MEMOIRS AND PROCEEDINGS

OF

THE MANCHESTER

Sere RARY & PHILOSOPHICAL

SOCIETY.

PUANCHESTER MEMOTRS.)

VOLUME XLII. (1897-98)

MANCHESTER :
36, GEORGE STREET.

1808.

I a a
The authors of the several papers contained in this
volume are themselves accountable for all the statements
and reasonings which they have offered. In these par-
ticulars the Society must not be considered as in any

way responsible.

—— IV:

VII.

VIII.

XIII.

GOENeT EN TS.

MEMOIRS.

. Notes on a Collection of Hymenoptera from Greymouth, New

Zealand, with descriptions of New Species. By PETER
CAMERON ... oe se xs ee Mi 1. pp. I—53

. Description of two new species of Judéz//a from South Africa.

By PETER CAMERON — ad oa Ks Tab ppee i==3

- On Waves in a medium having a Periodic Discontinuity of

Structure. By Horace Lams, M.A., F.R.S. ... ... pp. I—20

Further Investigations into the Molluscan Fauna of the Arabian

Sea, Persian Gulf, and Sea of Oman. (Addendum : Descrip-

tion ofa New Strombus from the Mekran Coast of Beluchistan. )

By JAMES CosMO MELVILL, M.A., F.L.S. Plates 7 and 2.
pp. 1—4o

. On a Method of Determining the Thermal Conductivities of

Salts, with some results of its application. By Cuarvrs H.
Pres OC. = = ss ee ve. PDs D4

. On the Mechanical Equivalent of Heat. By OsBorRNE Rey-

NOLDS, M.A., F.R.S., and W. H. Moorsy, M.Sc... pp. I—54

On the Instantaneous Pressures produced on the Collision of
Two Explosion Waves. By R. H. Jones, B.Sc., and J.
Bower, Bsc. Plaic 7. ... Nc sss .. pp. 1-7

On a General Method of determining the Form of the Velocity-
Potential of Fluid-Motion in Two Dimensions across a
Channel with Straight Sides. By R. F. GwyrHer, M.A. pp. 1—6

. On the Velocity of Sound in a Tube, as affected by the

elasticity of the Walls. By Horace Lams, M.A., F.R.S.
pp. I—16

. The New Gold Discoveries. By EDUARD SUESS, of Vienna. pp. 1I—9

. Hymenoptera Orientalia, or Contributions to a Knowledge of

the Hymenoptera of the Oriental Zoological Region. Part
VII. By PrereR CAMERON. late 4. ... Seg . pp. 1—84

. On the Physical Basis of Psychical Events. (The Wilde Lecture. )

By Professor MICHAEL FosTeER, Sec.R.S. We. 41) Pp» 1—46

Contributions to our Knowledge of the Marine Fauna of the
Falkland Islands. By EpirH M. Pratr, B.Sc. late 5. pp. 1—26

= CONTENTS.

PROCEEDINGS.
ALLEN, J. F.—Exhibit of specimens of chromium and an alloy of
manganese and tin... ag ” oe ae ad ins

— Exhibit of manganese alloys which had recovered from severe
strain after lapse of time ... iis oe ae, 503 fo
— Exhibit of an alloy of manganese and silver ie ae vee XXVii
ASHWORTH, J. J.—On a paper by Mr. J. Smith anticipating recent
discoveries of the colour-phenomena with a rapidly rotating

black and white disc a Aas tes ne i cue OX VILLE

BAILEY, CHARLES, F.L.S.—Exhibit of specimens of Sa/vzuza natans
Willd. i bs Sat on eS a: im ae KY

—— Exhibit of living plants of Tacquin’s oxlip ... bas ie ie Pp RORY,

Botox, H., F.R.S.E.—The paleontology of the slates of the Isle of

Man... oki ‘a Ae ae ay ss a5 - 0 ee
BroapBent, G. H., M.R.C.S.—Description of Sarcina aa 1 RKO
—— Description of observations on Vorticelle ... ab ace oc VL
BROTHERS, A., F.R.A.S....Exhibition of latest form of Ives’ Photo-

chromoscope ae Hes bas we oo eG cou ie pea
—— Notes on stereoscopic and pseudoscopic vision __... an XSL

BUTTERWORTH, JOHN, F.R.M.S.—Apparatus for observing low forms
of aquatic life a he ae Ses Sup a Be. 3. 9 F"

Dawkins, W. Boypb, F.R.S.—Exhibit of spruce trunk hollowed by
fungus ee fot ane 5 he a mee e Vili

—— Exhibit of section of Fardel coal... Ne va af rte 1X
Dixon, H.B., F.R S.—Description of experiments in obtaining photo-
graphs of explosion-flames ... ot re, rat ate a! 1X

FarAbAY, F. J., F.L.S.—On the economic importance of duration of
the gold supply... an oe hs ne Goce scwine i

—— On relative merits of cane and beet sugar ... a a ves! 1 SME

Hoyir, W. E., M.A.—Description of bone supposed to belong to a
whale a8 oe ae TN ere, Ne ye XXXII

Hyp, Henry. —Exhibit of specimens of S¢sybrium strictisstmum L.

viii & xiii

Joyce, SAMUEL.—Exhibit of pocket form of volt-meter... he a x .
Lees, C. H., D.Sc.—On Zeeman’s researches on the effect of a

magnetic field on light .. ah sae are Ge Se i |
MFLVILL, J. Cosmo, M.A.—Exhibit of specimens of Stachys alpina LL... — xiii |

—— Exhibit of alpine plants collected in the Ampezzo Thal ... ig egy

———

CONTENTS. . Vil

MELVILL, J. Cosmo, M.A.—Exhibit of specimens of g7/ops,
Triticum, and Agropyrun “ee ka sis is i XVM

— — Exhibit of series of distortions and deformities of Planorb7s
spirorbis L.... “ae ee ane at ee Mea fg all

Rocers, THOMAS. —Exhibit of collection of Bryozoa from S. Australia. — xvi

Exhibit of Azdodonta waterhousia from Lord Howe Island and

land shells from Trinidad... a6 cer ut Pe woe) RXVI
— On the geographical distribution of Achatina acicula... sal) EVI
— Fxhibit of fresh-water shells from Loando ... ve a oe RXV IL
STIRRUP, Mark, F.G.S. —Address on Finland ... ae ae, ieee. 30%
— Exhibit of specimens of silicified wood from Egypt on eee Sale
—— The composition and structure of spore-coal and bogheads ep X Vil
—— Exhibit of zircons, garnets and sapphires from volcanic rocks in

France a cine ax see aoe a ae Loe x Muli
Sykes, MARK.—Exhibit of Termites from Sierra Leone oe Pees ERY

— On mimetic forms among lepidopterous insects eS EXVIL

TuHorp, THOMAS.—A mechanical device for the solution of problems in
refraction and polarization Se ae oy we 2 Se il

—— Exhibit of copies of diffraction-gratings on celluloid films... vent) SRI

Wess, F. E., F.L.S.—Exhibit of some flowering specimens of Dog’s

Mercury... ane at se wis aa wis aus vii

Exhibit of specimen of Plowrightia morbosa a ae ee ix

—— Exhibit of fructification of Peszsa aeruginosa A ie 5 ix

General Meetings : nie a ae Vii, X, XVil, XXi

Special Meeting for the delivery of the Wilde Lecture ... en a, XML

Annual General Meeting _... 53, oes aa a ae ee SST
Meetings of the Microscopical and Natural History Section :—

Ordinary... = be me a ec RAIL, RIV, XXIV, XXVy XXVI

Annual ... " vo Lone a a ay oe Un xEV

Report of Council, April, 1898, with Obituary Notices of Francesco
Brioschi, Victor Meyer, Julius von Sachs, Edward James

Stone, George Henry Greville Anson, Thomas Ashton,

_ William Brockbank, William Grimshaw, Peter Hart, James

Heelis, James Heywood, and John Ramsbottom we oon RK
Treasurer’s Accounts... ie it hes “ek a i bre URAL
Report of the Microscopical and Natural History Section as ba SRK
List of the Council and Members of the Society ... hl gi pes
List of the Awards of the Wilde and Dalton Medals and of the
¢ Premium pel ae ae a Ixxx

> ign

Manchester Memortrs, Vol. «liz (1898), No. 1.

‘I, Notes on a Collection of Hymenoptera from Grey-
mouth, New Zealand, with descriptions of New
Species.

By PETER CAMERON.

[Communicated by J. Cosmo Melvill, M.A., F.L.S.]
Received October rath. Read October roth, 1897.

The species of Hymenoptera enumerated and described
in this paper were collected in the vicinity of Greymouth,
New Zealand, by the late Mr. Richard Helms, whose
assiduous labours have added so much to our knowledge
of the Insect Fauna of New Zealand, and who, after his
departure therefrom, did equally good work in investiga-
ting the Natural History of Australia.

Our earliest information on the Hymenoptera we owe
to Fabricius, whose types are now in the Banksian Cabinet
in the British Museum ; then, at a long interval, followed
Francis Walker, who described some Chalcidide collected
by Darwin during the memorable voyage of the “ Beagle,”
in his “ Monographia Chalciditum,’ 1839; F. Smith, in
his Catalogue of Hymenoptera in the British Museum ;
and Mayr and Sichel in “Reise der Novara,” 1867. Then
in 1876 came F. Smith’s important papers, “ Descriptions
of New Species of Hymenopterous Insects of New Zea-
land, collected by C. M. Wakefield, Esq., principally in the
neighbourhood of Canterbury ” (Trans. Entom. Soc. 1876,
pp. 473-487); “ Descriptions of Three New Species of
Hymenoptera (Formzczde) from New Zealand,” Ze. pp. 489-

February 4th, 1898.

2 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

492 ; followed in the same 7vansactions, 1878, pp. 1-7, by
“Descriptions of New Species of Hymenopterous Insects
from New Zealand, collected by Prof. Hutton, at Otago.”
Mr. W. F. Kirby (Zvans. Entom. Soc. 1881, pp. 35-50) con-
tinued Mr. Smith’s work with “A list of the. Hymen-
optera of New Zealand,’ and, Zc. 1883, pp. 199-202,
contributed “Notes on New or little-known Species of
Hymenoptera, chiefly from New Zealand.”

In Bull. Soc. Entom. Ital. xvi. 1884, Signor Gribodo
described Aventa Brount; in Trans. New Zealand Inst,
XVil, pp: 158-and 159, Mr. Colenso described Rhyssa
clavula and Lissonota multicolor; in Manchester Memotrs,
1887-8-9, I described five new species from Greymouth ;
in Entom. Mon. Mag., iii (2), p. 275, the Rev. T. A. Marshall
described TZanyzonus bolitophile |=Betyla fulva Cam.]|
which, with a Dzapria described by Mr. Maskell (Zvans.
New Zealand Inst., Xi., p. 230), the catalogue of Captain
Hutton, and the descriptions of Hudbertza, &c., by Prof.
Forel in C. R. Soc. Entom. Belg, 1890, completes our
narrative of the history of the literature of New Zealand
Hymenoptera.

Mr. Kirby in his list enumerated 81 species, from
which two may safely be deducted—one Ophzon luteus Fab.,
a common European species recorded by Fabricius, doubt-
less in error, one of the native species having been
probably mistaken for it; and Blennocampa adumbrata
Klug, the common European slug-worm, described by Mr.
Kirby as Monostegza antipoda. This leaves 79 as the
total number known as inhabitants of the islands in 1881;
add thereto five (one species, Przocnemis Pascoet Kirby,
was described in error) recorded in Kirby’s paper of 1883,
Gribodo’s Agenza Brounz, Colenso’s Rhyssa and Lissonota,
my three specimens described in 1888, the two in 1889,
and the 34 new species now described give us a total of
I2I species known from New Zealand. |

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 1. 2

This undoubtedly marks a gratifying increase of
knowledge since 1881 ; but I am certain that, if the islands
were to be again explored by a naturalist of the calibre
of Mr. Helms, the list might easily be doubled, particularly
if unworked localities were investigated.

It is more than probable that many of the species are
very local in their distribution, as is the case with
Lepidoptera and Coleoptera. On this point the following
remarks of Mr. E. Meyrick (Proc. Extom. Soc. 1883, p. 29)
throw some light on the peculiarities of the New Zealand
Insect Fauna. “The islands were composed partly of
bare mountain ranges, partly of low-lying forest. The
mountains, although very bleak and shelterless, had an
extensive and varied fauna, fresh species of insects
occurring on every mountain visited ; the genus Cvambus,
for example, was represented by a variety of species, for
which there seemed to be no special reason. On the other
_ hand, the forests, which comprised a remarkable number
of trees and shrubs apparently well suited for food, were
strangely deficient in insects, and further, the same species
occurred nearly throughout the islands. It appeared, in
fact, that a vast number of situations suitable for insects
was not utilised. This was the case with the Lepidoptera
and Coleoptera and probably with other insects.” The
parasitic species are probably not very numerous, their
places being taken by the parasitic Diptera. At present
the Diptera slightly exceed the Hymenoptera in number
of species.

As regards the affinities of the New Zealand species
the relationship to Australia is not very great. It is
indicated on the one hand by the presence of the
Australian genera Lamprocolletes, Dasycolletes, Ledoproctus
and Rhagigaster; and by species common alike to the
Islands and to Australia or Tasmania. These species are
Leioproctus tuittatus Sm. found in Australia, Lamprocolletes

4 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

obscurus Sm. in Tasmania, Prosopis vicina Sichel in
Tasmania, and the Ichneumon “ Rhyssa” sem¢punctia
Kirby, which seems to be a common Australian species.

Of the Aculeates, the Bees and Pompzlide are the
most numerous in species. The latter appear to be,
judging from the collecting of Mr. Helms, the most
numerous in individuals, as they are the most striking in
size, form, and coloration. Their great abundance would
seem to indicate a rich and varied arachnid Fauna; for
the Pompilide store their nests with spiders. Next to
the Pompilide, the family most numerous in species is
the Larrid@, which prey on Orthoptera. Among the
parasitic forms the genus /chueumon possesses the greatest
number of species, some of which are very large and
handsome creatures.

Although, of course, there can be no genetic relation-
ship between the Hymenopterous Fauna of New Zealand
and the Hawaiian Islands, yeta comparison between the
two brings out some very interesting features. Pzson is
not a large genus, but it is very widely spread over the
globe. It is not uncommon in Australia, is represented
in the Malay Archipelago, by one species in Tahiti, and by
two in Hawaii. Prosopis, a bee genus, has twelve species
in Hawaii, as against seven in New Zealand, it is common
in Australia and is of almost world-wide distribution.
The Larrid@ are fairly well represented in New Zealand,
but are quite absent from Hawaii. The Cradbronide again
are much more numerous in the last mentioned locality-
ten species as against four in New Zealand, the two latter
belonging to a group (hopfalum) not found in Hawaii
atall. It is, however, in the dominant group in each of the
localities where we find the most remarkable distinction.
The characteristic family in New Zealand is the Pom-
pulide, in Hawaii the Vespide, neither being represented
in the other islands; both families,moreover,being common "

Manchester Memotrs, Vel. xlit. (1898), No. 1. 5

in Australia and Tasmania—why this should be so it is
difficult to understand. The absence of Pompilide in
Hawaii may be owing to the scarcity of spiders there : but
on this point I have no information. The absence of the
Odyneride in New Zealand cannot be owing to the
absence there of their food, for it is as common as, if not
more abundant than, it is in the Sandwich Islands. The
absence of TJachytes, &c., in the Hawaii Islands may be
caused by there being no crickets living there.

The paucity of Formicide in species is remarkable.
All the species are endemic, two of the genera being
peculiar. I cannot, however, understand how, while in
the Sandwich Islands there are at least five ants of almost
world-wide distribution, ¢,¢., Ponera contracta, Prenolepts
longicornis, Tetramorium guineense, none of them should
have been recorded from New Zealand, where one would
think the environment is eminently suitable and the
commercial intercourse with other regions even more
extensive.

As respects the species added by Mr. Helms to the
Fauna, the most noteworthy are those belonging to the
genera Dzcoelotus, Hemiteles, Chorineus, Bassus, Ascogaster,
Meteorus, and Alysza, those genera not having been
previously recorded. Of the species, /ehneumon hersilia,
which differs markedly from the others in structure, is
perhaps the most interesting.

TENTHREDINIDA:.

No native species of this family is known ; but the
common European slug-worm of the pear (Llennocampa
adumbrata) has been introduced, and recorded by Captain
Hutton in his list as Blennocampa cerasi ; by Mr. F. Smith
(Trans. Entom. Soc.,1876, p.474) as Blennocampa adumbrata
Klug; and it has been described by Mr. W. F. Kirby
(Trans. Entom. Soc., 1881, p. 50) as a new species under the

6 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

name of Monostegia antipoda. Monostegia is not a valid .
genus, being founded on a character which is not constant
even in the same species. Thus Erzocampa adumbrata is
frequently found with only one median cellule in the hind
wings, instead of the normal two. Mr. Helms sends it
from Greymouth.

SISICMD ze:
XIPHIDRIA DECEPTA.

Derecyrta deceptus Sm., Trans. Entom. Soc., 1876, p.
474, pl. 4, f. 6.

Aiphidria flavopicta Sm., fc. 1878, p. I.

As figured by Smith this species is shown of a much
too uniform colour; the eye orbits, the lines on vertex,
the face and edge of the pronotum are clear pale yellow ;
the mesonotum dark ferruginous, suffused with black ; the
basal four segments of the abdomen clear reddish, and the
legs bright pale yellow. On the other hand, the thorax
above frequently wants the yellow marks found in the
type, the scutella, for example, not being differently
coloured from the mesonotum, while again the wings are
clear, not fulvo-hyaline. I suspect, however, that my
three examples are immature, a circumstance which makes
wood-feeding insects have the markings and colour less
distinct ; although it must be said that the yellow on the
head and the rufous colour on the abdomen are bright
enough in my two males, the 2? being coloured more as in
Smith’s figure.

ICHNEUMONID-.
ICHNEUMON.

A. Scutellum largely elevated, oblique, its top
depressed in the middle, the sides rounded; the
tubercles largely projecting, much larger than usual,
somewhat triangular, but with the apex rounded; the
median segment not tuberculate nor spined.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 1. 7p

ICHNEUMON HERSILIA, Sp. nov.

Rufus, thorace nigro et albo-maculato ; pedibus rujis ;
alis fulvo-hyalinis, stigmate nigro. 6. Long. 11 mm.

Head rufous ; the inner orbits narrowly below, broadly
above, and the sides of the clypeus, yellow ; the ocellar
region, the front, and the occiput, black ; the vertex bare ;
the face covered with short fuscous hair ; the mandibles
rufous, the teeth black ; the face roundly projecting in the
middle, strongly but not closely punctured ; the hollowed
front finely transversely striated ; the palpi rufous. Pro-
thorax black, broadly rufous above ; the mesonotum has
the sides and base, broadly in the middle, black ; the rest
rufous, with a large yellow mark at the apex. The scu-
tellum yellow, a rufous splash at the base; its height is
nearly equal to its width at the bottom; the basal keels
are curved and reach to the middle; the top is irregularly
divided, one lobe being wider than the other. The
median segment is gradually rounded to the apex ; the
-arez distinct ; the supramedian widely separated from
the base of the segment, longer than broad, a little
narrowed towards the base, which is rounded; the
sides straight ; the posterior median black, transversely
striated ; the other arez smooth and shining; the
base of the segments broadly black; the sides are
also edged with black; and, in front of the coxa,
there is a large yellow mark touching the keel. The
propleure broadly black in the middle; the meso-
pleuree at and including the tubercles white, the lower
part rufous, with a large white mark in the centre, and
the sternum is rufous ; there is a broad black oblique band
in the middle ; and the apex is black, narrowly so on the
lower side; the breast black in front. Legs entirely
rufous, as is also the abdomen. The stigma and nervures
black ; the areolet almost triangular, the nervures being

8 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

narrowed at the top, where it is in width less than the
space bounded by the recurrent and the second transverse
cubital nervures ; the transverse median nervure is inter-
stitial Abdomen smooth, shining, impunctate; the
gastrocceli are indicated by a shallow depression.

The scutellum in this species might refer it to Hoplzs-
menus, but it differs from that in having no spines on the
median segment. The shape of the scutellum is quite
similar to what it is in some Mexican species of /chneumon,

e.g. L. agtecus.

B. Scutellum flat, normal.

ICHNEUMON ACTISTA, sf. zov.

Niger, thovace coxisque albo-maculatis ; pedibus rufis ;
alts fere hyalints, stigmate nervisque nigris, 8. Long.14 mm.

Antennz black ; the scape with a yellow mark in the
middle on the lower side. Head: the face below the
antennz, the mandibles except the teeth, the palpi, a
mark on the vertex touching the eyes, and a larger mark
behind lower down, yellow ; almost impunctate, the front
and vertex thickly covered with short blackish hair, the
labrum fringed with longish fulvous hair ; behind, it is as
long as the eyes and sharply oblique. Thorax oblique in
front; the sides of the pronotum widely, a large square
mark on the mesonotum in the middle, the scutellum, post-
scutellum, the supramedian area of the metanotum, two
large marks on the mesopleure, the anterior slightly the
larger, and a large oblique mark on the metapleure,
yellow. Metanotal arez well developed ; the keels acute,
the supramedian rounded at the base ; the sides straight, -
eradually narrowed to the apex, which is transverse ; the
apex has an oblique slope. The four anterior coxz are
white beneath ; the hinder have a large white mark at the
base above and beneath ; the trochanters are black. The

Manchester Memozrs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 1. 9

alar nervures and stigma are deep black; the trans-
verse basal nervure is interstitial ; the areolet is narrowed
at the top, being there in length less than the space
bounded by,the recurrent and the second transverse
cubital nervures. Abdomen deep black, very smooth,
shining ; the gastrocceli shallow, smooth, indistinct.

ICHNEUMON HELMSII, sf. nov.

Niger, abdomine pedibusque rufis ; scutello flavo ; alis
Julvo-hyalinis, stigmate fulvo. g. Long. 15 mm.

Antenne black ; the scape with a yellow mark in the
middle beneath; the apical joints dilated on the lower side,
the scape thickly covered with longish black hair. Face
with clypeus strongly punctured, thickly covered with
short white hair ; the sides of the clypeus, a broad mark
on the cheeks close to the eyes, with its top obliquely
truncated and narrow, projecting obliquely from the base
of the truncated part into a pear-shaped mark, which
extends in the middle beyond the base of the antennae,
but not uniting there, the labrum and palpi, yellow ; the
tips of the mandibles piceous; their basal half strongly
punctured. Behind the eyes the head is obliquely
narrowed; the hinder part rather deeply and roundly
narrowed inwardly and margined; mesonotum and
upper part of the pronotum closely and_ strongly
punctured; the lower part of the propleure smooth
and shining; the prosternum closely punctured. Scu-
tellum entirely yellow, smooth, shining, flat; the post-
scutellum punctured. Median segment coarsely and
irregularly punctured ; the supramedian area almost
square, but slightly narrowed towards the apex ; the base
and apex transverse ; the apex of the segment with an
oblique slope ; coarsely, irregularly, transversely striolated
and reticulated ; its centre deeply furrowed at the base ;
the keels bordering it distinct, curved ; the lateral keels

IO CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

on the top stout, ending in the middle in a stout, flat, tri-
angular tooth. Meso- and meta-pleure strongly punctured,
the latter on the lower side with a curved keel. The coxe
and base of the trochanters are black ; the hinder coxee
have a reddish mark on the apex behind; the extreme apex
of the hinder femora black ; the apices of the hinder tibiz
and of the tarsal joints infuscated. The wing nervures to
the stigma, and the stigma itself, fulvous, the apical
nervures black; the areolet narrowed at the top, being
there distinctly less in length than the space bounded by
the recurrent and the second transverse cubital nervures.
The apex of the petiole closely, longitudinally striated,
and marked with yellow at the sides; down the sides
from the base is a narrow black line which is continued
down the middle to opposite the spiracles, becoming
thickened towards the apex ; the spiracles are bordered
with black ; the other segments are closely punctured ;
the second and third have the sides at the apex yellowish ;
the gastrocceli deep, wide at the apex, being somewhat
triangular seen from the outer side ; smooth, shining, the
middle at the apex with a few strie.

This is the largest and stoutest-looking species of the
New Zealand species of /chneumon, and is very distinct
from any of them.

ICHNEUMON DECEPTUS Sm.

Smith (7vans. Entom. Soc., 1876, p. 477) only describes
the ? of this species, so I now describe the ¢.

Scape of the antennz beneath, the face below the
antenne, the mandibles except the teeth, the palpi, a
broad line on the outer orbits of the eyes on the lower.
side, the pronotum broadly, a squarish mark in the centre
of the mesonotum, the scutellum, post-scutellum, a square
mark on the median segment, a mark on the base of the
mesopleure, a smaller one at the apex lower down, a

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 1. II

small one on the apex of the propleure and a large one at
the apex of the metapleure, yellow; the four anterior
coxe are yellow as are also the trochanters, the rest of the
legs having also a yellowish hue; the hinder coxe and
trochanters are black, the former witha large yellow mark
behind. On the abdomen above, the fifth and sixth
segments are more or less black. The wings vary in tint.

ICHNEUMON LOTATORIUS Fab.

Ichneumon lotatorius Fab. has been described by
Mr. W. F. Kirby (7rans. Entom. Soc. 1883, p. 200) as an
aculeate under the name of Przocnemis Pascoez. I have
examined the type in the British Museum. It agrees
with /chneumon instdiator Sm., and differs from the other
species in having the petiole black ; but /. zzszdzator has the
extreme apex of it yellowish, while /. Jo¢atorcus differs
from it in having the apex of the hinder. femora and of
the hinder tibiz black; the mesonotum not distinctly
punctured, and only the second abdominal segment is
red, while in J. zzszdzator the second and third are entirely
yellow.

_ Smith (7rans. Entom. Soc., 1876, p. 476) remarks that
his J. zxsidiator is probably the $ of J. lotatorius
Fab., but Mr. Kirby treats it as distinct.

As J. lotatorzus has not been properly described I give
_a description of both sexes here.

3 Black; the scutellum and tubercles yellow; the
legs and second abdominal segment reddish-fulvous, the
front legs with a more yellowish tinge ; the coxe, anterior
trochanters, the base of the posterior, the apex of the
hinder femora broadly, and the apex of the hinder tibize
more narrowly, black ; the wings fulvous or more or less
deeply smoky ; the stigma testaceous.

? Antenne short, thick, involute; pruinose towards the
apex, the base with short black hair. Head strongly

I2 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

punctured, much more closely in the centre below the
antennz ; the oral region with the punctures much more
widely separated and covered with longish fulvous hair ;
the palpi testaceous ; the eyes margined distinctly. Pro-
notum closely punctured ; the mesonotum with the punc-
tures more widely separated; the scutellum almost
impunctate; median segment closely punctured; the
areee all distinctly defined ; the supramedian longer than
broad ; the apex is closely and somewhat coarsely trans-
versely striated. Meso- and meta-pleurze closely and
strongly punctured. Coxe strongly punctured. .Abdo-
men smooth and shining, impunctate; the gastrocceli
impunctate. The areolet at the top narrowed, being there
a little less than the space bounded by the recurrent and
the second transverse cubital nervures; the recurrent
nervure is bent towards the apex of the wing near the
middle, and has there a minute branch.

ICHNEUMON INSIDIATOR Sm.

Smith’s description, which only relates to coloration,
may be supplemented as regards other points.

Comparing it with the ¢ of / sollzcitorzus, it may be
known from it by the petiole being black, only yellow at
the apex, whereas in J. sollicetorius it is entirely yellow ; the
face is black in the middle, the thorax above and at the
sides is much more strongly punctured, as are also the
the coxee ; the thorax is broader in front at the teculz ;
the post-scutellum black; the median segment strongly
aciculated ; the transverse cubital nervure at the base in
the middle, is angled with a short branch issuing back-
wards from the middle of the angle, whereas in /. sollicztorzus
it is rounded ; and the stigma is testaceous, not blackish.

ICHNEUMON SOLLICITORIUS Fab.

Apparently a common species. I have only seen the
male.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlez. (1898), No. 1. 13

ICHNEUMON ARTAXIDIA, sp. nov.

Capzte thoraceque ferrugineis ; scutello flavo, abdomine
nigro, bast late rufo-flavo ; pedibus rufo-fulvis, coxis tro-
chanteribusque nigris; alis cum nervis flavis. 6. Long.8 mm.

Scape of antennae dark-rufous, blackish above ; the
flagellum absent. Head closely, but not strongly punc-
tured ; covered rather closely with pale hair; the clypeus
with the hair longer and paler, and only with a few
scattered punctures ; the labrum fringed with longer hair ;
the mandibles strongly punctured; their teeth black
Thorax dark-ferruginous ; the prosternum, a large oblique.
mark on the propleurz, a large oblique mark on the
mesopleure extending from the base to the apex, a mark
on either side of the mesosternum at the apex, the meta-
pleurae except the apex above and the sides of the median
segment, black. Mesonotum closely punctured; the
scutellum, post-scutellum and the centre of the median
segment at the base, yellow. The pro- and meso-pleurz
closely punctured; the propleure with a few distinct
Geteemiat the apex in the middle; the top: of the
mesopleurze at the apex and the metapleure smooth
and shining; the base of the metapleure with a wide,
deep, crenulated furrow at the base. The median
segment has no aree, and the only keel is one bordering
the apex above; the sides at the apex between this
keel and the lateral at the apex is irregularly crenulated.
Abdomen smooth and shining ; the third and following
segments black ; the gastrocceli indistinct.

ICHNEUMON IXIA, sf. nov.

Rufus, abdominis apice late nigro, scutello flavo; alts
hyalinis, stegmate flavo, nervis fuscis. §. Long. 7°5 mm.
Antenne stout, involute, bare, obscure-rufous, the

14 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

flagellum darker above; the scape with a few punctures
on the under side. Head dark-rufous; the front and two
large marks on the sides above the clypeus, black ; the
vertex strongly punctured ; the face and clypeus with the
punctures much fewer and more widely separated ; the
face in the middle with a few fine transverse striations ; the
front largely excavated, smooth and shining. The eyes
distinctly margined ; the inner orbits narrowly lined with
yellow. Mesonotum rufous, a broad black band down the
centre and a narrower one down the sides; closely, but
not strongly, punctured. Scutellum rufous,the apex broadly
yellow ; the apex almost impunctate ; the remainder bear-
ing clearly separated, moderately large, punctures; the post-
scutellum for the greater part yellow. At the base of the
scutellum is a wide, deep curved furrow. The median
segment has a gradually rounded slope to the apex, which
is oblique; it is smooth and shining, almost bare ; the
supramedian area is large, somewhat wider than long,
rounded at the base, the sides straight, oblique ; the apex
rounded on its inside ; the supra-external aree are finely
punctured ; the posterior median area is roundly ex-
cavated, not much narrowed towards the apex, and
finely and closely punctured ; the posterior intermedian
areze are not so closely, but much more strongly, punctured ;
and, at the top, is a yellowish mark ; the pro- and meso-
pleure are strongly punctured, the former obscurely
striated at the apex ; the mesopleura black; excepite
large rufous mark in the middle at the base and a larger
one lower down at the apex ; the sternum for the most part
black ; the metapleurze very smooth, shining, impunctate,
black, except over the coxz. Legs dark rufous- the:
anterior brighter in tint ; the hinder femora much darker,
abdomen smooth and shining, the three basal segments
red ; the apical black.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 1. 15

ICHNEUMON COLENSII, sp. ov.

Rufus ; orbttis oculorum, linea pronott, linets 2 mesonote,
scutello, post-scutelloque flavis ; abdomints apice late nigro ;
alis fulvo-hyalinis, stigmate favo. °. Long. 7 mm.

Scape of the antenne dark-ferruginous, finely
punctured, thickly covered with short dark hair, the
flagellum black, paler on the lower side. Head rufous ;
the vertex in the centre darker; the inner orbits, broad
at the top, narrow at the bottom, a curved line at the top,
and the outer side beneath, lemon-yellow ; the face and
vertex punctured, but not strongly, their sides almost
impunctate ; the clypeus with a few scattered punctures ;
the mandibles punctured, suffused with yellow at the base ;
the apex black ; the palpi pale-yellow. Thorax rufous; a
broad line on the pronotum, the scutellum, post-scutellum,
the lower side of the propleure and of the mesopleure
broadly, two narrow lines on the centre of the
mesonotum and the apex of the metapleure below,
lemon-yellow. The mesonotum is punctured ; there is a
central and two large lateral black marks, the latter
bordered on the inner side by the yellow lines; the apex
of the scutellum is rufous, and it has a few shallow punc-
tures. The median segment has an almost gradually
rounded slope and is strongly punctured at the sides ; the
aree complete, the supramedian longer than _ broad,
rounded at the base; the pro- and meso-pleurz closely
punctured ; the propleure broadly black in the middle ;
the mesopleure broadly black above and at the apex ;
the metapleure very smooth and shining, impunctate.
Legs uniformly rufous ; the fore cox pale-yellow ; there
is a lemon-yellow mark over the hinder pair above at the
base. Alar nervures dark fuscous, the stigma pale testa-
ceous; the areolet narrowed at the top. Abdomen
smooth and shining; the apical three segments black ;
the gastrocceli indistinct, finely and closely punctured.

16 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

ICHNEUMON URSULA, Sf. nov.

Ferrugineus, thorace nigro-maculato ; orbitis oculorum,
linea pronotz, lenezs 2 mesonott scutelloque flavis ; alis fulvis
stigmate nervisque fulvis. 9°. Long. 9 mm.

Head : the inner orbits to the hinder edge of the eyes
above and a mark, longer than broad, on the outer edge
beneath, yellow ; the vertex with shallow, widely separated
punctures ; the front shining, impunctate, the middle with
a few transverse striations ; the mandibles and palpi pallid-
yellow ; the apex of the mandibles black ; the clypeus is
very shining, with a few widely separated punctures. An-
tennz broken off. Thorax: the edge of the pronotum, a
line on the lower edge of the propleurz, two lines in the
middle of the mesonotum, the scutellum, post-scutellum, a
mark over, and in front of, the middle and a smaller one
over the hinder coxe, lemon-yellow; a mark at the
base of the mesonotum in the centre, its apex being
triangular, two broad lines down its sides outside
the yellow ones and the scutellum and post-scutellum,
lemon-yellow. The scutellum is broader than long,
smooth, impunctate,;) the depression Jat ats base
black. The median segment strongly shagreened, more
strongly on the sides at the apex; the aree complete ;
the supramedian bluntly rounded at the base, the sides
straight, a little narrowed towards the apex ; the posterior
median of nearly equal width, not much hollowed in the
centre, its apex with a few transverse strize, the middle
almost smooth, hardly shagreened. In the centre of the
propleure is a large, somewhat triangular mark; the
mesopleuree under the wings broadly, the mesosternum-
and the basal three-fourths of the metapleure, black.
Legs uniformly ferruginous. Wings hyaline, but with a
decided fulvous tinge; the stigma narrowed at the top,
being there narrower than the space bounded by the

Manchester Memorrs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. 1. 7

recurrent and the second transverse cubital nervures ; the
latter is received shortly beyond the middle of the areolet.
Abdomen smooth, shining, impunctate; the fifth and
sixth segments broadly black ; the gastrocceli shailow, not
very distinct, finely aciculated. The ventral segments
are pallid-yellow in the middle.

ICHNEUMON BROUNI, sp. nov.

Kone; 7 mm. ¢.

A very similar species to /. fa/sus, but is smaller ; the
sternum is black; the hinder coxze are without any
black; the petiole is smooth, not shagreened ; the gastrocceli
are deeper and more clearly defined ; and the recurrent
nervure is broadly curved, while in /. fa/sus it is slightly
angled in the middle and emits there a short branch.

Antennz black, the scape yellow beneath ; the apical
joints of the flagellum dilated on lower side. Head pale-
yellow ; the occiput, and the vertex and front broadly in
the centre, black; the tips of the mandibles black ;
the face sparsely pilose ; the clypeus with longish pale,
the vertex thickly covered with black hair ; shagreened ;
the hollowed front smooth and shining. Thorax black ;
a broad line of equal width on the pronotum, two
lines on the mesonotum, scutellum, post-scutellum, the
median segment, the lower edge of the pronotum,
a short line opposite the tegulee, the scutellar keels at the
base, the scutellum, post-scutellum, two large marks on
the apex of the median segment, the tubercles, the lower
half of the mesopleure, and a line on the Jower side of
the propleure, lemon-yellow. The mesonotum has the
punctures somewhat close together, those on the scutellum
are larger and more widely separated ; the median seg-
ment has only a few minute punctures at the base. The
propleure. have the punctures shallow and _ widely

18 CAMERON, ‘Tymenoptera, from Greymouth.

separated ; the mesopleure are more strongly and closely
punctured, except the usual smooth spot on the apex ; the
metapleure smooth, impunctate. The base of the
median segment, the supra and the posterior median areze
are blood-coloured ; the supramedian is not much wider
than long. The median segment has a gradually rounded
slope ; at the base of the median segment below the wings
is a yellow and rufous spot. The areolet is triangular at
the top, the nervures being almost united there. The four
anterior coxe, trochanters and lower side of the femora
are lemon-yellow ; the rest fulvous; the hinder legs dark
rufous, the tarsi paler; the hinder coxz black above, and
to near the middle, the rest of the sides and their lower
side fulvous ; at their base is a large, somewhat triangular
lemon-yellow mark. The petiole is, towards the apex,
roughly irregularly shagreened ; the other segments are
closely punctured ; the gastrocceli shallow, at the base
closely longitudinally striated.

ICHNEUMON FALSUS, sf. ov.

Niger; ore, sterno, Linea pronotz, scutello, lines 2
mesonott metanotogue flavis,; abdomine ferrugineo, apice
late nigro,; pedibus anteriorzbus rufis, coxts trochanteribus jue
flavis, pedibus postices fusco-ferruginets ; alis fere hyalints,
stigmate nigro. 6. Long. 10 mm. :

Antenne black, slightly brownish beneath ; the scape
lemon-yellow on the under side. The face from below
the antennz, including the oral region, the mandibles
and the palpi, the inner orbits narrowly to shortly below
the ocelli, and the lower orbits—broadly beneath,
narrowly abéve—lemon-yellow. The face strongly punc-
tured, the clypeus with a few scattered punctures; the
frontal depression deep, shining, the edges aciculated.
The line on the pronotum is broad and dilated at the

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 1. 19

base ; the two lines on the pronotum are also dilated at
the base and extend to near the scutellum; a mark on
the lower half of the mesopleuree and the sternum, lemon-
yellow. The propleure impunctate; the upper parts of
the mesopleure at the base strongly punctured, the apical
impunctate in the middle, and the metapleurae impunc-
tate. The base of the median segment reddish (perhaps
through discoloration): the supramedian area a little
broader than long, rounded at the base; the posterior
- median complete ; the others obsolete. The alar stigma
and nervures black; the areolet at the top a little less
in width than the space bounded by the recurrent and
the second transverse cubital nervures. Legs fulvous ;
the four anterior coxze and trochanters lemon-yellow ; the
hinder coxae fulvous like the femora and yellow at the base
above and in the middle, the rest of them black. Abdo-
men reddish ; the apical three segments black above ; the
base of the second segments shagreened ; the gastrocceli
moderately wide, deep.

ICHNEUMON LEODACUS, sp. xov.

Ferrugineus, scutello flavo ; metapleuris, coxis trochan-
teribusque posticis nigrts, alis flavis. _3. Long. 8 mm.

Scape of antenne rufous, punctured, thickly covered
with pale hair; the flagellum fuscous. Head: the face
strongly punctured ; the clypeus shining, impunctate ; the
face covered closely with short white hair; the clypeus
has the hair longer, sparser and darker in colour; the
vertex and occiput more closely punctured than the face ;
_ the tips of mandibles black ; the palpi pale-testaceous ;
the inner and outer orbits above reddish-yellow. Meso-
notum shining, the sides finely and closely punctured, the
middle almost impunctate. Scutellum and post-scutellum
shining, impunctate, orange-yellow. The base of the

20 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

median segment rounded, the rest of it sharply oblique ;
the sides at the base shagreened ; the apex in the middle
transversely striated ; the rest coarsely shagreened. There
are no arez, and only a stout curved keel over the oblique
keel. The propleure impunctate ; in the centre isa large
somewhat triangular black mark ; the mesopleure slightly
- punctured ; in the centre at the apex isa black mark,
narrowed towards the apex ; immediately in front of the
middle coxz is a larger, somewhat similarly shaped, biack
mark ; the metapleurze smooth, impunctate, black, except
an elongate mark at the top, and a shorter, broader and
more irregularly-shaped one over the coxe. The legs
are uniformly coloured, except the hind coxe and the
basal joint of the hinder trochanters, which are black. The
areolet is narrowed at the top, being there a little less than
the space bounded by the transverse cubital and the
recurrent nervures, the latter being received almost in the
centre of the cellule. Abdomen smooth, shining, im-
punctate ; the gastrocceli indistinct, closely punctured.

ICHNEUMON MACHIMIA, Sp. nov.

Niger, orbitts oculorum, linea pronotz, tegulisque scutellc
flavis ; abdomine rufo,; pedibus anticis rufis ; tebits tarsesque
postertortbus sordide rujfis; alis fusco-hyalinis, stigmate
rufo-testaceo. 9°. Long. 8 mm.

Front strongly punctured ; the clypeus shining and
bearing a few scattered punctures ; the vertex shagreened,
the ocellar region rough, the inner orbits and round the
top to opposite the tegulze, as well asa line at the foot,
yellow ; the clypeus and labrum rufous (perhaps a dis-
coloured yellow) ; the mandibles a dirty yellow, the teeth
black ; the palpi yellow; the face and clypeus have a few
white hairs. Antenne black, the scape shining, and
bearing afew punctures. Thorax shining, the mesonotum
impunctate; the median segment coarsely aciculated

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lit. (1898), No. 1. 21

The edge of the pronotum, tegulz, two longitudinal lines
on the mesonotum, the scutellum and_ post-scutellum,
yellow. Median segment thickly covered with longish
pale hair, coarsely aciculated, the arez distinct except the
posterior median, the keels of which are obliterated. The
propleurz, except at the base, closely obliquely striated,
the striz coarser on the lower side, the mesopleure
rather strongly and distinctly punctured, the base of
the median segment punctured, the rest longitudinally
shagreened, running into striations on the lower side. All
the coxz and trochanters are black; the fore femora,
tibiz and tarsi rufous, as are also the four posterior, but
these are darker in tint, this being especially the case
with the femora. Abdomen shining ; the apex of petiole
closely punctured, the gastrocceli shallow, indistinct ; the
sheaths of the ovipositor black.

Has the look and form of a Cvyptus, but is a true
L[chneumon.

ICHNEUMON UTETES, sf. nov.

Rufus, pleuris nigris ; femoribus posticis fuscis ; ales
hyalinis, stegmate flavo, nervis fuscis. 9. Long. 5 mm.

Antenne short, stout, almost bare, if anything thick-
ened beyond the middle, uniformly rufous. Head rufous,
the vertex darker, the excavated front black ; the face
strongly punctured ; the clypeus with only a few shallow
punctures ; the front transversely striated in the middle;
the vertex and occiput closely and rather strongly punc-
tured ; the outer orbits, except at the top, very smooth,
and shining, and with only a few shallow scattered
punctures ; the mandibles rufous, their teeth black ; the
palpi testaceous. Thorax rufous ; the mesonotum in front
infuscated ; the propleurze black, except above and
beneath ; the base indistinctly striated ; the mesopleurz
black, except a pale testaceous mark on the apex above

BD CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

the middle coxa, the extreme base being rufous ; closely
punctured: the apex over the coxz) indistinetly and
irregularly striolated ; the metapleure above very smooth
and shining; the lower part finely longitudinally strio-
lated. The scutellum is, if anything, more strongly
punctured than the mesonotum. The median segment
has the aree complete; the supramedian area is trans-
verse at the apex ; the top obliquely narrowed, the middle
itself being transverse; the apex of the segment has an
oblique slope ; the middle is slightly hollowed, closely
punctured ; the top almost smooth, the bottom obscurely
transversely striated ; the posterior median area with
straight sides ; the legs rufous ; the base of the middle
coxz and the hinder coxz above, black; “Whe lauren
strongly punctured. Abdomen rufo-ferruginous, smooth
and shining,
and sides ; the sides of the 2-5 segments blackish. The
alar areolet narrowed at the top, being there in width very

glabrous except for a few hairs on the apex

little ‘less than the space. bounded by the “secomd
transverse cubital and the recurrent nervures.

ICHNEUMON THYELLMA, SP. zov.

Long. 5°5 mm.

Comes near to J/. wfetes, with which it has a close
resemblance in coloration, but differs in having the are
on the median segment and the nervures all distinctly
developed.

Scape of the antennz black above, yellowish beneath.
Head pallid-yellow, suffused with testaceous above ; the
occiput, the vertex and front broadly in the middle, black ;
the vertex strongly and closely punctured; the face not
quite so strongly; the front finely punctured in the
middle, the sides very smooth and shining ; the man-
dibles and palpi pallid-yellow ; the tips of the mandibles
piceous. Prothorax black, edged above and beneath with

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 1. 23

pallid-yellow, shining, impunctate. Mesonotum finely
punctured, its centre broadly rufo-testaceous, darker in
the middle, the sides black; the scutellum : probably
testaceous, but the pin goes through it. Median segment
with a rounded slope; its base black; the aree all
distinctly defined ; the supramedian slightly narrowed
towards the base; truncated at base and apex; the pos-
terior median area obscu rely transversely striated. Except
at the top behind the mesopleure, closely punctured ; the
upper part to the middle, black ; immediately below the
black part, rufous, followed by a pale-yellow band; the
sternum rufous. Metapleurze black, with a broad rufous.
mark in the middle on the apical three-fourths, the rufous
turning into clear pale-yellow at the apex. Wings hyaline,
the stigma and nervures fuscous. Areolet at the top
nearly the length of the space bounded by the recurrent
and the second transverse cubital nervures ; the recurrent
nervure received shortly beyond the middle. Legs fulvous ;
the four anterior coxe for the greater part pallid-yellow.
Abdomen rufous, closely punctured; the basal three-
fourths of the petiole black ; its apex closely punctured.
Gastrocceli shallow, indistinct, closely punctured.

ICHNEUMON NOVA-ZEALANDICUS, sf. nov.

Niger, pedibus abdomineque rujis, capite thoraceque rufo-
et fiavo-variegatis ; alts hyalinis, nervis stigmateque flavo
feeeees, © ‘Ione: fere 5.mm. 7

Scape of antenne rufous, black above, the flagellum
absent. Head rufous, the orbits on the inner side and
above and beneath on the outer side, as well as the base of
the mandibles, yellow ; the front deeply excavated, black ;
the vertex blackish, broadly so in the centre ; the face
minutely punctured, the vertex aciculated. The meso-
notum minutely punctured ; down the centre are two

24 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

rather broad rufo-testaceous lines, the scutellum and post-
scutellum are yellow, suffused with rufous. Median
segment sharply oblique, the middle slightly hollowed ;
the sides broadly rufo-testaceous; there are no keels
except the curved lateral ones, and on the apex the
testaceous part is bordered on the inner side by a lateral
keel. The propleurz above and beneath bordered with
yellow; obscurely striolated; the mesopleuree black above,
bordered with rufous; the middle broadly yellow, the
sternum rufous; the base above finely longitudinally
_ striated, the rest punctured; the metapleuree smooth,
shining ; a short, wide, deep, oblique furrow at the base
above. The cox and. trochanters are rufous, suffused
with yellow. Areolet narrowed at the top, being there
not much less in width than the space bounded by the
recurrent and the second transverse cubital nervures.
Abdomen uniformly ferruginous, shining; the basal
three-fourths of the petiole black above ; the sheaths of
the ovipositor rufous, black at the apex; the ventral
surface tinged with yellow.

Comes nearest to J. utetes, but that species has the
pleurze and sternum blackish and the mesopleuree strongly
striolated.

DICOELOTUS STRIATIFRONS, sf. nov.

Rufus, antennis nigris ; orbitis oculorum, tegulis, liuea
pronott, linezs 2 mesonote scutelloque flavis ; metapleuris
striolatis,; alts hyalints, stigmate testaceo. ¢°. Long. 6 mm.

Antenne black ; the scape and the basal half of the
flagellum brownish beneath ; the flagellum almost bare, .
the scape with a few hairs on the under side. Head
shining, the face and clypeus with longish pale hairs ; the
vertex punctured, except at the sides; the antennal
depression closely transversely striated ; the front with a

Manchester Menotrs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 1. 25

shallow longitudinal furrow over the depression; the
_clypeus obliquely depressed in the middle at the centre,
the depression almost semicircular; the top with a few
punctures ; the centre below the antennz broadly, roundly
and distinctly raised ; the mandibles rufo-testaceous ; the
tips black; the palpi pale-testaceous. The frontal
depression black ; the vertex blackish at the ocelli; the
inner orbits narrowly at the bottom, broadly at the top, and
narrowly again behind the eyes, yellow. Prothorax in front,
the edge of the pronotum, two lines in the centre of the
mesonotum, the scutellum except at the apex, the pro-
pleurz and the mesopleurz over the coxe, lemon-yellow ;
the propleurz almost entirely black, as is also the sternum ;
the upper half of the mesopleure, and the metapleure,
black ; the mesopleure strongly punctured,except the usual
smooth space behind; the base above almost longitudinally
striated ; the metapleurz very finely and closely longitu-
dinally striated ; a red and yellow mark over the coxe.
Scutellum flat, large, not much narrowed towards the apex,
the post-scutellum rufous, very smooth, and having two
large, deep, oval depressions at the base. Median segment
shagreened, almost striated in the middle; the supra-
median area longer than broad; bluntly rounded at the
base. The four anterior coxz coloured like the femora ;
the hinder broadly black at the base beneath, and with
a yellow mark at the base behind. Abdomen shining,
the apex of the fourth, the fifth and the sixth, black. In
the fore wings the transverse median nervure is interstitial ;
the areolet is much narrowed at the top, being there less
in length than the space bounded by the recurrent and
the second transverse cubital nervures.

Appears to be a true Dzcoe/otus, the first species of the
genus recorded, I believe, out of Europe, The fovee at
the base of the post-scutellum are large and deep, more so,
in fact, than in most species of the genus.

26 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

CRAY P ETN

MESOSTENUS ALBO-PICTUS Sm.
simith, ivams. Hntom. Soc. 1870, p47 7 pia at ale
One . A large and handsome species.

HEMITELES DESTRUCTIVUS, sp. nov.

Niger, pedibus abdomineque rufo-testacets, pettolo nigro ;
alis hyalinzs, stigmate fusco. 2. Long. 5 mm. ; terebra I mm.

Head absent. Thorax entirely black, shining ; the
pro- and meso-thorax thickly covered with short pale hair,
almost impunctate, the lower part of the pro- and
meso-pleure strongly longitudinally striated, except the
usual impunctate spot on the apex of the latter; the
part of the metapleurze below the keel obliquely striated,
that above it rugose. The median segment rugosely
punctured ; the aree all distinctly defined ; the sides with
a distinct tooth near the top of the apical part Legs
rufo-testaceous ; the trochanters paler ; the hinder cox.
black, except at the apex. Wings clear hyaline, the
stigma and the nervures paler; the recurrent nervure is
received in the apical third of the cellule, the tegule pallid-
testaceous. Petiole black, finely and closely longitudinally
striated ; apical segments of abdomen thickly covered
with short pale hair.

PAPE Dis S:

RHYSSA SEMIPUNCTATA.

The species described by Mr. Kirby (Zvans. Entom.
Soc. 1883, p. 202) cannot bel. referred tome7ysscn lean
not quite certain to which genus it belongs; assuredly
not to Ahyssa, which zzter alia differs in having the
mesonotum transversely striolated.

Compared with Pzmpla the face is longer, the eyes

Manchester Memotrs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. 1. 27

being separated from the base of the mandibles; the
clypeus is much larger, more elongate and narrowed
gradually towards the apex; the mandibles have two
teeth at the apex ; the eyes are distinctly margined on the
inner side; the centre of the mesonotum at the base is
separated by deep crenulated furrows into a cone-shaped
lobe, the sides of the pronotum being raised at the base of
the furrows, which are produced as one a short distance
beyond the apex of the lobe ; the scutellum is narrowed
towards the apex, curved at the base; the keels are
large and acute.. The median segment is strongly and
uniformly transversely striated; the centre flatly raised ;
the sides stoutly keeled ; the keels ending in a stout blunt
tooth ; the apex with an oblique slope and with the sides
keeled. The top and base of the mesopleure are depressed :
the edges of the depression crenulated ; in the middle and
reaching near to the apex is a wide, deep, slightly
oblique furrow ; the hinder edge has a wide, flat, slightly
oblique, crenulated furrow ; and, in front of this on the
lower side, is a short, wide, oblique depression. The legs
are stout; the hinder femora have, shortly beyond the
middle, a short, somewhat triangular tooth ; the tibize are
spined, especially the hinder, the middle pair having only
a few and the anterior none at all; the tarsi are spined ;
the claws long, curved, simple. The abdomen smooth,
shining and impunctate throughout; the base oblique,
not hollowed ; the sides of the second and third obliquely
furrowed, the furrows being more distinctly defined than
in Pzmnpla. The fore tarsi are twice the length of the
tibize ; the middle segments of the abdomen broader than
long ; the ovipositor issues from a ventral cleft.

The ¢ offers no noteworthy generic character wherein
it differs from the 9.

The toothed posterior femora, spined tibiz, elongated
face, deeply lobed mesonotum, furrowed mesopleure

28 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

and median segment form a combination of dis-
tinctive characters which warrants a new genus being
formed for this species, which I would name Xenopzmpla.

The ¢ is not described by Kirby. It agrees generally
in coloration with the @; but the scutellar keels, the
apex of the scutellum, the post-scutellum, the edges
of the apex of the mesonotum, and the metanotal spines
are yellow; the furrow on the mesopleure and the apex
of the mesopleurz, are black, but the extreme apexvor
the latter is yellow ; the petiole is bordered with yellow,
the yellow band being narrowed in the middle; the yellow
marks on the abdomen extend to the fifth segment ; one,
two, or three of the apical segments may be red; the
hinder tibize may be for the greater part blackish and they
are less strongly spined. In both sexes the quantity of
black on the antennz varies, as does also the amount of
violaceous colour in the wings.

LISSONOTA TINCTIPENNIS, sp. ov.

Rufa; antennis nigris ; thorace albo-maculato ; alts
fere flavo-hyalinis. 9. Long. 10 mm.

Antenne entirely black, covered with a microscopic
down ; the scape slightly black-haired. Head shining, the
vertex closely punctured, almost glabrous; the face
sparsely covered with short white hair; the orbits all
round, but more narrowly at the top, and the mandibles,
white ; the mandibular teeth blackish ; the mandibles at
their base piceous ; the palpi pale-rufous. Thorax dark-
rufous ; the middle of the mesonotum broadly, the sides
less distinctly, the lower part of the propleure, the sides —
and top of the mesopleuree, the hinder part of the meso-
sternum and the edges of the metathorax, black ; the
base of the pronotum, a somewhat triangular large mark
on either side of the mesonotum at the base, two elongate

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 1. 29

marks, dilated at the middle, at its apex, the scutellum,
the post-scutellum, a large somewhat oval mark at the
base of the mesopleure, and a large oblique one on the
-metapleurz, white. The median segment transversely
aciculated, less strongly so at the base; before the apex
is a stout transverse curved keel ; and in the centre are a
few transverse strize. Legs entirely rufous ; the fore pair
slightly paler in tint. Abdomen smooth, shining, im-
punctate. Wings hyaline, iridescent, and with a slight
fuscous tinge; the stigma and nervures fuscous; the
areolet oblique.

Allied to L. flavo-picta Sm., but that has only two
yellow marks on the mesonotum, no yellow on the meta-
pleure, and the coxe are yellow. L. albo-picta Sm., has
the head black.

TRYPHONIDES.
CHORIN ZUS (?) FORTIPES, sp. “ov.

Mona: 5 mm. 9%.

The specimen of this species unfortunately wants the
head, but it differs so much from C. xzgrzpes that there
can be no doubt of their distinctness. It differs from
C. nigripes in the petiole having two strong keels down
its centre, which is, further, much more distinctly raised
and separated from the sides.

Pro- and meso-notum shining, closely and strongly
punctured, thickly covered with black hair ; the scutellum
with large distinctly separated punctures. Median seg-
ment depressed and distinctly margined at the base,
rough, indistinctly punctured, thickly covered with greyish
hair ; the two keels in the centre much stronger than they
are in C. zigripes, and are continued round the sides of
the apex. All the pleuree smooth and shining, sparsely
haired ; the sternum thickly covered with fuscous hair.
Wings fusco-hyaline; the stigma and nervures dark-

OO

30 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

fuscous ; the transverse cubital nervures united at the top ;
the recurrent nervure is received in the apical third of the
cellule. Legs black, thickly covered with longish white
hair ; the base and apex of the anterior tibia and the fore
tarsi for the greater part testaceous. Abdomen strongly
punctured, thickly covered with short pale hair; the
petiole strongly keeled down the centre to shortly beyond
the middle ; the base not much depressed in the centre.
The two species I have here referred to Chorineus
agree better with that genus than with any other. The
keels on the second and third abdominal segments charac-
teristic of Chorzne@us can hardly be said to exist; the
femora and the legs generally are stouter than they are in
eg. the European C. funebris ; while both species differ in
the areolet being complete. |

CHORINAUS NIGRIPES, sf. zov.

Niger, tibits tarstsque anticis testaceis; alis fere
hyalinis. 9.

Long. fere 6 mm.

Face at the sides finely and closely transversely
striated, in the centre irregularly rugose; covered with
long, soft white hair; the front and vertex shining, im-
punctate ; more thickly covered with shorter hair than on
the face; the palpi dark-testaceous. Thorax shining,
impunctate; the pro- and meso-notum thickly ‘cowereds
with short dark hair; the median segment coarsely
shagreened, except in the middle at the apex where it is
shining and impunctate ; down the centre are two distinct
keels which slightly diverge at the apex. Pleurz shining,
impunctate ; the metapleurz on the lower side bordered
by a stout keel. Legs black; the front kuces, (tilmicetaad
tarsi, testaceous ; the four hinder tarsi of a darker testa-
ceous colour, the metatarsus being almost fuscous. Wings
hyaline, very slightly infuscated ; the stigma almost black ;

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. 1. 31

the nervures testaceous ; the areolet narrow, longish ; the
recurrent nervures united at the top; the first transverse
‘cubital nervure thick, the second narrow, faint on lower
side ; the recurrent nervure received near the apex of the
areolet and largely bullated at the top; the first transverse
cubital nervure bulges out backwards, forming a triangle.
The basal three segments of the abdomen strongly
punctured, the others impunctate, thickly covered with
longish pale hair.

BASSUS GENEROSUS, sf. nov.

Niger, orbitzs oculorum, ore, palpis, linea pronotz, scutello,
tegulis, lineaque tebtarum posticarum albts ; pedibus rufis ;
tarsts postices nigris ; alts hyalints, stzgmate fusco. 9.

Long. 6 mm.

Head black; the face punctured, sparsely covered
with short fuscous hair; the mouth, the base of the
mandibles, palpi and inner orbits, white ; the mandibular
teeth piceous and black. Thorax black; a large broad
mark on the side of the mesonotum at the base, reaching
to the tegule, the tegulz, tubercles, a triangular mark
on the pleurz below the base of the hind wings, the
greater part of the scutellum and the post-scutellum,
yellowish-white. Median segment closely punctured ; the
keels stout ; the supramedian area wider than long ; the
large median area rounded on each side at the top;
stoutly transversely striolated. Propleure distinctly punc-
tured ; the mesopleurze almost impunctate, especially
in the middle behind ; the metapleure minutely punctured.
Legs red ; the fore coxe and the middle at the base, black;
the apices of the coxz and the trochanters yellow; the
base of the hinder tibiz broadly black; a broad white
band towards the middle ; at the apex of the white band
they are black, the apex itself being rufous. The stigma
is for the greaier part black ; the base broadly testaceous.

32 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

Abdomen black; the apical half of the second and the
basal half of the third rufo-testaceous ; the apex of the
second segment yellow ; down the centre of the petiole
(but not reaching the apex) are two keels; the extreme
apex smooth, but, in front of this smooth part, there are
short, stout, longitudinal keels ; the second segment has,
shortly beyond the middle, a wide, deep, transverse furrow,
which is finely longitudinally striolated, and, in the middle,
is bent a little backwards; the base of the segment is
coarsely but closely punctured ; the third segment has
also a transverse furrow.

MESOLEPTUS SYBARITA, sf. zov.

Niger, capite thoraceque albo-maculatis, apice metanotz,
abdoutine pedibusque rufis,; alts hyalinis, stigmate fusco. 3.

Long. 9 mm.

Antennz black; the scape reddish in the middle
beneath. Head lemon-yellow ; the occiput except at the
sides, the vertex except at the orbits, and a broad line
down the face to the base of the clypeus, black ; finely
punctured, very sparsely covered with short pale hair ;
the mandibles lemon-yellow, black at the apex ; the palpi
yellow, without a lemon tint. Thorax black; a broad line
on the pronotum not reaching to the base, two lines in
the centre of the mesonotum extending from the base to
the apex, the base of the lines dilated outwardly, club-
shaped and touching the pronotum, the scutellum except
at the apex, post-scutellum, the prosternum, a large
oblique mark on the mesopleure, the apex of the propleurz
to near the bottom, the tubercles, a large oblique mark
on the apex of the metapleurz and a small one at the.
base above, lemon-yellow; the middle lobes of the
mesonotum and the apical half of the metanotum
brownish-red: above the yellow mark on the mesopleurz
is a large brownish-red mark; the upper part of the

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 1. 33

yellow mark being bordered by the same colour; the
reddish apex of the metanotum transversely striated.
Legs fulvous, the four anterior coxz, the trochanters and
the upper part of the hinder coxz, lemon-yellow. Areolet
triangular; the nervures blackish,the costa dark-testaceous.
Abdomen fulvous-red above; the ventral surface, except
at the apex, lemon-yellow.

MESOLEPTUS COMPARATUS, Sf. ov.

Long. 9-10 mm.

Differs from JZ. sybarzta in the thorax being almost
entirely brownish-red, in the pleuree having no yellow
marks, in the mesonotum having only two small yellow
marks, and in the face being broadly black in the middle.

Head black ; the orbits of the eyes except for a
small space below the top on the outer side, the clypeus,
base of mandibles, palpi, two short lines on the apex of
the mesonotum, the scutellum, post-scutellum, the pro-
thorax broadly beneath, a small obscure mark on the

mesopleuree in the centre, and a large oblique mark in the
centre of the metapleuree, yellow ; the middle lobe of the
pronotum, the parts at the sides of the scutella, the base
of the median segment broadly in the middle, the mark
being narrowed towards the apex, the middle of the pro-
pleurze, the top and base of the mesopleure broadly, the
mesonotum in the middle behind, the edges of the meta-
pleurze at the base and beneath, black. The puncturing
on the mesothorax is not very strong; the sides of the
scutellum obscurely longitudinally striated. Legs reddish,
except a large black mark on the hinder coxe beneath.
Areolet oblique, irregular ; the transverse cubital nervures
‘not united at the top. Petiole closely and strongly acicu-
lated except at the apex; the second segment aciculated,
the others smooth; the three apical broadly blackish.

34 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

OPHIONIDES.
OPHION PUNCTATUS, sp. nov.

Long. 11 mm.

Head rufous, the inner orbits bright lemon-yellow, the
colour becoming paler as it unites with the rufous colour
of the rest of the head; the face coarsely and closely
punctured, the clypeus at the base sparsely punctured, its
apex almost impunctate ; thickly covered with short pale
hair ; the mandibles pale lemon-yellow, the teeth black ;
the hinder orbits obscure-yellow ; the palpi pale-yellow.
The two basal joints of the antenne are rufous. Thorax
rufous, shining ; the pro- and meso-notum closely and
rather strongly punctured, closely covered with a micro-
scopic pile ; the scutellum is not so darkly coloured as the
mesonotum, and has the punctures more widely punctured.
Median segment finely closely rugose, thickly covered
with short fuscous hair. Propleurz closely and somewhat
strongly punctured, thickly covered wlth short fuscous
hair ; the base raised and paler in colour. The meso-
pleurzee strongly punctured; the metapleure with the
punctures more widely separated, and smaller at base;
at the base is a smooth, curved, and in front of the
spiracles is a wider, deeper, oblique, furrow, which becomes
wider towards the apex, and clearly separating the pleurz
into two unequal parts. Wings hyaline, with a fuscous
tinge, the nervures and stigma dark-fuscous. Tegulz
lemon-yellow. Abdomen not quite so dark-luteous as’
the thorax; the petiole with an elongated depression
extending from the front of the spiracles to a slightly
greater distance behind them, in the centre on the top ;-
its apex being slightly wider than the base ; the ventral
surface of the second and third segments pallid lemon-
yellow. The genital armature coloured like the abdomen.

The only New Zealand species of Ophion with

Manchester Memotrs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 1. a5,

punctured thorax is Ophion znutzles Sm., No. 2. Trans.
eam. 50C., 1378, p. 2, but that appears to be a.quite
different form, O. zzutilis, No. 2, having the nervures and
stigma ferruginous, while in our species the stigma is
black, without a tint of reddish colour; no mention
being made of any yellow colour in the eyes in O. znutvits.
I write “ O. zzutilzs, No. 2,” for Smith actually described
in the Zvans. Entom. Soc. 1876, p. 478, another O. zzuzzles,
which is treated as identical with the 1878 specimen by
Piroy (rans. Entom. Soc. 1881, p. 45). The 1876
specimen has also no yellow on the head, nor is there any
mention of the thorax being punctured, as it is said to be
in No. 2.

PANISCUS EPHIPPIATUS Sm.

Apparently a common species, if I have correctly
identified our species with Smith’s, whose description is not
clear. He says, “mesothorax black,” which would mean
the entire mesothorax ; but lower down he says, “ sternum
black,” words which are unnecessary if the whole meso-
thorax is black. In the Greymouth example only the
mesonotum and mesosternum are black; the orbits are
obscure yellow; the stigma and nervures dark fuscous.
The face is closely, the clypeus more widely, punctured ;
the tips of the mandibles black ; the ocellar region deep-
black ; the outer ocelli bordered by a distinct furrow on
the outer side. The black on the mesonotum does not
extend to the sides, nor to the edge of the central lobe.
The basal half of the propleurz obliquely striated; the
upper half of the mesopleure closely punctured; the
centre at the base rough ; the lower part punctured ; the
metapleure closely punctured above, the lower part
irregularly longitudinally striated ; the scutellum closely
punctured, the sides sharply keeled. The median segment
coarsely and closely transversely striolated, more strongly

36 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

towards the apex. Wings hyaline, the nervures and
stigma dark-fuscous.

PANISCUS FOVEATUS, sf. mov.

Long. 17-18 mm.

A larger species than P. ephzppiatus ; may be known
from it by the absence of black on the vertex and thorax,
and by the form of the post-scutellum, which is much
more convex, has the sides distinctly keeled, and is deeply
depressed at the base, the depression being almost bifurcate,
through the centre being raised.

The flagellum of the antennz infuscated; the face
and clypeus pallid-yellow; the face more closely punctured
than the clypeus; the tips of the mandibles black.
Mesonotum shagreened ; the scutellum closely punctured,
much narrowed towards the apex; the post-scutellum
rugosely punctured, the sides at the base (bordering the
depression) sharply keeled. Median segment coarsely
transversely striated, at its base in the centre is a wide,
curved, deep furrow asin P. ephippzatus. The propleurz
obscurely obliquely striated ; the apex closely punctured ;
the mesopleure closely, but not strongly, punctured ; the
metapleure behind the spiracles finely punctured, the
rest much more coarsely punctured, on the lower side
almost longitudinally striolated, the lower part of the
mesopleurz is not depressed as it is in P. ephzppzatus.
Wings hyaline, the nervures blackish, the stigma fuscous.
The abdomen is uniformly luteous, the apex not being
darkened ; the sides of the petiole at the base widely
excavated.

LIMNERIA ZEALANDICA, Sp. NOV.

Nigra, abdomine rufo, bast late nigro,; pedibus rujis,
coxis posticis nigris, trochanteribus flavis ; alis hyalinis,
stigmate testaceo. 9.

Long. 7; terebra 2.5 mm.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «lit. (1898), No. 1. 37

Antenne nearly as long as the body, black ; the scape
testaceous beneath; the flagellum thickly covered with
short black hair. Head black; the mandibles yellow ;
their teeth piceous-black; below the antenne thickly
covered with silvery hair; the vertex more thickly with
shorter black hair. Thorax black, hardly shining, except
on the apex of the meso- and the base of the meta-pleure ;
the propleure at the apex longitudinally striolated. The
median segment with a curved keel near the base; on the
metapleure a keel unites to the spiracle, and, from near
the apex cf this keel, a less distinct one runs to opposite
faeeimiddie of the coxz. Legs rufous; the hind coxze
black ; the four anterior trochanters pale-yellow ; the pos-
terior tarsi infuscated. Petiole black, except the apex,
which is very shining and testaceous, at the sides finely
striated ; the rest aciculated ; the second segment black ;
the apex broadly, the sides narrowly, rufous. The areolet
oblique, narrow, the nervures touching at the top; the
areolet projecting beneath ; the recurrent nervure received
beyond the middle of it.

BRACONID.
ASCOGASTER CRENULATUS, Sp. ov.

Niger, tarsis fuscis ; alis fumatzs. 9. Long. fere 5 mm.

Head almost opaque, except the vertex, which is
smooth and shining in the centre, covered, especially in
front, with a white pubescence ; the mandibles pale-yellow
at the apex ; the teeth piceous ; it is closely punctured,
the vertex and front being less strongly punctured than
the lower parts. Thorax covered with a microscopic white
pile ; the pronotum irregularly longitudinally striolated in
front ; the striations in the hollowed middle being the
larger. Mesonotum finely and closely punctured ; down
the middle are two shallow, striated furrows. Scutellum

38 CAMERON, A/ymenoptera, from Greymouth.

with the punctures more distinct and more widely separated
than on the mesonotum ; its base is hollowed and divided
by eight strong keels; it is narrowed towards the apex ;
its sides are straight, and it forms almost a triangle; the
mesonotum at its sides is strongly longitudinally striated ;
the striations being widely separated; on either side at
its apex is a smooth, shining, transverse space. The
base of the median segment bears short, thick, longitudinal
keels, separated from the rest of the segment by a stout
transverse one, the rest of the segment being reticulated,
bordered on the inner side by a longitudinal keel, the edge
itself being also stoutly keeled. The propleurz in front
finely transversely striated ; the centre hollowed, strongly
irregularly and deeply striolated; the striations on the
apex much weaker ; the mesopleurze above with shallow,
irregular punctures ; the lower side much more strongly
punctured, almost reticulated; the metapleurze strongly
irregularly reticulated. Legs black; the extreme apices
of the femora, and the base of the tibize testaceous; the
spurs whitish; the tibiz and tarsi closely covered with
silvery pubescence. The base of the abdomen coarsely,
the apex finely and closely longitudinally striated. Radial
nervure elongate, reaching to the end of the wing, being
nearly as long as the cubital; the second transverse cubital
nervure is very faint.

METEORUS NOVA-ZEALANDICUS, SP. nov.

Rufus, capite pedibusque pallide flavis, als hyalines,
stigmate flavo, bast fusco. 9.

Long. 5:5; terebra 2 mma

Head shining ; the face covered with white hair, the
vertex more thickly with shorter fuscous hair; the teeth of
the mandibles black, piceous at the base; the front finely
transversely striated; below the antenne are a-few short
longitudinal striz. Thorax uniformly rufous in colour ;

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlet. (1898), Wo. 1. 39

finely and closely rugosely punctured; the apex of the
median segment covered with moderately long, white hair,
the base with shorter fuscous hair. The propleurze irregu-
larly horizontally striolated at the base; the upper part
being almost entirely black; the mesopleuree at the top
(especially at the base) strongly irregularly striolated and
reticulated; the lower part is widely hollowed, the hollow
being strongly and somewhat obliquely striolated. Median
segment strongly and closely rugosely punctured ; the base
in the middle pwith 2 or 3 short longitudinal keels; the
metapleure near the top with a stout curved keel, beneath
which at the base it is horizontally striated ; the meso-
pleurz at the apex raised, almost carinate, the keel being
smooth and shining at the top. Legs pallid-yellow; the
hind coxz and apex of the hind femora rufous; the
hinder tibiz and tarsi not so pale in colour. Wings
hyaline with a faint fuscous hue; the nervures pallid-
fuscous; the stigma pale-yellow, darker at the base.
Petiole rufous; finely and closely punctured; the base
darker, almost transversely striated; the rest of the
abdomen lighter in colour, especially towards the apex ;
the second segment is finely punctured ; the others very
smooth.

The first abdominal segment has “tracheal grooves”
and is dilated in the middle. It is longer and more slender
than usual. The second cubital cellule is slightly narrowed
at the top. The antennze unfortunately have been lost.
The radial areolet of the hind wings is not geminated by
a transverse nervure.

ALYSIA STRAMINEIPES, Sf. ov.
Nigra, pedibus flavis ; alts hyalints, stegmate nigro. 3.
Long. 4 mm.
Antennz black ; the scape testaceous ; the flagellum
covered closely with a microscopic pile; the joints not

4O CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

clearly separated, the third longer than the fourth. Head
shining ; the face closely, the front and vertex sparsely,
covered with short, black hair. Pro- and meso-thorax
shining, closely punctured ; the median segment coarsely
rugosely punctured, sparsely covered with longish black
hairs; the metapleure rugosely punctured at the sides,
the middle with wide, deep, widely separated punctures.
The hinder edge of the mesopleurz crenulated ; its base
distinctly punctured, the punctures clearly separated, but
not by a great distance from each other; the upper part
with the punctures closer, smaller and shallower ; on the
lower side, but not touching the base, is a wide, deep,
curved furrow, indistinctly crenulated in the middle. The
upper part of the propleurz stoutly striated ; the upper
two striz stout; on the lower side immediately over the
coxz are two much stouter keels. Median segment
coarsely rugosely reticulated. Legs entirely fulvous-
yellow ; the femora sparsely, the tibiz and tarsi thickly,
covered with white hair. Wings hyaline; the stigma
large, blackish ; the costa and nervures paler; the first
abscissa of the radius very short, not one-half the
length of the space between the recurrent and the first
transverse cubital nervure. The petiole above closely, its
apex more sparsely and not so strongly, punctured ; the
rest of the abdomen very smooth and shining; the apices
of the segments pallid-yellow.

The only specimen is not in good condition, but I
believe I have described correctly its salient specific points.
It appears to be an A/ysza as defined by Foerster in his
generic synopsis of the family. (Verh. Ver. Rhetnl. XIX.
p. 263.)

EVANIID As
GASTERUPTION PEDUNCULATUM Schl.

Foenus unguiculatus Smith, Trans. Entom. Soc., 1869

p. 480, pl. IV., f 8.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No, 1. 41

Gasteruption pedunculatum Schletterer, Ann. K. K.
Natur. Hofmus. Wien, 1890, p. 467.

One ¢ and one @.

In both examples the pronotum is rufous, except in
the middle, the rufous colour being narrowest at the top ;
the mesopleure are broadly rufous immediately over the
sternum ; there is a curved rufous band over the hinder
coxz, and a narrower oblique one immediately in the
middle above it. The amount of red on the legs varies.
In the ¢ the amount of white pubescence on the pro-
thorax is much greater than it is in the 9, unless it be
that it has been rubbed off from the latter in my specimens.

PROCTOTRUPIDAS:
PROCTOTRUPES MACULIPENNIS Cam.

Cameron, Manchester Memoirs, 1888, p. 175.
One specimen.

MALVINA PUNCTATA Cam.

Manchester Memozrs, 1880, p. 33.
Four examples.

BETYLA FULVA Cam.

Manchester Memoirs, 1889, p. 13.

This species was described by the Rev. T. A. Marshall
in the Extom. Mon. Mag., November 1892, under the name
of Tanyzonus bolitophile, which name must give place to
my earlier one.

Mr. Marshall describes both sexes. The ¢ is winged,
and has the thorax fully developed, not narrow and con-
tracted as in the wingless ?, which has 15-jointed antenne,
while the ¢ has them 14-jointed, much thinner, attenuated
- towards the apex, and with the third joint emarginate.
Mr. G. V. Hudson discovered the species at Welling-

42 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

ton, New Zealand, to bea parasite on the luminous “ Glow
Worm” Bolitophila luminosa. Bolitophila is a species of
Diptera.

FORMICID-.
MONOMORIUM NITIDUM Sm.

Described by Smith as a Tetramorzum. Common at
Greymouth ; and, according to Forel, at Mount Cook, on
_ the Island of Timaru, at an elevation of 2,540 feet.

HUBERTIA STRIATA Sm.

This was also erroneously referred to Tetvamorium. It
is more related to Monomorium, and anew genus, Huderiza,
has been formed for its reception by Forel, C:R. Soc. Entom.
Belgique, 1890. Found at Greymouth and at Mount Cook
along with WZ. nztzdum.

For an interesting description of the habits of the
above-mentioned ants, as observed at Ashburton, the
reader is referred to a paper “On the origin of Ants’
Nests,” by Mr. W. W. Smith in Extom. Mon. Mag., March,
1892, pp. 60-65.* The nests are formed under stones
partly buried in the sandy soil, on the terraces of the river
and in stony places on the plains.

In the nests of the ants are found sundry inquilines.
There are two species of Homoptera a species of Azpersza
and Dactylopius pow Maskell, both feeding on the roots
of the grasses among which the ants’ nests are placed ;
a beetle, Dzarthrocera formicephiia Brown, an isopod,
Platyarthrus, and some mites. It is noteworthy that the
coccid genus, Rzpersza, and the crustacean, Platyarthrus,
are found inhabiting ants’ nests in Europe.

PONERA CASTANEA Sm.
Several examples.

* For a description of a great flight of WZ. zztedum, see W. W. Smith,
Entom. Mon. Mag., 1890, p. 321.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlat. (1898), No. 1. 43

APHAENOGASTER ANTARCTICUS Sm.

Two females.

FOSSORES.
CRABRO (RHOPALUM) JOCOSUS, sf. ov.

Long. 8-9 mm.

Comes near to C. perforator Sm.; differs in having
less yellow on the legs and none on the mesonotum.

Head black ; the cheeks and clypeus densely covered
with silvery pubescence ; the front and vertex alutaceous,
sparsely covered with microscopic down; the ocelli’.°;
the vertex depressed in the centre, where there is a furrow
running down from the ocelli; close to the eyes on the
inner side, nearly opposite the lower ocellus, is a short,
moderately deep, curved depression. Antenne black; the
basal joints of the flagellum testaceous beneath ; the third
joint slightly, the fourth largely, produced beneath ; the
sixth deeply incised at the base, the apex largely dilated ;
the fifth joint ovate. The mandibles piceous before the
teeth ; there is one large apical and a shorter basal tooth.
Pronotum at the middle distinctly separated from the
mesothorax ; in the centre above broadly hollowed, the
sides behind depressed, the middle raised, rounded; the
edge of the pronotum near the tegulz white. Mesonotum
and scutellum shining, impunctate, glabrous ; a deep, large,
oval depression at the side of the post-scutellum. Down
the centre of the median segment is a deep, moderately
wide furrow. At the base of the mesopleurz an oblique,
wide, crenulated furrow; in the centre above a small
round depression ; the metapleure are broadly depressed
at the base. Legs black; the base of the fore femora, the
fore tibie except a black line behind, the fore tarsi, the
apex of the middle femora, the middle tibize except behind,
the middle tarsi except the apical joint and the second

44 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

and third joints of the hinder tarsi, yellow. Wings
hyaline; the stigma and nervures black. Abdomen
shining ; the apical segments covered with short pale
hair; the pygidium opaque, covered with longish white
hair.

TARANGA.

Under this name Mr. W. F. Kirby (Zvans. Entom. Soc.
1883, p. 201, fig. ) describes a genus Zaranga “apparently
allied to Pemphredon” but which is really related to Pzson.
Kohl (Anun. K. K. Natur. Hofmus. Wien, XI. p. 458)
regards it as a division of Pzson. Bingham (Fauna of
L[ndia, Hlym. i. p. 218) says that he has “taken specimens of
Pison with three cubital cells in one fore wing, only two
in the other. Such seems to be the case with the allied
genus Zaranga Kirby. Kohl unites Zaranga to Pison ;
but from a careful examination of the type, I have come
to the conclusion that they are distinct.” I have noticed
myself that the outer nervure of the pendicular cellule
tends to become obliterated in species where it is normally
present. The neuration in 7avanga appears to be normal,
and not merely an individual aberration ; but still I cannot
regard it in any other light than as a division of P2zson.
Otherwise the species with neuration differing from the
type, é.g., Pzsonztes, would also have to be treated as distinct
genera.

PISON PRUINOSUS, sf. nov.

Niger, opacus, capite thoraceque longe albo-hirtis; alts
Jere hyalinis. 2. Long. 16 mm.

Antenne opaque, the scape and basal joints of the
flagellum thickly covered with longish pale hair. Head
covered thickly with long greyish hair, which is thicker
and more silvery below the eye incision. Apex of clypeus
rounded in the middle. Mandibles shining, the base with

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 1. 45

long silvery hair. Thorax opaque, alutaceous, thickly
covered with longish white hair, longest and thickest on
the scutellum and median segment. Apex of the median
segment with with an oblique slope ; the basal half in the
centre with a wide, moderately deep furrow, from which
run some curved, oblique keels; the base of the slope
coarsely punctured ; the rest with strong, transverse, dis-
tinctly separated striations. Pleurz and sternum with
small, shallow, distinctly separated punctures ; the sternum
depressed in the centre, down which runs a straight, stout
keel. Coxe, trochanters and femora covered somewhat
thickly with longish white hair; the tibize and tarsi pru-
inose. Wings fusco-hyaline; the extreme apex smoky ;
the second cubital cellule triangular ; in length scarcely
half the length of the pedicle; the first recurrent nervure
received shortly, but distinctly, in front of the cubital ; the
second interstitial ; the second transverse cubital nervure
near the top, and both branches at the bottom are bul-
lated. Abdomen opaque, the segments at the apices
banded with silvery pubescence; the basal two ventral
segments sparsely covered with white hair; the apical
more thickly with longer fuscous hair; the base of the
second segment is smooth, raised, and, in the middle, pro-
jects into a somewhat triangular area.

P. morosus Sm., is a smaller species than this, has
the head, thorax and abdomen more shining, and much
less pilose; the furrows on the median segment shorter
and shallower ; its head is more developed behind; the
abdomen deeply excavated in the middle at the base; the
depression on the mesopleure wider and deeper; the
pedicle of the second cubital cellule hardly longer than
the appendicular cellule; the second transverse cubital
nervure is more rounded and curved at the bottom; the
second cubital cellule at the top is hardly so long as the
second at the bottom, while in P. morosus it is longer ;

46 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

the transverse nervure is received distinctly in front of the
transverse basal; in P. pruznosus it is interstitial. P. tuber-.
culatus Sm. differs in being much smaller—only 3 lines—
and in having two minute tubercles on the second, third
and fourth ventral segments near their apical margin.

PISON MOROSUS Sm.

One specimen.

GORYTES CARBONARIUS Sm.

An example of this, apparently common, species has the
second transverse cubital nervure completely obliterated.
Gorytes trichtosoma Cam. is probably only a form of
G. carbonarius.

TACHYTES DEPRESSUS Sauss.

Reise der Novara, Hymen. p. 69.
Three specimens.

TACHYTES SERICOPS Sm.

One example.

TACHYTES HELMSI Cam.

Manchester Memoirs, 1888, p. 182.
One example.

POMPILID.

The Pompzlide appear to be the commonest, largest
and most handsome of the New Zealand Hymenoptera. .
Under the name of Spex one of the species has been
recorded by Mr. Potts (probably S. Wakefieldi), as
preying on spiders, with which the Pompilide provision
their nests. Mr. Potts (Mature, XXX. p. 267) says: “A
species of Sphex [read Salzus| with orange-coloured body
deposits the benumbed or torpid bodies of spiders in
some crevice for future use. An individual of this species

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 1. 47

had its hole in a dry corner beneath the plate of a long
veranda. One day I observed it dragging a victim along
a gravelled walk that was parallel to the veranda; the
small stones and grit made its progress very difficult.
After very trying struggles with these impediments it
displayed a remarkable degree of intelligence, by which it
gained its ends. It altered its course and made for the
veranda, ascending the smooth, painted board that
adjoined the gravelled walk. After slowly traversing
seven inches of perpendicular, it came to a rounded
beading which projected outwards. Now came its supreme
moment of physical exertion. The body of the spider
apparently was too heavy to render the aid of wings
available. After several pauses in its progress it slowly,
yet surely, surmounted the difficulty presented by the
projecting beading, gained the level boards of the veranda,
along which it travelled rapidly with its burden, which it
sometimes dragged, sometimes pushed before it. By the
expenditure of great exertion in surmounting the beading
_ it gained a smooth and level run to its home of thirty-
Hine: feet.”

In Mr. Kirby’s Catalogue all the species are des-
cribed under the name of Przocnemzs, which name, however,
must give place to Salzus.

a. Fulvous species.
SALIUS WAKEFIELDI Kirby. ,
This is by far the commonest of the Pompilide. Ina
fresh state the head and thorax are thickly covered with
golden pubescence; but with age this gets abraded,
the parts then appearing quite bare and shining.

SALIUS MARGINATUS Sm.

A much rarer species than S. Wakefieldz, to which it
has a great resemblance when the latter has the head and

48 (CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

thorax freshly covered with hair. In S. margznatus,
however, the head and thorax are quite black, instead of
brownish or mahogany-coloured, the base of the antennz
black instead of red, while the first and second transverse
cubital nervures are curved, in S. Wakefield straight
and oblique.

Under the name of Agenia brounz, Signor Gribodo
(Bull. Soc, Entom. [tal. XV1., 1884) describes a species from
Howich, which agrees closely in coloration, &c., with
S. Wakefieldi, but the latter is a Sa/zus not an Ageniza.

SALIUS FUGAX Fab. (maculipennis Sm.).

This is a rare species, and may be known from the
others by its smaller size and by having a stigmal as well
as an apical fuscous cloud in the wings.

b. Black species.
SALIUS MONACHUS White (see Smith).
One example of this large species.

SALIUS TRIANGULARIS, sp. ov.

Long. 10mm.

Agrees with S. monachus Sm. in being entirely black —
and in having the head and thorax covered with long
black hair, but is not half its size; and otherwise may be
readily known from it by the basal abdominal segment
being triangular as seen from the side, the centre being
sharp, the base and apex falling obliquely, whereas in S.
monachus the middle is broadly rounded and not sharply
differentiated.

Scape of antenne densely covered with black hair ;
the second and third joints bare; the rest missing. The
head covered all over with long black hair, shining ; the
apex of the mandibles rufous; the hinder ocelli separated
from each other by half the distance they are from the
eyes. Thorax covered with longish black hairs ; the pro-

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 1. 49

and meso-thorax shining ; the median segment rounded at
the base, the rest oblique ; the apex obscurely transversely
striated. The femora sparsely covered with longish black
hair. Wings with a shining, fuscous tinge; the apex of
the radial nervure curved; the second cubital cellule at
top and bottom not much more than half the length of the
third ; the first transverse cubital nervure sharply, the
second slightly, oblique ; the third roundly elbowed at the
middle ; the first recurrent nervure received in, the second
shortly before, the middle of the cellule. Abdomen shining,
impunctate ; the basal slope of the petiole covered with
longish black hair; the apical more thickly with stouter
hair; the apical segment thickly covered with long, stiff,
black hair; the hypopygium with the sides broadly rounded;
- the centre roundly incised.

In certain lights, the wings have a bright, metallic,

bronzy iridescence. ©

SALIUS CARBONARIUS Sm.

Two examples.

SALIUS NITIDIVENTRIS Sm.

fae atid 9.

This is a much smaller species than S. carbonarzus,
and agrees with it in having the body entirely black,
shining and almost bare; but may be known from it by
having the apex of the cubital nervure curved instead of
straight and by the second cubital cellule at the top being
distinctly shorter than the third, while in the other species
it is equal in length to it.

AGENIA HUTTONI, sf. nov.
Nigra, nittda, albo-pruinosa, alis hyalinis, nervis
nigris. $8. Long. 5 mm. ;
Head, except on the vertex, thickly covered with

50 CAMERON, Hymenoptera, from Greymouth.

silvery pubescence; the eyes very slightly converging
beneath, straight ; the hinder ocelli separated from each
other by a somewhat less distance than they are from the
eyes. The three basal joints of the antenne black, closely
covered with white pubescence. Thorax almost shining,
thickly covered with short white pubescence ; the median
segment elongate, rounded. Legs pruinose. Wings as
long as the body ; the apex of the radial nervure with a
slight curve ; the second and third cubital cellules at the
top as long as the third; the first transverse cubital nervure
at the bottom slightly curved, the rest oblique ; the first
recurrent nervure is received shortly beyond, the second
shortly before, the middle of the cellules. Legs entirely
black ; the femora sparsely covered with white hair ; the
tibiz and tarsi with white pubescence, the apex of the
hind tibiz on the inner side with fulvous pubescence.
Abdomen shining, impunctate, the apex with short white
hair; the hypopygium large, broadly keeled at the base
in the middle; the apex rounded, sparsely covered with
long white hair.

ANTHOPHILA.
ANDRENID-.

DASYCOLLETES VESTITUS Sm.

Trans. Eentom. Soc. 1876, p. 485.

Two specimens.

DASYCOLLETES HIRTIPES Sm.

Trans. Entom. Soc. 1878, p. 7.
One specimen.

PROSOPIS AGILIS Sm.

Trans. Entom. Soc., 1876, p. 484.
One specimen.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 1. 51

PROSOPIS SULCIFRONS, Sf. nov.

Nigra, nitida, alis fusco-violaceis. 9. Long. 8-9 mm.

Head shining, the vertex sparsely covered with long
blackish, the face more thickly with short white hair; the
face with shallow punctures, the vertex at the sides
much more distinctly punctured ; the centre at and below
the ocellar region opaque, alutaceous; the front between
the antennz carinate. On the inside, at the top of the |
eyes is a deep distinct longitudinal suture. The clypeus
at the apex roundly, but not deeply, curved. Mandibles
entirely black, deeply and widely furrowed on the outer
side ; the base alutaceous, the apex shining; the teeth
blunt. A curved, shallow, narrow furrow runs down from
the antennz to the bottom of the eyes, bordering the
yellow mark; and, in the centre below the antenne and
joining the lateral ones, is a transverse straight one. The
flagellum of the antennz obscure-brownish on the under
side towards the apex ; closely covered witha pale down ;
the scape punctured, scarcely dilated towards the apex.
On the pronotum is a yellow line, narrowed and almost
interrupted in the middle, dilated on the outer side; the
tubercles yellow, the latter having at their apex a thick
mass of pale hair. Mesonotum distinctly, but not deeply,
punctured ; there is a central and a lateral narrow, not
very distinct, furrow, reaching from the base to the middle.
Scutellum punctured like the mesonotum, indistinctly
keeled down the middle. Median segment alutaceous, its
apex oblique, thickly covered with long white hair. Pro-
pleurz sparsely covered with long white hair; the meso-
pleurz bearing all over shallow punctures; the furrow
distinctly crenulated. The central furrow on the median
segment, deep, narrow. Legs entirely black, except
the spurs which are pale; the tibiz and tarsi thickly
covered with silvery hair, the tibia especially towards

52 CAMERON, Hymneoptera, from Greymouth.

the apex, the femora sparsely covered with soft pale ~
hair; the spurs pale. Wings fuscous, with a violaceous
tinge; the stigma and nervures blackish, the former
fuscous on the lower side; the second cubital cellule
narrowed at the top, being there less in length than
the space bounded by the recurrent nervures; the
first recurrent nervure is interstitial; the second dis-
tinctly separated from the second transverse cubital.
Abdomen shining, impunctuate ; the apex thickly covered
with long black hair. The propleurz at the base are
finely indistinctly obliquely striated.

Comes near to P. laevigata ; but the description given
of its metathorax “smooth”, the apex of the abdomen with
only “a few black hairs,” while in the present species it is
thickly covered with long black hairs, does not fit the
species here described.

PROSOPIS INNOCENS, Sf. xov.

Lone, 7mm. 6:

Comes near to 7: agi Sm. but: differs iim tie
shorter second cubical cellule, in the recurrent nervures
being completely interstitial,in the pronotum being without
any yellow, and the tubercles black, not yellow.

Head dull, not shining, the front and vertex obscurely
punctured ; the clypeus, except the apical margin, yellow,
the yellow being produced above it as a wedge-shaped
mark, which reaches nearly to the enclosed space below the
antenne, its top being irregular, having one side higher
than the other. The inner ‘orbits have a yellow line
reaching from near the base of the antennz, where it is
narrow, becoming gradually dilated, rounded, narrowing
again to the bottom, but not so narrowly as at the top.
The mandibles black on the lower edge, the upper part
yellow; the teeth piceous and black) Antennze stout.
black ; the basal joints of the flagellum brownish beneath ;

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. liz. (1898), No. 1. 53

the scape curved, only very slightly dilated towards the
apex, and obscurely punctured, the lower part fringed
with longish pale hairs. Thorax alutaceous, sparsely
covered with pale hairs ; the mesonotum and mesopleurz
obscurely punctured ; the base of the mesopleurze crenu-
lated ; a deep, wide, curved furrow in front of the middle
coxze. On the mesonotum opposite the tegulz is a
curved, shallow furrow. The middle of the median segment
has a wide shallow furrow, and bears long pale hair. Legs
black, the anterior tibiz yellow in front ; the apices of the
anterior tarsal joints testaceous ; the tibial spurs pale;
the tarsi thickly covered, especially at the base, with pale
fulvous hair. Wings hyaline, the stigma black, fuscous
on the lower side ; the nervures blackish ; the first trans-
verse cubical nervure oblique ; the second obliquely bent
towards it (but not sharply) at the top; the top of the
cellule three-fourths of the length of the bottom; the
first recurrent nervure almost, the second completely,
interstitial, Abdomen dull, the apices of the segment dull-
piceous ; the apical segments fringed with longish hair.
Abstract of the Greymouth Hymenoptera :—

ICHNEUMONIDES ... ... 20

CRYPTIDES

PIMPLIDES ICHNEUMONIDE
TRYPHONIDES
OPHIONIDES...
BRACONID£...
EVANIIDA
PROCTOTRUPID& ...
FORMICIDE ...
CRABRONIDA
LARRIDZ
POMPILIDZ ...
ANDRENIDA

JrmaonnrRwrvwaun nn

GERI te. 5) GAs SPECIES.

| PRAGA TORR T CP ge rae <a Ney eg rh ning aie me ‘

| Ti, Mare | cbse eae

gi
tf

te eee

j Y a f | ee itt Kes Hitt ie

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 2.

II, Description of two new species of Mutilla from =
South Africa. |

By PETER CAMERON.

[Communicated by J. Cosmo Melvill, M.A., F.L.S.|

Received October 12th. Read November 30th, 1897.

The two species of Mutclla here described agree
closely in coloration, having the thorax red, the head and
abdomen black, the latter having two white marks; but
they differ completely in the form of the thorax.

MUTILLA CARSONI, SP: xov.

Nigra, longe hirta, thorace rufo; abdominis segments
secundz maculis duabus albis. Long. 20 mm.

Hab. Island in Lake Tanganyika (Carson).

Head black; coarsely rugosely punctured, covered
with long black hairs above ; the sides below the eyes
with silvery pubescence, the oral region with long blackish
hair ; the palpi blackish. The scape of the antennz curved
towards the apex, sparsely covered with longish black
hairs; the flagellum covered with a microscopic pubescence;
the basal joints thick, the others distinctly tapering towards
the apex. The head is largely developed behind the
eyes, being developed there almost twice their length.
Thorax three times the length of the head ; a little con-
tracted in the middle, gradually narrowed towards the
apex ; before the depression is a stout, shining, rounded
tooth, and behind it are two others of about the same size.
The upper part of the mesopleurze smooth, shining,
glabrous ; the lower part coarsely punctured; this part
being separated above by a distinct raised margin,

february 4th, 1898.

2 CAMERON, Mutilla, from South Africa.

and thickly covered with fulvous pubescence and less
thickly with long white hair. The apex of the median
segment smooth, impunctate. Above, the thorax is
covered with long black hairs; the lower part of the
metapleure thickly covered with pale hairs. Legs thickly
covered with long pale hairs; the fore calcaria pale.
Abdomen black, thickly covered with long black hairs ;
before the middle of the second segment are two roundish
marks of silvery pubescence; the third segment is covered,
except in the middle, with silvery pubescence ; the fourth
and fifth with long black hairs; the apical with long pale
hairs ; the basal half of the second ventral segment is
stoutly keeled in the middle, the keel ending in a stout,
curved, projecting point.

MUTILLA ZGROTA, Sf. zov.

Long. 24-25 mm.

Flab. Transvaal.

Agrees in coloration with JZ. carsonz,; but the white
marks on the second abdominal segment are smaller and
situated on the extreme base; otherwise differing in the
much shorter and broader thorax which is not one-half
the length of the abdomen. |

Head strongly rugosely punctured, above sparsely
covered with stout black hairs ; the oral region, at the sides
and behind, with the hairs longer, paler and much more
numerous ; behind the eyes it is not much longer than
them, and straight, not narrowed; the space above the
antennz hollowed, rounded at the top; its sides near the
antennz with a straight stout keel; the clypeus covered
with longish, thick, golden hair; the mandibles with
longish blackish hair. Antenne short, thick, not much
longer than the width of the head; the scape curved,
shining, above sparsely covered with short black hair; the
flagellum thick distinctly and gradually narrowed towards

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlzz. (1898), No. 2. 3

the apex where it is shining and glabrous. Thorax
scarcely twice the length of the head, not much narrowed
behind ; very coarsely rugosely reticulated; the sides
irregular ; before the middle is a stout tooth ; the median
segment at the sides, shortly below the top projects into a
large, stout, triangular tooth. Legs short and stout (much
shorter than in MW. carsoni); the anterior coxze and
femora thickly, the posterior more sparsely covered with
long white hair ; the four posterior tibiz and tarsi thickly
covered with stiff silvery hair; the fore tarsi short and
thick, above strongly punctured, its lower side with three
large stout spines ; the apex shining, piceous. The basal
two segments of the abdomen nearly as long as the head
and thorax united, black; on the extreme base of the
second segment are two small silvery marks, broader than
long ; on either side of the third segment is a large, trans-
verse mark of silvery pubescence ; the second segment is
strongly punctured, the punctures large, deep, elongate,
and running into reticulations ; its apex with the punctures
very much smaller and more distinctly separated. The
basal ventral segment forming a projecting blunt triangle ;
the base of the second segment oblique, and having a
blunt projection in the middle, strongly punctured,
especially at the sides where the punctures are much
larger, deeper and more irregular; the other segments
are much more finely and closely punctured, and thickly
fringed at the apex with long pale-fulvous hair. The
pygidial area closely rugose; the sides thickly covered
with long pale-golden hair; the hypopygium thickly
covered with black hair.

AQ

ea Fe ey

ans.
Dice

r
La .

portray

4

‘ bas
, cil , Bd, arn
yoke) Sa
= ve es ie

a

ies

24 it

ba sa

a

ee a

1

Ey RRA a.

III. Lams, Ox Waves.
p. 4, equation (19) ; vead
ae
p. 4, equation (20) ; vead N?, in second member.

p. 16, equation (89) should precede the last two lines of type.

Fie a ere ey kre a5); Ea

Vee youn anninie RY
oe é PRR AS u PRG. as
1) BS ae ee

j Ps Seal 4 pw = oee eS
he } ihnwe pace! 4 fe Fs Lee

* * ba

OS tie

a” € Veg

\
f r. me
avi
< -
;
{
\
c
‘
F
sal ‘
~
.
’
“
ey
ie ,

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 3.

III. On Waves in a Medium having a Periodic
Discontinuity of Structure.

By Professor HORACE LAMB, M.A., F.R.S.
Recezved December 6th. Read November 30th, 1597.

The main object of this paper is to illustrate the
selective total reflection which takes place at the boundary
of a medium of the above constitution. The case where
the periodic variation of properties is contznuous has been
discussed by Lord Rayleigh,* but the problem in this
form is very difficult, and it may therefore be worth while
to investigate in some detail the consequences of the
periodic structure in the more tractable circumstances
here considered. Inthe examples chosen for discussion the
medium is represented by a string supposed to be capable
of longitudinal vibrations, and the periodic interruption of
properties consists, in one case, of a series of equal
particles attached at equal intervals; in another, these
particles are (moreover) urged towards fixed positions by
elastic springs ; whilst in a third example they are sup-
posed to be connected to the string (not directly but)
through the intermediary of springs. It is further shown
how the methods can be extended to the case where equal
and similar dynamical systems, of any degree of com-
plexity, are inserted at regular intervals. Exactly the
same analysis applies when the intervening medium con-
sists of a tense string capable of transversal vibrations, and
to many other cases.

Experimental illustrations of the principles here

* Phil. Mag., Aug., 1887.

february 4th, 1898.

2 LAMB, Waves tn a Medium with Periodic Structure.

developed are afforded by some optical and acoustical
phenomena studied by Lord Rayleigh ;* but the results
have also an interest, on another scale, as bearing on
mechanical theories of reflection, refraction, &c. In parti-
cular, the usual assumption that the wave-length is great
compared with molecular intervals, is here dispensed with,
and we are able to trace tu some extent the fate of a train
of relatively short waves, or of an abrupt disturbance.
On the other hand, some caution must of course be
exercised in drawing inferences as to theories of radiation,
absorption, and the like, from the study of a one-
dimensional model.

1. Suppose we have a string of line-density o, loaded
at equal intervals @ with particles of mass 47. Taking
the axis of x along the string, and denoting by € the
displacement of any point of it, we have the equation

az are

Wo Te A . . 3 (1),
where

Ba Bip Oe

E being the coefficient of elasticity. If we assume that € .

varies as e”**, ze, we consider a simple-harmonic disturb-

ance whose wave-length on the unloaded string would be
27/, the equation (1) becomes

dé

we 5 Re =O : : ; ( By:

If we distinguish the values of & corresponding to.

successive particles 7 by suffixes, the solution of (3) for

the interval between the sth and (s+1)th particles is

obviously

E41 —-&,cos ka .
ae Sin Ba SIDA : (4),

&=£,cos kx +

* Phil. Mag., Sept., 1888, p. 256; Theory of Sound (2nd ed.), vol. ii.,
Dgtrs

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 3. 3

where the origin of x has been taken (temporarily) at the
undisturbed position of the sth particle. Similarly, in the
interval between the (s—1)th and sth particles, we have,
with the same origin,

Ecos ka — Ze

sin ka

Hence the tensions of the string on the two sides of the
sth particle are

z( =) - an nae Ecoska) . (6),

ai
AF) = aerial hi

E=£,cos kx + sin kx . (5).

and

ae COS ea =F a)e Ua),

respectively. The equation of motion of this particle is

therefore ;
- == Ss = hat —2f,coska+é,_j) . (8),
or, since é, o< e2kct,
E,.,— 2£,(cos ka—4ukasinka)+é,,;=0 . (9),
where
p= M/pa , : » “\ «(kO);

z.e. w denotes the ratio of the mass of one of the attached
particles to that of the portion of string constituting one
of the intervals.

The solution of the difference-equation (9) will assume
distinct forms according as the coefficient of 2&, does or
does not lie between the limits +1. In the former case
we put

coska-4pkasinka=cosé . eH):
and we may without loss of generality suppose that 0 lies
between oandz. This gives

See Oa. (x2),
or, expressing the time-factor,
E, = Aeiltet+ st) . peplhet — 58) ’ (13),

where A, & are independent of s.

4 LAMB, Waves in a Medium with Periodic Structure.

In the alternative case we put

_ coska — dua sin ka = + cosh u : (14),
where wz is real, and obtain i
pe A eihet + su 4: Bets : (15),
Or
B A ( a ee aie? 4 Bere pat (16),

according as we take the upper or the lower sign in (14).

The two types of disturbance represented by (13)
and (15) or (16) are essentially different in character.
Either term of (13) represents a disturbance whose
amplitude is the same at all parts of the medium, whilst
in the case of (15) or (16) the amplitude of either com-
ponent diminishes indefinitely as we advance in the
medium in one direction or the, other, In the enmes
case, the disturbance can be transmitted to any distance ;
in the latter case, this is not possible. A fuller discussion of
this question will be given presently (§ 2).

In the present problem (but not in all the variations of
it, see § 5), 6 will be real for values of £a falling below a
certain limit, and the disturbance will then be of the
type (13). Moreover, for very long waves, fa and 6 will
both be small, and we find, approximately,

O= (1+ p).ka ; : : (17):
The disturbance represented by either term of (13>
may now be described as a wave travelling in the negative
or positive direction of x If the wave-length (A) in the
loaded medium be 7z times the interval a, where m is a
large number, we have 70= 27, and therefore

h=2na/0=fa/0.X, . 9 2 ai eee

where A,=27/é. Hence, for the refractive index (/V) of
the medium, we have

N=, = (1 +p) (19),
as we should expect, since the effect of the loads is to

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 3. 5

increase the average density of the medium in the ratio
I+p. |

If we carry the approximation a stage further, we get
the dispersion-formula

7 1 Tt 7p? )
5 22252 — N72 ‘a sD eg
LV T+mt+ pha NV (s+ cone (20),

where /V.. denotes the refractive index for infinite wave-
length, as given by (19).

2. We proceed to apply the preceding formule to
the case of reflection. We will suppose that the string to
the left of the origin is unloaded, and that from the origin
onwards masses JZ are attached at equal intervals a, as
before’*

An incident wave

cr aN, mel (21),
in the unloaded portion may be regarded as giving rise to
a reflected wave

pee ce : : (22),
and to a certain disturbance in the loaded medium. When
6 is real, and sin ka positive, this latter disturbance may
be represented by | ar

a TE ENS : : (22)\e;
and it is proposed to determine the coefficients of reflection
and transmission (A and £).

We will suppose that at the origin we have s=o. The

kinematical condition to be satisfied at this point is
1t+d4=B. : : (24).
The tension of the string immediately to the right of the
particle s=o is
AE

sin Fa i ade

* The case of sound-waves incident on a series of equidistant perforated
screens, as in the experiment described in Lord Kayleigh’s Sound, § 343, is
mathematically equivalent.

6 LAMB; Waves in a Medium with Periodic Structure.

and that of the string immediately to the left is
(—1+ ARE
Hence the dynamical equation is

(AES a (a

OPT Sag Elli 008 ha) + thE (a — Ayeitet. (25),

or, |
(1 — Aygitet = EEA shat, ae haan
Substituting the values of &,, & from (23), this becomes
; i,
; Py = pha sin ka —€
zsin ka
20
e — cos ka
sire ae : . . : (2m);
where a reduction has been effected by means of (11).
Solving (24) and (27) for A and B, we find

; (2 a)
, | sin- QL =
etka aye 5 iba

A= NE a ; (28).
CA se sin2( a oh a)
in & 1;
B=1+A= ett =O) to eaten
sina( ha + )

The amplitude of the reflected wave is therefore
sins(ke - 0)
eats Miata ds

oe!
sin-— (4a + 0)
2

and that of the disturbance transmitted to the particles
M is

(30),

sin ka |
sin (Aa +0) | fied a he ean (31).

For sufficiently long waves, Za and @ are small, and
6=WVka, where JV is the refractive index ; the expressions
(30) and (31) then take the forms
N-1 2
Niet OE es

fa

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No.3. 7

Some caution is necessary in the application of the
above results. When @ ceases to be very small, the
disturbance in the loaded medium is no longer of the
simple character which we are accustomed to associate
with the term “wave-motion,” and it becomes necessary
to consider which of the terms in (13) is to be taken to
represent a disturbance progressing in the direction of
x-positive. Inits present form the problem of this § is
indeed, strictly speaking, indeterminate. A more definite
form may be given to it if we introduce a very small
frictional force, acting on each of the particles J, and pro-
portional to the first power of the velocity. It then appears
that the foregoing solution applies when sin £a is positive,
but that when sin Za is negative, the disturbance in the
loaded medium must be represented by

2B pilkct + 59) , 4 (32),
in place of (23).t The amplitude of the reflected wave is
then obtained by reversing the sign of 6 in (30).

When 0 is imaginary, the formula (23) must be re-

placed by

Be Beh — SU ; (33 )
or

[| A a RT
according as the upper or lower sign obtains in (14). The
analytical work is the same as before with the substitution
Of ~ or u—?zm for 20, and the results can therefore be
written down at once. Thus, we find, in the former case,

_ @@—e& _ __(e*—cos ka) —Zsin ka ~ 26
gem ~(eoska)tisinka °° (35)
where
sin ka
é” — cos ka (36)

t It appears unnecessary to go into the proof of these statements, as the
more general investigation of the next § is free from the difficulty here
indicated.

= tan

8 Lams, Waves in a Medium with Periodic Structure.

It appears that the amplitude of the reflected wave is now
equal to that of the incident wave. This might have
been anticipated from considerations of energy, since (33)
shews that for sufficiently large values of s the disturbance
to the right of the origin is insensible. The same result
will hold, of course, when 26 is replaced by “—2z7.

3. The next application of our formule is suggested
by the optical problem: to determine the intensities of
the light reflected and transmitted respectively by a late.
We will suppose that to the left of the origin the string is
unloaded, that a series of masses / are attached at the
points : | | |

—. B=O0, A, 20, 3a, ..-c00, 20,
and that to the right of the last-named point the string is
again unloaded.

It may be sufficient to indicate the leading steps of

the calculation. For x<o, the disturbance may be
regarded as made up of an incident wave
ge ehlt— x) i ; f (37),
and a reflected wave
Peete) , » “4S
as before. For x>ma, we have a transmitted wave
: RS a |). eae

The formulz applicable to the loaded portion of the
string will depend on the value of 4a. If the value of 0
defined by (11) be real, we have

foi Ge i) 4 Detl*et+ 59) 4 (40),
The kinematical conditions to be satisfied at r=o and —
“+=na are, respectively,
1+A4=C+D . ; (41),
and ° | | :
Poe inka 2 Gem 2728 i De (42).

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 3. 9

The dynamical equations, analogous to (26), are found to

give
20 —20
Bale pos gee — cos ka e —cos ka
zsin ka zsin ka (43);
and |
— 70 0 2
Be inka. _ Cnn c = cos ha _ 7,ind e’* — cos ka (44)
zsin ka z sin 2a :

From (41) and (43) we obtain
Be as an") = e7simza > (45),
ere + De *) — of Asin ha oy:

Again, from (42) and (44) we find
0 Lika

—ind & —@ —inka
ee ~ 27sin@ fe - (47);
Si ee ue
De” — aaa PT ae pies
22 sin 0 ee : - (48).

The last four equations may also be written

Cehtlt 4a) sin-(0 + ka) — De~ EA sin(0 — ka) = sin ka (49), |
+f. ioe ae : |
os CHO sin 6 — ka) + De Beira sin-(0 + ka)= A sinka (50)

sin (0 + ka)
= —____—-B

Z(2+4)(9— ha)
Suey oe (51), .
ck
sin—(6 — a) }
ta 2 Be ~ta+4)(8+ ha) ; (52).

sin 0
Substituting from (51) and (52) in (49), we find

sin? =(0 + ha) e+” — sin® Ne aye Hn +1)

sin @ sin hae” +142

~ sin 0 sin 2a cos(z + 1) + z(1 —cos 0 cos £a)sin (7 + 1)0 (53)

10 LAMB, Waves tn a Medium with Periodic Structure.

The intensity (/) of the transmitted waves, that of
the incident waves being taken as unity, is given by the
square of the modulus of this expression, and is therefore

pane: , sin? @ sin? Za ee fen
sin? 6 sin? £a cos? (z + 1)6 + (1 — cos 6 cos £a)* sin? (z + 1)0

Again, from (50), (51), (52) we find

— 2#sin — (0 + 2a) sin =(6 — ka) sin (7 + 1)0
7 ea 2 2 Beninka
sin 0 sin 4a

= z(cos 6 — cos ka) sin (z we 1)0 eika
sin 0 sin £a cos (7 + 1)6 + 2(1 — cos 0 cos 2a) sin(z + 1)0

(55):

The intensity (/‘) of the reflected waves is therefore
given by
l= (cos 6 — cos fa)? sin? (7 + 1)0 6
~ sin? @ sin? ka cos? (z + 1)0 + (1 — cos @ cos 2a)? sin? (z + 1)0 (55):
It is easily verified that
I+Il'=1 ; 4 5 (57);

as should obviously be the case, since there is no dissipa-
tion of energy in our medium.

When the number (z+1) of particles in the loaded
portion of the string is considerable, a very slight variation
in the value of #a (and consequently of 0) will cause
great fluctuations in the values of cos(#~+1)@ and
sin(z-+1)60, and thence in the values of J and J. The
mean value (/) of the former expression, for wave-lengths
in the neighbourhood of 27/2, is easily calculated* from
the formula

4a

2f do I
x a? cos? ¢ + 6? sin af ; ; (58).

(0)

Thus

sin @sin £a
I —cos 6 cos ka

NI

(59),

* Cf. Kirchhoff, Opt, p. 165.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No.3. 11

and the mean value of 7’ is then .
T=1-f : : . (60):
We may notice that if g denote the coefficient of reflection,
as given by formula (30) of § 2, we have
iepatg _ 2g?
Tae: ar g

(61),

in accordance with known optical results.
So far, we have supposed @ to be real. When 4 is
imaginary, the formula (40) must be replaced by
i= Coke —su+ Detkct+su : (62),
or by
a Cei(Rett sm) — sue py tlket+ sx) + su : (63),

according as the upper or the lower sign is taken in (14).
The rest of the notation being as above, we find in the

case of (62)
a sinh w sin ka e+ Tha
~ sinh w sin £a cosh (# + 1) + 7(1 — coshwcosa) sinh (x + 1)z

(64),

i(cosh 2. cos Ra) sinh (n + 1)u ec”

~ sinh w sin Aa cosh (m + 1)u+2(1 —coshz cos fa) sinh (7 + 1)

(65),
these results being obtained at once from (53) and (55) by
writing @= —zu. When zz is great, we may put

cosh (7 + 1)¢=sinh (z+ 1)¢“=co,
which gives
E :
mee ut z(cosh # — cos ka) etka (66).

~ sinh w sin a + 2(1 — cosh z coska)

The modulus of the latter expression, which is, moreover,
easily indentified with (35), is unity. The incident wave
is now reflected with unchanged amplitude, and there
is no transmitted wave.

4. It remains to examine for what ranges of ka the
incident wave in the problem of § 2 is partially transmitted,
or wholly reflected, respectively. For this purpose we

12 LAMB, Waves in a Medium with Pertodic Structure.

require to know the critical values of a, viz., those which

make
coska—dukasnka=+1 ..-. (67).
This equation requires that either :
sin ka =o : é : (68),
or 1 |
cot ¢4za=h4yhka ; (69),
or
tan tha = —4pka dete (70).

The roots of (69) and (70) are easily constructed
graphically by means of the intersections of the curves

J=Co sa, y— tan ee : (71),
(where += 2a) with the straight line
walgpe. ws: iaqy ae gaainiae:
The positive roots of (68) are given by
RO 0, im, 27.) meee
We will denote the positive roots of (69) by
RG =a, Gian! Gayecs.c0. .

and those of (70) by

ot) (ROE (Gh (Cresson

It appears on reference to the figure that the positive
roots of (67), when arranged in ascending order of
magnitude, are given by the first line of the following
scheme :

Neo

RA =0, ay, 7, (1, 27, Ag, 37, Bo, ciel (73)

O = 0, a, mm, GC, O,)) me iy nO) se : d
open on pei

and it is easily ascertained that the equation in question
has no multiple roots. Hence each of the roots in (73)
marks a transition from partial transmission to total —
reflection, or vzce versd. The upper brackets indicate the
ranges of £a for which there is partial transmission, and
the lower ones mark the intervals of total reflection.

If the masses J7 be increased, the straight line

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898). No. 3. 13

y=4,x becomes steeper,and the intervals of total reflection,

which are indicated by the heavier portions of the axis
of xin the figure, widen out at the expense of those of
partial transmission.

In interpreting these results we must remember that
the quantity £2 is inversely proportional to the wave-length,
and therefore directly proportional to the eros
of the incident vibrations.

Toestimate the maximum amplitude of the transmitted
waves, in any interval of partial transmission, we remark
that the value of @ in any such interval ranges between
the limits o and z. If we put. 6=47, the formula (59) of

§ 3 gives

T= | sin a | La)
Also, putting 0=47 in (11), we have
2
ie Ca

Hence, near the centres of the intervals of higher order

we have
ka =sr +e,

where e« is small, and

I= €,
approximately. We infer that in the successive intervals
of partial transmission the amplitude of the transmitted

14 Lamps, Waves in a Medium with Periodic Structure.

vibrations becomes Icss and less. Moreover, it is easily
seen that this tendency is more marked, the greater the
value of pu.

5. As a first variation of the problem stated in § 1 we
will suppose that each of the masses JZ, in addition to the
forces which it experiences from the string on the two
sides of it, is urged towards its mean position by means of
a spring.

The equation of motion of the sth particle is then of
the form
di, hE
oe at? sinka

(E..3 a De COS ka F E.1) oe Mo, 3 (76)

or since & oc eet,
pow i h I h a2 i.) ae a
41 — 26,4 COS ka — a ( a-—z--7,)8n a} + =O (77):
The constant o here denotes the ‘speed’ of the oscillation
when JZ vibrates under the influence of the spring alone.
The expression whose value determines the character
of the motion is now

I HEA TON
cos ka — wa ka Mica i) sinka . : (78).
If this lie between the limits +1 we have in the problem
of § 2 a partial transmission ; in the opposite case a total
reflection. }
The limiting value of (78) for Za=0 is

1 + dy0°a?/c,
and therefore greater than unity. It follows that for
frequencies below a certain limit, or for lengths of the
incident waves exceeding a certain limit, we shall have
total reflection. The fact that in a medium of the kind

here considered there is an wffer limit to the length of
waves which can be transmitted is very remarkable.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 3. 15

The critical values of a are determined by the

equation
cos ka fu Aa -— i) si ha= 1 (79)
a os as 2 "ha sin = OF . 79): :
This requires either that
sin ka=o : Sy nla);
or that
I ara? I
tan il de = du( Aa = ae x) . : (81),
or that
I aa? I
cot Pace = 3y( 4a uae =) en (a2)e

The positive roots of (81) and (82) are determined
graphically by the intersection of the curves

y= tan 4x, y =cot4x . . (33),
with the hyperbola
: 272
y= du(x- ph >) + Sheena

We have now total reflection throughout the range
extending from £a=o to ka=£,, where 23, is the lowest
positive root of (81). For large values of x the hyperbola
(84) approaches the asymptote y=4yr, and the critical
values of £a approximate to those determined in § 4.
It will be noted that no special peculiarity attaches

16 LAMB, Waves in a Medium with Periodic Structure.

to the case of 4a=oa/c, which occurs always in an interval
of partial transmission.

6. An instructive contrast to the state of things con-
sidered in §5 is obtained if we suppose the masses MZ to
have an elastic connection with the vibrating string. In
the annexed illustration, each of the circles is meant to
represent a light rigid frame, attached to the string at

opposite ends of a diameter, and carrying a particle 7
connected with it by springs.

a 7

Some addition to our previous notation is now required.
We will denote by &, the displacement of the point of
the string to which one of the masses is attached, and by
€, that of the corresponding particle. We have then

ai,
MF + Moré, = E,) =0 - - (85),
whilst, from the equilibrium of tensions,
sin katt — E,coska) — sin bat" cos ka —&,_1) + Mo(é,' — &,) =0 (86)

Assuming that & o< e***, and eliminating &,’, we find
1
3

pha
Ce 28,( cos ka — 7 Pele sin ka) +&1=0 (87).

For sufficiently small values of 4a we now have trans-
mission, as in § 2. The critical values of 2a are given by

duk
cos ka — 7 Bare sin ka= +1 : (88).

This is satisfied by sinka=o, and the remaining roots are
determined by the intersection of the curves (83) with the
curve

This has an asymptote parallel to y for x=ca/c, or
Gave

Ne t
pe eee ; (89).

Manchester Memozrs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No.3. 17

eeoee= ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ww we ee

we eww we eee eee =

It appears that waves whose length (A,) exceeds a
certain limit (<<2@) are partially transmitted. Moreover,
for sufficiently long waves we find

| N= f(t +p) i : “i “(e)
exactly asin§1. As the wave-length is diminished we
get a series of alternate intervals of total reflection and
partial transmission, respectively. But the intervals of
partial transmission become wider and wider as we pro-
ceed, so that our medium is transparent for relatively
short waves, except when the wave-length falls a little short
of an aliquot part of 2a. Moreover, in the middle of any
one of these intervals, of high order, we have 6=4m and
sin a= +1, approximately.* It follows from (59) that the
coefficient of transmission is then nearly equal to unity.

We have here perhaps‘an illustration of the theory of
refraction sketched by Sir George Stokes in the Wilde
lecturet+ At all events,-we have constructed a one-

* The angle 9 is now defined by the equation
Luka
ier 1 —h2¢?/¢?
‘In the investigations of §§ 2, 3 we have only to write «/ { I— h2c2/a? } for «
throughout. The results, such as (30), (31), and (59), from which »# has

been eliminated, will remain unaltered.

cos ka— sin a=cos 6.

+ Manchester Memoirs, vol. xii. (1897), No. 15.

18 LAMB, Waves in a Medium with Periodic Structure.

dimensional medium which for sufficiently long waves has
a definite index of refraction, with coefficients of reflection
and transmission related to this index in the usual manner ;
which (again) totally reflects radiations of wave-lengths
lying between certain limits ; whilst for sufficiently short
waves there is, as a rule, free transmission, with practi-
_cally no reflection.

7. The above examples have been chosen for simplicity,
but there is no difficulty in extending the method to the
case where dynamical systems of any degree of com-
plexity, but all exactly alike, are interpolated at regular
intervals.

We may suppose that the position and configuration of
any one of these systems is determined by means of the
coordinate (€) of the point of the string where it is
attached, and by means of z other coordinates q1, go, .«. Jn
There is no loss of generality in supposing these latter
coordinates to be so chosen that the expressions for the
kinetic and potential energies reduce to the forms

2T = angry + doggy? +... F Ang? + 2(a191 + AoGg +... tang,)E + P2

AS (Oh)

and
2V = big? + bogs? +... + Ongn? + 2(Prgi + Boge + --» + ng, JE + OF?
--.(92),

respectively. Lagrange’s method then gives equations
Ofthe) type

a,4), + b,g,.+ tes Ge=e A + (92am
together with

PEt Oe Slag seek) ean

where X is the extraneous force corresponding to the
coordinate &, viz., the difference of tensions on the two
sides of the interruption. If we assume that all our
functions vary as e”, we have, from (93),

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No.3. 19
Rca, — By.
oer Teh.” - (95);
and thence, from (94),

| wap-Q-3,See FT | SLi hs G6)

" ke?a, — 6,

We have a formula of this type for each interpolated
system. Distinguishing the successive systems by suffixes,
we have, from (6) and (7),

kE
Sniatert! = 2é.coska + Es) 3) : (97),

and therefore

E.11—2{coska—/f(k)sinka}é,+&1=0 . (98),
where

(ke? Te ee
F(h)= ap HeP- o2s = Sey (99).

The difference-equation (98) is to be solved as before.
The critical values of 2 are determined by

coska—f(k)smka=+1. 2 (Eco)

and are therefore given graphically by the intersections of
the curves
y=cotgx, y=-tangv . TAKEO)
with the curve
D=f (x/2) : ; . (ree).
The latter curve has asymptotes parallel to y correspon-
ding to
w—()./4-\,. [A= 1, 20-278] : ie aio)»

It is not difficult to establish that these special values of
& will occur always in intervals of total reflection.

It may be shewn also that the terminal conditions, in
the problems of §§ 2, 3, reduce to the forms given in
equations (24), (27), and (41)...(44), and thence that the
expressions obtained in § 3 for the coefficients of reflection
and transmission in terms of £a and @are perfectly general.

20 LAMB, Waves in a Medium with Periodic Structure.

The problem may be still further generalized by
imagining each interpolated system to have two distinct
points of attachment, on opposite sides, to the interrupted |
string. The simplest example of this kind is where each
system consists of two equal masses connected by a spring.

A dynamically equivalent problem is that of the propaga-
tion of sound-waves along a tube having a series of equi-
distant bulbous expansions. The difference-equation is

eo Skah wi
STR ee

found, on examination, to be of the same general type
(98) as before.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliv. (1898), lVo. 4

IV. Further investigations into the Molluscan Fauna
of the Arabian Sea, Persian Gulf, and Gulf of ee
with descriptions of Forty species.

(Mostly dredged by F. W. Townsend, Esq.)
By JAMES CosMoO MELVILL, M.A., F.L.S.

Recetved and read December rath, 1597.

Referring to my first paper* on this subject, read
exactly a year ago (December, 1896), before this Society,
I had the pleasure of meeting Mr. Townsend in London
last summer, and of examining carefully with him
the whole of the material collected by him during the past
four years. He has now returned to India, and is
coatemplating, if possible, seeking fresh areas for research
and for dredging purposes, and hopes to be able to sound
depths exceeding those compassed by him in former
expeditions. His last best results came from the Bahrein
Islands, and the southern shores and inlets of the Persian
Gulf. From the neighbourhood of Bushire to the north,
and especially from the two islands Kais (or Gais) and
Sheikh Shuaib, some very prolific material was dredged.

The principal novelties are, a most exquisite Ostvea,
perhaps. the most delicately beautiful of the genus yet
discovered, a handsome 7Zyvochus, allied to 7. radzatus,
two new cones, one of these, C. saecularis, we trust to
receive live examples of, and augur that, in perfect condi-
tion, it will hardly yield the palm for perfection of form
and graceful outline to any other species. Another Yoldza
has occurred, a wonderfully pure crystalline shell, a Drzla

* Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xli., No. 7, 1897.

May 17th, 1898.

2 MELVILL, Molluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, ete.

(D. resplendens) unique for fine polish and_ brilliant
colouring, two Bulle, one (L. ceroplasta) peculiar and
unusual in form, a pretty Scalaria (S. malcolmenszs) from
Malcolm Inlet, on the S. of the Persian Gulf, and Fusus
avabicus, a dwarf species of typical form and character,
from Muscat, where also occurred the striking I/7ytilecardia
Ffinchi, which, at the request of Mr. Townsend, we have
named after Mr. B. T. Finch, C.1.E., chief of the state
the Indo-Oceanic Telegraph Service. Two more examples,
also, of the beautiful Scalaria fimbriolata Melv., having
occurred off Muscat, the largest (a remarkably perfect
example measuring 52 mm. in length, and well preserving
the salient characters of the original description, by which
it was differentiated from S. decussata Kien) is here figured
(Pl. 1, f. 12). But, of all the forms, a new Szvombus is
perhaps the most unlooked for. It is now very many
years since any additions were made to this genus, and
monographers have considered it complete. The species,
therefore, for which I propose the name Jdelutschzenszs,
dredged off Charbar, on the coast of Beluchistan, is there-
fore exceedingly noteworthy. It only came to hand during
the preparation of the present paper, and may be regarded
as the first fruits of Mr. Townsend’s fresh dredging expe-
dition (1898).

I have also included in the present paper certain new
species dredged by Captain Tindall, of the S.S. “ Patrick
' Stewart,” either on the Angrias Bank, W. of Bombay,
at Quilon, on the Malabar Coast, or near Batticaloa and
Hambangtotte, E. and S. Ceylon respectively. From the
two former, especially, came some good results, eg.,
Ancilla Tindall, a distinct addition to a circumscribed
genus, Marginella quzlonica, an elegantly banded shell,
and Calliostoma duricastellum, this last dredged abun-
dantly at Batticaloa. One example of the true Scalaria
decussata Kien, was also dredged off the Angrias Bank.

Manchester Memozrs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 4, 3

I am indebted, too, to Mr. G. B. Sowerby for letting
me inspect a few Mollusca collected on the Mekran Coast
and in the neighbourhood of Karachi by Mr. J. O. Twells,
one of which, a toothless VVerzta, seems undescribed.

iia heretofore, to Mr. Ernest R. Sykes, Mr. E. A.
Smith, and especially Mr. Hugh Fulton, very best
acknowledgments are due. The latter has much aided me
with close examination of critical forms. Mr. Robert
Standen has also been most kind in his help, and I am
much obliged to him.

It will not, I think, be amiss here to print in extenso
a short account of Mr. Townsend’s collecting grounds,
supplied to me by him, and given in his own words, as
follows:

“The extent of the Mekran Coast does not seem to
be generally realized, comprising, as it does, over 500 miles
of coast in a direct E. and W. line, Karachi being at the
Eastern, and Jask at the Western extremity. It naturally
follows that only a very few spots have been exploited,
and, with the exception of Karachi, it cannot be said that
even now any one place has been thoroughly worked out.
Karachi offers a fairly rich field to the collector, consider-
ing its limited area, both as regards littoral and dredged
species, the number already named and classified being
about 750, and there are still many unidentified species,
which do not appear in the list, and which are now being
gradually worked out.

“The extensive mud flats of the Karachi Harbour
backwater have not, so far, yielded many varieties, but
this may be due to the fact that they have been but
slightly investigated. The mud is mostly of a very soft
nature, and the labour entailed by walking even a short
distance is very great, and to that may be added the risk
of contracting malarial fever by stirring up noxious gases.
The reefs to the west of the harbour are composed of

4. MELVILL, Molluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, etc.

sandstone, in which several kinds of borers are common,
and, though not nearly as rich in results as might be
expected from their situation and appearance, yet some
of the species found there are exceptionally fine. For
instance, Cyprea lentiginosa, C. pallida, C. turdus. The
loose ‘stones of the training groin inside the harbour
furnish very similar species, but they are not, as a rule,
so fine in colour or size as those found on the reef. This
may be due to the fact that the stones forming the groin
are in a more or less muddy and dirty state, whilst the reef
is free from mud and deposit from the harbour.

“The sandy beach, which extends for miles, is even less
productive than the rocks, the few species found there
being common and uninteresting. As will be seen,
whenever the list we are contemplating is published, the
majority of the Karachi species have been obtained by
dredging. The most profitable ground for this kind of
work is a mixture of sand and mud with loose stones, in
the immediate vicinity of rocky patches or reefs. Different
kinds of softish mud also yield good results, but not
without much labour, as the dredge fills quickly, and so
the contents take some time to sift. There is a good deal
of shingle about Karachi, the worst of all bottoms, as the
dredge is filled at once with stuff that cannot be sifted,
and is seldom worth careful examination.

“Before passing from Karachi, it may be worth noting
the manner in which the fishermen obtain quantities of
Solen corneus, which they use for bait for certain kinds of ©
fish. A pointed stick about two feet long is introduced
into one of the holes with which the mud flats abound, and,
should an obstruction be felt, is quickly withdrawn and a
pinch of common salt dropped into the hole. The stick
is then re-inserted, and twirled rapidly and lightly between
the palms of the hands until an upward movement is felt
and the fish appears, more than half the shell sometimes
protruding above the surface of the mud.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 4. 5

“Placuna placenta, which seems to be common both on
the Mekran Coast and in the Persian Gulf, is preserved at
Karachi and in the neighbourhood, and is a source of
revenue to the Indian Government, the right to collect
them for the pearls they may contain being sold every few
years. No edible bivalves are collected at Karachi for the
market, as at Bombay.

“West of Karachi, almost all the species given in the
list have been dredged in depths varying from 5 to 60
fathoms, soft mud, muddy sand, and hard clayey mud
being the kind of bottom usually met with. A few
isolated patches of soft muddy sand, with loose stones,
have been found at a depth of about 7 fathoms, and these
are always profitable to dredge over—whilst, on the other
hand, the hard clayey mud is not only utterly unprofitable
as regards living specimens, but is very troublesome in
choking the dredge.

“The chief features of the Mekran Coast vary very
little—high, rugged hills, both in the fore and back
ground, with occasional valleys, the whole presenting as
barren and desolate an appearance as it is possible to
imagine. The whole of this coast has undoubtedly formed
part of the sea bottom at some prehistoric age, as the
highest hills are covered with a layer of hard stony
substance, which has originally been mud, and in which are
found quantities of shells in a more or less fossilized state.
On the Gwadur Headland, 480 feet above sea level, large
specimens of Hburna Molliana in an almost perfect state
have been found, the colouring in one instance being almost
as fresh as that of a living specimen. Large numbers cf
single valves of Pecten Townsendi have also been found in
the same place in an equally good condition, in fact the
whole of the Mekran Coast and Persian Gulf offers a
rich field to geologists. Several of the rocky reefs
between high and low watermark, and the long stretches

6 MELVILL, Wolluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, ete.

of sandy beach which are exposed to the full force of the
S.W. monsoon, have been examined, but they are usually
as devoid of shells as the surrounding country is of
vegetation; it is only in sheltered nooks that anything like
success has rewarded the most diligent search. The coast
line of the Persian Gulf is about three times the length of
Mekran Coast, and has been even less explored. Oppor-
tunities of landing at any but the regular ports of call are
few, although more dredging has been done in the Gulf;
it is again only in the sheltered corners that any spoils
can be obtained. One live coral reef, at Bahrein, was
examined at low water, but yielded nothing beyond Murex
spinosus and Turbo radiatus, both common species.

“The bed of the Gulf is chiefly composed of blue mud,
at a depth of from 4o to 50 fathoms, decreasing, as the
head of the Gulf is reached, to 30 and 20 fathoms.
Although live specimens are seldom met with, the mud
contains large quantities of dead shells, and these, it may
be presumed, in a living state, inhabit the rocky patches
and coral which abound in all parts, becoming scattered by
the action of currents, hermit crabs, etc. The best results, in
dredging, have been achieved round the various islands in
from 7 to 12 fathoms; the bottom, in these localities, is
mainly composed of coral, live and dead, sand and weeds ;
the little mud there is being mixed with sand and loose
stones.

“ One interesting fact has been observed in the Persian
Gulf, and in a less degree on the Mekran Coast. The |
submarine telegraph cable belonging to the Indian
Government (from Karachi to Jask a single line, from
Jask to Bushire two lines), lies principally upon the mud,
in about 45 fathoms. Upon raising the cable for repairs,
in any part, it is generally found to be covered with shell
growth, varying in quantity and thickness according to the
length of time the cable has remained undisturbed.

Manchester Memozrs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 4. 7

Strange to say, however, nothing living can be dredged
‘near it, therefore could the cable be seen at the bottom of
the sea it would present the appearance of a long line of
oysters and other shell growth interspersed with weeds,
passing over a vast field of mud.

“The dredge used in making the collection is of wire
netting, the bag having an iron mouth, for boat use; the
mouth would be 2ft. x 6in. made of flat iron (2in. x YWin.),
the top and bottom being flattened out and made sharp,
the wire net bag about 2ft. deep, with Yin. mesh. The
rope for towing is attached to a chain bridle, made fast to
to the four corners of the frame.”

LEUCOTINA GRATIOSA, sp. zov.
CPiy 2. itis.)

L. testa attenuato-fustformi, albtda, ochraceotincta,
Aelicata, tenut, anfractibus octo, ventricosulis, undique
spivaliter arcté punctato-sulculosis, apertura oblonga, labro
simplicr, margine columellart tntus uniplicato.

Long. 13°50, lat. 4 mm.

Hab. Malcolm Inlet, Persian Gulf, 10-12 fathoms.

A whitish shell, tinged with pale ochreous; attenuately
fusiform, eight-whorled, whorls somewhat swollen, spirally
closely punctate, the punctuations stained with pale
ochre, mouth oblong, lip simple, columella internally
once-plaited.

A very graceful shell, and evidently a Leucotzna,
though at one time we had fancied it came nearer
Acteopyramzs. Much confusion exists at present as to
the limitation of these two genera, and no solution will be
_ found to this difficulty till the animal is studied, when,
naturally, the wide distinction between the opistho-
branchiate Actg@onid@ as compared with the Pyramidellide,
will be seen at once. Conchologically, the chief distinc-
tion seems to be in Lewcotina, the uniform punctate

8 MELVILL, Wolluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, etc.

- sulcation, and the columellar plait. The sulcations in such

species as Monoptygma fulva, and Myonta concinna now

relegated to Actgopyramis, are simple, and non-puncturate.
(eratiosus, benign.)

TORNATINA TOWNSENDI, sf. xov.
(Piaite:)

T. testa cylindracea, delicata, papyracea, albida, vel
pallidé straminea, omnind levi, parum nitente, anfractibus
guatuor, apud suturas canaliculatis, apicale mammillato,
uitreo, ultimo magnoperé ceteros superante, lateribus rectis,
apertura oblonga, apud basim latiore, labro recto, tenuz,
stmp lect.

Long. 3°50, lat. 1°50 mm. ,

fTab. Karachi.

Cylindrical, papyraceous, thin, with straight sides, four
whorled, including the glassy nipple-shaped apical, the
shell being entirely smooth, though hardly shining, deeply
channelled at the sutures, the last whorl ten times exceed-
ing the size of the ‘others put together \ Dredaed
abundantly near Karachi; we have seen quite a hundred
specimens. It is “allied to Vy juszjovmes AS Ae irem
Japan, also to 7. J/sselz Pilsbry (=pygmea Issel), which
occurs with it, but not plentifully..

TEREBRA EDGARII, sf. nov.
CPS 2 tees)

I. testa attenuata, angusta, solidiuscula, cinereofusca,
haud nitente, anfractibus tredecim quorum apicali leve,
subvuitreo, ceteris apud suturas impressis, paullulum
gradatulis, spivaliter zona suturald succinctis, undique longi-
tudinaliter et trregulariter costulatis, costis rudzbus, levibus,
enterstetits planis, cinerets, ultimo anfractu dorsaliter
transversim infra medium albizonato, apertura squarrosé

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lit, (1898), No. 4. 9

ovata, intus fusca, spiraliter albizonata, labro simplict, colu-
mella fusca, niteda.

Long. 19, lat 4550 mm., sé. a7.

Hab. Karachi.

A few specimens of an attenuate, solid, dull grey
Terebra, with fuscous rudely sculptured ribs, which are
smooth and slightly shining, relieving (at all events in the
larger examples before us) the dull unicolorous interstices.
The sutured band is broad and well defined, the whorls
thirteen, inclusive of the glassy apical whorl, the last has
dorsally a whitish spiral zone encircling it, which appears
reflected inside the mouth. The outer lip is simple,
columella shining, fuscous. We dedicate this species to
Mr. Edgar Smith, who has done more of late years than
any other author to elucidate the genus, He considers it
near 7. pretexta Conr. and 7: evoluta Desh., this latter by
some being considered a variety of the large 7. Dussumueriz
Kien. Mr. Hugh Fulton has also taken much trouble in
the differentiation of this species, also considering it near
evoluta, and for his care I am much indebted.

CONUS (LEPTOCONUS) DICTATOR sf. nov.
CEii Is. f ke.)

C. testa fusiformz, oblonga, spira multum elevata, apice
acutissimo, anfractibus duodecim, apicalibus levibus, feré
pellucidis, ceteris gradatulis, albidis, arcté brunneosparsts et
maculatis, ultimo anfractu apud peripheriam acutangularz,
lateribus rectis, parum nitente, undique transversim sulcato,
sulculis arcté puncturatis, omni superficie brunneosparsa,
flammulata, vel ( precipud apud medium) maculata, apertura
angusta, labro tenut, stmplict, recto, bast paullum recurva.

Long. 47, lat. 20 mm.

Hab. Sheikh Shuaib Island, Persian Gulf, 10 fathoms
in coral sand.

The nearest allies to this cone are C. tornatus Brod.,

10 MELVILL, Wolluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, etc.

(wrongly joined to zuterruptus Brod. (Xzmenes Gray), by
Tryon, both being natives of the west coast of Central
America), and C. plantliratus Sowb. This last has been
newly figured by Smith, it having been dredged in the
“Investigator” Expedition, off Calicut, west coast of
S. India, in 45 fathoms. (cf Ann. & Mag. N.FH. Series 6,
vol. xiv., p. 159, 1894.) Our shell is more elegantly
spindle-shaped, and the spiral grooves are less distant and
puncturate. C. dictator is fusiform, with elevated spire,
acute apical whorls, attenuate base, straight sides, angled
periphery, dull white colour, everywhere dotted and painted
with dark brown; these markings on the last whorl break
out into longitudinal brown flames, and there is another
suffusion of brown below the middle. This whorl is like-
wise transversely encircled with lined furrows, which are
closely puncturate. The mouth is narrow, outer lip simple.
One perfect specimen.

CONUS (LEPTOCONUS) SACULARIS, 5p. vov.
CR en; i s2 3)

C. testa gracilt, arcuato-Susiformt, spira elevata, apice
acutisstmo, anfractibus tredecim, arctis, gradatis, tribus
apicalibus pervitrets, levibus, ceteris infra suturas stramineo-
sparsis, pulchré cancellatis, et tornatis, ultimo anfractu
arcuato, stramineo, nitido, ad peripheriam acutangulart,
albo, rubrimaculato, infra hic illic, et precipué apud medium
albosparso et maculato, simul ac prope basim, basi multum
attenuata, undique transversim arctissimé sulculoso, sulcults
puncturatis, apertura angusta, labro simplice.

Long. spec. maz. 36, lat. 13 mm.

Loc. Malcolm Inlet, Persian Gulf, 24 fathoms mud.

One of the most gracefully beautiful’ of the genus.
Several individuals were discovered by Mr. Townsend at
the locality above cited, none, however, in live condition,
and only two (one especially) showing coloration and

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. liz. (1898), No. 4. II

markings to perfection. The shell is fusiform, arcuate,
much attenuate at the base, spire elevated, thirteen-
whorled, of which three are apical, glassy, smooth, the
rest beautifully turned and cancellated below the sutures,
the last whorl is acutely angled at the periphery, pale
straw in colour, flecked and lined with white at the
periphery, which is also decorated with a row of reddish
spots. At the median band, and likewise at the base, there
are also white blotches, and the whole surface of the last
whorl is closely transversely sulculose, the sulci being
dotted. All are unfortunately more or less broken at the
edge of the outer lip.

(saecularzs, in allusion to the “ annus saecularis,’ year
of Jubilee, 1897,in which this exquisite cone was discovered.)

PLEUROTOMA (DRILLIA) ANGRIASENSIS, sf. 70v.
(Qa Wet 38)

P. testa fustformt, solidiuscula, tev, nitida, anfractibus
decent, longitudinaliter costatis, costs in medium rugulosts, tn
ultimo feré evanidis, ultimo anfractu latiore, apud basim
subtruncato, apertura ovata, labro exteriore effuso, paullum
wmcrassato, sinu tnconspicuo.

Long. 20, lat. 7°50 mill. :

Hab. Angrias Bank, W. of Bombay (Capt. Tindall).

A white, smooth Drillia, with nodulous angled whorls,
and almost plain last whorl, lip effuse, base subtruncate.
This more resembles Drillia cygnea Melv. and Standen
from Lifu than any other species known to me.

PLEUROTOMA (DRILLIA) RESPLENDENS, sf. ov.
(Ply 25 fim.)
P. testa fustformi, solida, nitida, perlevi, ad apicem
mammillata, vitrea, anfractibus decem, incluso apicalt, ad
suturas compressis,rubro-struminets,longitudinaliter costatts,

12 MELVILL, Molluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, etc.

costes tncrassatis, perlevibus, pallidé straminets, interstiti1s
levissimes, rubrotinctis, ultimo anfractu apud basim paullum
truncato, ad medium longitudinaliter, sicut supra, costato,
enfra ad basim levisimo, albescente, apertura ovata, labro
encrassato, sinu suturalt profundo, excavato, dorsaliter lentter
bifasciato, margine columellaré recto.

Long. 19 mm, lat 5.

Hab. On the Oceanic cable, near the entrance to the
Persian Gulf.

A very shining, smooth, brightly-coloured Drzdiza, with
about ten whorls, the apical mammillate, vitreous, the rest
shining, ornamented with pale straw-coloured thickened
ribs on a smooth blood-red ground, the last whorl smooth
below the middle to the base, where it is almost white.
Above, the ribs are as in the upper whorls, the mouth is
oval, outer lip somewhat thickened, sutural sinus profound,
excavate, dorsally the outer lip is slightly bifasciate, the
columellar margin is straight.

A few specimens, all alike, save as to size.

CYTHARA HYPERCALLES, Sf. nov.
CPI iad 5.)

C. testa eleganter fusiformi, versus apicem attenuata,
gradatula, solidiuscula, anfractibus, inclusis duobus aptcalt-
bus, vitreis, decem, longttudinaltter costatis,costis inequalibus,
transversim spiraliter undique arctissimé striatis, stramineo-
ochracets, dorsaliter et precipue circa suturas brunneo-suffusis
vel maculatis, ultimo anfractu apud basim paullulum recurvo, -
apertura angusta, oblonga, labro extus incrassato, albo,
dorsaliter binis maculis brunneo-rufis decorato, intus simul ac
margine columellart, minuté denticulato.

Long. spec. max. 15, lat. 5 mm.

Ffub. Muscat in 20 fathoms ; sandy mud.

Six examples, but only three mature, of an elegantly
formed Cythara, fusiform, gradate, ten-whorled, two being

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. 4. Ine:

apical and glassy, the rest unequally longitudinally ribbed,

and spirally closely striated, pale straw colour, dorsally

marked with darker red-brown effusion, and often spotted

below the sutures. The lip is thickened, white, being within,

as on the columellar margin, minutely denticled. There

are two brown spots at the back of the outer lip.
(vreoxadAne, surpassingly beautiful).

CLATHURELLA FORAMINATA Reeve var: CAMACINA, ov.
CPi... £57 5.)

C. testa fusiformit brunneo-rufa, solidula, anfractibus
septem vel octo, quorum apicalé minimo, levi, brunneo-nigro,
ceterts arctisstmé et pulchré clathratis, apud suturas wm-
- pressts, ventricosults, clathris squarrosis junctura gemmulatts,
apertura ovata, aurzta, intus rufa, labro incrassato pulchré
crenulato, sinu lato, haud profundo, columella feré recta.

Long. 9, lat. 2°75 sp. may.

Hab. Karachi, and Linjah.

A very neat form, of the same alliance as C. violacea
Pease, or clandestina Desh. The three specimens before
us are alike in shape, two are dark-brown in colour, the
third a paler ochre yellow. The clathrations are beautifully
regular, and in a young specimen the point of junction
between the longitudinal and spiral lire is gemmuled
with shining small papillae. The whorls are seven or eight,
aperture acute, outer lip thickened, crenulated sinus wide,
but not cut deeply, columella nearly straight.

Although half as long again (9 as against 6 mm.) as
any of the typical foraminata Rve, that have been collected
at Karachi (Townsend), or Bombay (Blanford, Aber-
crombie, etc.) where it seems to be abundant, a closer
investigation convinces me it is not specifically distinct.
I have, nevertheless, drawn up a full description, and it
may be observed that a few points of distinction, in

14 MELVILL, Molluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, etc.

addition to that of size, occur. For instance, the canal is.
shorter, aperture wider, with the surface of the whorls
more coarsely, though equally evenly, clathrate.

(kauaé, a trellis. Lat. clathrus.)

LACHESIS BICOLOR, sf. ov.
Cela, isi)

L. testa fustformt, solidiuscula, versus apicem attenuata,
carneo-brunnea, ad utramque extremitatem albescente, an-
Jractibus fortasse octo—apicalibus ?—cateris longitudinaliter
frexuoso-costulatis, costis sptraliter arcté striatis, apertura
laté ovata, labro effuso, simplict, haud sinuigero,

Eonew7, laity 2 mim

Hab. Persian Gulf.

Several species of the small genus, Lacheszs, inhabit the
Mediterranean, one of them being British. One Japanese
species is recorded, and one from St. Paul I., South Indian
Ocean (L. Turquett Velain.). It is interesting, therefore,
to find another in the Persian Gulf, possessing the family
“facies,” but the outer lip more effuse than usual, the
colour pinkish-brown, whitening towards both extremities,
the shape fusiform, probably eight-whorled, but the apical
whorls are wanting in the specimen before us.

ANCILEA (iN DALEY 3757200)
CPL rls)

A. testa oblongo-fusiformi, apud apicem attenuata,
nitidissima, pallide stramineo-ochracea, anfractibus septem-
octo quorum tribus apicalebus, pellucido-vitreis, ceteris
transversim paullum infra suturas untsulcatis, interstited
castaneo-affusa, ultimo anfracta vix effuso, in medio cinna-
momeo-castaneo ochraceo, delicate sub lente lineolato, juxta
basim fasciola pallide castanea decorato, apertura ovato-

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), Wo. 4, is

oblonga, intus albida, labro extus vix effuso, margine columel-
lari paullum calloso, nitidiss¢mo.

Long. 17, lat 8 mm.

Hab. Angrias Bank, Lat. 16°50, long. 72. (Captain
Tindall). |

A very elegant, shining, cinnamon-coloured shell,
banded below the sutures and towards the base of the
last whorl with chestnut brown. Allied to A. margzinata,
but of different shape, and much smaller.

Ten specimens. We have pleasure in connecting with ©
this Azczlla the name of Captain Tindall, of the S.S.
“Patrick Stewart,” who, at the request of Mr. Townsend,
took a few soundings off the Angrias Bank, and some
other places on the Malabar Coast.

MARGINELLA (GLABELLA) QUILONICA, sf. nov.
EAs a

M. testa politissima, nitida, perlevt, ovata, spira pyram-
tdali, anfractibus quingue, ventricosulis, albocinereis, supra
suturas spiraliter rufozonatis, ultimo anfractu apud medium
et infra bizonato, apertura angusta, labro exteriore incrassato,
aloido, intus multidenticulato, margine columellari fortiter
guadriplicata.

Long. 8, lat. 4 mm.

Hab. Quilon, Malabar Coast, at 15 fathoms (Captain
Tindall). |

Four or five examples of a pretty shining polished
shell, having the same disposition of banding as the smaller
M. suavis (Souverbie), from New Caledonia. The whorls
are five, cinereous white, banded once, spirally, just above
the sutures, with a rufous-brown zone, the last whorl being
bizoned, below the lower zone the basal region is white,
shining, the aperture narrow, the outer lip thickened,
within denticled, columella strongly four-plaited.

16 MELVILL, Molluscan fauna of the Arabian Sea, ete.

We carefully compared the shell with the description
and figure of IZ. deformzs Nevill, from Ceylon, the marking
being similar, but form entirely different.

With a few other interesting Mollusca, this was
dredged by Captain Tindall, during a cruise of the
S.S. “ Patrick Stewart,” in 1896, off the Malabar Coast and
West of Ceylon. We may add that some of the specimens
were encrusted with a coral (eteropsammia sp.*)

MARGINELLA (PERSICULA) OODES, sp. ov.
(Pla, -f. 1,6.)

M. testa minuta, crasstuscula, perlevi, albida, nitida,
Spira omnind tmmersa, anfractu ultemo globoso, apertura
oblonga, angusta, labro percrasso, nitedo, levi, intus planato,
non denteculato, columella quadriplicata.

Long. 2) lat 1-25, mm:Gp, 7207.)

Tab. Bushire (Persian Gulf).

About a dozen examples of a little pure-white shining
Cyprea-like shell, globose, with spire wholly immersed,
the mouth narrow, oblong, the outer lip very thickened,
quite smooth and not denticulate within. Columella four-
plaited. From Issel’s description of his 7. pygmea, which
must be near this species, the colour is yellowish, and the
outer lip is denticulate within. From the figure we would
gather the mouth was narrower than in our species,
and the form more oblong than globose. Issel described
it from one example only, found in the Gulf of Suez, and
what purports to be it has also been once recorded from the :
Persian Gulf. It is very likely this nearly allied species.

(wwone, egg-shaped.)

FUSUS ARABICUS, sf. ov.
(Pia,
F. testa parva, attenuata, lanceolata, gracili, anfrac-
tzbus novem, duobus apicalibus brunneis omniné levibus,
* These were kindly examined by Prof. S. J. Hickson, F.R.S.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol xliz. (1898), No. 4. E7

ceteris ventricosults, apud suturas astrictis, longitudinaliter
costatis, penultimo et ultimo ad octo costis, votundatis,
incrassatis, sptraliter undique arcté costulatis, tnterstztis
spiralter granuloso-liratis, ultimo rectirostrato, canali longa,
apertura ovata, labro vix incrassato, intus spiraliter plicato,
columella septemplicata.

Long. 34, lat. Io50 mm. sfec. maz.

Hab. Muscat, Arabia, 15 fathoms mud and sand.

A small species, but one that has attained its full
erowth, being a typical /usus in form,attenuately lanceolate,
nine-whorled, two of them are apical, smooth, brown, the
rest constricted at the sutures, ventricose, longitudinally
thickly ribbed, ribs about eight on the two last whorls,
these ribs are spirally crossed by revolving riblets, or raised
lines, the interstices being granuloso-lirate, the colour is
cinnamon brown, slightly darker on the ribs, the mouth is
ovate, canal straight, prolonged, lip within plicately striate,
the columella is seven plaited, these plaits are the con-
tinuation of the spiral riblets.

Two species, similar, but one slightly smaller than the
other, say long. 32, lat. 9°50. Also three or four, in young
condition, have been subsequently (1898) procured from
the same locality.

BULLIA CEROPLASTA, Sf. nov.
CEL -2) £13")

BL. testa parva, fustformz, tenut, cerea, paullum nttente,
levissima, anfractibus septem, quorum duobus apicalibus,
perlevibus, mammiullatis, ceteris longitudinaliter costulatis,
costis vectzs, ultemo anfractu ceteros longitudine exequante,
costis infrd medium evanidis, ad basim sptraliter multe-sul-
catis, sulculis profundis, bast subtruncata, apertura ovata,
labro paullum effuso, parum incrassato.

Long. 12, lat. 4550 mm.

Hab. Mekran Coast.

18 MELVILL, Wolluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, etc.

A thin, waxy little Bullia, with a superficial resem-
blance to certain Nasse, eg., WV. teretzuscula Ad., and
pulchella Ad. Very smooth, slightly shining, cinereous
drab in colour, seven whorled, two being apical, swollen,
vitreous, the rest all longitudinally ribbed, the ribs very
smooth, as are the interstices, the last whorl about equals
the remainder put together, here the ribs disappear below
the middle of the whorl, and in their place are several
spiral deeply sulcate lines around the base of the shell.
The aperture is oval, outer lip a little effuse.

Ten or twelve specimens. .

(knodmAaoroc, Waxen.)

BULLIA (PSEUDOSTROMBUS) INDUSICA, sf. xov.
GE hare)

B. testa ovato-fustformt, spira acuminata, paullum
nitida, pallidissimé straminea vel albo-cinerea, anfractibus
octo (zncluso apical: vitreo, levi) ad suturas impressts,
ventricosults, tribus supernis plus minusve levibus, nitidts,
ceteris undique spiraliter lineart-sulcatts, infra, juxtd suturas
bino plicarum ordine transverso, nequaquam granoso nec
decussato incrassatis, ultimo ventricoso, costulis sptralibus
magis prominulis ad basim, apertura ovata, intus alba,
labro paullum effuso, tenuz, canalt brevi, columella paullum
excavata, operculo corneo, ovato, margine serrato, nucleo
apicalt. |

Kong 23 slat emai

Hab. Karachi.

This cannot be confounded with S. /znxeolata (= Belan-
gert Kien), there being no trace of fulvous marking, nor
is the shell of the same consistency, being far more delicate.
The transverse sulculi, too, in B. Zineolata, are only partial
over the whorls, leaving a considerable space below the
sutures smooth, with the exception of a once folded
sutural plait. The species before us is ovately fusiform

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 4. 19

with acuminate spire, somewhat shining, very pale straw
colour or whitish grey, whorls eight, the first three being
smooth, the rest regularly spirally line-furrowed, the sutures
are impressed, and the sutural plaits are shown by a
double row of thickened spiral costulez, there is no sign of
decussation or granulosity, the aperture is ovate, outer lip
slightly effuse, thin, canal short, columellar slightly
excavate. The operculum, which is present in both
specimens examined, is horny brown, ovate, with serrated
margin, and apical nucleus. (Karachi is at the mouth of
the R. Indus, hence the trivial name.)

MUREX (OCINEBRA) FLEXIROSTRIS, sp. ov.
(PRT fit.)

M. testa fusiformi, utrimque acuminata, brunnea, asper-
rima, Spira turrita, anfractibus septem, apicalibus duobus
levibus, ceteris vix varicosis, squamosis, longitudinaliter
crassicostatis, angulatis, spiraliter liris squamzferis accinctes,
anfractu ultimo ad basim attenuato, canalt longa, flexirostre,
apertura rotundo-ovata, labro fimbriato, dorsaliter, juxta
labrum, varicifero, columella et interiore pallidé violacea.

Long. 8, lat. 4 mm.

Hab. Muscat, 10 fathoms, coral sand.

A distinct little Ocznebra, being, in the most perfect
of the specimens, which is selected for the type, of a brown
colour, acuminate both posteriorly and anteriorly, rough
with small scales on the lirze which cross the thickened,
obliquely-angled ribs spirally, the last whorl attenuate
towards the base with a long (2°50 mm.) beak, bent back-
wards, the aperture is roundish, columella and interior
of the mouth pale violet, outer lip fimbriate, and with one
large varix just behind it. The shell is otherwise singu-
larly free from varices.

A smaller example, which has not attained its full

20 MELVILL, Molluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, etc.

growth,is even darker brown, with the same pale violaceous
interior. Three or four specimens.
(flextrostris, curvedly beaked.)

CERITHIOPSIS (SEILA) HINDUORUM, Sf, nov.

C. testa cylindracea, multum attenuata, solidiuscula, cas-
tanea, anfractibus quin- vel se-decim, undigue spiraleter
tricarinats, cavinis arctis, levibus, equalibus, enterstetzs lon-
gitudinaliter liratis, ultimo anfractu quinque-carinato,
juxta basim angulato, basi excavata, apertura subquadrata,
labro stmplici, canalt brevissimo, subretuso.

Long. 13, lat. 4.50 mm.

An abundant shell at Karachi, especially the neigh-
bourhood of Manora. We have seen nearly a hundred
specimens, differing a little in basal breadth, and length,
and also in number of whorls, the colour varying from pale
chestnut to dark russet ; and the larger examples are lon-
gitudinally streaked or suffused with darker brown. Sezla
bandorensis Melv., described from Bombay examples,
occurs with it, and we shall hope in a succeeding paper to
draw up a revised description of this, Mr. Townsend’s
specimens being dredged, and perfect at the mouth. |

S. hinduorum is no doubt near dextroversa Ad. and
Reeve, but the spiral carinz are all equal, and the colour
is chestnut brown. A strong family resemblance charac-
terises this section of Cerithiopsis, the majority of species
being American.

SCALARIA MALCOLMENSIS, sp. “ov.

S. testa ovato-fustformt, delicatula, tenut, albo-lactea, -
turrita, anfractibus octo vel novem, apicalibus * * * ,
undique arcté obligut-costatis, costis lamellosts, tncurvt7s,
papyracets, longitudinaliter connatts, auritzs,suturas superim-

pendentibus, lamellis simul ac interstitits transversim lentter

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 4. za

striatis,apertura rotunda, peristomate extus circiter lamelloso,
rotundo,

Long, 9, lat. 4 mm.

Hab. Malcolm Inlet, Persian Gulf; 25 fathoms.

Allied to the Mediterranean S. murzcata Risso, but the
lamellz are closer, more ear-shaped at the sutures, and
thinner in substance. They are likewise longitudinally
continuous and connate along all the whorls. This new
form is a remarkably graceful species. Two examples
occurred.

EULIMELLA KAISENSIS, sf. ov.

E. testa perlonga, multum attenuata, polita, niteda, albo-
lactea, anfracizbus duodecim, apicals vitreo, pellucedo, hetero-
stropho, anticé verso, omnino lactets, apud suturas tmpressts,
ventricosulis, infra, juxta suturas, vitta semipellucente sptra-
liter succinctis, aliter albolactets, apertura ovatorotunda,
labro extus vix incrassato.

Long. 6, lat. I mm.

flab. Kais (or Gais) Island, Persian Gulf, 10 fathoms.

A very prolonged, shining, milky white, perfectly
smooth shell, twelve whorled, with heterostrophe apex,
glassy, coiled on the front of the next whorl, the whorls
are impressed at the sutures, and slightly ventricose.

MIRALDA OPEPHORA, Sf. nov.

M. testa attenuato-fustformi, minuta, albtda, subcrystal-
lina, anfractibus octo, apud suturas multum impressis, ven-
tricosults, longitudinaliter arcticostatis et spiraliter carinatis,
superné trzbus, ultimo anfractu quatuor carinis instructo,
interstities profundis, quadratis, decussatis, ultimo anfractu
ad basim infra carinam delicaté spiraliter tornato, apertura
oblonga, labro tenuz, stmplict, columella inconspicué unt-
plicata. |

22 MELVILL, Wolluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, etc.

Long. 4, lat. 1°50 mm. |

Hab. Karachi (E. R. Shopland and F. W. Townsend).

A beautifully chased little species; allied to certain
Odostomze with decussated sculpture, and I follow Tryon
in including such under the subgeneric—or generic—
name of Mzralda. It is a semicrystalline little shell,
white, alternately sculptured with many longitudinal
ribs, crossed by prominent keels, three in the upper
whorls, four in the lowest. The interstices are quadrate,
and deep. Below the lowest keel on the last whorl,
the base is delicately spirally striate. The mouth is
oblong, outer lip simple. The columella is once plaited
but this is not very conspicuous. Three or four specimens.

(érnpdpoc, chink bearing, from the deep quadrate
interstices. )

TURBONILLA BASILICA, sf. nov.

T. testa minuta ad apicem perattenuata,crystallina, tenut,
anfractibus novem vel decem, quorum apicali heterostropho,
vitreo, levi, ceteris apud suturas mulium appressis, ventrt-
coso-tumzdts, longitudinaliter obtust-costatis, costis flexuosts,
obliquis, apertura ovata, labro tenuz, simplict, columella recta.

Long. 4, lat. 1°25 mm.

Had. Persian Gulf, off anchor, Bunder-Abbas.

An exceedingly delicate, glassy nine or ten-whorled
Turbonilla, with very impressed sutures, and tumid
whorls, the longitudinal ribs being somewhat flexuose.
Mouth and outer lip simple, columella straight. Judging
from the figure, it comes near 7° acutecostata Jeffreys, from
the Mediterranean, but a more delicate species, of about the
same size. The longitudinal ribs of the last whorl, though
terminated just above the base, which is smooth, do not
seem to have the spiral line at the point. of termination,
as in acutecostata. Three examples.

(baselicus, kingly.)

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), Vo. 4. 23

TURBONILLA (PYRGOSTELIS) MANORA, sf. nov.

T. testa oblonga, fustformi, delicatula, semipellucida,
albida, apice heterostropho, vitreo, levi, anfractibus octo, ad
suturas tmpressis, ventricosulis, undique recticostatts, costis
levibus, tnterstitiis spiraliter filostriatis, apertura rotundo-
ovata, labro tenur, simplict, paullum effuso, columella rec-
teuscula.

Long. 4, lat. 1°50 mm.

Hab. Manora, Karachi.

Several examples of a Turbonzlla, which, did it but
possess the columellar plait, so characteristic a feature in
the Pyrguline, would be easily comparable with P. Edgariz
Melv., or P. zxterstriata Souv. It is eight whorled, white,
delicate, longitudinally straightly ribbed, ribs smooth,
interstices spirally filostriate, mouth roundly ovate, outer
lip slightly effuse, simple, columella straight. Allied to
T. (Pyrgostelis) flexuosa Jeffreys, from the Mediterranean,
and the recently described 7. (Pyrgostelis) Emile Melv.,
from Bombay; it is much larger than this latter species,
whorls more ventricose, and eight, as against six whorled.

TURBONILLA (PYRGOSTELIS) TEMPLARIS, Sf. “ov.

T. testa crystallina, alba, delicata, turrita, gradatula,
anfractibus decem, gqucrum apicalt vitreo, levi, bulboso,
ceteris gradatis, levibus, longttudinaliter recticostulatzs,
interstitiis omnino levisstmis, ultimo anfractu costulis infra
medium evanidis, ad basim levi, apertura ovata, labro
tenut, stemplici, columella obscurissmé untplicata.

Long. 4°50, lat. 1°25 mm.

Hab. Karachi and Mekran Coast (Townsend and
Shopland).

An exceedingly pretty species, the whorls are white,
ten in number, including the glassy, bulbous apical, the
rest being scalariform, proportionately graduate, and taper-

24 MELVILL, Wolluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, etc.

ing, crystalline and delicate. Longitudinal straight riblets
adorn each whorl, these, as in the case of so many ribbed
Turbonille, are evanescent below the middle of the last
whorl. The aperture is ovate, outer lip thin, elongate,
columella very obscurely once plaited. This shell has for
its allies 7. scalaris Phil, a European species, entirely
different in texture and substance, though akin in form,
and 7. (Pyrgostelis) Velaint Tryon=scalaris Velain non
Mont, from the Island of S. Paul, South Indian Ocean.
I have only seen a figure and description of this latter
species, from which 7. ¢emplaris seems to differ in the
perfect smoothness of the interstices between the ribs,
those in 7. Velaznz being striate, in the ten as against eight
whorls, and in being larger in allits parts. Z. Adercrombzez,
described by myself in 1893, from Bombay, is like in its
graduate whorls, but differing in form of mouth and last
whorl, and lastly, Pyrgulina pyrgomella Melv., also from
Bombay, resembles our shell in form, but here the longi-
tudinal ribs begin at a little distance from the sutures, the
intermediate space being smooth, and the ribs are also
slightly papillose at the upper end. The columella is also
very conspicuously plaited.
(vide Proc. Mal. Soc., Vol. I1., 1896, pp. 113, 114.)
(templaris, of or belonging to a temple.)

NERITA (HEMINERITA) ANODONTA, sf. nov.

NV. testa parva, subglobosa, solidiuscula, anfractibus
tribus, apicalibus erosis, ultimo rapide accrescente, spiraliter
filo-lirato, in uno spectmine lirts concinné nigris, vegularibus,
zn altero trregulariter adisposttis, hic 2llec nigro-tessellatis vel
maculatis, apertura lunata, labro paullum incrassato, intus .
levi, area columellari planata, nitida, ochraceotincta, margine
non denticulato, recto, operculo paucispiralt, extus granuloso.

EO. diam. 1©. mim,

Hab.. Karachi (J. O. Twells, Esq.).

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 4. 25

A small, but well-marked species, for the sight of which
I am indebted to Mr. G. B. Sowerby. It belongs to the
toothless section of Merita proper, and is really best dis-
tinguished from certain Merztzne by its operculum. It is
variable in its painting: one of the examples before us is
neatly spirally threaded, the lirze being black, another is
more irregularly lirate, and tesselated, here and there only,
with black. The mouth is, as just observed, not denticulate,
nor has the outer lip teeth within the aperture. The opercu-
lum is paucispiral, granulated without.

(avddouc, without teeth.)

TROCHUS (INFUNDIBULUM) FULTONI, sp. nov.
CPi 21.)

T. testa profundé pseud-umbrlicata, solidula, pyramidata,
conica, antractibus septem vel octo, apicalt subacuto, interdum
Jeré rectis, interdum supra suturas tumidulis, quast grada-
tulis, vividé viridi-coloratis, et radiatim longitudinaliter
rubro varit-pictis, flammis superné in onintbus speciminibus
haud variantibus, infra, in ultimo anfractu nunc cordensatis,
nunc tenucbus, vel fulgetrinis, anfractibus omnibus undique
spiraliter liris granulosis instructis, superné quatuor vel
guingue ordinibus lirarum, ultimo guinque vel sex, ad
_ peripheriam angulato, bast subplanato, viridi, et delicaté
rubripicta, lirarum quinque ordinibus predita, interdum
granulis evanidis, interdum, et sepius, distincté granulosis,
strits concentricis interstitralibus, apertura quadrata, tntus
zridescente, crasstlirata, labro exteriore crassiusculo, columella
wridescente, plicata, margine vix crenato, bast intus crenulato.
Operculo corneo, cartiligineo, multispiral,

Alt. 25, sp. mzaj., diam. 25 mm.

Hab. Entrance to Persian Gulf (G. of Oman),

A great many specimens, all nearly similar, but witha
slight tendency to vary in granulosity of spiral lire, and
also, in some instances, in tumidity of the lower part of the
central whorls. 7

26 MELVILL, Molluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, ete.

Hitherto this shell must have been mixed up with
T. radiatus Gmelin, from which, however, we can always
distinguish it. Some points of difference consist in the
apex never being orange tinted, the whorls uniform and
more vivid green, the interstitial lirze between the granular
striations being absent in all the specimens examined, the
diametric measurement less in proportion to the altitude
than in either 7. radzatus Gmel., or 7. vevidus Reeve (the
nearest approach to our species) and the false umbilicus
more profound, and narrower. The general form is like-
wise more acutely narrowly conical.

Mr. Hugh Fulton has rendered me most valuable
assistance in the elucidation of this and other critical
species in Mr. Townsend’s and Commander Shopland’s*
collections; and it gives me much pleasure to connect
this interesting species with his name.

CALLIOSTOMA DURICASTELLUM, Sf. nov.
(EL al A5)

C.testa perforata, pyramtdato-contca, palliderufo-ochracea,
soltda, elegante, anfracttbus ecto, haud prominulis apud
suturas, undique spiraliter arcté et delicaté punctosulcatzs,
infra, guxta suturas, et ultimo apud peripheriam spiraliter
bifuniculato, squarrosé rufotessellato, in medio interdum
unicolore, interdum obliqué rubrisparso et maculato, ultzmo ad
periphertam acutangulato, bast concinné sptraliter sulculosa,
hic wlic rubri-picta, apertura obliqué quadrata, intus irt-
descente, labro éxtus tenut, stmplice.

Alt. 10, diam. 7-50 mim:

Fab. Batticaloa, Ceylon (Captain Tindall).

A pretty Trochoid shell, allied to C. polychroma Ad.,.
C. enterruptum Wood, and others of that section of the
genus. The shell is perforate, pyramidal, the whorls close
set, and not prominent at the sutures, the spiral puncto-

2 ct Ann G Mac. N. 7., Ser. 7, Vol. le, (1405) p04 sqae

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 4. 27

striation or sulcation is uniform, and close. At the bottom
of each whorl, just above the sutures, the sulci are broader
and funiculate, and tessellated with red, the remainder of
the surface is sometimes flushed with red, and sometimes
quite plain.

A good many examples, all alike in form, but differing
slightly in pattern, as described above.

(duricastellum, a stronghold.)

OSTREA TOWNSENDI, 5p. nov.
(Piet. ft. £4.)

O. testa suborbiculari, albida, dorsaliter rufo-suffusa,
probabiliter per lobos valve infertoris adherente, valva
superiore multiplicata, costis ramosis, apud medium, precipué
dorsaltter, elevata, superficie delicate longitudinaliter sericata,
marginem ad ventralem lamellata plicis albidis, quindecom
ad septemdecim, divaricatis, plicis varits, acuté angulatzs,
cardine magno, superficie tnterna albo-ochracea.

Alt. 2°75, lat. 3 unc.

Hab. On the Telegraph Cable, entrance to Persian
Gulf.

A few specimens, which, when cleared of nullipores
and other growths, present a beautiful shell surface. We
could almost give it the palm in a genus which, uncouth
as are many ofits members, yet in some few instances
almost rivals the Sfondylz. The present species which,
rightly, is to bear the name of its discoverer, Mr. F. W.
Townsend, is suborbicular in shape, white, many plaited
round the ventral margin, the plaits being acute-angled.
Transverse lamellz are seen above the plaits, the rest of the
surface being beautifully longitudinally sericeous and
shagreened ; dorsally there is a suffusion of red-brown,
the depressions between the branching ribs being darker.

The hinge is large, inner surface yellowish white.

28 MELVILL, Wolluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, ete.

PLICATULA PERNULA, sp. nov.
Cel A556 1O),)

P. testa paullum inequivalvt, inequilaterali, pediformt,
parva, depresso-planata, pallidé carneo-rufa, costis oblaquis
circiter decem decorata, his costis hic illic spiniferts, spinis
brevibus, tubtferis, squamatis, transversim superficie omnt
valvarum rudt-corrugatis, umbonibus angustis, latere antico
arcuato, ventral, cum postico, leniter rotundato-oblongo, entus,
2m speciminibus maturis circiter marginem incrassato, longt-
tudinaliter costarum wmpressiones exhibente, cardine utroque
dentibus duobus devits.

Alt. 20, lat. 15; diam. 4'mm., 57.497207.

Hab. Malcolm Inlet, Persian Gulf; 24 fathoms, mud.

Apparently near P. depressa Lam., from the New
World,.and P. murzcata A. Ad. Mr. Hugh Fulton, who
has made comparisons with this latter, writes me that that
shell is not so narrow at the umbones, and that the
plications are far more numerous, nor are the spiny
scales tubulous as in P. pernula.

Though small, it appears full grown: the shells are
covered with Sevpule and Leprale ; eight examples in all.

(pernula, a little ham, from the form.)

LIMA (LIMATULA) LEPTOCARYA, Sp. nov.
(PL 25f2.) |

L. testa tenui albida, recta, equivalvi, oblonga, clausa,
ventricosa, longitudinaliter arcté costulata, costis ad medium
valvarum prominulis, ad latera evanescentibus, numero ad
sex et vigintt, umbonibus distantibus, sulculo mediano vix
notato, auriculis egualibus, margine cardinal lato.

Alt. 8, long. 5, diam. 4°50 mm.

Hab. Muscat ; 10 fathoms.

Resembling the British Z. subauriculata Mont., and
especially L. elt¢ptica Jeffr. In the former species the
longitudinal median sulcus is distinct and central, in the

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «lit. (1898), No. 4. 29

latter it is inclined to one side. In this new form, the
median sulcus is hardly perceptible. As in ZL. eldzptzca,
the longitudinal riblets are evanescent at the sides, being
about twenty-six in number ; these riblets are more pro-
nounced than in that species. Several examples.

(Aewroxaovoy, a light nut, the fruit of the hickory, from
the shape of the shell.)

YOLDIA CLARA, Sp. ”ov.
CRI Ati)

Y. testa crystallina, pellucide tenuz, equivalvi, inequt-
laterali, umbonibus parvis, approximatis, margine dorsali
utrimgque Jlentter declivi, anticé oblongo-ovato, margine
ventralt convexiusculo, posticé paullum producto, dentibus
pectinatis, in utraque valva posticé quatuordecim, antice eodem
numero, superficie nitidissema,vetrea,concentrice obliquilirata,
hiris tndistinctes.

Alt. 8, lat. 15, diam. 4°50 mm.

Hab. Bushire, Persia, 4 fathoms, mud.

A very delicate crystalline pellucid Yoldza, the super-
ficies concentrically obliquely lirate, and slightly prismatic,
the shell is posteriorly produced, anteriorly ovate-oblong,
the ventral margin somewhat convex, the umbones small,
approximate, dorsally declining on each side; teeth,
pectinate, about fourteen in either valve on each side of
the umbones.

The only species nearly allied to this is Y. serotena
Hinds, which is alsoin the Townsendian collection, having
been found among shell-growth on the Telegraph Cable at
55 fathoms mud, in lat. 25°58’ N. and long. 57°3' E. This
is not so transparent a shell, and posteriorly not quite so
produced, the concentric lire in Y. sevotina are clearer
cut, and the umbones more prominent, causing the dorsal
margin anteriorly to be slightly arcuate.

(clarus, clear, transparent. )

30 MELVILL, Wolluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, ete.

MYTILICARDIA FFINCHI, sp. nov.
| Pi 2p tior7)

M. testa oblongo-trapezoide, enequilaterali, rufo-gilva,
umbonibus incurvis, margine dorsalt posticé recta, anticé
excavato-declivi, latere postico recto, ventrali ad anticum
oblique declivi, antico breviter oblongo, lunula parva, profundé
cardiiforimti, testa longitudinaliter quatuor-decim vel quin-
decim costis decorata, anticé angustis, trregulariter nodosts,
posticé mazoribus et latioribus, sepe spiniferosquamosts,
squamis foltacets, cochlearibus, precipue latus apud posticum
conspicurs, stmul ac ad posticam marginis dorsalis partem,
antus albida.

Alt. 25, sp. maj. lat. 37 mm.

Hab. Muscat, 10 fathoms coral sand, and Persian Gulf,
33 fathoms.

Seven or eight examples varying only in size, being
very uniform in shape and structure. We have taken the
largest specimen as our type. This new /ytclecardza is
an interesting and conspicuous shell, coming in the same
category as W/. calyculata L., from the Mediterranean, than
which it is much broader, and JV. crasszcostata Lam., a
more elaborate species altogether.

It is of a fulvous-dun colour, the umbones incurved,
placed very far forward, the ventral margin is posteriorly
almost straight, anteriorly excavate, the posterior margin
also straight, anterior shortly oblong; the ventral
obliquely tending from the posterior to the anterior
margin. The longitudinal ribs are fourteen to fifteen in
number, the posterior much the larger and wider, and are
ornamented,the smaller with nodules, the larger with spiny,
foliaceous and spoon-shaped squame..

Named, at the request of Mr. Townsend, in honour of
his chief, Mr. B. T. Ffinch, C.I.E., who is taking consider-
able interest in the results of these numerous dredging
expeditions in the Arabian Sea and Persian Gulf.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 4. 31

BASTEROTIA ARCULA, Sf. ov.
(Ph. 2, £::06;)

B. testa equivalvi, inequilateralt, subquadrata, inflata,
valuis parum hiulcis, umbonibus incurvis, prominults, mar-
gine dorsalt utrimque recto, antico rotundato-truncato,
postico obliqué producto, ab umbonibus usque ad marginem
ventralem posteriorem carinato et acutangulato, cardine in
utrague valva uno dente instructo, dentibus productzs,
magnis, superficie sordidé alba, granulosa, latere postico
cordtformi, plano-marginato, minuté granuloso, entus alba.

Alt. 8, lat. 13, diam. 7°50 mm. sf. maj.

Hab. Karachi, 3 fathoms, mud and sand.

This genus, formerly known as Eucharis. Recluz non
Latreille, bears, until the hinge with its conspicuous teeth,
one in each valve, be examined, a considerable resem-
blance to certain members of the family Avcade. The
new species now before us, especially so; indeed, it might
be considered a small variety of Arca tetragona L.

The shell is equivalve, inequilateral, squarrose, inflated,
the valves hardly gaping laterally, the umbones incurved,
prominent, the dorsal margin straight on both sides of the
umbones, anteriorly the shell is roundly truncate, pos-
teriorly obliquely produced, from the umbones to the
posterior end of the ventral margin runs. an acutely
angled keel, the surface of the shell is dirty white;
granulose, the posterior side flattened, plane margined
(with the keels just mentioned), heart shaped, minutely
granular. Within the shell is white.

One perfect shell, and a larger half valve.

(arcula, a little ark-or chest.)

CIRCE NANA, Sf. nov.
(Pl 2,1. a)
C. testa parva, obliqué orbiculari, solidiuscula, umbonibus
paullum attenuatis, prominults, anticé ovata, postice obtus-
angulo-truncatula, margine ventrali convexiusculo, dorsaliter

32 MELVILL, Wolluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, ete.

posticé feré recto, anticé multum declivi, superfice albida
concentrice trregulariter lerata, liris apud medium anticé et
posticé oblique granuloso-undosts, zntus alba, linea pallialé
parum sinuosa.

Alt.,7, lat 8°50 mm.

Had. Indian Ocean ; 33 fathoms, long. 26°10 N., lat.
52°s0' E., mud, and coral rock.

A dwarf Czrce, in size resembling the British and
Mediterranean C. mznzma L. It is white, obliquely
orbicular, the umbones slightly attenuate, prominent, the
dorsal margin straightish posteriorly, much declining
anteriorly, the shell being unequally concentrically lirated,
the lire ornamented with oblique nodules tending regu-
larly posteriorly and anteriorly, ceasing beyond the middle,
while the shell is slightly shining. Within white, the
pallial line hardly sinuous.

DIPLODONTA GENETHLIA, SP. NOV.
CPi ort s16k):

D. testa oblique rotunda, ventricosa, nitida, levi, indis-
tincté concentricé striata, straminea vel cinereo-alba, umbont-
bus approximatis, incurvis, prominulis, dorsaliter utrimgue
rapidé declivi, posticé rotunda, anticé a medio marginem ad
ventralem tri- vel quadri-plicata, plicis obtusis, inconspicuts,
zntus albescente, cardine in utraque valva bidentato, dentibus
enequalibus. |

Alt.'7, lat-7'5o, *diawmal’s) mam

Flab. Gais (or Kais) Island, 7 to 10 fathoms ; also
Muscat, 10 fathoms, Persian Gulf.

An obliquely rounded shell, straw coloured or olivaceous
or ashy white, shining, concentrically striate, umbones
approximate, prominent, valves extremely ventricose and
tumid, posteriorly round, anteriorly three- or four-plaited,
the plaits commencing below the centre of the shell to
the ventral margin.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 4. 28

A great many examples from the two above-mentioned
localities.
(yevéSALo¢, generative, from its frequency.)

GARI ERASMIA, Sf. ov.
CPL 2 ive)

G. testa parva, oblonga, equivalvt, feré equilateralt,valuts
dorsaliter lentter declivibus, anticé oblongis, sicut tn latere
postico, margine ventrali longo; convextusculo, feré recto,
superficte violacea vel roseo-ochracea, arctissimé concentricé
costulata, interstitits posticé fere levibus, a medio feré ad
latus anticum alvearibus, costulis crenelliferis, anticé
crassigranulosis et undulosis, bis alternatim dtsposttts,
quadratulis, intus parum nitente, violacea vel rosea.

Alt. 5, long. 9, diam. 3 mm., sf. maz.

Hab. Gais (or Kais) Island ; 14 fathoms, broken rock
and coral sand. ,

One of the smallest, if not the least, of the genus, but
none the less beautiful. Two specimens are before us.
Of these, the larger, pale violet in colour, is of an oblong
shape, rounded off anteriorly and posteriorly, slightly
convex, but running almost straight at the ventral margin.
The ornamentation is peculiar. Closely concentrically
costulate, these ribs posteriorly are almost smooth, as are
the interstices, towards the middle of each valve the coste
become crenelliferous, the interstices honeycombed, and,
at the anterior margin, they are noduled and granuled, in
an alternate manner, assuming a diamond pattern. The
smaller example, of a rosy-ochre, is much smoother
posteriorly and in the middle, but has the same character
of ornamentation in a lesser degree. The presence of
Lepralig on the larger specimen would seem to denote its
mature condition, I may add that Garz Schum., 1817,
has precedence one year over Psammobia Lm., 1818.

(g0aosu0¢, lovely.)

34 MELVILL, Molluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, etc.

TELLINA (ARCOPAGIA) HABROTIMA, sf. nov.
CP le slgalie ss ie

1. testa delicata, sordidé alba, umbonibus parvis, acutts,
sed conspicuis, candidis, anticé ovata, posticé rotundata,
margine dorsali lenté utrimgque declivi, ventralé rotundato,
arctisstmé radiatim costulates, et spiraliter s¢tmultter con-
centricé decussatis, costulis sptnoso-lamellatis, interstetizs
guadratzs. |

Alt. 13, lat. 15, diam. 4°50 mm.

Fab. Angrias Bank, Arabian Sea (Captain. Tindall).

An exceedingly delicate, ornate shell, the sculpture
being of a highly-chased radiate and concentric costula-
tion, the interstices being quadrate. The radiate ribs are
spiny, lamellate, in number about forty-six. In form, and
general decussation this Ze//zwa resembles most closely
T. carnicolor Hanley, from the Philippines, the number of
radiate ribs is, however, nearly doubled in that very finely
sculptured species, the ribs being much thinner and finer.
There is likewise strong superficial similitude to 7. costata
Sowb., but the umbones in that species are more elevated,
the shell narrower by far, and the ribs only about
thirty-two. )

(aBodrimoc, delicately refined.)

TELLINA (MARA) ACTINOTA, Sp. mov.
(EiS2 oi ir)

T. testa parva, delicatula, oblonga, antice prolongata,
postice curta, margine ventrali convexo, dorsalt utrimque
declivt, superficie delecaté concentrico-striata, striws posticé
paullum squamatis, pulcherrimé puniceo-radiata ab um-
bonibus ad marginem ventralem, intus niteda, radizs
conspicuts. |

Alt. 6°50, lat. 9, diam. 3°50 mm.

Hab. Muscat, Arabia; 10 fathoms, coral sand.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol xlit. (1898), No. 4. 35

A very beautifully rayed, and delicate species. It is
allied to 7. semen Hanley, T. lechriogramma Melv., etc., but
we have not seen any of these near relations to it, in any
instance, rayed. The concentric striz are very delicate, and
more pronounced posteriorly.

(axtivwroc, radiate.)

TELLINA (ANGULUS) SERICATA, sp. nov.
(PL 2,8 18)

_T. testa subtrapezoide, delicata, tenut, pallidissimé albo-
straminea, umbonibus acutis, latere postico ab umbonibus
vapidé declivi ad medium breviter truncato, antice peroblongo,
margine ventralt convexiusculo, ab umbonibus ad extremt-
tates posticas marginis ventrals valvarum unangulata,
superficie triangulari inter angulum et latera postica
spinifera, trregulariter noduloso-corrugata, cetera superficie
concentricé lineata, liners obliquis, irregulariter diffusis,
transeuntibus, in medio magis arctis, hic sinuoszs, tlic,
precipae anticé, prope ventralem marginem evaniadts.

mut 10, lat. 14, diam. 4 mm.

Hab. Muscat, Arabia ; 10 fathoms.

An ornate species, with a beautiful silky superficies, pos-
teriorly angled and truncate, spiniferous, the space between
the angle, which extends from the umbones to the
posterior extremity of the ventral margin, is irregularly
nodulously wrinkled. The shell, anteriorly, is very oblong,
the surface shagreened with concentric lines, crossed ob-
liquely and irregularly with other lines, these last becoming
almost obsolete at the posterior extremity of the ventral
margin. Not very nearly allied to any Yedda we are
acquainted with. TZ. gargadza L. and T. znequalis Hanley,
especially the latter, have some characteristics in common
with it, but are hardly comparable.

(serzcatus, silken.)

36 MELVILL, Molluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, ete.

PERIPLOMA INDICUM, Sf. nov.
. CPI o2 tae)

P. testa tnequilateralt, tnequivalvz, valva sintstra
minore, valvts ventricosulis, tenuibus, sordidé dlbts, super-
fictaliter trregulariter concentricé striates, strizs rudibus, um-—
bonibus contiguis, incurvis, margine dorsalt utrimque declvz,
posticé curto, subtruncato, antice ovato-rotundo, margine
ventrali convextusculo, ab umbonibus usque ad tateres
postict extremitatem unicarinata, carina obtusa, cardine
zn valva utraque obliquo, cochleart, intus alba, nitida, vix
zridescente.

Alt. 12, lat. 15, diam. 5 mm. sf. maz.

Fab. Jask ; 4 to 6 fathoms, sand and mud.

Resembling in form, though not in texture, P. ¢vape-
zotdes Lam., from California. It is of a dirty white hue,
smoothish, the left valve smaller than the right, umbones
contiguous, incurved, ligament obscure externally, the
shell dorsally declining on both sides of the umbones, the
posterior side curtly truncate, the anterior. roundly ovate,
merging with the convex ventral margin, while an obtuse
keel runs from the umbones to the posterior extremity in
both valves, The hinge is oblique, spoon-shaped, one in
each valve, the shell within is white, shining, not iridescent.

Seven or eight examples.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No, 4. a7

ADDENDUM,

Description of a new Strombus from the Mekran
Coast of Beluchistan.

(Dredged by F. W. Townsend, Esq.).
By JAMES CosMO MELVILL, M.A., F.LS.

Received and read March 22na, 1898.

STROMBUS (CONOMUREX) BELUTSCHIENSIS, sp. 2ov.

S. testa crassa, brevicula, coniformi, levi, alba, epider-
mide leté olivacea contecta, anfractibus novem, quorum
apicalibus duobus, tribus his proximis, parvis, infra
suturas Sprvaliter tornatis, ceteris trregularibus, applanatzs
ultimo magno, perlevi, spiraliter irregulariter squarrosé
castaneo-maculato, infra suturas obtusangulari, apertura
angusta, oblonga, tntus pallidé carnea, labro sinuoso apud
basim, supra excavato, margine columellart incrassato,
polito, nitzdo, recto. .

Long. 45, lat. 23 mm. sp. maz.

Hab. Charbar, Mekran Coast of Beluchistan, dredged
at 7 fathoms, in mud and sand (F. W. Townsend, 1898).

Strombus belutschiensis.

I have made a brief allusion to this new Strombus
in my last paper on the subject of Indian Ocean Mollusca.

38 MELVILL, Molluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, ete.

Such a discovery is of very exceptional interest, for (since
S. mirabilis Sowb., 1870, has been proved only synonymous
with S. Listerz Th. Gray, 1852) no addition to the genus has
been recorded since 1857, when Mr. Lovell Reeve des-
cribed the still unique S. ¢auvus.* This is more than
forty-one years ago, and monographers have more than
once expressed a pretty decided opinion that the genus
might be considered complete.

It belongs to a section of the genus—Conomurex
Bayle—characterized by the outer lip being hardly dilated,
spire short, facies cone-shaped, aperture narrow. The
abundant S. mauritianus Lam. (cylindricus Swn.) and ©
S. luhuanus Linn., are the only other recent Conomurices.

The two specimens of S. delutschiensts before me only
differ in size, and I have taken the larger for the type.
The shell is thick, short, coniform, heavy for its size, the
whorls covered with a smooth olive epidermis. The eight
upper whorls, inclusive of the two apical, are all small,
the third, fourth, and fifth are spirally tornate, the next
three, with the larger lowest whorl, are smooth, irregularly
formed, and gradate at the sutures, the last whorl is also
obtusely angled and shouldered a little way below the
suture, and is squarely, but irregularly, spotted and
dashed with bright brown markings. The aperture is
narrow, Straight, interior light flesh colour, outer lip twice
sinuous towards the base, excavate at the upper part,
columellar margin white, incrassate, polished, smooth, and
Straight.

From all the many forms of S. mauritzanus Lam. I
have seen, it differs in this polished thickening of the
columella, and the very stunted coniform shape.

It is hoped that the types of all the species in this and
the preceding paper may be deposited in the British
Museum (Natural History), S. Kensington.

"Frc. Z001, SOG, 1657. Ps 2075, Elen oyia tices:

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 4.

Explanation of Plates.

PEATE UT:

Ancilla Tindallz.
Scalaria malcolmensis.

Pleurotoma (Drillia) angriasensis.

Marginella (Glabella) quilonica.
Cythara hypercalles.

Fusus arabicus.

Miralda opephora.

Tellina (Arcopagia) habrotima.
Turbonilla basilica.

Conus (Leptoconus) dictator.
Murex (Ocinebra) flexirostres.
Scalaria fimbriolata Melv.
Cerithtopsis (Seila) hinduorum.
Calliostoma duricastellum.
Clathurella camacina.
Marginella (Perszcula) oodes.
Lacheszs bicolor.

Nerita (Heminerita) anodonta.
Bullia (Pseudostrombus) indusica.
Lornatina Townsend.

Trochus (Infundibulum) Fultont.
Turbonilla (Pyrgostelis) Manore.
Conus (Leptoconus) secularts.

a0

40 MELVILL, Molluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea, ete.

PLATE <2)
Fig. 1. Lellina (Mera) actinota.
» 2 Lima (Limatula) leptocarya.
» 3. Gari erasmia.
» 4 LPertploma indicum.
» 5. Lulimella kaisensts.
» 6. Turbonilla (Pyrgostelis) templaris,
anak OLA IO Clare.
» & Pleurotoma (Drillia) resplendens.
» On "Circe nana.
» 10. Plcatula pernula.
» Il. Dziplodonta genethiza.
» 12. TLerebra Edgari.
» 13. Bulla ceroplasta.
» 14. Ostrea Townsends.
» 15. Leucotina gratiosa.
» 16. Basterotia arcula.
» 17. Mytelicardia Finch.
» 18 Tellina (Angulus) sericata.

-

ee eeter Memoirs. Vol XL.

J.Greendelet lth. / Mintern Bros.imp.
MARINE MOLLUSCA,

ie +

Ses Memorrs. Vol XLI.

J.Green delet lth.

MARINE MOLLUSCA.

Mintern Bros. imp.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 3:

V. On a Method of Determining the Thermal Con-
ductivities of Salts, with some results of its
application.

By CHARLES H. LEES, D.Sc.
Received and read December 14th, 1897.

In the course of a recent investigation on the
thermal conductivities of mixtures of substances, and
their dependence on the conductivities of their con-
stituents, I required the conductivities of crystallised zinc
sulphate and some other salts, and had to devise a means
of determining them. The methods usually adopted in
determining a thermal conductivity, require a disc or
plate of the substance, and are therefore difficult to apply
to salts in the form of powder or discontinuous crystals.
A method of experimenting which has often been used
for the determination of the physical properties of small
bodies of irregular shape, may, however, be used with
advantage. This consists of immersing the body in a
liquid which possesses the particular physical property to
be determined, to nearly the same extent as the. body to
be tested, and observing whether the property of the
liquid is changed in magnitude by the presence of the
body. If a change is perceived, another liquid is tried,
till eventually one is found for which no change occurs,
and which, therefore, possesses the property in question
to the same extent as the immersed body.

In applying this method to the determination of the
thermal conductivity of a salt, the salt in a rather fine
state is mixed with water, or with a mixture of water and

May 17th, 1898.

2 LEES, Thermal Conductivity of Salts.

alcohol the thermal conductivity of which is known, and
the conductivity of the mixture of salt and liquid observed.
If it is greater than that of the liquid, a better, and if less,
a worse, conducting liquid is used, the operation being
repeated till no apparent change in the conductivity of the
liquid is produced by the addition of the salt. To prevent
chemical action going on during the test, the liquid is
previously saturated with the salt, and the thermal con-
ductivity of the saturated liquid either determined experi-
mentally or calculated from Jaeger’s* results.

The range of conductivities over which the method
can be strictly applied, is limited by the conductivities of
the liquids available, but it has been used over a wider
range in order to supply some approximate information
in a field in which our previous knowledge was nil. In
most cases only a rough approximation to equality of
conductivity of liquid and salt has been made.

The apparatus, which was that used by me in deter-
mining the variation of conductivity with temperature,
has been described elsewhere in detail,t and will only be
described shortly here. It consisted of two discs of copper,
4 cm. in diameter and °3 cm. thick, cemented to opposite
surfaces of a glass plate of the same diameter and ‘281 cm.
thick. To the free surface of ‘one copper disc, afar
spiral coil of insulated platinoid wire was attached, and
the other free surface rested on a horizontal ring of ebonite
"226 cm. thick,/ 3:8 cm. ‘internaland 7 cm. Nextesmal
diameter, supported on, and cemented to, a third copper
disc 7 cm. diameter and ‘3 cm. thick. This disc was
placed on the top of a metal box, through which water
circulated. The liquid, or mixture of salt and liquid -
to be experimented on, was placed within the ring of
ebonite, and the smaller copper discs pressed onto it till

* See Landolt und Bornstein, Zadellen.
+ Pail. Trans., 1897.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 5, 3

they rested on the ebonite. An electric current was then
sent through the spiral coil, the temperature of the upper
disc was raised, and heat flowed through the glass plate and
liquid to the lower disc and water bath. The tempera-
tures of the various discs, when “steady,” were determined
by means of thermojunctions soldered into holes in the
discs, a galvanometer, and a wire of known resistance
through which a known current was passing.

The following results have been obtained for a mean
temperature of 15°C.:—

Substances. Thermal Conductivity (c.g.s. units)
Water "OO14
Sulphates.
CuSO, + 5H,O between ‘oo17 and ‘0018
fm5O,+7H,0 — ,, wae tte 15
FeSO, +7H,0O _,, ie eae 14
NiSO,+7H.O ,, ~ ee erp 12
MgsSO,+7H,0 _,, Rie 2 12
Sulphides.
FeS about ‘o17
Cus about ‘org
PbS between ‘0015 and ‘oo16
Oxides.
Al,O; (Emery) about *025
ZnO 15) 1009
CuO PEN glsiors
PbO 0) eo
Pb,O, we oes
Fe,O3 33 °003
MgO ees
Chlorides.
KCl ‘OI4
NaCl 013
PbCl, "0013

CuCl, ‘0013

4 LEES, Thermal Conductivity of Satts.

For comparison, I give the mean values quoted by
Graetz* for metals, and the values found by me for sulphur.

Cu "9

Al us
Mg 4

M 3

Jue 16
Ni i

Pb 08

S) "0004 to ‘0006

The values for salts whose conductivities lie
between those of water and alcohol, have been determined
by the method described, those above that of water by
interpolation on the assumption that NaCl in particles
has the same conductivity as in bulk (rock salt). The
latter, as absolute values, may be wrong to a consider-
able extent, but the order of the various substances in the
above tables is not likely to be seriously affected by
subsequent more accurate work.

From the above results the following conclusions can
be drawn :—

(1) A good conducting metal does not always confer
good conductivity on its salts. )

(2) ,.The presence of water of crystallisation in a salt
seems to bring the conductivity near to that
of water.

(3) The chlorides of the alkali metals are good thermal
conductors.

(4) Sulphides and oxides of the metals are com-
paratively good conductors.

(5) No direct connection appears to exist between

the thermal conductivity of a salt and the con- .

ductivities of its elements.

* Winkelmann, Handbuch der Physik, Bd. III.
+ Phil. Trans., 1892 and 1897.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol xlit. (1898), No. ©.

VI. On the Mechanical Equivalent of Heat.

By OSBORNE REYNOLDS, F.R.S.,
Professor of Engineering, Owens College,

AND

W. H. Moorsy, M.Sc,
Late Fellow of Victoria University, and 1851 Exhibition Scholar.

[A condensed account of the matter of the Bakerian Lecture ,*
published under the condition of the Joule Fund, ‘to the honour
of Joules name.” |

PART Ty

On the Method, Appliances and Limits of Error in the
direct determination of the Work expended in
raising the temperature of Ice-Cold Water to that
of Water Boiling under a pressure of 28°899 inches
of Ice-Cold Mercury in Manchester.

By Professor OSBORNE REYNOLDS.

The prestige conferred on this Society by Joule’s inti-
mate and lifelong association with it, renders it the high
privilege as well as the duty of all its members to foster
the fame of that great discoverer, and to guard with the
most jealous eye the memory of his work against whatever
may detract from the estimation in which it is held.

With these views, the author cannot bring before this
Society the results of an independent determination of the
Mechanical Equivalent of Heat without a word of explana-

* Phil. Trans., A,, vol. 190, 1897, pp. 301-422.

[The Council of the Royal Society have kindly permitted the use
of the diagrams, pp. 30-34, prepared to illustrate the original paper. ]

2 REYNOLDS AND MOORBY, Eqguzvalent of Feat.

tion of the circumstances and motive which led to the
undertaking.

In the experimental comparison of physical quantities
in different modes, such as heat and work, the-measured
results depend not only on the aptitude and foresight of
the experimenter and on the particular units employed, but
involve fundamentally the standards to which the units
are referred. Thus, in a repetition of the experiments,
however accurate, the results should not agree unless the
standards employed are the same.

Now Joule’s standard of temperature-measurement was
the scale of his thermometer (0), which is now in the
custody of the Society, and which has not been used in any
other determination.

Other determinations have been inade by various
observers with various thermometers, and the results are
various which, though none of them differ by more
than 1 / from Joule’s values—77269 (1849), 772°55
(1878)—, are on the average higher than Joule’s. And,
as the result of two researches (Rowland and Griffiths),
there had, before 1890, been serious proposals, published
in the Zvansactions of the Royal Society, to adopt the
number 778 instead of J or 772. :

As a member of this Society, the author felt strongly
averse to this proposal, and not only so, but, from a study
of the published papers, convinced himself that, notwith-
standing the improved laboratory conveniences, the
methods and means by which these later results were
obtained, were, quite apart from Joule’s wonderful aptitude,
in no way comparable with those of Joule ; still he did not
then feel competent, even had he been able to do so, to
attempt a verification of Joule’s results; for it seemed to
him a mere impertinence to publish results either as
verifying or correcting those already obtained except
with the fullest assurance that the requisite means, aptitude,

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. ©. 3

skill, experience and devotion are at least equal to those
which have been already employed.

It was only on the occurrence, five years later, of cir-
cumstances which seemed to afford an opportunity, such
as might not again occur, of obtaining the measure, in
mechanical units, of the total heat necessary to raise water
from 32° to 212°, the physically fixed points of temperature,
and of thus placing the heat, in mechanical units, on the
same footing as the unit of heat defined by temperature,
without the intervention of the scales of thermometers, that
the research was contemplated, and then after considerabie
hesitation.

The recognition of the responsibility even in attempt-
ing such a determination, and the harm to science that
might follow from further confusion owing to errors in
what, in spite of opportunities, must be the extremely
difficult task of making such a complex determination
within less than the thousandth part, together with
the author’s inability to devote the time necessary, pre-
vented any attempt until July, 1894. At that date
Mr. W. H. Moorby offered to devote himself to the
research, and so to relieve the author from all responsi-
bility except that which attached to the method and
appliances, so that having, from experience, formed the
highest opinion: of Mr. Moorby’s qualification, there
appeared no excuse for further delay, particularly as, after
seeing the appliances, both Lord Kelvin and Dr. Schuster
expressed strongly their opinions as to the value of the
research.

The opportunity for the research consisted in the
inclusion in the original equipment of the Whitworth
Engineering Laboratory, in 1888, of the following
appliances :

(1) A set of special vertical triple-expansion steam
engines, with separate boiler, closed stoke-hold and forced

4 REYNOLDS AND Moorpy, Eguzvalent of Heat.

blast, capable of running steadily at any speeds up to 400
revolutions a minute, and working up to 100 HLP.,
especially arranged to give access to the shaft three feet
above the floor.

(2) A special hydraulic brake dynamometer, on an
extension of the engine shaft. This brake, which is shown in
Figs. 1 and 2, is capable of absorbing any power up toa
maximum of 30 H.P. at 100 revolutions a minute, increasing
as the cube of the speed, so that it is capable of absorbing
the whole power of the engines at any speed above one
hundred revolutions a minute.

The whole of the work is absorbed by the agitation of
the water contained in the brake, while the heat so
generated is discharged steadily by a stream of water
through the brake, with no other functions than of affording
means of regulating the temperature of the brake, and
the quantity of water in it. The moment of resistance
of the brake is a definite function of the quantity of
water it contains. And as, except for this moment, the
unloaded brake is balanced on the shaft, the load being
suspended from a lever on the brake at four feet
from the axis of the shaft, if the moment of resistance
of the brake exceeds the moment of the load, the lever
rises and wzce versd. By making the lever actuate valves
which regulate the inlet and outlet streams, the quantity
of water in the brake is continually regulated to that
which is just sufficient to suspend the load with the lever
horizontal, and a constant moment of resistance is thus
maintained whatever may be the speed of the engines.

(3) Manchester Town’s water, of a purity expressed
by not more than 3 grains of salts to the gallon, brought ~
into the laboratory in a 4in. main at town’s pressure (25
to 5o0lbs. per square inch), and distributed either direct
from the main, or at constant pressure from a service tank
1oft. above the floor of the laboratory.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. ©. 5

(4) Two tanks, each capable of holding 60 tons of
water, one in the tower 116ft. above the floor, the other
15ft. below, connected by 4in. rising and falling mains,
each 500ft. long, passing through the laboratory in a
chase beneath the floor. The rising main includes a
special quadruple centrifugal pump, 2ft. above the floor,
capable of raising one ton a minute from the lower to
the upper tank, also a set of mercury balances in the
laboratory, showing the pressures in the rising and falling
mains and the levels in the two tanks.

(5) A special quadruple vortex turbine supplied from
the falling main, and discharging into the lower tank,
capable of 1 H.P., and available for steady speed at all
parts of the laboratory.

(6) A supply of power to the laboratory by an engine
and boiler, quite distinct from the experimental engine,
and distributed by convenient shafting always running.

The existence of these appliances, with all their speciali-
ties, was largely owing to the interest in educational work
taken by Mr. William Mather, who, together with the
other members of the firm of Mather & Platt, afforded
facilities to the author and inspired that enthusiasm in the
execution of the novel and special work which alone
rendered it possible.

Of these appliances the brake is the centre of interest,
as it was in this that the work has been measured as well
as converted into heat.

A description of this brake has already been published,
together with that of the engines,* and it is here only
described so far as is necessary for reference.

The brake consists primarily (1) of a brake wheel 18in.
in diameter, fixed on the 4in. brake shaft by set-pins, so
that it revolves with the shaft (Fzgs. 2 and 3), (2) of

* Triple Expansion Engines, by Professor Osborne Reynolds, Proc. Zust.
C.Z., 1889-90. Part I., p. 18.

6 REYNOLDS AND MOoorRbY, Eguzvalent of Heat.

a brake case (or brake) which encloses the wheel, the
shaft passing through bushed openings in the case, which |
it fits closely so as to prevent undue leakage, while leaving
the shaft and brake wheel free to turn in the case, except
for the slight friction of the shaft. (/2zgs. 1,2, and 3.)
The outline of the axial section of the brake wheel
(Fig. 3) is that of a right cylinder gin. thick. The cylinder
is hollow—in fact, made of two discs bolted together,
which form an internal boss for attachment to the
shaft, and also meet together at the periphery—forming a
closed annular box, except for apertures to be further
described. In each of the outer disc faces of the wheel
are 24 pockets (Fig.2) carefully formed, 4%in. radially, |
1%in. axially, but so inclined that the narrow partitions
or vanes (in. thick) are nearly semicircular discs inclined
at 45° to the axis; those in one of the disc faces being
perpendicular to the opposite vanes in the opposite face.
The internal disc faces of the brake case are the exact
counterparts of the disc faces in the wheel (except that
there are 25 pockets), so that the partitions, or guides, in
the case, are in the same planes as the vanes meeting them
in the wheel. The clearance between the two faces is ,yin.
The pairs of opposite pockets when they come together
form nearly closed chambers, having sections, parallel to
the vanes, nearly circular. In such spaces vortices inclined
at 45° to the axis of the shaft may exist, in which case
the centrifugal pressure on the outside of such vortices
will urge the case and wheel in opposite directions inclined
at 45° to the direction of motion of the wheel, which will
give a tangential component stress over the section of
the vortices, between the wheel and case, of I/,/2 of
the sum of the pressures in the vortices.
The existence and maintenance of these vortices is
ensured by the radial centrifugal force of the water in the
pockets of the wheel owing to its motion.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. ©. 7

This is the late Mr. William Froude’s arrangement,
but an essential feature of this brake is the provision
which secures atmospheric pressure at the centres of the
vortices, and admits of the pockets being only partially
filled.

The effect of the vortex motion is to ensure a greater
pressure towards the outside of the vortices than at their
centres, but, as the tangential stress is the mean pres-
sure over the section of the vortices, if the pressure at
the centres of the vortices is allowed to fall, this stress will
be diminished more or less. Thus, to secure regular stress,
it is necessary to secure regular pressure at the centres of
the vortices, and to obtain the maximum stress it is
necessary that the central pressure shall be that of the
atmosphere.

In order to secure these conditions, and at the same
time to allow of the pockets being only partially filled—
that is, to allow of hollow vortices with air cores at atmo-
spheric pressure—it is necessary that there should be free
access of air to the centres of the vortices. Such access
cannot be obtained through the water which completely
surrounds these centres between the vanes and guides.
It is therefore obtained by passages (Zin. in diameter)
within the metal of the guides, which lead into a common
passage opening to the air on the top of the case. (/7zgs. 2
and 3.)

In order to supply the brake with water, there are
similar passages in the vanes of the wheel leading from
the box cavity within, which again receives water through
ports (/zg 3), leading from an annular recess in one of the
disc faces of the case, into which water is led by means of
a flexible india-rubber pipe from the supply-regulating
valve. The water on which work has been done leaves the
vortex pockets through the clearance between the disc
surfaces of the wheel and the case, and enters the annular

8 REYNOLDS AND Moorsy, -guzvalent of Heat.

chamber between the outer periphery of the wheel and
the cylindrical portion of the case, which is always full of
water when the wheel is running, whence its escape is
controlled by a valve, in the bottom of the case, from which
it passes to waste.

By means of linkage, connected with a fixed support
and the brake-case, automatic adjustment of the inlet
and outlet passages is secured according to the position of
the lever, without affecting the moment on the brake-case,
and this linkage also affords a means of adjusting the
position of the lever when working. (/7zgs. 2 and 4.)

To admit of adjustment for wear the shaft is coned
over those portions which pass through the bushes, the
bushes being similarly coned to receive the shaft and
screwed into short sleeves on the casing, so that by
unscrewing them the wear can be followed up, and
undue leakage prevented. (Fags. 2 and 3.)

The brake levers, for carrying the load and balance
weights, are such as allow the load to be suspended from
a groove in the lever, parallel to the shaft, at 4ft. from the
shaft by a carrier with a knife-edge, the carrier and the
weights being each adjusted to 25lb. (Fags. 3 and 4.)

In addition to the load, a weight is suspended from
a knife-edge on the lever nearer the shaft, this load
being the piston of a dash-pot in which it hangs freely
except for the viscous resistance of the oil (/zg. 4). This
weight is adjusted to exert a moment of 100 foot-Ibs., and a
travelling weight of 48lb. is carried on the lever, and.
worked with a screw of Yin. pitch, so that one turn
changes the moment by two foot-lbs., while a scale on the
lever shows the position. A shorter lever on the opposite
side carries a weight 74°6lb. adjusted to balance the lever
and riding weight when the load and dash-pot are
removed.

The principle of these hydraulic dynamometers is that

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. ©. 9

when moment of momentum is introduced into a fixed
space without altering the moment of momentum within
that space, the rate at which moment of momentum leaves
the space must equal that at which it enters. The brake
wheel imparts moment of momentum to the water within
the case, and the friction of the shaft imparts moment of
momentum to the case. If, therefore, the moment of
momentum of the water in the case is steady, the water
must impart moment of momentum to the case as fast as
it receives it from the wheel, and the time-mean of the
moment of the load must be equal to the time-mean of the
moment of effort of the shaft, and this is not affected by
water entering or leaving the case as long as it enters and
leaves it radially. The condition of steadiness is, however,
essential in order that the moment of effort may at each
instant be equal to the moment of resistance, since any
change in the moment of momentum of the water is the
result of the difference of the moments of effort and
of resistance.

Fluctuations in the speed of running may thus cause
two classes of error, even when the load has been constant
all the time. (1) A terminal error resulting from a difference
in the moments of momentum of the water at starting and
ending the measurements. The relative magnitude of this
error is the difference of the terminal moments divided
by the product of the mean moment of the load and
the interval of time in seconds; so that as the length
of the time increases this will become indefinitely smaller.
(2) The difference between the time-mean of the moment
as measured by the load, and the angular mean of the
actual moment which measures the work. This error can
only occur where both the moment of effort on the wheel
and the velocity fluctuate. With the automatic adjust-
ment of the resistance, such fluctuations are limited to
those of so short a period that they do not give the water

10 REYNOLDS AND Moorsy, Eguzvalent of Heat.

time to adjust, that is, they are limited to the fluctuations
which occur in a single revolution of the engines. Fluc-
tuations of this kind occur in all reciprocating engines
from causes which are well-known and hence admit of
estimation, and by such estimation the limits of errors
from this cause have been found to be such that at 300
revolutions a minute the relative error would be less than
one forty-thousandth part.

Besides these fundamental errors, the effect of the
friction of the automatic gear (/zg. 4) had to be considered.
In designing the brakes, it was hoped that the slight
tremour to which they would be subject during their
motion, would so far relax this friction that the gear-
ing would adjust without pressure on the support, and
this proved to be the case. The question of the dash-pot
was also a matter of consideration; but so long as the
viscosity of the oil is constant, and the passage for the oil
to flow past the piston of constant dimensions, the time-
mean of the resistance is simply proportional to the
distance traversed divided by the time, so that, as the
piston does not move through o'! ft. in an hour, this also
became insensible.

The only other source of error in taking the product
of the angle turned through and the moment of the
load as measuring the work done, is possible end-play
of the wheel in the case. This is very slight ; it cannot
exceed z of an inch, while a side pressure of less than
5o0lbs. will always stop it; so that this again became
negligible.

The exact determination of the moment of the load
which involves the exact balance of the brake, and the >
measurement of the length of the lever and the weight of
the load was, of course, necessary for the exact measurement
of the work.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. ©. ie

The development of the thermal measurements.

The appliances were originally designed in 1887, for
the purpose of the study of the action of steam in the
engines and certain problems in hydraulics and dynam-
ometry, without any intention of their being used for the
purpose of determining the heat-equivalent of the work
absorbed. It was obvious that, as the measured work was
all spent in heating water, it was only necessary to
measure the change in temperature and quantity of the
water used to obtain an approximate estimate of the heat-
equivalent, but the recognitition of the extreme difficulty
of obtaining any first-hand assurance as to the accuracy
of scales of thermometers, and the fear of creating
erroneous impressions as to the value of the equivalent,
prevented the making ofany provision for the introduction
of thermometers in the first instance.

But after the engines and brake had been in use for
two years, and had been found to possess attributes in
steadiness of running and delicacy of adjustment and
balance beyond expectation, and particularly to be able to
work with an almost absolutely steady current of water
through the brake, doing steady work whatever the speed
and load, the author recognised that, by working two trials
-with the same thermometers, on the same parts of the scales,
and with the same loads and the same temperatures of
‘water, but at different speeds, since the relative balance of
the brakes would be the same, the difference of the results of
the two trials, made under the same surrounding tempera-
tures, would afford the means of determining the loss of heat
by radiation, and, this being known, the differences of two
trials, both made at the same water temperatures as the pre-
vious, and both at the same speed but with different loads,
would afford data for determining the error of balance,
without introducing the value of the equivalent, or the
scales of the thermometers except to identify equal

12 REYNOLDS AND Moorsy, Equzvalent of Heat.

temperatures. He then yielded to the general wish in
the laboratory, and added such provision to the brake as
would admit of the measurement of the heat carried away
by the effluent water, but only for verifying the accuracy
of the balance of the brake as determined by mechanical
tests, which, owing to the friction of the shaft, was difficult
and only practicable to about one foot-pound.

The supply of water to the brake came from the service
tank, 1oft. above the floor and 7ft. above the shaft; the
tank being supplied through a ball-cock direct from the
town’s main; the pipe from the tank passing under the
floor to a point conveniently close to the brake, thence by
a branch rising vertically through the floor, in which there
is a hand-cock, and above this, at a height of 4ft. above
the floor, the automatic inlet valve. From this the pipe
turns horizontal until over the inlet into the brake, where
it ends in a mouthpiece facing the inlet, with which it is
connected by a flexible india-rubber pipe (Fzgs. 1 and 4).
The first provision made for measuring the temperature of
the entering water was an aperture in the bend over the inlet
valve with a vertical 3gin. brass tube, soldered in, about 4in.
long; this admitted an india-rubber cork, through the
centre of which a thermometer was passed down into the
pipe. This was subsequently replaced by a glass thermo-
meter chamber.

To measure the temperature of the leaving water, it
was necessary, by means of a pipe fixed to the mouth of
the outlet valve, to lead the effluent stream above the
balancing lever of the brake and to one side of it. This pipe
was arranged so as to admit of the introduction of a ther-
mometer much in the same way as the other. In the first
instance, the extension-pipe and the thermometer were all
rigidly attached to the brake and moved with it, which
entailed a re-balance of the brake. Subsequently another
arrangement was made. The thermometers used in the

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. ©. 13

first instance were divided to fifths of a degree Fahrenheit ;
they were both immersed in the flowing water to within a
few degrees of the top of the mercury. They were com-
pared at equal temperatures, but otherwise subjected to no
tests for accuracy of scale.

During the experiments, the link connecting the inlet
valve to the automatic gear was removed, the valve
being set open and the supply regulated by the hand-cock
below. The pressure in the brake being that of the atmo-
sphere, and the head of water on the inlet constant at 7ft.,
when the hand-cock was set, the flow was steady. The
quantity of water in the brake then depended on the
automatic adjustment of the outlet valve, which, with the
exception of a little trouble at starting and stopping the
engines, soon overcome, kept the brake lever steady.

To admit of catching the water after leaving the out-
flow thermometer, the extension-pipe turned downwards
over the side of the lever into a small basin, with its lip
above the mouth of the pipe and from the basin the water
flowed into a short trough, from which it was caught in
buckets and carefully weighed. This was a primitive
arrangement, and required several assistants, but was found
capable of considerable accuracy up to about 4olb.a minute,

The engines were kept running at a constant speed
by keeping constant pressure in the boiler, the speed being
indicated on the speed gauge as well as recorded on the
counter.

The water coming from the town’s main was at nearly
constant temperature, between 40° and 50° Fahrenheit,
according to the time of the year, and varying less than a
degree throughout several trials.

The rise of temperature was adjusted by the quantity
of water admitted, according to the work, so that the final
temperatures, as well as the initial, were as nearly as possible
the same in the different trials.

14. REYNOLDS AND MOORBY, Aguzvalent of Heat.

The rise was generally such as admitted of the tem-
perature of the brake being the same as that of the labo-
ratory, which could always be adjusted to about 70° Fahr.
The rise was thus from 25° to 30°, which, with golb. of
water a minute, required from 25 to 30 H.P.

Before commencing the measurements everything
was adjusted, and the engines running at steady speeds
with constant load until the thermometer showed the tem-
perature to be steady. Then, at a signal, the counter was
put in gear and the water caught. The water thermometers,
and one showing the temperature of the laboratory, being
read at minute intervals over I5 or 30 minutes, when, on
a signal, the counter was removed and also the last bucket.

The results of these tests were very consistent within
about 0°3 per cent, which was within the limits of accuracy
then aimed at. Trials with equal loads and different
speeds showed that the loss of heat by radiation was very
small, while those at the same speeds with different loads
showed that the balance was within the limits determined
by mechanical tests.

In these trials the only correction was that for the
lubricating water which escaped from the brake bushes.
This was caught at each bush, and the temperature taken
so that the heat might be added, but this was seldom
more than 0°3 per cent. |

It is also to be noticed that in these trials the heat
lost or gained by conduction to or from the shaft was
included in the radiation. The brake being on an over-
hanging shaft, which extends no further than the outer
bush of the brake case, the only conduction is on the side
at which the shaft is continuous, where the brake shaft is
only some 4 inches from the brass of the shaft bearing.
The temperature of the brake on this side, which is
opposite to that at which the cold water enters, was kept
by the lubricating water at the temperature of the effluent

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xli. (1898), Wo. 6. 15

water, which was the temperature of the laboratory, so that
there would be no cause of conduction unless the tempera-
ture of the shaft bearing was raised by friction. When
the lubrication was good this was small, although on one
or two occasions it made itself felt.

The idea of raising the temperature from 32° to 212°.

These tests became an annual, and very instructive
exercise. But as the value of the equivalent was then a
subject of much discussion, the desire to obtain measures
of it from these trials by those engaged in them, resulted
in Mr. T. E. Stanton, M.Sc., then senior demonstrator in
the laboratory, effecting, for his own satisfaction, a com-
parison of the scales of the thermometers used in these
experiments with a thermometer used in the physical
laboratory, which had been corrected by the air ther-
mometer, and introducing the corrections into the results
of these trials, which so gave values very close to what
might be expected.

The author could not, however, see that determinations
based on such corrections could have any intrinsic value,
but as the matter was exciting great interest in the
laboratory, he carefully considered the conditions which
would be necessary to render the great facilities which the
brake was then seen to afford, available for an independent
determination.

The institution of an air thermometer was considered
and rejected, but it occurred to the author that it might
be possible to avoid the introduction of the scales of
thermometers just as before, and yet obtain the result.
If it could be arranged that the water should enter the
brake at the temperature of melting ice, and leave it at
the temperature of water boiling under the standard
pressure, all that would be required of the thermometers
would be the identification of these temperatures.

16 REYNOLDS AND Moorsy, Equzvalent of Heat.

At first the difficulties looked formidable, but on
trying by gradually restricting the supply of water to the
brake when absorbing 60 H.P., and finding that it ran quite
steadily with its automatic adjustment, till the temperature
of the effluent water was within 3° or 4° of 212°, he
further considered the matter, and formed preliminary
designs for what seemed to be the most essential appli-
ances to meet the altered circumstances. These involved :

(1) An artificial atmosphere; or a means of main-
taining a steady pressure in the air passages of the brake
of about four-thirds of an atmosphere.

(2) A circulating pump and a water cooler, by which
the entering water, some 30 pounds a minute, could be
forced through the cooler into the brake at a temperature
of 32°, having been cooled by ice from the temperature of
the town’s main.

(3) A condenser by which the effluent water leaving
the brake at 212° F., might be cooled down to atmospheric
temperature before being discharged into the atmosphere
and weighed.

(4) Such alteration in the manner of supporting the
brake on the shaft, as would prevent excess of leakage
from the bushes in consequence of the greater pressure of
air in the brake; since not only would the leaks be
increased, but, when the rise of temperature of the water
was increased to 180°, the quantity for any power would
be diminished to one-sixth of what it would be for 309, so
that any leakage would have six times the relative
importance.

(5) Some means which would afford assurance of the
elimination of the radiation and conduction, as with a rise ~
of 140°Fahr. above that of the laboratory, these would
probably amount to two or three per cent of the total heat.

(6) Scales for the greater facility and accuracy in
weighing the water, witha switch actuated by the counter.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. ©. i

(7) A pressure-gauge (or barometer) by which the
standard pressure for the boiling point might be readily
determined at 3° or 4° above or below the boiling point,
so as to admit of the ready and frequent correction of the
thermometers used for identifying the temperature of the
effluent water.

(8) Some means of determining the terminal diffe-
rences of temperature and quantity of water in the brake,
which would be relatively six times larger, with a rise of
1802 than with 30°.

Having convinced himself by preliminary designs,
not only of the practicability of the appliances, but also
of the possibility of their inclusion in the already much
occupied space adjacent to the brake, there stil] remained
much to be done in the way of experimental investigation
to obtain data for the determination of the requisite pro-
portions of the appliances, and these preliminary inves-
tigations were not commenced till the summer of 1894,
when Mr. Moorby undertook to carry on the research.

A convenient table weighing machine, with a tank to
hold 1 ton of water, was obtained and placed on the other
side of the passage, opposite the brake.

The outflow pipe was rearranged, a flexible tube being
used to take the water from the brake to a fixed thermo-
meter chamber. Glass thermometer chambers were
constructed, so that both the thermometers were wholly
immersed in the flowing water.

The effluent water was led from the thermometer
chamber over the passage to the switch into the tank.

The switch was constructed so that it would divert
the water from waste to the tank, or vice versé, without
any splash, and was subsequently connected with the
counter, so that they both moved together (F7zg. 6).

When these arrangements were completed, a series of
experiments was commenced by Mr. Moorby, similar to

18 REYNOLDS AND MooRBY, FLquzvalent of Heat.

those already described, with a view to test the improved
facilities, also to gain experience and facility in making
and recording the observations. The engines being
otherwise engaged two or three days in the week, every
opportunity was valuable.

At the same time, experiments were in progress to
ascertain the length of Iin. pipe necessary in order that
water (20lbs. per minute) flowing through it might be
cooled from 212° to 75°, when the pipe was jacketed by a
stream of town’s water at 50°. As the result of these a
condenser 30ft. long was constructed.

After passing the condenser, the water was led verti-
cally to a height of 5ft. above the chamber, thence past
an air gap down again to the switch, so as to maintain a
head of sft. in the chamber, to prevent bubbles forming
in the water on account of the air it contained. This
height was subsequently raised to 1 Tft.

In order to cool the water as nearly as practicable,
without danger of ice being carried over, the cooler was
designed so that the ice should be outside the pipe through
which the water passed. This clearly required a con-
siderable length of pipe, so that the resistance had to be
taken into account. As the result of experiments, 200ft.
of 3gin. composition pipe was used in a coil, it being
estimated that this would pass 2olbs. a minute, with a loss
of pressure of 30lbs. on the square inch. This was placed
in a tank of paraffined wood, and a paddle worked by the
line shaft constantly circulated the water ; the arrange-
ment being designed to secure the coldest water passing
along the coil.

To obtain the necessary head—3olbs. for the coil, 5
for the brake, and 25 for regulation—it was necessary
to pump the water. It was also necessary that the flow
should be steady. To obtain these ends, recourse was had
to the 3in. quadruple turbine, driven by the water from

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. ©. 19

the tower, to drive a 1%in. quintuple centrifugal pump in
the circuit of the water between the service tank and the
cooler, and in this way the requisite steady head was
obtained. |

These preliminary investigations and the construction
of the appliances, so far described, were not completed till
May, 1895. It then became possible to make experi-
ments as to the working of the brake under pressure and
at high temperatures, so as to obtain guidance as to the
artificial atmosphere and means of controlling leakage at
the bushes. These showed that the artificial atmosphere
would be a simple matter. A strong vessel, made of tin
plate, with a capacity of three gallons, was connected with
the air passage on the top of the brake by a flexible tube.
The vessel had two openings at the top besides that con-
nected with the brake—one with a cock, to admit of air
being forced in; the other with a fine screw stop, to allow
of a definite escape of air. There was also a cock at the
bottom, to drain water which might accidentally get
in. A syringe was used for pumping in air at starting,
while, during the trials, the small amount of air released
from the water was more than sufficient to maintain the
pressure.

On the other hand, these experiments showed that the
increased leakage at the bushes was a very serious matter,
and must be controlled.

The first step was to enclose the open end of the shaft
by,a cap screwed on to the bush, and the side on which
the shaft was continuous by a stuffing-box, having small
apertures controlled by cocks to regulate the outflow of
water for lubrication. (/7g. 5.) The result was, however,
far from satisfactory, as the lubricating water flowing out
from_the brake not only raised the shaft to a high tem-
perature, but was itself of uncertain temperature. It
was in July, 1895, that this experience was obtained, and

20 REYNOLDS AND Moorpsy, Aquzvalent of Heat.

for a time the success of the research seemed doubtful. It
necessitated the reconsideration of the whole scheme of
working. This revealed to the author that it would be
possible to reverse the course of the lubricating water,
make it flow in at the bushes instead of out, and so not only
maintain lubrication, but also cool the bushes and shaft.
That this would be the result of forcing the water in at the
bushes was tolerably obvious, but what was not obvious
at first, was that there was already provision in the form
of excess of pressure in the inflow pipe, between the cooler
and the supply-regulating valve, to maintain this flow, by
merely admitting a portion of the cooled water into the
bushes by by-pipes with regulators, without passing it
into the thermometer chamber. This water being taken
from the inflow pipe before the rest passed into the
thermometer chamber would be nearer 32°, but would be
warmed by the radiation into the by-pipe, so that it would
enter at a slightly uncertain temperature, but this would
be a radiation effect, and would be eliminated with the
other radiation effects. As soon as this became clear, the
success of the research became assured. The work was
executed by Mr. Foster, and, when complete, rendered it
possible to keep the bushes at any required temperature.
In the preliminary trials this temperature was ascer-
tained by touch, and regulated to that of the laboratory
as nearly as possible, the cocks being set to a definite
opening, and the excess of pressure maintained as nearly
constant as possible. This plan was found to give con-
sistent results. But it appeared that, in order to maintain
the same temperature in the stuffing-box with the heavy
as with the light trials, the pressures in the pipe being the ~
same, it was necessary to open the branch cock
wider in the heavy trials, on account of the greater
vortex pressure in these trials. In commencing the
final trials, the same setting of the cocks was maintained

Manchester Memotrs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. ©. 21

in all the trials, a record being kept; so that, should any
means of determining more definitely the relative slopes
of temperature in the shaft be found, it could be used
retrospectively.

Such a means of determining the relative slopes of
temperature in the shaft between the stuffing-box and the
near brass was obtained by sweating brass thermometer
tubes, radiating outwards, on to the end of the stuffing-box
and on to the brasses of the near bearing. It appeared to
the author that these thermometers, although they did not
indicate the temperature of anything in particular, would
serve, the conditions being steady, by the difference of
their readings to identify similar conditions as to slopes
of temperature, and this turned out to be the case. A
flood of light was thrown on to conditions which before
had been hardly perceptible, and it became possible to
observe the smallest differences in the slopes of tempera-
ture, thus ensuring the elimination of the conduction of
the shaft (which had threatened to be a considerable, and
the only considerable, source of error) to within 000002
of the heat in a single trial, and altogether negligible on
the mean of 42 trials.

In order to relieve Mr. Hall, who had charge of the
engines, from the necessity of maintaining the speed
constant, a hand brake was arranged on one of the pulleys,
by which the speed could be adjusted by one of the
assistants, so as to keep the speed within something like
03%. And the quantities of water in the brake for
various loads and speeds having been ascertained by
experiments, the terminal errors were obtained from the
records of the initial and final speeds and temperatures.

The method of conducting the trials was designed to
secure the most perfect elimination possible of the heat
lost by radiation, and with this view, after the experience
obtained in preliminary trials, it was arranged that all trials

22 REYNOLDS AND MOORBY, Eguzvalent of Heat.

should be in pairs at 300 revolutions a minute, the loads
at first being—
Heavy trials 1,200 foot-lbs., about 70 H.P. on the brake
ieht. GOO Tootlpse) ees dines
The time of runnine one hour for each trialaine
thermometers in the inlet and outlet chambers, also the

”

temperature of the laboratory to be read every two
minutes and maintained as constant as possible, and
subsequently the thermometer on the stuffing-box and
brasses to be read every eight minutes, and the speed
gauge read every two minutes. The setting of the cocks
and the pressures in the supply pipe and artificial atmo-
sphere also recorded. All observations being recorded
in ink in a book, and kept distinct from any reductions.

It was impossible to make trials simultaneously. And
as the possible opportunities were subject to the regular
work of the laboratory, in order to secure similar con-
ditions as far as possible, it was at first arranged that
each set should consist of at least four pairs of trials,
taken in such order that the four heavy trials were not
only made at hours of the day, but also on days in
the week similar to those of the corresponding light trials.

Each such set of trials would afford means of
determining the approximate radiation-constant, and
show how far the radiation had been eliminated.

In order to obtain still further definite assurance of
the elimination, it was arranged that, after consistent
results had been obtained in several groups of four pairs
of trials with the brake naked, the brake should be
covered with non-conducting material in the best way
practicable, so as to greatly reduce the radiation, at the ©
‘same time leaving it definite, and then similar trials
should be run. In this way, if the radiation could be
reduced to one-fourth part of that with the naked brake,
such error as there might be in the elimination with the

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No.6. 23

naked brake would be reduced to one-fourth part with
the covered brake, provided no fresh errors, owing to the
time taken to get the lagging at a steady temperature or
owing to its absorption of moisture, intervened. Further,
it was arranged that a similar plan should be adopted to
obtain assurance of the elimination of errors resulting-
from each detailed circumstance that could effect the loss
of heat, namely, that, where such circumstance could not
be removed, its effect should be definitely varied and a
fresh set of trials run, which plan seemed to afford the
best possible means of determining the limits of error.

The leakage of water from the three working joints
of the brake was a matter of first consideration and
continual care. By continual attention to the stuffing-
box and gland it was reduced to a very small amount. In
so far as the leakage was equal in the light and heavy
trials, the effect of such leakage would be eliminated ;
and, to ensure this, the water was caught, its temperature
on leaving the brake measured, and the losses of heat
allowed for, so that the possible limits of error from this
cause, which were very small, were somewhat definitely
ascertained.

The losses of water by evaporation from the surface
in the tank, &c., were rendered as nearly as possible equal
for the light and heavy trials by cooling all the water tc
a fixed temperature before exposure to the atmosphere,
it being arranged that, after the experiments were over,
the appliances should be so altered as to admit of the
water in the weighing tank at the working temperatures
being forced round the same circuit from the weighing
tank back to the weighing tank, for one hour, at the rates
of entrance in the light and heavy trials respectively, so
that the actual losses in each of these trials should be
ascertained.

By these means, definite estimates of the outside limits

24. REYNOLDS AND Moorpsy, £gucvalent of Heat.

of the error that might arise from each of the circumstances
affecting the relative accuracy were provided, thus assuring
the accuracy of the results obtained within these limits, in
terms of the standard of measurements—length or tem-
perature—to which they are referred. These limits are
given in a table at the end of this Part.

The Standards of Measurements.

During the inception of the research, the appliances
for standardising the results had been in course of prepa-
ration, in accordance with the system mest mentioned
as designed by the author.

Since the absolute quantity of mass does not enter
into the results, it was only necessary to use a common
standard in comparing the masses of water with the
masses which formed the load on the brake. And for this
purpose 12 of the 25lb. cast-iron weights used for the
load on the brake were adjusted by balance, with a limit
of accuracy of oo1lb. of each other ; then the scales, after
being reset by Mr. Foster, were surveyed with the adjusted
weight and the corrections fully determined. As the
weights on the scales, as well as the adjusted weights
exclusively used on the brake, were of the same material,
it was not necessary to apply any correction for the weight
of the atmosphere’ to these. |” Amd, since the water as
balanced by cast-iron and the load is balanced by cast-iron,
a correction for the weight of the atmosphere displaced by
the iron would leave the relation between the load and
the water the same; so that the only correction was for
the weight of the atmosphere displaced by the water.

The standard capacity for heat being that of distilled
water, this would have been employed in the experiments
had it been practicable. But since, letting alone the extra
appliances, the cooling the 100 tons of water from a tem-
perature, say, of 72° to 32°, would have required more than

Manchester Memozrs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No.@. = 25

30 tons of ice, while with the water from the town’s mains,
at a mean temperature from February to June of 45° F.,
about Io tons would suffice, town’s water was used. And
had it not been for the known purity of this water, the
research would not have been attempted.

As affording definite assurance of the purity of the
water, Professor Harold B. Dixon kindly furnished the
result of the analysis he makes periodically for the Corpo-
ration from water drawn in the College. From this it
appears that the effect of the salts dissolved is nearly
negligible.

A much more important consideration was the effect
of the air which is dissolved in all water, and particularly
distilled water. It may be taken that the water used for
the standard capacity of heat always contains this air, and
it is only in such experiments as these in which the
temperature of the water is raised to within one-third of
an atmosphere of its boiling point that this air can
produce any sensible effect, and it does not appear that
this effect has hitherto been noticed. It is, of course, well
known that when water is heated, before it boils, what are
called air-bubbles rise to the surface, but on consideration
it will appear that these are not altogether, nor chiefly, air-
bubbles, but are filled with saturated steam corresponding
to the temperature of the water, the function of the air
being merely to support the excess of pressure whatever
it may be. Hence the volume of these bubbles represents, .
in addition to the heat of the water evaporated, the latent
heat of this water, and this, taking the weight of air as 0°003
per cent. of the water (the usual amount) and the excess
of pressure 14 atmosphere, the effect would be a relative
error of 0':0003. [t was to prevent this that the back
pressure in the thermometer chamber was made as large
as practicable. In this way, if the proportion of air
leaving the water could be ascertained, allowance could be

26 REYNOLDS AND MOORBY, Eguzvalent of Heat.

made, and it was arranged that, after the trials, experi-
ments should be made to determine this. For, although
the limits of this error were within 0:03 per cent., they
were much the largest in the research.

For the standard of length a series of Whitworth
gauges and a brass scale, by Elliott, were used ; and from
these a bar was prepared by Mr. Foster having parallel
plane ends 30 inches apart, to be used for reference in all
measurements, and preserved.

The standard of temperature being the interval
between the temperature of ice melting under the pressure
of the atmosphere and that of water boiling at the sea
level in latitude 45°, under a pressure of 760 mm. of ice-
cold mercury, reference to the barometer was necessary.

To verify thermometers at the higher temperatures
with facility at any time, irrespective of the pressure of
the atmosphere, and to secure ready verification of the
absolute distance between the upper and lower surfaces of
the mercury, the author designed a special barometer, in
which the light over each of the surfaces of the mercury
is cut off by the separate adjustment of two cylindrical
brass curtains, the upper curtain screwing down over a
slotted cylindrical prolongation of the lower curtain, which
encases the tube and the lower vessel, screwing down on
the latter, So that when, the trmuly turned lips wofthe
curtains are adjusted to read the barometer, say at 30’,
the lower curtain can be screwed off the barometer and
placed vertically over the 30” bar standing on end on a
surface plate, so that the lip of the curtain rests on the
plate, when, as the relative positions of the curtains have
not been altered, the light over the top of the bar should ~
be just as it was seen over the mercury. The lower vessel
is a cylindrical cast-iron bottle, with parallel plate-glass
windows, and with the tube passing out through a stuffing-
box, there being an aperture furnished with a nozzle for

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «lit. (1898), No. 6. 27

connection with the vapour chamber in which the
thermometers were placed.

The execution of this was undertaken by Mr. Foster,
who has produced a very beautiful instrument, the mercury
being re-evaporated in apparatus belonging to Dr. Schuster
by his assistant, Mr. A.T. Stanton. The readings are easily
taken, and verified to the ten-thousandth of an inch.

The correction on the thermometer for 32°F. was
obtained in the usual way; but as there was no ready
means, as with the higher temperature, of testing the
scale of the thermometer for two or three degrees above
32°, this correction could only be made by comparison
with the thermometer already compared with the air
thermometer, and these comparisons Dr. Schuster kindly
allowed to be made in the physical laboratory.

The corrections of the thermometers on account of the
pressures in the thermometer chambers were also deter-
mined, while the limits of error, owing to the slight excess
of the low temperature over 32°, were carefully considered
and defined.

The question as to what should be done in the way of
rejecting trials was also a subject of first consideration.
It was certain that in sucha research accidents must occur,
and it was necessary to have some rule so as to prevent any
sorting of the trials. It was therefore arranged to reject
all trials in which there was definite evidence, either during
the trial or in the results, of uncertainty in any one of the
measurements to which no definite limits could be assigned,
without regard to the apparent consistency of the results,
and to retain all other trials.

After the conclusion of the trials, on opening the
brakes, an estimate of the wear of the metal was made,
from which estimates of the possible absorption of work
in disintegrating the metal and of the production of heat
in oxidizing the metal were obtained.

28

REYNOLDS AMD Moorsy, Aquzvalent of Heat.

The several circumstances on which the accuracy of
the results of the investigation depends, together with the
relative limits of error as determined for each circumstance,
and the formulz of the relative corrections to be applied,

are as follows :—

Circumstances and Formule of Correction..

IO.

Il.

12.

1/3)

ital,

15.
TO}

. Yerminal differences in the moments

of momentum of the water in the
brake

Cyclic fluctuations of f speed of ae
engines

Work done on water by cn play
of the shaft.. be

. Work done in a aed
. Effect of the automatic gear on the

balance of the brake

Imperfect elimination of the error of
balance of the brake

. Imperfect elimination of the heat

conducted by the shaft
SC dye Tye)
Imperfect elimination of the heat
radiated from the brake
— R2(T3 - T?)/2()
The engagement of the counter
+ 0000013

The terminal difference of speed and
temperature
— 2{(B+ W,)T3 — (B + W,)T?}/3(H)

Leakage of the stuffing- Pex

~ 2W,,(T T)/3(H)
Leakage at the ee valve,
0°000000

Imperfect elimination of water lost
by evaporation

Limits of accuracy in weighing the
water Ke er
Weight of sueidunacoHee — 0°001 204

Correction for gravity to latitude
_ of Greenwich

Outside Limits of Relative

Errors.

0°000000, — 0°005000
0°000025, — 0000025

O*OOCOI7, — O0°000000
O°GO0000, — 0’000000

0°000016, — o’000016

0*O000000, — 0°000000

O0*O0O00000, — 0°000000

O*OOOOIO, — O'OO0O0I0

0°000000, — 0°000000

O*O000000, — 0°000000
0°000000, — 0000025 |
O0°OO00000, — O0°OO00000

0*000000, — 0°O00000

0'000025, — 0'000025

©*O000COO, — 0000000

Circumstances and Formulae of Correction.

I7.

18.

IQ.
20.
21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «lit. (1898), No. ©. 29

Outside Limits of Relative

Errors.
Correction for gravity to latitude
ani. x Hie i oe
Salts dissolved by the water + 0°85... | 0*’000000, — 0°000000
Air is 55 — 10°31@| 0000100, - 0000100
Length of lever va oa ... | 07000020, — 0000020

Effect of pressure on the thermo-
meters — 3{ W(ef; — @.f2)}/2180°W) | o'0000I0, — o'000010
Rise of the standard reading of the
thermometers in the intervals of
correction; + 0°5 (difference of rise
/number of intervals) /180 ... | ©'000000, — 0°000000

Difference between the initial tem-
perature of the water and freezing ;
— 0'0000282{ W(T,’ — 32°) }/2(W) | 0000000, — 0'000000

Work done by gravitation on the

water .—
— 0'0000083{W(Pi—P2)}/2W | o:000000, — 0000000
Work absorbed in wear of metal ...| o:oo0010, — o‘o000T0
Total Limits of Error ... ... | + 0°000233, — 0'000241

The quantities under 2 ( _) in the denominators of

the corrections are to be taken positive for the large trials,
negative for the small.

The significance of the symbols are as follows :—

C, the constant of conduction obtained: from the trials.

R, the constant of radiation obtained by trials with the
brake naked and lagged.

s and a, the relative weights of salts and air in the water.

Pi, 62, the pressure in inches of mercury in the initial and
final thermometer chambers.

€, ¢, the corrections, per inch of mercury pressure, on the
initial and final thermometers.

W the weight of water in a trial; W,g the weight lost at the
stuffing box; W, weight of water in the brake at beginning,
W, at end of trial.

T°’ temperature Fahrenheit; T? of water entering; T? of

effluent water ; T%, at stuffing-box; Tg at bearing; Ty, of

air; T? at beginning, T?% at end of trial.

H, heat generated during a trial.

B, capacity of heat for the metal of the brake.

30 REYNOLDS AND Moorsy, Equzvalent of Heat.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «lit. (1898), Wo. 6.

3I

32 REYNOLDS AND Moorny, Eguzvalent of Heat.

%
3
s
Ky

fy

s
‘ay,
Q
Dy
%
S

~
\
gf “Ry f
Y -sff

UYfee:

N ZL to
; — oF ree
aS ramon os

: totale WVU“ Wea, 0

Util. DAG nw
fee oan xe MK
Z
GY

.
4 i a. ,

Wa

TETUPLTIVEVEL IIIT.

Vi q
fy 4
(f(t)
Ra mt
Ee a

QQ MAMMA WINS

N \ :

SSsssassty Pp

Lig. 4.

aa

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «lit. (1898), No. 6.

Ie

1 oi
‘ ‘
‘ '
i ‘

OOOO 71GH7 s

34 REYNOLDS AND MOORBY, Equivalent of Feat.

Fig. 6.

SS

i

SS SSVSSSV7sw wwe

Mss”

La

ESS

“.
.
’
4

~

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898) No. 6. 35

PART, TE

On an Experimental Determination of the Mechanical
Equivalent of the Mean Specific Heat of Water
between 32° and 212° Fahrenheit, made in the
Whitworth Engineering Laboratory, Owens College,
on Professor Reynolds’ Method.

By WILLIAM HENRY Mooresy, M.Sc.

1. General plan of the Investigation.

The Whitworth Engineering Laboratory, at the
Owens College, is supplied, among other apparatus, with
a 100 H.P. experimental engine, the whole of the work, if
desired, being absorbed by one of Prof. Reynolds’
hydraulic brakes. This brake maintains a steady turning
moment on the shaft, which we may represent by M, for
any trial. If N be the number of revolutions of the shaft
in any time, then the total work done in the interval is
U=27MN. The whole of this work is expended in
raising the temperature of a stream of water flowing
through the brake.

Let W=total weight of water in the interval, and
aT =rise of temperature in the brake ; then, neglecting all
losses by radiation, &c., the heat generated = H = W.aT.

For some years past experimental determinations of
the heat generated in the brake have been made to obtain
evidence of the adjustment of the brake, to the limits of
accuracy of the thermometers used, by equating the heat,
multiplied by 772, to the work as measured. The chief
difficulty met with in the endeavour to obtain reliable
results by this method was in the calibration of the scales
of the thermometers

36 REYNOLDS AND Moorsy, £gaucvalent of Heat.

In July, 1894, on my applying to him for some
research work, Prof. Reynolds asked me to undertake the
experimental part of a research (the method and appli-
ances having been already devised) on the work expended
in heating water from the freezing to the boiling point.

The method suggested was substantially that set
forth below.

The stream of water was to be supplied to the brake
at a temperature approaching as nearly as possible
to 32°F., and was to be raised to a temperature of 212°F.
before being discharged from it.

If these temperatures could be kept steady at the
points indicated, two thermometers, the one in the supply
pipe and the second in the discharge pipe, would be
required ; and their only function would be to supply a
means of comparing, in the first case, the temperature of
supply to that of melting ice, and, in the second case,
the temperature of discharge to that of steam at the
standard atmospheric pressure. Thus the calibration of
their scales would be of no consequence.

In order to eliminate losses of heat by conduction
along the shaft and by radiation from the brake, the trials
were always to be made in pairs, the one carrying a
moment of 1,200 ft.-lbs. on the brake, and the second a
moment of 600 ft.-lbs. The duration of each trial was to
be the same, viz., one hour. Consequently, since the same
difference of temperature would exist in each case between
the final temperature of the water and the surrounding
air, the loss of heat by radiation would be sensibly the
same in both, and the difference of work done in the
two trials should be exactly equivalent to the difference of ~
apparent heat generated; and by dividing the first of
these quantities by the second, a value of the constant
required would be obtained.

In addition to the very obvious advantages contained

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «lit. (1898), No. ©. 37

in the plan suggested above, the power available for the
purposes of the research enabled me to deal, in trials of
one hour’s duration, with quantities approaching the
following values :—

Revolutions, 18,000. .

Total work done, 135,000,000 ft.-lbs.

Total weight of water raised 180°F., g6olbs.

Total apparent heat generated, 170,000 B.T.U.
In quantities so large as these, some of the small errors
inevitable to all physical experiments became quite or
nearly negligible.

2. Arrangement of the apparatus.

Before the experiments could be begun it was
necessary to specially arrange the line of piping supplying
water to and discharging it from the brake. The course
taken by the water in the apparatus as completed was
as follows (zg. 6) :—

From the mains in the laboratory it was forced by a
centrifugal circulating pump through a length of about
200ft. of 3gin. diam. composition pipe, immersed in a
well-stirred mixture of ice and water, with the object of
cooling it to 32°F. From this pipe the water flowed into
a glass tube carrying the thermometer which indicated
the temperature of supply to the brake, the whole stem of
the thermometer being immersed in the water and the
readings being taken through the glass walls of the
chamber. From this chamber the water was delivered
through a flexible rubber pipe to the brake. Here its
temperature was raised to 212°F. before being forced
through a second rubber pipe into the fixed discharge
pipe, which carried a second thermometer jacketted like
the former one with the water whose temperature was
required. The water was then cooled by passing through
an iron condenser of the ordinary chemical pattern, and

38 REYNOLDS AND MOORBY, £qauzvalent of Heat.

delivered through a two-way tipping switch, either
waste or into a tank which stood on the platform of a weigh-
ing machine. When the engine was running steadily, the
discharge temperature could be regulated to the required
point by means of a valve inserted in the supply pipe
between the ice-cooler and first thermometer. If this
valve was opened, more water was admitted to the brake,
and consequently the temperature of discharge fell and vzce
versa. By this means the temperature of discharge in
most of the trials rarely varied by as much as 2° from the
desired point, viz., 212°, and the mean temperature of
discharge, as obtained from 30 observations in each trial,
never varied by as much as 1° from 212”.

The temperature of supply varied between 32°7° and
34°3° according as the temperature of the water in the
town’s mains was lower or higher. In any one trial the
supply temperature was exceedingly steady, often not
varying through an interval of o'1° through an hour’s run.

3. Lhe various losses of heat.

As it was likely that in a pair of trials the losses of
heat would not be exactly the same, and that, therefore,
some error would appear in the differences of work and
heat used in the determination of the equivalent, an
estimate was made of the losses of heat occurring by
different means in any trial.

These losses were as follows :—

(1) Loss by radiation :

The total loss in a trial was assumed to be propor-
tional to the mean difference of temperature between the
water discharged and the air of the engine room, this
latter temperature being always taken from a thermometer
standing in a definite position. A quantity R, represent-
ing the loss by radiation per trial per unit difference of
temperature between the brake and the air was deter-

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), Vo. 6. 39

mined, so as to make the value of the equivalent given by
the heavy trials alone equal to that given by the light
trials alone.

This quantity varied from 36°86, in trials made with
the brass of the brake exposed directly to the air, to 7°98
in trials made with the brake covered with loose cotton
lagging.

(2) Loss by conduction along the engine shaft.

This was assumed to vary as the difference in the
readings of two thermometers, placed, the one on the
stuffing-box making the joint between the brake and the
shaft, and the other on the lower brass of one of thesmain
shaft bearings distant some 234 inches from the cover of
the stuffing-box.

From the first 42 accepted trials this loss was calcu-
lated to be 12 thermal units per unit difference of
temperature between stuffing-box and bearing per trial.
The conical brass bushes forming the bearings of the
brake itself were lubricated by forcing a stream of ice-cold
water from the supply pipe, through each into the brake.
Consequently, by regulating the amount of this water
supplied to the stuffing-box, I had a very delicate control
over the temperature gradient along the shaft. In the
later trials I endeavoured to make this gradient zero, and
thus cut out altogether any loss of heat by conduction.

(3) Loss by leakage of water from the envelope formed
by the supply and discharge pipes, the brake and the tank.

The only leakage of consequence was that which
might occur after the water entered the brake.
The brake itself had three working joints.
Ist.—The stuffing-box on the engine shaft.
2nd.—The smaller stuffing-box through which passed
a pin, making the connection between the shaft
and the revolution counter.

40 REYNOLDS AND Moorsy, Eguzvalent of Heat.

3rd.—The regulating valve controlling the flow of —

. water from the brake.

Some leakage occasionally occurred at the shaft
stuffing-box. This was all caught in the later trials, and
the heat generated in it per lb. was assumed to vary as
difference of the temperatures of the stuffing-box cover
and of the water in the supply pipe.

The second stuffing-box worked absolutely dry.
Leakage always occurred at the regulating cock. This
consisted of hot water, and a special device was made to
catch it so as to ensure no loss by evaporation. The
water, thus caught was weighed with the main stream
which had entered the tank, and credited with the full
rise of temperature between the supply and discharge
pipes. A fourth working joint in the envelope was at the
point where the discharge pipe emptied itself into the
tank. A determination of the loss that might occur in
the end of the discharge pipe and tank was: made by
pumping the water continuously for an hour up from the
tank, and back to it through the discharge pipe, which
had been disconnected from the brake for the purpose.
The loss was found to be very nearly Ib. in all trials,
and, since it would be eliminated almost entirely on the
difference of heat, it was neglected altogether.

A further correction was often necessary to the

apparent heat obtained on account of the change in tem-
perature of the brake itself, together with its water content,
during a trial. The amount of contained water varied.
with the speed of revolution. Accordingly a curve was
plotted giving, for different speeds and loads, the thermal
equivalents of the brake and contents.
At 300 revs. and 1200 ft.-lbs. this was 57°6 lbs. of water.
- ; 50) $OOn aes - 54°60 » ;
The gain or loss of heat by the brake was added to or
subtracted from the apparent heat obtained.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. © 41

4. The method of conducting the experiments was as follows:

During the progress of the experiments I had the
assistance of two menanda boy. The first of the men
had to keep the boiler pressure constant and attend
generally to the needs of the engine. The second had
charge of a small hand-brake, by means of which the
speed of revolution could be delicately adjusted, and
further, it was his duty to keep a constant pressure of air
in a receiver which was in direct communication with the
inner surfaces of the water vortices formed in the brake.
This receiver had been attached to the brake in place of a
former free communication with the atmosphere, which
would have allowed the water in the brake to boil away
when the temperature rose to 212°F. ‘The boy’s time was
fully occupied in charging the ice-cooler with. ice.

In the last series of experiments three similar trials, of
62 minutes duration each, were made per day, the engine
never being stopped after the start till all three trials were
completed. Consequently, what is said below as to the
starting of the engine, only refers to the first trial made
on any day.

I. The pump and engine were started simultaneously,
the brake being therefore supplied with a stream of water
from the ice-cooler. The brake then automatically
adjusted the amount of the contained water till the load
floated steadily clear of the floor. The engine speed was
then adjusted to the requisite point, viz., 300 revolutions
per minute, as indicated by a speed gauge.

Il. The temperature of discharge of the water then
rose more or less quickly, on account of the work done on
it inthe brake. By adjusting the regulating valve in the
supply pipe, the discharge temperature finally remained
steady at about 212°F. The water supply to the stuffing-
box was also regulated so as to get the desired difference

42 REYNOLDS AND MoorRBY, £quzvalent of Heat.

of temperature between the brake and the adjacent shaft-
bearing. These adjustments took from a quarter to half
an hour, and, when completed, the engine was allowed to
run for some half-hour longer to ensure a steady condition
being attained. The condensing water had also, in the
meantime, been adjusted till the water issuing from the
discharge pipe had the required temperature.

III. Readings were then taken of :—

(a) the revolution counter,
(2) the weight of the empty tank and its cover.

IV. When a steady condition was reached, on a
signal being given, the connection of the revolution
counter with the engine shaft was made simultaneously
with the pulling over, by a system of links, of the two-way
tipping switch, and the stream of water which had hitherto
been flowing to waste was thus diverted into the tank.

The vessels used to catch the leakage from the stuffing-
box and regulating cock were placed under their res-
pective drain pipes.

The speed of the engine, as indicated by the gauge,
was read on the signal being given, and as soon as
possible afterwards an observation was made of the tem-
perature in the discharge pipe.

V. At intervals of 2 minutes, 30 observations were
then taken of the temperatures of supply and discharge of
the water to and from the brake, and also at each of these.
intervals a note was made of the indication of the speed
gauge.

At intervals of 4 minutes, 15 observations were made
of the thermometer registering the temperature of the
room ; and at intervals of 8 minutes readings were taken
of the two thermometers in the stuffing-box and on the
main bearing.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. ©. 43

VI. When 62 minutes had elapsed, the counter was
disengaged from the shaft, and at the same time the
stream of water was again diverted to waste. The drain
pipes from the stuffing-box and regulating cock were
removed from their respective vessels. Readings were
taken of the speed indicator and of the temperature of
discharge.

VII. Fresh observations were made of :—

(a) the reading of the revolution counter,

(0) the weight of the tank and water received during
the trial, to which had been added the water
caught from the regulating cock.

A record was also made of :—
(¢) the weight of water which had been caught at the
stuffing-box.

5. Lhe observations were then reduced as follows :

Let T, = mean temperature of water supplied to the brake,

je y _ discharged from _,,
W.=weight of tank and contents before the trial,
= , M! = after! .;

w =weight of water caught from stuffing-box,

# =rise of reading of the thermometer in the dis-

charge pipe during the trial,
T =mean temperature of the stuffing-box cover,
. ae i ,» lower brass of the main
bearing,
T, =mean temperature of the air,
N, =reading of revolution counter before the trial,
Ne = = % - after ‘
M =moment in ft.-lbs. carried by the brake.

Therefore we have for the total heat generated

H= (Wz — W,)(T2 = T)) as w(T, as T) +Z2.x
+ (Tee TCS (T= TR:

44 REYNOLDS AND MOooRBY, Eguzvalent of Heat.

where #4. stands for the terminal correction to the heat
due to change of temperature of the brake, and

C =conduction-constant per unit diff. of temperature.

R =radiation-constant ¥ i.

Also the total work done
U =27r(M + m)(N2—-Nj),
where m=error of balance of the brake.

If the capitals Hi and U refer ‘to trials, (mith
large turning moment on the brake, and the small letters
A and w refer to trials with a small turning moment,
then for the value of the mean specific heat of water
in mechanical units we have

U-u
H--z
The letter K is used here in preference to the usual nota-

tion J, since the constant obtained is not strictly the
same as that determined by Joule and other experi-
menters ; for it must be borne in mind that we are here
dealing with the mean specific heat of water between
the freezing and boiling points.

6. The reliabilety of the measurements.

I was personally responsible for every observation
taken, with the exception of the two readings of the speed
gauge taken at the beginning and end of each trial, and
also for the checking of all the apparatus used in the
research.

The measurements fall generally under two heads.

le
Lhe measurement of work.

This involved the balance of the brake, the length of
the lever, the determination of the values of the weights
used in loading the brake, and the counting of the revo-
lutions.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 6. 45

(a) Balancing the brake.

This was an extremely difficult operation to perform,
owing to the large amount of friction which occurred
between the brake and the engine shaft. A number of
experiments were made which shewed that the want of
balance could not exceed ¥% ft.-lb. This want of balance
would make an error in the work calculated for each
individual trial, but on the difference of work done in any
two trials the error was completely eliminated if each had
the same number of revolutions. Consequently, the speed
of the engine was regulated to the end that the number of
revolutions should be the same in any two trials which
were afterwards to be compared.

Even with a difference of 300 revolutions, which was
about the maximum difference, between the two trials,
the error of % ft.-lb. in balance would make an error of
less than o'OOI5 per cent in the calculated difference of
work. Further, since this error was a casual one, it was
probable that it would cut out on the ‘mean final result,
and being so extremely small on any individual determina-
tion it has been neglected.

(6) Length of the lever.

This was determined by very careful observation to
be 4ft.+0'02in. when the engine was running under all the
conditions which obtained in the trials. As in the pre-
liminary calculations this length was given its nominal
value of 4ft., the value of K obtained required a correction
of +0042 per cent.

(c) The weights used in loading the brake.

These were cast iron plates weighing 25]bs. each.
Their weights were determined to z$slb., and in the later
trials they were so arranged that no error could appear
in the final result on account of the slight differences

46 REYNOLDS AND MOORBY, Eguzvalent of Heat.

which were found to exist between the weights. The
extreme variation from 25lbs. was o‘o4lbs. 3

(d) The counting of the revolutions.

This was done by means of a counter, which was
pushed into gear with the shaft at the commencement of
a trial, and disengaged at its close. The engagement
was of such a character that the mean chance was that
y revolution was missed at the commencement of the
trials, while at the end the counter stopped as soon as it
was withdrawn from the shaft. The work obtained there-
fore needed a correction of

1

~*~ = + ———= +0’00001 nearly,
18000 72000
This correction was added to the mean values of K

derived from the trials.

ME

The measurement of heat.

This involved the calibration of the scale of the
weighing machine, and the frequent determination of the
index errors of the two thermometers used in the deter-
mination of the rise in temperature of the stream of water
flowing through the brake.

(a) The weighing machine.

It was of vital importance that the same unit of mass
should be used for the weighing machine scale and for the ©
weights used on the brake. The scale of the machine was
consequently checked against the 25lb. weights and vce
versa. By this means a series of corrections to z¢plb. was
obtained for all readings, and, with the exception of casual
errors occurring in any individual weighing, the deter-
mination of the mass of water may be taken as accurate
to zaolb.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xh. (1898), No. ©. 47

(6) The index errors of the thermometers.

For the initial temperature thermometer this error
was determined by immersing it ina mixture of crushed
ice and water. In most of the trials this thermometer
gave readings between 33° and 34. On this interval the
index correction was found to be correct when compared
with a standard thermometer in the Physical Laboratory
of the College. Higher up the scale a slightly larger
negative correction to the readings was found to be
necessary, and this correction was applied to the later
trials when required.

The main accepted experiments lasted from February
to July, 1896, and during that interval six determinations
were made of the index error of this instrurnent.

The correction required by the readings fell from
—o'48° on Feb. 5th to —0'52° on July 7th.

By the use of Regnault’s steam tables, corrections were
obtained to the indications of the thermometer used in
the discharge pipe at the points 212°, 213'8°. and 2156’,
and also at lower temperatures when the barometric
pressure permitted.

The corrections were obtained by immersing the ther-
mometer in steam at these temperatures, the pressures
being reduced directly from Regnault’s table.

These pressures were measured to zogpin. of mercury
by means of a combined manometer and barometer
specially constructed for the purpose.

The corrections obtained fell from +0'24 on February
8th to +0°04 on July 6th, 1896.

Both of these thermometers worked under a con-
siderable pressure, and on that account a determination
of the elevation in their readings, due to a known pressure,
was made. This elevation I found, in the case of the
thermometer (Q2) used in the supply pipe, to be 0'0072°
per inch of mercury pressure, and for the thermometer

48 REYNOLDS AND Moorsy, Eguzvalent of Heat.

(P1) used in the discharge pipe the corresponding rise was
0'0066° per inch of mercury.

The pressures under which the initial temperature
thermometer (Q2) worked were different, according to the ~
load carried by the brake. Taking these varying pressures
into account, a correction factor to be applied to the final
result was obtained. Its value was (1—0'00037). After
applying this correction it is extremely improbable that
any error exceeding ~4,°F., or one: part im 13,c0e;medm
have existed in the calculated mean rise of temperature of
the water in any trial.

7. The main experiments.

The trials were begun on Feb. 5th, 1896. The accepted
trials were made in 11 different series, each series con-
taining generally 3 pairs of heavy and light trials. Between
each series, some slight alteration was made in the
apparatus or method of working, all the alterations leading
up to the methods finally adopted, and which have been
described.

Series T,

Contained 4 pairs of trials, giving 4 separate deter-
minations of K. This series differed from all that followed
it in that the outer brass skin of the brake was exposed
directly to the atmosphere, and consequently the radiation
constant had the large value of 36°86.

The mean value of K obtained from the series was
777°81. The maximum value being 778°56 and the mini-
mum 77702. This series of trials has not been allowed
any weight in the final result, because in some of the
trials the necessary observations of the temperature_
gradient in the shaft were not taken, and, consequently,
the conduction correction could only be approximated to
by assuming this gradient the same in all the trials, since
the supply of cold water to the stuffing-box on the shaft

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 6. 49

was the same in all. This series, when compared with
others that follow, was of use, in so far as it showed to
scme extent the limit of error involved in the method of
eliminating the loss of heat by radiation.

The results obtained from the first series were so satis-
factory that the lagging of the brake was at once pro-
ceeded with. This consisted of a layer of about 1% inches
of loose cotton covered with thick flannel.

Series IT. to VII.

Contained trials Nos. 12 to 42. In trial No. 12 the
lagging was evidently damp, and the results obtained
were consequently rejected. Trials Nos. 24, 25, and 26
have not been reduced at all, because the load carried by
the brake was 1244'12 ft.-lbs., and therefore the results
were not readily comparable with the other heavy trials,
which carried a load of 1200 ft-lbs. In addition to this
the tightness of the bottom regulating cock on the brake
was so great, as to impede its motion by a moment of
30 ft.-lbs. about the engine shaft.

Series V., containing trials 27 to 32, also suffered under
the latter defect, and have, therefore, been allowed no
weight in the final result. The individual results do not
differ materially from others which have been obtained,
but the want of freedom of the brake was thought
sufficient to condemn them.

The annexed table gives the maximum, minimum,
and mean values of K given by these series.

ber |
|

| Number of | Values of K obtained.
) Determi- | 3
_ nations. | Maximum. Minimum. Mean.

Series II. 1 Ae i Se Pe a By
Series III. 779'46 | 776°63 | 77794

Tel
aia
Series V. 3 778°46 | 777°75 | 778°
2
3

| Series VI. | 778°sg | 77716 | 777°89

|
| Series VII. 778°55 | pao | 77 7°86

|
|

50 REYNOLDS AND Moorpsy, Eguzvalent of Heat.

Omitting Series V. for the reasons mentioned, the’
mean value of K, obtained by dividing the sum of the
differences of work in the above determinations by the
corresponding sum of the differences of heat, is

K=77785.
From this the greatest variation is less than 0-3 per cent
in individual determinations, and for the means given by
each series the greatest variation is less than 0'03 per cent.

Serzes VITTI. and IX.

Differed from the last series considered in that the
light trials only carried a moment of 400 ft.-lbs.

Number of Values of K obtained.
Determ1-_ |—----
nations. | Maximum.| Minimum. Mean.
Series VIII. 2 To ATTN 17a BOY | To Oca
Series IX. 3 77S 54.1) 777 7O| epee

Series X. and XT.

These trials were made in July, 1896, after the careful
checking of the whole of the apparatus afresh. The
results are appended.

Number of Values of K obtained.

Determi-
nations. | Maximum.| Minimum. Mean.
Series X. 3 773°44 | 776°89 | 777°74

Series XI. 3 T7107 | 71 SO. | 7 sae

These trials were run under precisely similar con-
ditions as to load, &c., as obtained in Series II. to VII.
The mean value obtained for the two Series was
K=77785,
which happened to agree exactly with that given by the
former set.

|
|

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «lit. (1898), No. ©. 51

For the final value of K, the quantities given in
the appended table were obtained :—

un ° Wes '
= ni 9 ' a WO Sw
° n° 2g ww c wo s
= fe: |g & |g .| a
5 : = Se peter ese |B obs Bic
Ou rs Ses p>v a) O4Ef] Oe i
> 5 eS irs es Ee tel | sir ©
vod = a°s iv] nw moe we oO o
Sic Log 2B os OoO90| O ws.
wT a os a ov fa) 3
Ow ra aU & os tS OE ons es}
1.6 s Sets as eo lee orm |-aorg 2
vs Oo OO She Vg v o
2 ha n@ = DY x 9 £2 2
= Sos a m Ss0|/HEE ro
[o) Vv pa ayal _ fo}
Zz jn) 4 = a QA io)
Means for 21
accepted 17817 | 134337403 | I71510 4 —I1 | —3°9| 140°5 | 172685

heavy trials.

Means for 23
accepted | 17832 61355503 77710 I —7 | —54|141°5| 78°867

light trials.

72981900 93800 3 | 6 ‘5 | -—I° 93818

Mean differ- -
ences. 5

5 6 7 8

1 ee ee

A value of K is obtained by dividing the difference
of work in col. 2 by the uncorrected difference of heat in
col. 3. This operation gives

K, = 778:°00.

This value, however, wants correcting on account of the
quantities in cols. I, 4, 5, 6, and 7.

(1) Error in balance of brake.

It has been shown that the difference of 15 revolutions
in col. 1 will not, when the error of balance of the brake
is considered, have any appreciable effect in the value
of K, given above.

(2) Loss of heat by leakage.

In col. 4 this loss is given as 3 thermal units. The
correction to K, is therefore — 5x255
= —0'000032.

52 REYNOLDS AND Moorby, Eguzvalent of Heat.

(3) Lerminal corrections to the heat.
In col. 5 the difference of these corrections is given as

6-thermal units. The correction to K, is therefore
= —0'000064.

(4) Loss of heat by conduction along the shof.
In col. 6 the difference of temperature between the

brake and the adjacent bearing is 1°5°. The loss per 1°
is 12 thermal units. The correction to Ki is = —o-oo01g2.

(5) Loss of heat by radtation.

In col. 7 the difference of temperature between brake
and air has the value —1°; assuming g for the constant
of radiation the correction to Kr becomes =0'000096.

The total correction factor required on account of the
non-elimination of these casual errors is therefore

7 I —O'000192.
Applying this factor we get
K, = Ki(1 —0'000192) = 778'06 (I —O'000192) = 77701.
This value K, can also be obtained by dividing the differ-
ence of work in col. 2 by the difference of heat (corrected)
in col. 8.

This value K, now requires a correction factor made
up of a number of quantities which are dealt with below.

8. Corrections to the mean value of K (77791) gtven by the
experiments.

I. Length of brake lever.

This correction has been calculated to be 000042.

II. Salts dissolved in Manchester water.

These amount to 42°1 milligrammes per litre. Assum-
ing their specific heat =o'2, the correction ‘required 51s
0'00003.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. ©. 53

Ill. Azr dissolved in the water used in the trials.

This had an effect in raising the apparent specific heat
of the water, on account of the bubbles of air expelled
being saturated with vapour at 212°F. I made experi-
ments to determine the volume of the bubbles, and from the
data so obtained a correction was calculated at —0'0002!.

IV. Reduction of the weighings to vacuo.

Bearing in mind that the density of the air affected
equally the cast iron load on the brake, and also the rider
weights of the weighing machine, this correction becomes
—0'001 20.

V. Varying specific heat of the water.

If Regnault’s formula for the specific heat of water
were accepted, the value of K obtained would require a
correction of —o‘00006, introduced by the fact that the
initial temperature of the water was never exactly 32°F, .
as assumed in the specific heat used in the calculations.

So little is known of the true value of the specific heat
at any temperature that this correction has not been
applied.

VI. Correction due to pressures on thermometer bulbs.

This has been stated to be —0'00037.

VII. Correction due to loss of head in stream of water
between supply and discharge pipes.
A certain amount of heat would be generated by this
loss of potential energy.
The correction required is -+0'00007.

VIII. Engagement of revolution counter.

This has been already given = +0'0000I.
Adding all these corrections together, we get as a

final correction factor
I—O'00I25.

54. REYNOLDS AND MOORBY, Equzvalent of Heat.

9. Conclusions. -

We have, therefore, for the pomecied value of the
specific heat of water, expressed in mechanical units,
measured at Manchester,

77°94 |
at Greenwich, correcting for gravity,

77797 5

and in eile 45°, at sea level,

17d Bos
or, in metre-grammes, this last value becomes

42658,
as the equivalent of the mean value of the Centvignme
unit of heat.

In absolute C.G.S. units this becomes
41,832,000 ergs.

i oe
Vat sit

» * Nn Oe
F Ui =
as ee ry ,
‘ i, " »
_ 1
» wy
*
¢
+
° .
7
*

|

+>

i.

hy

art : re fase: 2

a

F
rh
, ' :
\ 5 i

;

—
js 6

¢ .

2
.
: .

Manchester Memorzrs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. 4.

VII. On the Instantaneous Pressures produced on
the Collision of Two Explosion Waves.

Pye aoe ati: JONES, .B.SC.,
AND

J. BOWER, B.Sc.
[Communicated by Professor H. B. Dixon, F.R.S.]
Received and read February 8th, 1898.

A paper, the latter portion of which treated upon this
subject, was brought before the Society in 1894 by Dixon
and Cain; but, owing to knowledge attained since that
time by the former investigator in conjunction with our-
selves, some doubt has been thrown on the significance of
the numbers then obtained.

At a recent meeting of the Society, Professor Dixon
brought before your notice several photographs taken in
order to gain information concerning the “ Nature of
Flame in Explosion.” Among the photographs were |
several shewing that the effect of a junction in the
apparatus is to check the rate of explosion and to diminish
the luminosity very materially, the explosion wave only
recouping itself after traversing the explosion tube for some
six or eight inches beyond the junction.

This we discovered by photographing the flash on a
sensitive film fastened to a rapidly-revolving wheel.

The apparatus consists essentially of a flat-rimmed

Ley 13th, 1898.

2 JONES AND Bower, Explosion Wave Pressures.

tinned-iron wheel, capable of being rapidly rotated about
a horizontal axis, the rim upon which the photographic
film is placed being 1%4in. wide.

The lenses of the camera are arranged so that an image
of the explosion tube placed horizontally and parallel to
the axis of the wheel may be focussed on the rim. Since
the explosion travels along the glass tube horizontally
and the wheel is revolving in a vertical plane, the image
of the flash on the film appears as a line inclined to the
horizontal, the sine of this angle varying inversely as the
velocity of the flash, provided the rate of the wheel is
constant.

A photograph of the flash immediately after it has
passed an imperfect junction in the apparatus is shown
in fig. z. The explosion wave has been partially checked,
and the point of redetermination is clearly visible. 7

The second figure shows the collision of two partially-
destroyed explosion waves before they have had time to
recuperate.

In the case illustrated by the third figure, the explo-
sion wave has been alternately determined and checked
two or three times. This was brought about by having
three strong glass tubes placed horizontally and parallel

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. %. 3

to one another, fastened together by lead bends and caps
which fitted over the glass, the mixture being fired in the
uppermost tube.

What we required was a junction of lead pipe to glass
tubing, both the lead and glass having an internal bore of
Yin., but having different external diameters—the lead
34in., and the glass 34in. The mode of joining in these
cases where a stoppage occurred was to take a short piece
of lead piping, which just slipped over the glass tubing,
and to beat down one end until the bore at that end was
only Yin. ; this was then soldered to the lead piping of
Yin. internal diameter, a short piece of rubber tubing was
drawn over the end of the glass tubing, and this was finally
thrust into the lead cap. These junctions were not quite
rigid, and the ends of the tubes not exactly flush.

The pictures given show clearly the partial stoppage
of the explosion wave at such a joint, the point of redeter-
mination being indicated by a definite and increased
speed of combustion, represented by the straight and
intensely luminous line as distinct from the curved and
less luminous line of the recouping period.

Further, a new and very luminous wave is observed
starting from the point of redetermination of the explo-
sion wave proper, and travelling in the opposite direction
with a speed almost, if not quite, equal to that of the
explosion wave itself.

The point, however, bearing most directly on Dixon
and Cain’s paper is this—that tubes which stood the pres-
sure of the explosion wave itself, almost invariably broke
at this point of redetermination.

Thus, in their experiments, they might really be
measuring, not the pressure of the explosion wave, but
this greater pressure always associated with the re-institu-
tion of the wave after a partial stoppage. The figures
obtained forced them to the conclusion that there was no

4 JONES AND BOWER, Explosion Wave Pressures.

increase of pressure on collision of two explosion waves—.
a conclusion which Professor Dixon recognised to be
hardly consistent with his own theory of gaseous explo-
sions, according to which the explosion wave may be
regarded as an intense sound wave in the burning gases.
The evidence from other sources was sufficiently cogent
to make him still retain his belief in the theory, and we
have now had the pleasure of removing this seeming
contradiction.

An actual increase of pressure on collision of two
explosion waves has been proved, and also an explanation
arrived at concerning the cause of the previous inability
to demonstrate this fact.

Two distinct theories have been advanced to bring all
the rates of combustion of the various gaseous explosive
mixtures under one general formula :—Dixon’s and
Berthelot’s. |

Berthelot assumes the instantaneous pressure-motion
of the wave to be due to the forward movement of burnt
molecules, ze. of molecules produced by the completion
of the chemical reaction; thus each wave front, on
collision, would act as a dead wall to the other, the mole-
cules merely exchanging energies, and there would be
no reason to expect any abnormal increase of pressure
above that due to the stoppage and reversal of the waves.

From Dixon’s theory it seemed possible—if the wave
is plopagated partly by movement of heated yet unburnt
molecules in the wave front—that these molecules meeting
‘“end-on” would cause a measurable increase of tempera-
ture and pressure at the: moment of collision, over and
above the natural increase due to the impact ot two
pressure waves. On either theory an increase of pressure
would be expected.

The means of measurement was that first suggested
by Le Chatelier and applied by Dixon and Cain.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xltz. (1898), No. '%, 5

Glass tubes were obtained of a strength such that they
withstood the pressure of the explosion wave travelling
one way, but broke when two waves came into collision in
the tube. The method depends on the principle that the
glass will respond to a pressure exerted on its sides, no
matter how short the time for which it is applied.

In our experiments the same form of lead Y-piece
was used, save that special care was taken to ensure
absence of ridges at the junctions, by using brass caps
with flat ends in place of the rounded lead caps, and thus
having the glass tube fitting flush against the head of the
cap. The junctions were also made rigid with Faraday’s
cement. With these junctions no retardation of the
explosion wave was found to occur.

One limb of the Y-piece was so supplied with taps
that the apparatus could be filled with the explosive mix-
ture, and the flame made to travel down one or both limbs.
The explosion tube was fitted between the arms of the Y;
these being of equal length, the two explosions, when
desired, could be made to meet in the middle of the tube
to be tested.

The mixture used was cyanogen gas mixed with its
own volume of oxygen. This is a mixture which under-
goes a simple reaction, and one unaccompanied by any
noticeable dissociation.

Jena glass was used; pieces of uniform bore and
thickness being chosen about 24 in. long; 6 in. were
cut off from this to be tested hydraulically, the remaining
18 in. being used in the experiment itself. The external
diameter was # in., and the thickness of the walls varied
from +g in. to ;%; in. in different experiments.

Among many attempts, four cases were noticed of
tubing which stood the explosion one way but which
broke on collision of two waves. Moreover, repeated
explosions were often made in such a tube one way,

6 JONES AND BOWER, £xploszon Wave Pressures.

to make sure that one explosion did not tend to diminish |
its strength, and it was found that if a tube stood an
explosion once it would remain intact after any number
of explosions, and yet would be shattered to fragments by
the pressure produced by impact of two explosion waves.

The samples of tube which were hydraulically tested
gave the following results for breaking pressures :—

1. Tubes which broke ove way—

oe ay ce m Etean 868lbs.=58 atmos.
2. Tubes which stood one way, but broke with two
waves meeting—
1ooolbs. per sq. in. ;
1232lbs. 55 Pew 1117lbs.=75 atmos.
I12olbs. ss
3. Tube which stood both ways—
1344lbs.=90 atmos.
Hence we have the increase of pressure on collision of
two explosion waves clearly demonstrated.

Comparison of these numbers with those of the earlier
paper will shew a considerable difference.

As previously stated, the higher numbers obtained by
Dixon and Cain are possibly due to the fact that their
tubes were fractured, not by the explosion wave, but by
the greater pressure always evident at the point of redeter-
mination of the wave after a partial stoppage. We are
now conducting experiments with other mixtures of gases.

The phenomenon of the collision of two true explosion
waves is shown in jig. 4.

The photograph shews that the junctions in the appa-
ratus produced no disturbing effect on the explosion wave. ~

Two rebound waves start from the point of collision
in opposite directions along the tube. These are sound
waves, made luminous by passing through the still heated
gases. A comparison of this photograph, where the true

Manchester Memorzrs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 4. 7

explosion waves meet, with that of the collision of the
waves whilst in the recouping period after a partial
stoppage (see fig. 2), shews that, in the former case,
the rebound waves are less luminous and travel much
more slowly than the explosion waves; whilst, in the
latter case, the rebound waves are more luminous and
travel faster than the recouping explosion waves.

A sound wave, similar to those obtained on the
collision of two explosion waves, is produced when an
explosion takes place in a glass tube closed at one end,
rebounding from the end surface and travelling back along
the tube.

The fifth figure gives an illustration of the phenomenon
just mentioned. Notice that the angle which the rebound
wave makes with the horizontal diminishes, thus indicating
that the rate becomes faster. The dark vertical line, used
for purposes of measurement, is caused by a small black
band placed on the explosion tube,

Comparison of the rate of this rebound with that of
each of the rebounds produced when two explosion waves
meet shows the former to be slower.

The ratio of the two rates is about Io to 13.

Thus we have indirect evidence of the increase of
pressure when two explosion waves come into collision.

This is again confirmed by the increased intensity and
longer duration of the light which the photograph displays
at the point of collision.

The evidence from the actual measurements, the rates
of the rebounds, and the luminosity, taken together, seem
to establish beyond a doubt the increase of pressure on
collision of two explosion waves.

ee ng a inter v

pl oem) |e

‘ea tay an f

ue

‘atin und, Nan

Al, ttt i sd 3

ea a Ay Di alts

S de pbe anes aT eas ee ua

nr elie at ee Le | Ory | i -,

“high: oe

‘SHAVM NOISOIdXH HO NOISITIOO
“GS By ‘+ BY € -3ty 2 By 1 By

S OFM ld IVTX (JOA Stloluapy topsayounpy

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlid. (1898), No. 8.

VIII. On a General Method of determining the Form
of the Velocity-Potential of Fluid-Motion in Two
Dimensions across a Channel with Straight Sides.

By R..F. GWYTHER, M.A.
Received and read January 11th, 1598.

In a paper™ on the permanence of Mathematical
Forms of the expressions for physical quantities, I have
pointed out that the forms of the general equations in
applied mathematics are necessarily limited by purely
mathematical considerations, and, to that extent, indepen-
dent of the physical assumptions on which they may have
been originally based.

The present paper may be regarded as a continuation
of that paper, but dealing with the limitations imposed by
the same considerations upon the possible forms of the
solutions of the general equations rather than upon the
forms of the equations themselves.

It will appear in the development of the subject, that
when the form of solution is limited by the considerations
proper to a problem, the process of change of coordinate
axes, or of resolution of velocities, &c., will be notably |
simplified in consequence.

It is, of course, necessary to select an illustration only
of the method proposed, partly because the conditions in
different problems are so varied, and partly in order to
make the character of the method clear by making the
conditions definite.

For these reasons, I have selected, as a general

* Manchester Memoirs, Vol. ix., 4th series, 1895, p. 119.

Lidl, 13th, 1898.

2 GWYTHER, Velocety-Potential across a Channel.

problem which has well defined conditions, the irrota-
tional motion of a fluid in two dimensions across a channel
with straight sides.

THE FORM OF THE VELOCITY-POTENTIAL.

With the modification of the usual notation adopted
in Lamb’s Hydrodynamics, write

—o-m=f(x+y),
“u—Ww=f'(x +729).

The function /(#+ zy) will, in general, contain as arguments
the measure and direction, relative to the axes, of gravita-

so that

tion, and the coordinates, whatever they may be, of the
lines bounding the fluid. As it is assumed that these
bounding lines are straight, these arguments may be taken
to be g and y, Z, and ,, Z, and #,, etc., where g and B are
the coordinates of a straight line.

The origin and axes of coordinates are to be taken
arbitrarily, and the principle which is fundamental in the
method of this paper is that with any system of boundaries
the function /(%+zy) will enjoy a permanence of form for
any change in position or direction of the coordinate axes,
or, stated analytically, must be a covariant of the system,

X Ai4)), Cy, Se Vy Dion) eeaene sions orice ;
or of

XD, Cyn Pia Page ree » Pi -— Vy Bar Yorreees :

where y has been selected as the angle by which to
orient the system of coordinates in space. .

In considering the conditions for covariancy under a
change of axes, the letters x, y, y, A, [3, will still be retained
to mean the quantities relative to the new axes corres-
ponding to those they previously indicated relative to the
old axes; after the conditions have been found it will be
useful to drop this convention with results which will be
Seem later,

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 8. 3

Employing this convention for the present, it is easy
to see that if the axes are turned through an angle a,
retaining the origin, there is no change in S6—y, but
#+z2y is replaced by (r+zy)e*, and y by y+a. We must
therefore, take the arguments of the function to be

Oe-payje %; 2, 8 Pi Payences- ey a Ce a

Next, if .we give the coordinate axes an arbitrary
infinitesimal displacement of translation, the analytical
conditions for covariancy are extremely simple, and it will |
be sufficient to state the results as they affect the mode of
entrance of the several arguments into f(v+7zy).

M@hese are that /:, Po, .----- will only enter the function
in the form

Bie e tat =p (81—) ete,

and that ++zy will only enter in the form

(+ iy)e?7 -i{f f(Bo-%) — pr Bale v) /sin (3, — 2), etc.

For brevity, write g, for

pre 1(8,—9) — po eles Ss etc.,
then the arguments of f(v+2zy) may be taken as

(x + zy)e~ °Y — zg,/sin ((3,—B,), 4, & Yay ---> » Bi -Y> Por Ye-e eee

In writing them in this way an arbitrary preference has been
given to the boundaries of subscripts I and 2, but in any
case to which this method may be applied it appears
probable that such a choice would ultimately be made,
and its introduction here in no way affects the generality
of the results.

This completes the conditions which the permanence
of form demands.

With the form of the function limited in this way, and
still written f(4+2zy), we deduce

u—iv=e ' f'(x +1),

4 GWYTHER, Velocety-Potential across a Channel.

which can easily be seen to satisfy the requirements which
have here been developed.

In the case of a channel bounded by 2, 3, etc., sides
we have found what arguments may enter into /(# + zy), but,
of course, from general considerations we cannot learn
more of the manner in which they enter the function. We
proceed to deal with other matters with regard to which
general conclusions can be arrived at.

SIMPLIFICATION OF RESULTS CONSEQUENT ON A
CHANGE OF AXES.

In this process a very obvious advantage resulting
from the stipulation that /(#+zy) shall have its general
covariant form becomes apparent.

The convention which has been adhered to up to the
presémt that y, Gio, secre , (as well as ++zy) shall, after a
change of axes, represent magnitudes measured from the
new axes, will now be dropped, and in the case of the angles
(but not of ++ zy) will be considered to retain the reference
to the original axes. This will, of course, make no change
in B—y, but in y only.

The change necessary, when the axes are turned
through an angle a, will merely be to write y—a in place
of y, or sometimes more simply, to write (7+ zy)e* in place

of (++zy).

CONDITION AT A BOUNDARY LINE.

Supposing now that a convenient system of axes has
_ been chosen in any case, and that the angles are given
relative to that system, it becomes necessary to express
the condition that there is no flow over the boundary ~
whose coordinates are f, 3, or that ~ is constant along
that boundary. Changing to an axis of y parallel to this
bounding line, from the last paragraph it appears that
all that is necessary to ensure this condition, is to write

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xhz. (1898), No. 8. 5

(A+zy)e#® in place of ++zy and to stipulate that the
imaginary part of #(++zy) shall, in consequence, become
constant.

The corresponding condition affecting the velocity
may be dealt with in the same manner, when that is pre-
ferable to dealing with y.

OTHER MODES OF ORIENTING THE SYSTEM.

Hitherto. the orientation of the system in space has
been effected by orienting the axes by means of y
relative to the vertical, and the system relative to the axes
by P's. This is, of course, an arbitrary arrangement, but
it is perhaps the least arbitrary among such arrangements,
and it has secured a formal unity in the expressions
without interfering with the generality of the results.

In any particular case, however, the horizontal and
vertical will probably be taken as axes, and all that is
then necessary is to orient the system in the most con-
venient method with reference to the axes, and this may
sometimes best be done by using some line specially con-
venient for the purpose which need not be the vertical.

In illustration of this, we may take the general case
of transverse motion of a fluid within a space bounded by
two intersecting lines.

Most symmetrically, the system may be oriented by
the position of the bisector of the angle between these
lines, and the shape of the space containing the fluid
determined by the semi-angle at the apex.

It would also be convenient to take the origin at the
apex. We should then replace y by ((2+/3:)/2, and get in
the first place

—p— Was {(e+a)e—AB, + 82)/2}
with the boundary conditions that the imaginary parts of
ST {iyet**1 ~ Ba)/2y
may be constant.

6 GWYTHER, Veloczty-Potential across a Channel.

If we write A for the angle the bisector makes with
the axis of x, and w for the semi-angle at the apex. These
expressions become

F{(a+ ape} and f{ ye***}
respectively, and A and ym as representatives of such
quantities as $i—y, B2.—y, may freely enter the function
f(#+y).
It is easy to verify that the known cases of transverse
oscillations in such a space (Lamb’s Hydrodynamics,

p. 426) where A= and Hee or > are in accordance with

the expressions here given.

The main difficulty in finding solutions to suit actual
cases of fluid motion is the condition, not here dealt with,
relating to the pressure at the surface of the fluid, and no >
new solution is here offered. The very suggestive form
arrived at in the expression /{(r+zy)e-#4} is perhaps
worthy of notice.

Manchester Memotrs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 9.

IX. On the Velocity of Sound in a Tube, as affected
by the Elasticity of the Walls.

By Prof. HORACE Lamp, M.A., F.R.S.

Received and read March Sth, 1898.

Reference having been made to this subject in the
course of a recent discussion in the Society, it occurred
to the writer that some results of interest might be
obtained without much trouble by applying the known
theory of the deformation of a ¢#zz cylindrical tube. It
soon appeared that although in the case of air-waves ina
glass or metal tube the effect would be quite insignificant,
yet in the case of such a tube filled with water (or other
liquid) the velocity of sound-waves in the fluid might be
very appreciably reduced. This had indeed been predicted
long ago by Helmholtz,* and assigned by him as the true
explanation of the diminution observed in some experi-
ments of Wertheim. On further looking into the literature
of the subject, the author found that the problem had
been treated mathematically by Korteweg in 1878.¢ As
the investigation given below in § 1 follows a somewhat
different plan, and embraces one or two collateral problems
of interest, the writer ventures to submit it to the Society,
although on the main question it does little more than
confirm the results obtained in the paper cited. |

When the assumption that the thickness of the tube
is small compared with the radius is abandoned, the
problem becomes much more difficult. The method of

* Fortschritte der Physik, t. iv.; Ges. Abh., t. 1., p. 246.
+ Wied. Ann., 1. v., p. 526. This paper gives references to the more
recent experimental investigations on the subject by Kundt and Dvorak.

Shey. 13th, 1898.

2 Lams, Velocity of Sound in a Tube.

applying the general equations of elasticity to this case is
indicated in § 3. In order to diminish to some extent the
complexity of the analysis, attention has been directed
mainly to the case where the external radius is infinite.
This has, moreover, a special interest as forming the
opposite extreme to the circumstances considered in
the previous part of the paper. Even “here thewimal
equation for determining the wave-velocity is of a some-
what unmanageable character; but it leads to a very
simple result when the wave-length is very great compared
with the circumference of the tube. It is to be remarked,
indeed, that the more definite results obtained throughout
this paper are, as a rule, of the nature of limiting forms
which are approximated to more closely the greater the
wave-length. In some of the experiments on the subject,
the ratio of the wave-length to the circumference of the
tube cannot be said to be very great; a correction on this
account, when the ratio is moderately large, might be
investigated without much difficulty.

1. Let the axis of x be taken along the axis of the
tube, whose thickness (/) will for the present be assumed
to be small compared with the radius (a). In the defor-
mations to be considered, the displacement of any point
of the wall will be in a plane through the axis, and if a
and w denote its components in the directions of the
generating line and of the radius, respectively, these
quantities will be functions of x and ¢ only. The linear
extensions in the tangent plane, along and perpendicular.
to the generating line, will be ¢u/dx and w/a, respectively.
Hence if « denote Poisson’s ratio (of lateral contraction to
longitudinal extension in a bar of the same material), the
tensions called into play in these two directions will be

Lh ae) Wau .
P= BF +0~), Q= Bi + 05") oe!

“see Proc. Lond. Math. Sot. t. Xx, pp) 137, 138 (1800)

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. 9. 3

where

Tene . . : . (2),
the elastic constants \ and u being those of Lamé, viz. p is
the rigidity, and A is a constant such that A+2u measures
the elasticity of volume. In terms of the same quantities,

we have , |

ea OG)
If o be the volume-density of the material of the wall,

the equations of motion of the tube will be
aa aP a*w QO

CU de age EG

(4),*
where /# denotes the excess of pressure on the inner surface.
Substituting from (1) in (4) we obtain

ee =)

ae p\ dx? ta ax)

5)

aw va Bio du “) (5)
at ~ ho ate dx a?

If we now assume that w, w, and 7 all vary as

eim(ct+2)
>
we have
( =) ae 6
ee Ee a= 0,
0 ma o
. Ae ae Gi)
ot B ( ; I =) Pp (6)
ma iy CA ere 8 0 ha

Here m is a constant such that 27/m is the wave-length ;
and ¢ is the corresponding wave-velocity.

It will tend to make the subsequent results more
intelligible if we recall the known solutions of these
equations when =o. The formula (6) then gives, on
eliminating the ratio z/w,

1 \5A. 1-0 /B\2
2 SVD Nee
é (: + wat) 5 + Fae - = Oh Cr

* The flexural terms are here omitted. They are quite unimportant
unless the wave-length of the disturbance be very small.

4 LAMB, Velocity of Sound in a Tube.

a quadratic inc’. If, as isassumed throughout, the wave-
length be large compared with the circumference of the tube,
m’a* will be a small fraction, and the roots of (7) will be

approximately |
| Be AE
G=(1=o2)>=—= ; 8),
(2 = of) =F 8)
where & denstes Young’s modulus, and
htt
e ~ a2q? p : F (9),

respectively. In the case of (8) we have, by the former
of equations (6), :

wiuw= -toma . : (x9);
This ratio is therefore small, and the vibrations are mainly
longitudinal. The wave-velocity given by (8) is, in fact,
that of longitudinal vibrations in a bar. If we continue
the approximation, we find, in place of (8),

B= (1 - ota?) : (see
p
On the other hand, the solution (9) makes
u/w= —toma : : UP \ 7 Gwe

so that the vibrations are chiefly radial. The corresponding
type of motion is, indeed, best described as a radial
vibration, with a very gradual variation of phase as we
pass along the tube; and the result is best expressed in
terms of the “speed.” Thus if we put 2=c, so that 2/27
measures the frequency of the vibrations, we have

(= za aes Gh)
The next approximation gives
B
n?= (1+ age tase X14):

* The results (8) and (9) are given by Love, Theory of Elastzctty,
fella gn ton 259:

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 9. 5

Let us now suppose that the tube contains an elastic
fluid of density p,. The pressure / is subject to an equation
of the form

dp jd dp dp

de> da aes adr * rdr ; = (5)
where 7 denotes the distance from the axis, and ¢, is the
velocity of waves of expansion in an unlimited mass of
the fluid; viz., if we denote by x the cubical elasticity of
the fluid, we have

a ; : : = (UG):
If

p oc Gee aras

(15) reduces to the form

Bi Pe Mp oh nel: :
ae ae OT
where
2
v=m oS) (18)
- £6
The solution of (17) which is finite for r=0 is
p=Cl1,(rr) CEO).
where the function /, is defined by
I ( g2 Aa
3 Airy (20).
Now, from the hydrodynamical equation
a -| 2 AEG ohh > Gam
e at. hay ee
we have
m*c*o,w = y CI, (va) (22)5
whence, for the value of # to be substituted in (6),
fee i hv) ;
p=mco,a oar alan : ae Peye

The complete solution of our problem involves the
determination of ¢hree classes of vibrations ;_ viz. (I) the
sound-waves in the fluid as modified by the yielding of the

6 LamB, Velocity of Sound in a Tube.

tube, (II) the longitudinal vibrations of the tube-wall as
modified (very slightly) by the presence of the fluid, and
(IIT) the radial vibrations of the system.

In the cases (I) and (II), c? is comparable either with
c2 or with B/o, and for sufficiently long waves va will be
a small quantity. The formula (23) then reduces to

2mc*o,
ea (24)
approximately. If we make this substitution in (6), and
then eliminate the ratio z/w, we obtain

2 = oe |e og =} Oe ee eae
(< rep 1+ Pahp!” ~— na pS map) ~° ° CoE

,

If we substitute the value of v? from (18), this may be
put in the form

( I c I - =(<)
2 Se BAC, | has 5 yy ets (eae
ay a + Pe p OO aN p

20,@ 1 B
eG a i 20):

This is a cubic in c’, but we are only concerned with the
two smaller roots.

For very long waves, one root is very great, and the
remaining pair are given by the quadratic

(2 —- cad ( - ee - a| = fale ~ 7) . Qa

where « has been written for o,¢.2. In the case of a gas
enclosed in a metal or glass tube, the right hand side of
(27) may be neglected, owing to the excessive smallness
of the ratio «/6.* Whe xoots of (27) are then andme
the mutual influence of the vibrations of the fluid and of
the tube being quite insensible.

In the case of a liquid, however, the fraction 2ax/ZB
may well have an appreciable, and even a considerable
value, and the alteration of the wave-velocity in the fluid

* Its value for air and glass is about 2°34 x 10-6.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 9. ye

may beimportant. It is easily seen that the quadratic (27)
has in all cases two positive roots. If (as we shall generally
suppose) ¢,” is less than 4/0, one root will lie between o
and ¢,?, and the other between Z/o and B/o. The former
determines the velocity of waves in the liquid, as diminished
by the elastic yielding of the tube; the latter determines
the velocity of longitudinal waves in the tube-wall, as
increased by the reaction of the enclosed fluid. If (on the
other hand) c,2 were greater than /o, one root of (27)
would lie between o and 4/o, and the second root between
cs and 5/6. An extreme instance of this is afforded by
water in an india-rubber tube ; the fraction 2a«/B is then
large, and the two values of ¢ are found to be
(LE|2a9,)! and (Ble),

approximately. The former of these agrees with the
velocity of “pulse-waves” as determined theoretically by
Résal.*

If o were zero for the substance of the tube, the
constants 4 and & would be identical, and one solution
of (27) would be c?= S/o, it being otherwise evident that
the longitudinal vibrations of the tube would be entirely
unaffected by the fluid. Moreover, the difference between
B and & is for most solids a small fraction of either.
Hence the velocity of longitudinal waves in the tube,
which lies (as we have seen) between the limits (4/0) and
(B/o)*, will not as a rule be more than slightly affected by
the liquid. On the other hand, since the product of the
roots of (27) is equal to

eae IP
1+ 2aK/hAB
it appears that the lower root, which determines the wave-
velocity in the fluid, must lie between the limits
— o I
rteayae° 0d Toe + (28).

* Liouville, 1876 (quoted by Korteweg).

8 LAMB, Velocety of Sound in a Tube.

As a numerical example, let us take the case of water
in a glass tube whose thickness is one-tenth of the radius.

Assuming
K= 2°22 x10), =O Osrno 10 A0mmliOn

in C.G.S. units*, we find that the velocity of longitudinal
waves in the tube-wall must lie between

(Z/o)! and 1°035(£/p)',
and that the wave-velocity in the liquid will lie between
"4a, and. 7'7Oc,.

If we actually solve the quadratic (27) we find, with
the same data, that the accurate value of the ferme:
velocity is
1015(Z/)’,
and that of the latter
"75 8Lo5

To avoid a possible misconception it may be well to
point out explicitly that the forced vibrations of the tube-
wall, due to waves of expansion in the contained liquid,
are, under the present conditions, mainly longitudinal.
This follows from the former of equations (6), which shews
that the ratio w/z is of the order ma. An increase of
pressure in any part of the tube tends (it is true) to produce
in the first instance a radial enlargement, but this in turn
tends to produce a longitudinal contraction ; and, owing
to the length of the waves, and to the relatively great
velocity of wave-propagation in the solid, this latter effect
is cumulative.

If we had assumed that the strains in the tube have
at each instant the statical values corresponding to the

* The numbers refer to a specimen of flint glass whose elastic constants
were determined by Everett (see his Uzts and Physical Constants).

Manchester Memotrs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 9. 9

actual distribution of pressure on the inner surface, we
should have had, in place of (5),

ax a
: : Ae) 3
du Ww pa
"le a AB

Imax

and thence, on the supposition that ~, w, p vary as e’™,
2
oo ee , 2 (30).
Combined with (18) and (24) this leads to
ae
Ps T+ 2xafhe : ; hh ety):
This is the formula obtained by Korteweg, on the assump-
tion just stated. It may easily be shown that the right
hand side of (31) is an upper limit to the smaller root of
(27). In the particular case previously considered, it gives
Fa iSO oe

The assumption referred to may be justified (as a first
approximation) by an appeal to a fundamental theorem
ieierations.. In the cases at present in view, the
motion of the tube-wall may be regarded as a forced
vibration whose period is considerably longer than that
of the free vibration of the same type (ze., of the same
wave-length), so that the deformations have practically the
“equilibrium values” corresponding to the instantaneous
distribution of force.

It remains to notice the various modes of radial
vibration of the system. These are found by putting
u=0, dw/dx=0, in (5). If the time-factor be ¢”, we find
from (5) and (23),
fii Lay oN 3B
* hy ral, (va)S ~ pa ; - (32),

tae

where
y=init, . = (33).

* See Lord Rayleigh’s Sound, § 100.

10 LAMB, Velocity of Sound in a Tube.

Hence we may put

Bone ; . "Gay
where g is a root of

21 = — <= ne ae a
J, denoting the ordinary Bessel’s Function of zero order.
If the fraction ao,/zp were small,'one root of this would be
= (B/pe,”)* ,
approximately ; this root determining the frequency of the
radial vibrations of the wall as modified by the presence of
the fluid. The remaining roots are in the neighbourhood
of those of |
Jo'z) = 0,

and correspond to the various radial vibrations of a
cylindrical mass of elastic fluid, as modified by the want
of rigidity in the boundary. It is easy to continue the
approximation, and so to estimate the extent of the modi-
fication in the several fundamental types of radial vibra-
tion, but it is hardly worth while to write down the results,
as in cases of any interest the fraction ap,/Zp would not
be small. The only plan would then be to solve (35) by
means of the tables of Bessel’s Functions.

2. We have so far investigated only the case of fluid
internal to the tube. When, asin Wertheim’s experiments,
the tube is immersed in liquid, we shall have in place of (6)

( é 2) ioB
(GIS | Was w=oao
0 mao

ba Ly + (2 a )ee = me swe

ma 0 Pas mho }

(36),

where 7’ denotes the external pressure. The solution of
(17) appropriate to the external space is

Pee GON Ge es a7)

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 9. vg

where K, is defined by

K(2) = id cos (z sinh z)du

x \2 I yee )
a SOE gee ee es ar ie hws
i) : {3 82° 2! (82/2 f (38),
the latter series being of the “semi-convergent PeGlass.

and therefore only available for large values of 2. For
small values of z we may use the form

ge gt I
Kz) = —(y + log ~2)1,(2) Bak acl - ) +... (39),

2°47
where y='57721..... The condition analogous to (23), to
be satisfied at the external surface, is
K,(va)
ye
P= MC'9. eter x (40),

The effect of this is that, in our previous work, we must
replace
L,(va)
val (vit)
by
L,(va) K (va)
val,(va) vaK,' (va) ,

or, for sufficiently small values of va,

where only the most important term in each fraction has
been retained. When the wave-length is at all consider-
able as compared with the circumference of the tube,
the second fraction is small compared with the first; ze.,
the effect of the external fluid may be neglected.

3. It has been assumed, so far, that the thickness of
the tube is small compared with the radius. When this

* See Gray and Mathews, Bessel Functions, pp. 67, 68.

12 Lamb, Velocity of Sound in a Tube.

restriction is abandoned we must fall back on the general
equations of Elasticity.”

In a usual notation, the equations of motions of an
elastic solid free from extraneous force are

aa do
pgaa Athy teva &c., &e . (41),
where
«Ge, Din ay
= Te dy” dz =e

If the time factor be e””, it is known that the general
solution of these is of the type
sr) 1 ao I ao
Qi op gO eee
where o is the solution of
(v27+#)d6=0 : ; - (aay
and uw, v, w constitute the general solution of the system
(yeah), (yee) 0 —e, (y oes e—e
au BU. naw » (45-)t
a eee
The constants , £, which appear in these equations,
are defined by the relations
P=meol(rX+ 2p), B=mco/p oo 4 One
In the case of symmetry about the axis of 4. ihe
equation (44) takes the form
a0 270 ao

Tee eet ae A . * an
where
ja (y? + me
We may also write
ie a, we ee
Bere = = ae ee

* It has not been found possible, in the investigation which follows, to
preserve altogether the notation of the previous part of this paper.
Tt Cf. Proc. Lond. Math, Soc., t. xiii., p. 192 (1882).

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. 9. 13

where y is a function of x and + satisfying the equation
(V>+#?)y=0, or

a*y a*y I dy
dx? drt + ar

+ ky =0 (4):

If we now assume that, as regards dependence on +,

all our functions vary as e’”, then, writing

r= (98 + 2y)/7,
so that 7 denotes the radial displacement, we have *
wm , ey coke ay
a= — 70+ (h?—m*)x, T= -ja7 tim . (50).

The normal stress across any plane perpendicular to

vy is then given by

_ ar
Pre =O + 2UT,

Bae 8
=(X eae )e her dr
me @
— 2ipm(k? — m)y — =e = (5a

and the shear parallel to + and 7 by

da ar 21m ao dy

22 ee EER. pyD\

ee a i eg ee

In the reduction of (51) use has been made of the
differential equations (47) and (49).

The pressure in the fluid is subject to the same
equation (17) as before, and we find, as the condition to
be satisfied at the inner surface (r=a@) of the cylindrical
tube,

Prr= — moa. ven 2 (a4);*

There is a similar condition to be satisfied at the
external surface, if the influence of the surrounding fluid
is to be taken into account ; see § 2, above.

*The change of sign, from (23), is due to the fact that p denotes a
pressure, and pyr a tension.

-

I4 LAMB, Velocity of ‘Sound in a Tube.

For sufficiently long waves (53) reduces to

2mco,

Dp Be aa : fr s (54) 3

and the conditions to be satisfied for ~=a are therefore

n? QDI Ph, wie 2am a
@ 4 ope “ee ja a es air 20pm k? — m?)y — ae a
IMEC O(a) ian
=a Gi sim) (55),
and |
21m ao ax
= 7p t (R? - 2m*)F = 0 mre (510)

The conditions to be satisfied at the second surface may
be obtained in a similar manner.
If we write
ee a Rae 1.)
the differential equations to be satisfied by the functions
é and x take the forms -

Oe Tee vi eee

ea ie tg ol) ; : - Se
A 7G. ely,

Be yg eee: ks . J (Gop

If we aim only at a determination of the wave-velocity in
the fluid, as modified by the elasticity of the tube, ¢ will be
less than ¢, and @ fortiord less than the velocity of free
waves, whether of expansion or of distortion, in an infinite |
elastic solid. Hence the quantities v, n, ¢ will be real.
The case where the internal and external radii are both
finite leads to some rather complicated equations. The
problem is a little simplified if we suppose the external
radius to be infinite, z.¢., we consider a tunnel bored in an
infinite solid. This case is also of some interest as forming
the other extreme to the state of things considered in § 1

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit (1898), Wo. 9. 15

above. The solutions of (58) and (59) which are finite
for y=co may be written

K (nr) Kier)

o— Aga X= BYE (Fa) ; we (OQ),

where A, & are arbitrary constants. Substituting in (55)
and (56), and eliminating the ratio A/B, we find

5; 2) K (na) 2 amr
| _ 2pm \ae je Po
(4? — 2m (ree 72 JnaK,(na) | a2 72a?

ata Ebe- EE) 6
This equation, in conjunction with (18) and (57), deter-
mines the wave-velocity c.

In the present investigation, na and Za are real, and
less than ma, which is by hypothesis small. Now we
have seen from (39) that for small values of 2 the fraction

KA)

aK, (2)
is of the order log z. The terms in (61) which have a
coefficient of this form are therefore of the order 2? log z
as compared with the remainder, and may (for sufficiently
long waves) be neglected. The equation then takes the
simple form

prfm=apC=Kxe[cr . , rales

where «x denotes the cubical elasticity of the fluid. If we
substitute the value of v? from (18), this gives

c? ll

er abu (63).

The value of yu for glass is (roughly speaking) about Io
times the value of « for water. This would give a
diminution of about 5 per cent.in the velocity of sound in
the water.

The formula (63) is precisely what we should obtain

16 LAMB, Velocity of Sound in a Tube.

on the hypothesis that the strains in the solid have at each
instant the equilibrium values corresponding to the internal
pressure. In the case of a cylindrical cavity bored in an
infinite solid, the statical value of the displacement at the
surface (y=@) due to an internal pressure 7 is

Wa) 2 a : ; +) (Oat
Comparing this with (24) we obtain the results (62) and
(63).

The corresponding approximation for a tube whose
internal and external radii (@ and 4) are comparable with
one another is easily investigated. If the tube be subject to
a statical pressure on the interior, the radial displacement
(w) at the inner surface is found, on the hypothesis that
the tube is free to contract longitudinally, to be

“8 (A + 2p)a? + (3A + 2p)6?
=" auGh eee aay Pe 0 ee

Compared with (24), this gives

p GReaW(e—a) J

In the case of b=a+4, where h/a is small, this becomes

oe 2aK
eal. on er fee é (Gao

Bs {; ety (A + 2u)a? + (3A + 2)07) (66).

in agreement with (31).

* See Love’s Elasticity, t. i., p. 226.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. liz. (1898), No. 10.

X. The New Gold Discoveries.

By EDUARD SUESS (Vienna),
Honorary Member of the Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society,

Received and read April 5th, 1598.

Reference has lately been made in the Proceedings of
the Society to my small book on “ The Future of Gold,”
published in 1877, and a desire has been expressed to
learn my opinion on the present situation. My opinion is,
that the succession of rich discoveries and the energy of
mining operations accelerate the exhaustion of the
resources in gold offered by nature to mankind, and at
the same time hasten the approach of a universal economic
danger.

When Germany, after the war of 1870, adopted the
gold standard, the Government was supported by dis-
tinguished men, of well-deserved renown in economical
affairs, but without the necessary deference to the geo-
logical side of the question. That is why, in 1877, I
ventured to remind them that the production of silver
would not be reduced in the ratio of the fall in its value,
that the source of available gold would not be sufficient
to provide a gold standard for the whole world, and that
the epoch was inevitable, probably after a few centuries,
when the production of gold must diminish steadily and
in a high degree, and this metal, with increasing rarity,
would no longer be able to retain its present economic
position.

The evidence seems very clear. The Greek philoso-
phers knew that gold was only found on the utmost

Shey 13th, 1898.

2 Suess, Lhe New Gold Dtscovertes.

frontiers of civilisation, and Humboldt emphasized the
fact that all subsequent centuries have proved the truth
of this observation. The same experience has occurred,
since Humboldt’s time, in Eastern Siberia, in the Rand, in
Western Australia and on the Yukon, up to the present day.
The rich discoveries have always been dependent on
geographical expansion. Each such discovery has yielded
gold to mankind through a certain time, according to the
richness of the deposit and the energy of working, and
has then ceased. Now, as the extent of unexplored
country is limited, and the distribution of gold-bearing
rocks within these districts is also limited, it must never
be forgotten that the entire sum-of gold still attainable
by man is also a limited figure.

This constant displacement of mining operations
forces them beyond the regions of congenial climate.
The consequences are well shown in Mr. Goodrich’s de-
scription of gold-mining on the Yukon, contained in
Spurr’s excellent Alaskan Report to the U. S. Geological
Survey. Firstly, we must remember that all gold from
the Yukon comes from placers, and consequently cannot
be compared to the gold won at the Treadwell Mine,
Alaska, which is mined under wholly different and
exceptionally happy circumstances on Douglas Island, near —
the entrance to Lynn channel. The Cassiar district, near
Dease Lake, British Columbia, is of the same type as the
Yukon placers. This district gave 1,000,000 dollars in
1874, then receded gradually to 22,000 dollars in 1895,
and is now exhausted. Cassiar has given experienced
prospectors and miners to the Yukon district. But here,
on the banks of the Yukon, frost reigns through eight.
months of the year.

The prolonged and intense cold is a serious impedi-
ment to placer work and only the richest deposits can pay.
Gold of coarse grain is, by the high specific gravity of the

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 19. 3

metal, much easier to separate from the wash dirt, than
the fine gold particles of even a rich silt. Therefore, the
prospectors push up to the higher parts of the creeks,
where frost and snow are even more excessive, food is
wanting, and every sort of transport becomes extremely
difficult. In some places, the miners melt the frozen
eround by fire, sink shafts and throw out the pay-dirt for
washing during the shortsummer. But, as the number of
persons who endure all these hardships is small, only the
richest places are worked, and every new and better find
causes the desertion of the old place.

In 1886 Stewart River was abandoned when Forty
Mile Creek was discovered, and in 1896 Forty Mile Creek
was quitted for Klondike. The consequence is a very
incomplete harvest. It is improbable that hydraulic
arrangements in this severe climate will pay, and the
establishment of quartz mining is likewise held improbable
by authorities.

The production from the placers of all the Alaskan river
valleys in 1896, together with the Yukon creeks on British
territory, but without those on Cook’s Inlet on the sea-
board, was estimated by the Alaskan Mining Record at
2,170,000 dollars, and by Mr. Goodrich at 1,700,000
dollars, showing how difficult it is to obtain trustworthy
figures from districts of this kind.

In comparing the various fluctuations which the
world’s production of gold shows since the early ages, I,
in 1877, thought myself entitled to suppose that these
‘fluctuations would continue during the next few centuries
until the time of final exhaustion. This supposition was
erroneous. The facilitation of every sort of communica-
tion which has taken place during these 21 years, the im-
mense expansion of the white race, the magazine rifle, the
increased experience of the prospector, the fabulouscredulity
of the mass risking thousands after thousands in 41 shares

4. SuEss, The New Gold Discoveries.

on enterprises with but the faintest spark of hope, and
many other circumstances, combine to the effect that, zx
place of the continued fluctuations, presumed by me in 1877,
the whole production of the world now tends to unzte znto one
great wave, and, consequently, to hasten the end and to
increase the danger. It is a further consequence of this
state of things, that the distance of this end may no
longer be measurable by centuries.

But, along with this increase of the world’s production,
every sort of activity has increased all over the world,
hundreds of new exigencies have arisen, and the question
may be raised, whether the production of gold and the
new necessities have grown in a comparable manner
during recent years.

Every figure in these matters can only be more or less
rudely approximate. The figures of production, of export
and import of gold, which I beg leave to cite below, are taken
from the last excellent publication of the U.S. Director of the
Mint, Mr. Preston. I am aware, that in these figures
the production of gold for the United States is given
for the calendar year, as for the rest of the world, and
the figures of export and import are given for the U.S.
fiscal year ending June 30th. This may displace a part
of the figures, but cannot affect the general conclusion.

In 1887 the world’s production had decreased to 21°8
millions sterling, and from that time the rise was constant,
until in 1897 50 millions sterling was reached; the
estimate for 1898 is 55 or 56 millions sterling.

Three-quarters of this sum is produced by four parts
of the world: Australia, South Africa, Russia, and the
United States. It is a very wide-spread delusion that
these four countries really deliver up all their gold to the
world’s use. In reality, the case is very different.

Let us only consider the last four years, 1893-96, for
which we possess the necessary figures.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 10. 5

The net export of gold from Austraha during these
four years teaches that one-half of the production (82 million
dollars out of 167 million dollars) was retained for home
purposes, and only one-half was exported.

South Africa, in the same time, retained about 31 per
cent. of her production, and delivered up 69 per cent. (108
million dollars out of £58:2 million dollars).

Russia, during all these years, shows high figures of
net import. We see that Russia retained all her own
production, and continued to draw gold from other parts
of the world.

The United States have, under the influence of
economic changes, exported in some years a greater and in
others a smaller part of their production; it has even
happened that they have exported more gold than was
produced. But since the middle of 1896 the current has
wholly changed. Since that time they also have retained
all their production, and drawn on the rest of the world.

If you will take the trouble to subtract the production
of these four countries from the production of the world,
and add their net export to the rest (always basing on
Mr. Preston’s figures), you may obtain the approximate
sum of new gold really left to the disposal of the rest of
the world during this time.

These figures are :—

1893, world’s production 33'0 millions sterling reduced to
16'8 millions sterling.

1894, world’s production 380 millions sterling reduced to
14°I millions sterling.

1895, world’s production 41°8 millions sterling reduced to
28'7 millions sterling.

1896, world’s production 42°6 millions sterling reduced to
minus 1'7 millions sterling.

This means a world’s production of 387 millions sterling
per annum, out of which only 14°5 millions sterling per

6 SuESS, The New Gold Discoveries.

annum were at the disposal of the world excepting the
four countries named. At the same time the variability
of the reduced figures may be seen (one of them showing
even a negative result), and the treacherous character of
averages. But, although the production varies, the vari-
ability of demand is incomparably greater, having regard
to quantity as well as to origin. It may be said, that the
bad harvest in Europe, and Russia’s preparations for a gold
currency, are claims of a temporary and passing character
which give abnormal figures. But the demands are very
often of a temporary character, and it is a justifiable
requirement that the disposable quantity of gold should
be adequate even to meet much stronger claims; let us
not speak of war.

In 1897 the position was no better, and it is hard to
assume that it will be much improved in 1898.

In Australia the export of agricultural produce is
rather retrograde, English capital has also been withdrawn,
and therefore Australia gives more gold; the export of
gold to Europe has been strong in 1897 and is expected
to be considerable in 1898 (say 11 to 13 millions sterling).

South Africa delivers up a great part of her increasing
production, but part of the outcrop mines on the Rand have
already closed up ; the life of others is reckoned approxi-
mately to last four or five years longer. The life of the
deep levels is estimated by mining authorities at about 25
years. Let us accept these figures. South Africa is now not
only one of the very first producers, but also delivers up the
greatest part of her gold,and let us ask, What after 25 years? -

Russia has continued her gold policy, she has retained
her own produce (6°5 millions sterling or more) and has
continued to import foreign gold. Mr. Witte’s last
report says, that in 1897, 1o'°9 million dollars have been
added to the Government’s gold treasure, besides very
large sums of gold which entered into commerce.

* Manchester Memotrs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 10. 7

The Unzted States in 1897 likewise retained their own
production (11 millions sterling), and continued to draw
on the rest of the world. Their net export in trade in
1897 amounted to about 70 millions sterling. During
recent years a certain amount of American railway
securities seems to have returned homewards, thus
narrowing one of the channels by which Europe received
American gold.

Besides these variable contingencies, and besides the
hoarding of gold treasure by Austria-Hungary and Japan,
there appear a great number of exigencies which are not
temporary but are constantly increasing. I first mention
the consumption of gold in the arts and industries, which
for the world (excepting the said four countries), is
estimated at about 9g millions sterling per annum. Then
comes the increasing demand for circulation in the very
few parts of Europe which possess a gold currency.
Everybody feels the necessity of reinforced metallic
reserves for banking institutions to face the quite incal-
culable quantity of paper values and the manifold kinds
of liabilities. Let me call to your mind that the increase
of business of the Deutsche Reichsbank in 1897 alone
amounted to 500 millions sterling, that the demands
for new capital at London were 49°! millions sterling in
1893 and rose to g1°8, 104°7, 152°8 in the three succeeding
years respectively, and in 1897 to 157'2. I donot add
more figures, as we all live in the midst of the bee-hive
ourselves.

The effect of all this is that, although the world’s pro-
duction of gold 7s more than twice as great as it was ten
years ago, still the struggle for gold is, to say the least, quite
as sharp as it was then.

But all this is only one side of this disastrous affair.
Now come the consequences of the yearly increasing
difference in the relative values of gold and silver. I do

8 SUESS, The New Gold Discoveries.

not intend to speak of the influence of this fact on prices,
nor on different branches of industrial and agricultural
activity, but I wish to say a few words on Asia.

India has from 1893 to 1896 produced 18°55 millions
sterling of gold. Exports and imports of gold have been
extremely variable ; still India had a net import of 2°29
millions sterling for these years, so that the Indian pro-
duction also was not delivered up to Europe. But this
home production is of small account for the country.
India, deeply and innocently injured by the fall of silver,
now hardly strong enough to bear the burden of her debts
amounting already to about 18 millions sterling in gold
per annum, loaded with new gold debts to pay old
interest and with new experiments; the same India
to which in 1892 an eminent Indian statesman thought
to assure a gold circulation by means of merely 15
millions sterling, and which is now, six years later
and after the great increase of the world’s production,
haunted by the spectre of a gold standard without gold;
this vast and rich empire, blessed by nature and sprinkled
with the blood of so many of England’s noblest children,
is at this moment a deterring way-mark on the path which
China is being forced to enter. Can any earnest man,
casting his eye over the world’s increasing traffic, and over
this great and increasing gold monetary movement, which
we are witnessing, I say, can anyone believe that this
process may be called upon by a modern Joshua to
stand still at 1s. 4d.2 But is not this forced application |
of a foreign standard the resurrection of that colonial
policy of past times, condemned by history and by civili-
sation? Does advanced Europe, proud of her Christianity,
indeed think of subduing foreign nations by giving to
each of their liabilities an ulcerating character? Do
enlightened statesmen not perceive, that zx Asza, that ocean
of mankind, xo reasonable policy of whatever direction ts
compatible with a gold standard ?

Manchester Memozrs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 19. 9

These are the conditions under which we float towards
a great monetary crisis. Yukon will not be the last of the
rich discoveries. Some others probably are still reserved
for the near future, be it on the north of the Kuenlun
Range, or in Central Africa, in Siberia, or in any other
distant part of the world. Other sources will decline,
but, zz Zoto, the world’s production will for some time
continue to increase. The necessities of mankind will also
continue to increase, and probably even in a higher degree.
Then the apex of the wave of production will be attained,
the final decrease of gold will begin, but the necessities of
mankind will continue to increase. Perhaps America will
in the meantime decide upon the free coinage of silver, and,
setting up a monetary barrier right across the traffic of the
world, will defer the final crisis of gold. We cannot
foresee the single events, but we can see the line of drift.

Germany has loosened the old tie of gold and silver,
without anticipating the consequences. In the long run
the profits have, without any merit, fallen to the bond-
holders, and the losses, without any fault, to the debtors.
The holders of foreign securities in England are actually
in the first line responsible to the world for the continuation
of this state of monetary affairs, so perilous also for
themselves.

I know well, that personal interest is a very strong
item, but national interest is a stronger item, and when
national interest speaks, personal interest must rest silent.
But the interest of humanity is a stronger item still, and
even if national interest should eventually point another
way, which I contend is not here the case for England,
the common interest of humanity must prevail. A great
nation, claiming to be a leading member of mankind,
must feel this as a duty.

wey ers Naas Ve 7. -.
wheter 2 ay iyey tee bea

en 7. Lait Ti P a,
MT ser aut ah loa tee

1 he
A ‘FN sit} ata ah ‘eae
». sill beadlg ae LOA Kdnnie
ie ae ae iy Lary ae with Meee ;
+e ‘ae cviseere gy Ta oie

Bart © at 2 + eo sie Oe; nid ae oF a) he :
or } :

,_ ee el a Ne ee Be 5 Sits Taek
a aid Fy lip EL Tw

i

ea

Vo . | 7 gay Pe peeea MAP bs di ae

a “ert POU WY ARAL OSRE Gt ee ad Uefa
i. | oY Si ar? QITP Pe eere he es A Pata! erie AR
a “shogyyiiioe SU Be NoMa yo Pe ene aes Se ae
(Rey Ta et EEF: at ari te Pee Mea 1 ‘the
; Tee bee acy Wace ee at Tatas Vat ea |

chy eyereice Wirhevevt tie irelent ares

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 11.

XI. Hymenoptera Orientalia, or Contributions to a
knowledge of the Hymenoptera of the Oriental
Zoological Region. Part VII.

By PETER CAMERON.

[Communicated by J. Cosmo Melvill, M.A., F.L.S.]
Rececved January 18th. Read January 25th, 1898.

Since the publication of Part VI. of this series of

papers on the Hymenoptera of the Oriental Zoological
Region, there has appeared Col. C. T. Bingham’s “ Fauna
of British India, Hymenoptera,’ Vol. I., which deals with
the Aculeate Section of the Order, except the Ants. To
facilitate reference [ have, in this paper, followed
Col. Bingham’s arrangement, giving indications of the
positions my new species will occupy in the system
adopted by him. Further, I have pointed out certain
omissions and corrections in his work.
It is necessary to say here that Col. Bingham’s book
only refers to British India, Burma and Ceylon, whereas
the scope of my papers includes the Oriental Zoological
Region as defined by Mr. A. R. Wallace—a very much
wider area.

MUTLLLIDZ:.
MUTILLA VISRARA, sf. nov.
Long. 8 mm.
Hab. Trincomali, Ceylon ( Yerbury).
Allied to 17. nzveoszgnata, but differs in the basal seg-
ment not being “almost bare” at the base, but covered

September 13th, 1898.

2 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalza.

with long black hair, although not so thickly as at the apex,
where it is densely covered with long fulvous hair, in the
second segment beneath not having three longitudinal
keels, in the véntral segments and legs being distinctly
piceous, and in being two mm. smaller.

Head slightly wider, but not quite so long as the
thorax; rounded in front, but not quite so much so
behind, very coarsely rugosely punctured, the punctures
longest and deepest in the centre of the front and vertex;
behind the eyes it is developed to a greater extent than
their greatest length; the eyes are small. Front and
vertex covered with long black hairs; above the antennz
more thickly with silvery hair; on the clypeus it is equally
long and pale golden. Antennal tubercles piceous at the
apex, shining. Clypeus reddish, the apex bordered with
black. Mandibles broadly red in the middle. Antenne
longer than the head and thorax united; distinctly tapering
towards the apex; the scape shining, thickly covered with
long silvery hair; piceous at the apex; the flagellum bare
of hair except at the base, distinctly pruinose towards the
apex; black, the apical joints rufous beneath; the third
joint about one-third longer than the fourth; thorax
quadrangular, scarcely widened towards the apex; the
mesonotum, with a semicircular space on the top of the
median segment, reddish, coarsely punctured, the punc-
tures large and deep; the pronotum bearing long, blackish
hairs ; the mesonotum with depressed, pale golden, shorter
hairs; the top of the median segment rounded, and bearing
a row of large, deep punctures; the rest of it oblique; the
sides with a row of large aree; the centre has a blistered
appearance and an indistinct keel down its centre;
it is sparsely covered with long blackish hairs. Propleure
reticulated ; the metapleurz also reticulated, but with the
reticulations much larger and deeper ; the mesopleure
smooth, the lower part densely covered with long silvery

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 11. 3

hair ; over the middle coxe it is rufous. Legs black; the
anterior coxe and femora rufous ; the other femora, tibiz
and tarsi more or less piceous; the femora more sparsely,
the tibiz and tarsi much more thickly covered with long
silvery hair; the tibial spines thick, testaceous; the
calcaria white. Abdomen as long as the head and thorax
united ; the basal segment irregularly reticulated; the
base covered, but not thickly, with long, black hair; the
apex fringed with long, fulvous, golden hair, which extends
on to the base of the second segment ; the second segment
coarsely irregularly reticulated, most strongly at the sides,
thickly covered with long, black hair; in its centre, in
front of the middle, are two oval marks of silvery pubes-
cence; the other segments are covered with long, black
pubescence; on the third, are two marks of silvery
pubescence, but wider and shorter than those on the
second ; the apical segments are slightly fringed with
silvery hairs at their apices; the pygidial area smooth,
shining, impunctate; covered thickly at the sides with
long, black and a few silvery hairs. The first and second
ventral segments piceous ; the basal obliquely triangularly
raised in the middle; the basal part depressed before the
apex; the second segment broadly depressed in the
middle at the base; its apical half bearing large, deep,
irregular punctures; sparsely covered with long, white
hairs ; the other segments closely punctured at the apices,
thickly covered with long, silvery hair. The apices of the
third and fourth ventral segments are obscure testaceous
in the middle.
MUTILLA ELTOLA, Sf. ov.

Long. fere 7 mm.

Hab. Trincomali, Ceylon ( Yerdury).

A species very similar in form and markings to JV.
vothneye Cam., but may be known from it by the median
segment not having “a single central spine posteriorly.”

4 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalia.

Head large, subquadrate, very slightly narrowed
gradually behind the eyes; black; the vertex broadly in
the middle, and the front broadly, in the centre to the
middle of the eyes, red, sparsely covered with long, fuscous,
intermixed with shorter silvery, hair ; the front and vertex
strongly and distinctly longitudinally striolated, the striz
running into coarse punctures over the antennz ; the striz
behind the eyes stout, sharp, slightly oblique, and not
extending below the level of the eyes; the antennal tuber-
cles very smooth, rufo-piceous. Oral region piceous-red ;
the clypeus in the middle incised, the sides of the incision
forming two stout projecting teeth. Mandibles ferru-
ginous; the teeth black; except at the apex, sparsely
covered with long, pale golden hair; thorax at the base very
slightly narrower and not very much longer than the head,
of nearly equal width throughout ; the mesonotum, except
at the base and at the sides, rufous, the black on the base
being broader than on the sides, very coarsely longitu-
dinally reticulated, the reticulations becoming wider and
larger towards the apex ; the median segment with an
oblique slope; reticulated, the reticulations much larger
than on the mesonotum. The sides of the mesonotum above
with projecting teeth; those at the base indistinct ; the
central very large, straight, sharp at the apex; that behind
it blunt, curved, longer; the teeth on the median seg-
ment finer, curved, five in number; the central) beme
the longest. Pleurz not excavated, smooth, shining, im-
punctate ; the propleurz at the apex piceous ; the baseof |
the meso- and the meta-pleure thickly covered with
longish, silvery pubescence. Antennz longish, distinctly
tapering towards the apex; the under side of the
scape of the second, and of the base of the third joint,
rufous ; the scape punctured, thickly covered with longish
silvery hairs ; the flagellum thickly covered with a silvery
down ; the third joint twice the length of the fourth.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 11. 5

Legs black, thickly covered with longish, silvery hair ;
the tarsi towards the apex more or less rufous; the
calcaria white. Abdomen as long as the head and thorax
united, black; a silvery spot on the apex of the basal
segment at the apex ; a large, round, central and a smaller,
more elongate mark on the side of the second segment,
and the centre of the fourth and fifth segments broadly in
the centre, covered with silvery pubescence; the basal
segments punctured, sparsely covered with long black
hairs; the pygidium shining, covered with long, black.
hairs; the centre slightly raised, impunctate; the rest
punctured, the punctures large, moderately deep and
clearly separated. The basal ventral segment testaceous ;
the apical three-fourths keeled down the middle ; the keel
black, dilated at the base, but not much; the second
segment with large, shallow punctures, sparsely covered
with long, pale hairs; towards the apex the middle
projects into a stout, somewhat triangular, tooth ; the other
segments closely and rather strongly punctured except at
the base, and covered with long hair; the hypopygium
closely punctured and for the greater part testaceous.

Might be the 92 of 7. edzpus, but this is a point which
can only be settled by direct observation.

MUTILLA SIMPLICATA, sf. 70v.

Long. Io mm. 2.

Hab. Mahaganay, Ceylon ( Yerdury).

Belongs to the limited group of J7utzlla kanare Cam.
and W. atomus André, distinguished by having no spots
on the abdomen, having instead broad bands of reddish-
fulvous pubescence; the legs red, the antennz black,
reddish at the base. JV/. kanar@ is a larger species than
this, its thorax is red: the head covered above with fulvous
pubescence ; and the second abdominal segment fulvous

6 CAMERON, Aymenoptera Orientalza.

at the apex only ; W. atomus has also the head red, and
the antennz and thorax entirely ferruginous.

Antennz stout, the basal three joints ferruginous ;
the scape sparsely covered with longish, pale golden hair ;
the flagellum with a white, microscopic pile. Head as
wide as the thorax; dark ferruginous, darker on the
vertex ; coarsely punctured, sparsely covered with long,
pale golden hair; the third joint of the antenne as long
as the following two united. Thorax rounded in front,
not much narrowed behind, the sides straight ; above
coarsely rugosely reticulated, sparsely covered with long,
black hairs. Legs entirely ferruginous-red, covered with
long, white hair ; the spurs pale ; the tibial spines stout,
reddish. Abdomen black, velvety ; the apex of the basal
segment covered rather densely with long, pale golden
hair, the second segment broadly at the base, and the third
and fourth entirely with golden, depressed pubescence ;
the other segments black, and bearing black hairs ; the
pygidial area strongly longitudinally striolated.

The thorax in my only example is somewhat crushed,
and I cannot satisfactorily describe its sides; the meso-
pleurz appear, however, to be smooth; the median seg-
ment coarsely punctured, and sparsely covered with long,

white hair.

MUTILLA CEDIPUS Cam.

Col. Bingham (4c, p. 27) gives Mutzlla edipus Cam.
(he calls it contracta) as the 3 of M. rothneyt Cam.
There is, however, no evidence, except surmise, that
this is the case; and, like so many other species, it
had better be kept distinct until direct observation
shows what its female really is. Col. Bingham states
further that it is not really apterous—that its wings
have been torn off. There is nothing novel in the fact of
there being an apterous male Wutz//a, for there is more

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 11. 7

than one undoubted instance known; and, when such is
the case, the form of the thorax in the ¢ approximates to
that of the females. Such is certainly the case with JZ.
edipus, in which I am not only unable to find any trace of
there having been wings, but so far as the hind wings are
concerned, I cannot see where they could have been
attached. The contracted thorax is well shown in my
figure (Manch. Memoirs, vol. xli., No. 4, pl. 4, f. 13). A
comparison of my figure with that of iW. perfecta Rad.,
shows great similarity between these apterous males in
structure of the thorax.*

Mutilla acidalia Cam., described (WManch. Memoirs,
Zc., p. 56) in both sexes by me, is omitted entirely by
Bingham.

Col. Bingham also has overlooked my description of
both sexes of Mutzlla opulenta (Manch. Memoirs, lLe.,

Pp. 57).

MUTILLA APICIPENNIS Caz.

This species is not mentioned by Bingham under
this name, unless he regards it as identical with JZ.
pedunculata Klug (Zc, p. 51). If so, his description
of the latter is defective in a very important point,
namely, he says nothing about the petiole being serrate,
or irregularly armed with teeth beneath, this being one of
the most specific features whereby J/. pedunculata is dis-
' tinguished from the very closely-allied JZ. chlorotica Grib.
I have not at hand Klug’s original description, but JZ.
apicipennzs does not agree with Gribodo’s description of
M. pedunculata, e.g. the second abdominal segment is not
coarsely and strongly rugosely punctured, JZ. apicipennts
having it only irregularly roughened at the base; in JZ.

* For details regarding the apterous males, as wellas the generic position
of Mutclla apicipennis and its allies, see the work of Radoszkowski, Hore |
Soc. Ent. Ross., XIX. 1885, and the more recent paper by M. Ernest André,
Mém. Soc. Zool. France, 1896, pp. 261-277.

8 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalia.

pedunculata the epipygium is said to be smooth, longitu-
dinally carinate in the middle ; in M. apicipennts it is only
smooth at the base, the rest closely rugosely punctured
and without a trace of a keel (cf, Gribodo, Aun. Mus.
Civ. Genova, Xx., p. 390). M. pedunculata is known from
Arabia and Berbera. It, with JV. chlorotica Grib., and
perhaps MW. aszatzca Rad., forms the genus or subgenus
Tricholabtodes Rad.

When I described MW. apzczpennzs, I relied (not having
Klug’s work to consult) on the description of JZ. pedun-
culata given by Sichel and Radoszkowski in their Mono-
graph of the Old World WWuztellzde. Their W. pedunculata
is assuredly not JZ. apicipennis, but is perhaps WV. chloroteca
Grib. It has not the petiole serrate beneath, nor is any
mention made of there being two furrows on the meso-
notum. JZ. chlorotica (also from Arabia) differs from JZ.
apicipennis in having the abdomen without any black, the
petiole without teeth, and all the abdominal segments
obliquely punctured. It.seems to me therefore clear that
M. pedunculata Klug must be deleted from the lists of
Oriental Mutdhd@, unless the example from “ Western
India” recorded by Bingham, be the true J. pedunculata,
in which case his description does not fit it.

MUTILLA POSTHUMA, Sp. nov.
Long. 4°5 mm.
flab. Trincomali, Ceylon ( Yerbury).
In the table (7anchester Memoirs, V 01.5 (1892), p.123-4)
this species comes in at “15. Head red, wholly or in part.”
16. Abdomen with one spot and one band.
16a. Head and thorax with golden hair; antennz
entirely rufo-testaceous ; pygidial area black, not longi-
tudinally striated. Length 7 mm. JZ. poonaensis Cam.
166. Head and thorax without golden hair ; antennz
at the base pallid testaceous, fuscous towards the apex ;
the pygidial area testaceous, distinctly longitudinally
striated. Length 4°5 mm. M. posthuma.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit, (1898), No. 11. 9

The little WZ. atomus André is readily separated from
it by the pygidium not being striated. Antenne stout,
thickened towards the apex ; pallid-testaceous, infuscated
towards the apex, sparsely pilose, the third and fourth
joints equal in length. Head, if anything, wider than the
thorax ; the front and vertex strongly punctured, dark
rufo-testaceous ; the oral region and the tubercles pallid-
testaceous, as is also the base of the mandibles; the
tubercles large, shining ; behind, the head is developed
one-half the length of the eyes. Thorax, with the sides
above, straight, slightly and gradually narrowed towards
the apex ; the mesonotum coarsely punctured ; the median
segment with a slight oblique slope, rounded at the top.
Pleure slightly excavated, smooth and shining; the
middle with long, white hair. Legs thickly covered with
long, white hair ; testaceous, the femora darker, the tarsi
paler. Abdomen a little longer than the head and thorax;
black, with a slight violaceous tinge ; the base and apical
segments rather thickly covered with long, pale hair ; the
anal segment rufo-testaceous, strongly longitudinally
striolated. Ventral surface black; the basal segment
testaceous, with a straight, blunt centre; the other
segments fringed thickly with long, white hair.

MUTILLA CONSOCIATA, sf. nov.

Long. 5 mm. @.

Hab. Trincomali, Ceylon ( Yerbury).

Agrees closely with WZ. posthuma,; but instead of the
apex of the second abdominal segment being entirely
covered with silvery pubescence, it has only a square mark
of it in the centre, there being also similar marks on the
fourth and fifth; the anal segment is black and is only
finely, not strongly, punctured, and, at the sides, is thickly
covered with longish, stiff, black hairs; the apex of the
median segment is more sharply oblique, and not rounded

IO CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalia.

at the top ; the vertex is not so dark, nor the base of the
antenne so light, in tint. It also resembles 17. regza Sm.,
but that is much larger; its abdomen has a very decided
bluish tint; its mesonotum has in front a large mark of
silvery pubescence, and the median segment has a rounded
slope. J. poonaensts may easily be known by its thorax
being longer and distinctly narrowed towards the apex,
the thorax of JZ. consoctata being of uniform width.

Head as wide as the thorax; the front) and vertex
coarsely punctured, the vertex slightly infuscated ; and |
with only a few short, black hairs; the oral region with
some long silvery hairs; the tips of the mandibles black.
Antennz stout, rufous, blackish towards the apex ; the
scape with a few large punctures and a few silvery hairs;
the third joint twice the length of the second and one-
half the length of the fourth. Thorax short, of uniform
width ; the mesonotum strongly punctured, sparsely
covered with long, silvery hair; the median segments with
a sharply oblique slope ; reticulated, and bearing long,
fuscous hair ; the reticulations are weaker and smaller on
the bottom. Pleurz shining, not excavated ; the middle
thickly covered with long, depressed, silvery hair. Legs
rufo-testaceous, thickly covered with long, white hair ; the
hinder knees infuscated. Abdomen hardly so long as the
head and thorax united ; deep black ; an elongated ark
of silvery pubescence in the centre of the second segment,
a transverse one at its apex, and one in the centre of the
fourth and fifth segments ; the anal segment finely longi-
tudinally striated ; the centre in the middle piceous ; the
- ventral segments thickly covered with long, white, silvery
hair.

MUTILLA INDECORA, sf. nov. (PI. 4, fig. 1.)
Long) 4 mm, 9)
fab. Ceylon, Trincomali ( Yerbury).

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. Ak. II

Agrees with JZ. serratula Cam. and M. veda Cam. in
having the thorax spined and the abdomen with golden
markings. From JZ. serratula it may be known by its
head being red, not black, by having only a golden
mark on the apex of the second abdominal segment, not a
complete band, and by the metapleure being coarsely
punctured; JV. veda is to be known from it by the large
belt of golden pubescence on the apex of the second
abdominal segment, by the much less strongly punctured
metapleurz, and by the apical abdominal segment above
being densely covered with golden pubescence.

Head, if anything, wider than the thorax; dark
rufous, slightly infuscated on the vertex ; strongly and
coarsely punctured, thickly covered with long fuscous hair;
the space behind the eyes as long as the eyes; the oral
region thickly covered with long, white hair. Mandibles
rufous, their apices broadly black. Antennz stout, the
flagellum blackish; the scape rufo-testaceous, shining,
sparsely covered with longish, white hair, and having some
large punctures. Thorax somewhat narrower than the
head and about double its length, of nearly equal length
throughout, closely rugosely punctured; the median seg-
ment with an oblique slope, and punctured all over, the
punctures distinctly separated; at the top is one large
cént.al tooth and four smaller lateral ones. Pro-, meso- and
base of meta-pleurz shining, impunctate ; the rest of the
metapleure strongly punctured, the punctures large and
deep. At the apex of the mesopleure above is.a large
stooth ; on the sloping part of the metapleure are six
smaller teeth also above. Legs stout, rufo-testaceous, the
spurs paler; thickly covered with long, pale, fuscous hair;
on the hinder tibiz are four long, sharp spines. Abdomen
broad at the base; closely punctured; on the apex of the
first segment is a roundish spot of golden pubescence; on
the apex of the second in the. middle is a similar mark,

12 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalia.

double its size, and narrowed at the base; on the centre of
the third is a small patch; and the apical segment is
entirely covered with a long, pale golden hair. Ventral
segments punctured, closely covered with long, white hair.

MUTILLA ERNESTI, sf. nov.

Long. 5 mm.

flab. Trincomali, Ceylon ( Yerbury). -

Belongs to the group of JZ. serratula Cam., except that
the head is not black, only dark ferruginous. From
M. veda and M. indecora, it may be known by the darker
colour of the head and thorax, by the deeper tint of the
abdominal marks, and by the second abdominal segment
being distinctly longitudinally striolated.

Head as wide as the thorax; the sides behind the
eyes straight, and as long as the eyes ; strongly punctured,
shining, sparsely covered with long, fuscous hair; the
antennal tubercles shining, smooth, piceous at the apex.
Oral region piceous ; mandibles ferruginous, broadly black
at the apex. The scape and basal two joints of the
flagellum ferruginous; the flagellum brownish beneath ;
the third joint is distinctly longer than the fourth. Thorax
about twice the length of the head and of about the same
width, scarcely narrowed towards the apex ; above coarsely
rugosely punctured ; at the base the sides project into
a stout, blunt, triangular tooth, in the middle there is
a smaller triangular tooth, and at the top of the median |
segment on the sides are a few teeth, the lower indistinct.
The median segment has a sharp oblique slope, which is
for the greater part blackish ; the top serrate, the three
middle teeth being much the larger. Except the apex
of the metapleure, which is strongly punctured, the
pleure are shining and impunctate. Abdomen black ; the
apex of the first segment with a small, the second with

Manchester Memotrs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 11. = 13

a much larger, semicircular mark of deep orange pubes-
cence, mixed with pale golden hairs; the second segment
longitudinally striolated.

MUTILLA LITIGIOSA, sf. mov.

Long. 8 mm. 9.

Hab. Trincomali, Ceylon.

In Bingham’s table, this species comes in on p. 4—
“Second abdominal segment with two spots, the spots
medial, one above the other.”

The spots golden.

Legs and scape of antenne red. M, pulla André.

= = black. M. litigiosa.

Antenne stout, tapering very distinctly towards the apex,
the scape sparsely covered with longish white hair ; the
flagellum bare, or with a microscopic pile ; the apex of
the scape and the base of the flagellum rufous beneath ;
the third joint nearly one-half longer than the fourth.
Head as wide as the middle of the thorax; coarsely
rugosely punctured ; sparsely covered with long, fuscous
hair on the vertex ; on the face and oral region the hairs
are paler, silvery white and more numerous ; the base of
the mandibles piceous. Thorax rufous, except on the
sternum ; rounded at the base and apex, becoming
gradually, but not very much, thicker towards the apex;
above coarsely rugosely punctured ; the pleure excavated,
smooth and shining ; their lower part black, and thickly
covered with long, white hair; the median segment
broadly rounded at the top, and with an oblique slope.
Legs black; the tarsi more or less rufous towards the
apex ; the femora sparsely, the tibia more thickly,
covered with white hairs, the tarsi with the hairs thicker
and stiffer; the calcaria pale. Abdomen longer than the
head and thorax united; black; a fringe of longish,

IA CAMERON, [Hymenoptera Orwentata.

golden hair on the apex of the first segment ; a roundish
mark near the base of the second segment in the middle;
a semicircular one on the extreme apex ; and a broad belt
of golden pubescence on the apex of the third ; the other
segments at the sides with long, pale golden hair; the
pygidial area rufous in the centre, strongly and uniformly
longitudinally striolated. The basal ventral segment
rufous at the sides; the base with two stout curved keels ;
shining ; the central keel stout, straight; the seeoad
segment stoutly punctured; the other segments at the
base finely transversely striated; their apices closely
punctured, as are also their sides; and they are covered
sparsely with long, pale hair. —

This species has a considerable resemblance to MM,
buddha Cam., but that is longer; its legs are stouter
shorter and more thickly haired; the basal abdominal
segment is wider compared with the second and more dis-
tinctly separated from it, the second segment itself being
of equal breadth at base and apex, whereas in WV. /etzg20sa
the base of the segment is narrower than the apex; and
in MW. buddha the pygidium is not striolated.

MUTILLA FALLACIOSA, SP. “ov.

Long. 7-8 mm.

fab. Trincomali, Ceylon ( Yerdury).

Similar in form and coloration—black, with the thorax
red above, the second abdominal segment with two white
round spots, the one behind the other, and the whole of.
the third segment covered with silvery hair—to I. con-
stancié, but easily separated by the very roughly tubercu-
lated median segment. Is also not unlike MW. “étigiosa
described in this paper, but that has the pleure red, the
head more coarsely and not so thickiy punctured, and the
base of the thorax above is not black. Also not unlike
MM. dives Cam., but differs in the tuberculated median

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «lit. (1898), No. WN. 15

segment, in the densely pilose head, and in the median
segment not being so sharply oblique.

Head nearly as wide as the thorax ; rugosely punc-
tured; rather thickly covered with longish, silvery and
more sparsely with longer, fuscous hairs; the antennal
tubercles and the basal half of the mandibles above, rufous;
rounded at the sides behind, it being there nearly the
length of the eyes; the scape of the antennz covered with
long, silvery hair; the flagellum covered with a close, white
down; the third joint is a little, but still distinctly, longer
than the fourth. Thorax twice the length of the head;
black ; the meso- and meta-notum red, except the base
and sides of the former; the mesonotum coarsely rugosely
punctured, sparsely covered with short, depressed, golden
hairs; the median segment with a rounded slope, almost
oblique towards the apex, where it is black; coarsely
reticulated; the base coarsely tuberculated, the tubercles
largest in the middle. The sides of the thorax above
almost straight, rough; the eyes bearing very long, blackish
hairs. The pleure above rugosely punctured; the rest
smooth and shining; their lower part thickly covered with
long, silvery hair. Legs thickly covered with long, silvery
hair; the spines on the hinder tibiz long, sharp. Abdomen
as long as the head and thorax united; deep, velvety
black; the basal segment thickly covered with silvery
pubescence; there is a spot of silvery pubescence on the
second segment in the centre; there is a mark, broader
than long, a smaller almost square one in the centre, and the
whole of the third segment is covered with silvery pubes-
cence; the segments are also sparsely covered with longish,
black hair. Pygidial area longitudinally striolated, rufous
in thecentre. Petiole beneath with a blunt, slightly curved
keel; the second segment somewhat thickly at the apex,
and the other ventral segments thickly covered with long,
silvery hair.

16 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalta.

MUTILLA STULTA, sp. nov.

Long 3s mam. 9

Hab. Trincomali, Ceylon (Yerdury).

In Bingham’s Table, (4c, p. 5) this species comes in at
“$'. Spot silvery white. 42. First abdominal segment not
ciliated with white hairs. a°. Second abdominal segment
with a transverse band of white pubescence on its apical
margin in addition to the spot,” but it is very different
from JV. decora Sm., the representative of this section.
With WM. trimaculata it has no near relationship; but,
judging from the descriptions, it must be nearly related
to M. coronota Bingham. It is not M. strzdula Rossi,
sec. Rad.=coronota Fab., for that has the first segment
“armé de dents et carene,” which is not the case here; nor
has it the pygidial area “ovale, assez grand, finement strié,”
nor are the tarsi reddish. It is not the coronota of Saussure,
Reise der Novara, Hymen. p. 106, who quotes his Ceylonese
species as doubtfully identical with J7. coronota Fab.
M. coronota Sauss. has the pleure “omnis excavata et
polita, postice ad marginem leviter rugulata,” while in the
present species, the pro- and meta-pleure, are strongly
and coarsely punctured.

Head wider than the thorax; black, the tubercles and
the middle of the mandibles broadly rufous; coarsely
punctured, the punctures large and deep; there is a dis-
tinct keel down the middle of the front; thickly covered
with long, fuscous hair; the tubercles large, shining, im-
punctate, a fine keel between them; over them is a
moderately thick, curved keel; behind the eyes the head
is obliquely narrowed. Antennz stout, the scape shining,
sparsely covered with longish, pale hairs; the flagellum
Opaque, covered with a white down. Thorax distinctly
narrower than the head, narrowed towards the base and
apex; the pro- and meso-notum coarsely longitudinally

Manchester Memotrs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. Uk. = 17

punctured, sparsely covered with short, black hair; the
median segment has the hair much longer, especially at
the base; the base is rounded, the apex oblique and has
down its centre a keel ; reticulated, the reticulations larger
at the base; at the apex of the scutellar region is a trans-
verse keel; and, in the centre of the median segment at
the top, is a curved scale-like projection. Atthe apex of
the mesothorax and at the base of the median segment is
a small, projecting, roundish tubercle. The propleure
rather coarsely punctured; the mesopleure not much
excavated; smooth and shining, except over the middle
cox, where it is punctured; in the middle on the lower
half is a black, curved, oblique furrow; the metapleurz
coarsely punctured behiod the oblique furrow. Legs
black, thickly covered with pale hair; the tibial spines are
few and longish; the spurs pale. Abdomen not much
longer than the head and thorax united; a mark of white
pubescence on the base of the second segment, which is,
at the apex, thickly covered with white hair, forming a
broad belt; the penultimate.segment covered with long,
white hair; the pygidial area smooth, shining, impunctate;
the second segment is strongly punctured. Petiole beneath
more or less piceous, the apical parts bluntly keeled ; the
apex itself obliquely pointed, the second ventral segment
coarsely punctured, sparsely covered with short, white
hair ; a reddish transverse band before the apex; the
third and following segments covered with long, white
hair ; the apices of the other segments (including the last)
strongly punctured.

SCGLED A.

TIPHIA FULVOHIRTA, SP. xov.

Long. 8 mm. ¢.
Hab. Poona (Wroughton).
In Bingham’s table (Zc.,p. 57) this species comes into the

18 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalia.

section: “Wings hyaline or flavo-hyaline: 06% Median

segment with three longitudinal carine; a*. Clypeus incised
at apex :” |

The area on the median segment nearly as broad as long:

the metapleurze with only 8 semi-oblique keels at the top ;

apex of abdomen not densely covered with fulvous hair.
T. tncisa Cam.

The area on the median segment distinctly longer than
broad: the metapleurze strongly obliquely striolated all
over, with much more than eight keels, the apical
abdominal segments densely covered with fulvous hair.

T. fulvohirta.

Head shining, rather thickly covered with longish
fuscous hair, above the antenne closely rugose, the front
and vertex with large, deep punctures, which are more
numerous and closer together near the eyes; the clypeus,
except at the apex, closely punctured, thickly covered
with long, white hair; the apex in the middle smooth,
and shining, and with a wide, distinct incision. Mandibles
black, towards the apex broadly rufous: covered with
long, white hair; the palpi testaceous. Antennz stout,
the scape strongly punctured, covered with longish, fuscous
hair; the flagellum fuscous beneath, almost glabrous.
Pronotum in front shining, the base impunctate, the rest
of it covered with large, distinctly separated punctures,
except: a’) broad, impunctate! band, \on)) the) apex
mesonotum with the punctures larger and more widely
separated than on the pronotum ; the scutellum punctured ©
like the mesonotum, but with the punctures more widely
separated; the post-scutellum punctured like the scutellum,
but with the punctures smaller. The central area on the
median segment with two keels: the space inside them
transversely, rugosely punctured, except for a small shining
depression at the apex ; the inner side of the lateral arez
rugose, the outer aciculated; the apex crenulated ; the

Manchester Memozrs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 11. = 19

apex of the segment has an oblique slope and is closely
rugosely. punctured. The base of the propleure acicu-
lated longitudinally, the upper part with large, deep
punctures; the apex, except at the top, closely longi-
tudinally striated, this part being separated from the rest
by a curved furrow; the lower part, under the larger
punctures, smooth, impunctate. Mesopleure strongly
punctured, except immediately under the wings, where
there is a small impunctate space, separated from
the rest by a deep, wide, curved furrow. Legs thickly
covered with long, white hair; the fore knees, tibiae and
tarsi more or less rufous. Wings hyaline, with a decided
greyish-fuscous tinge towards the apex ; the stigma black,
the nervures fuscous. fPetiole shining, marked with
scattered punctures, the apex, especially in the middle,
almost impunctate ; the second segment punctured, except
in the middle towards the apex; its base obliquely
depressed: the third and following segments opaque,
closely and strongly punctured, thickly covered with long,
pale fulvous hair. The ventral segments punctured, the
punctures becoming smaller and more numerous towards
the apex ; the last segment with an impunctate line down
the centre.

The rufous colour on the fore legs is not a specific
character in this, or in the allied species, as the amount of
it varies considerably. The same remark applies to the
quantity of rufous or brownish in the colour of the
antennz. There is no trace of a central keel on the
median segment in the present species.

Tiphia tarsata Cam. and T. magrettc Cam. are omitted
by Bingham; so also is 7. femorata Fab., a European
species recorded by Magretti, from Burma (Azn. Mus.
Civ. Genova, (2) xii., 248).

20 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalia.

MYZINE BENGALENSIS, sf. ov.

Rone. 15 mm 12:

Fab. Poona, Bengal (Wroughton).

Bingham (4c., p.65) has been unable to assign the males
‘of the Indian species to their respective females, and
describes 7 males and 7 females as distinct species.
Doubtless direct observation will be necessary to unite the
sexes correctly; and, in default of this information, there
is no course open but to treat them as distinct species.
Of males, no species is described with red on the abdomen;
but of females, there are three with the abdomen red
wholly or in part. Of these the present species comes
nearest to WZ. mandalensis Magretti, but that has segments
1-5 of the abdomen red and both wings hyaline at the
base, the anal segments fuscous, the posterior wings
“hyaline, the extreme apex somewhat fuscescent,” the
tegulz flavo-testaceous, and, in length, it is only 9-10 mm.

Head shining, rather thickly covered with long, white
hair; the vertex with scattered punctures, except in the
centre behind the ocelli; the ocellar region being also
without punctures; the front more closely and strongly
punctured ; the clypeus strongly punctured except the
apex ; its middle carinate. Mandibles black, slightly
rufous in the middle ; the palpi dark testaceous. Scape
of antennz shining, sparsely covered with long, pale
fulvous hair, and with large, deep punctures ; the second
joint also shining and punctured ; the flagellum opaque,
thinly covered with a pale down, the under side brownish ;
the basal joints produced on the under side beneath. The
base of the pronotum transversely aciculate; the apex
bearing all over large, deep punctures, and sparsely covered
with long, pale fulvous hair. Mesonotum shining, having
some large, deep punctures; and a deep, wide inner and a
much narrower outer furrow on its apical two-thirds. Scu-
tellum shining, its sides and apex bordered with large,

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. it. = 21

deep punctures ; near the centre there is one distinct row
and a few other punctures. Post-scutellum shining and
slightly punctured in the middle ; the sides strongly acicu-
lated. Median segment strongly aciculated, the apex with
the sides closely transversely striated ; down the centre at
the base are two flat, irregular keels. Propleurz punc-
tured ; the apex closely obliquely striolated except at the
top, which is punctured ; the metapleurz stoutly obliquely
striolated ; the upper part closely and finely at the base
above. The coxe and femora shining, sparsely covered
with long, white hair, this being also the case with the fore
tibiz and tarsi; the four hinder tibiz very thickly covered
with stiff, white hair; their calcaria pale fulvous; the tarsal
hairs silvery, their spines pale fulvous. Wings violaceous,
the base of the hinder pair hyaline. Abdomen ferruginous,
the two apical segments black; the sides and apex rather
thickly covered with long, white hair; the basal segment
with shallow, widely separated punctures; the other
segments with the punctures fewer in number and more
widely separated; the pygidium coarsely punctured,
except at the apex, which is pale yellow, dull rufous
behind ; the ventral surface covered, not very thickly, with
long, white hair.

A smaller species than MW. violacezpennis, to which it is
closely allied ; but from which it is very distinct, differing
greatly in the sculpture of the thorax, the pronotum in
M. violacetpennis being very coarsely longitudinally strio-
lated, and the scutellum very coarsely punctured ; while
in the present species those parts bear only scattered
punctures ; the punctures on the head are also fewer, and
neither so large nor so deep.

MYZINE VIOLACEIPENNIS, sf. nov.

Long. 19-20 mm. 3.
Hab. Poona, Bombay (Wroughton),

22 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orzentalta.

In Bingham’s table (Zc, p. 65), it comes in at “a4 Black,
2nd, 3rd, and base of 4th abdominal segment red, hind
wings hyaline at base.”

Which will now have to be sub-divided, as the terms
will apply to two species.

1. Mesonotum rugose, post-scutellum and median
segment smooth and shining. J7. madraspatana Sm.
2. Mesonotum smooth, except for a few large, scattered
punctures at the apex ; post-scutellum rugose, with a few
large punctures in themiddle; the median segment opaque,
uniformly finely rugose. MM. violaceipennts.

Head black, shining ; the middle of the vertex with a
large, smooth space, except for four small punctures
placed in a curve in front of a large, deep one; the rest of
the front and vertex with large, deep, widely separated
punctures, being, if anything, larger and distinctly more
numerous over the antenne, clypeus coarsely punctured,
except at the extreme apex; the middle not cartaare:
mandibles entirely black, fringed with long, pale golden
hair; the palpi dark testaceous. First and second joints
of the .antenne shining, bearing some large, deep
punctures; the flagellum pruinose, the microscopic pile
giving it a whitish appearance. The base of the pronotum
transversely coarsely aciculated; the vertical part smooth,
impunctate; the basal part very coarsely rugose, the
punctures very large, deep and elongated, running more
or less into each other; mesonotum smooth and shining;
on its apical half are a few large, deep, oval and round
punctures; on the apical half there is, on each side, a
narrow but distinct furrow. Scutellum very coarsely and
deeply punctured all over; post-scutellum coarsely acicu-
lated at the sides ; its centre with a few moderately large
punctures, median segment coarsely aciculated, opaque, the
sides of the basal part obscurely transversely striated; the
apex sharply oblique, its sides punctured, but not strongly;
down the middle of the basal part runs a straight furrow,

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «lit. (1898), No. Wl. 23

slightly narrowed towards the apex ; its sides bordered by
sharp keels, its centre with stout transverse keels. Pro-
pleure strongly punctured at the base; the apical half
strongly longitudinally striated ; the mesopleure coarsely
punctured, except at the apex; the metapleure strongly
closely obliquely striated all over. Wings uniformly
deeply violaceous, except the hinder pair at the base,
Legs entirely black, shining, the femora sparsely covered
with long, pale hair; the outer side of the hind tibie
thickly covered with white hair and more sparsely with
thick, pale fulvous spines; on the apex of the posterior tibiz
on the inner side is a thick patch of depressed, pale hair,
and in front of the calcaria are four stout, pale fulvous
spines; the calcaria pale fulvous: the tarsal spines rufous.
Abdomen shining, smooth: the petiole black, except
at the apex, which is red like the 2nd, 3rd, and the basal
three-fourths of the 4th segment. The pygidium coarsely
irregularly longitudinally striolated, the striz becoming
smaller and less distinct towards the apex ; its sides bear
long, pale hairs. The ventral segments are coloured like
the dorsal ; the third, fourth, and fifth finely punctured at
the base and apex : their middle with some large punctures;
the sixth with the punctures fewer and more scattered.

POMPILID A.
POMPILUS ICHNEUMONIFORMIS Cam.

This is probably the species described by Bingham
(Zc. p. 110), as Pseudagenia deceptrix Sm. The two in
my opinion are not identical, and my type does not
agree with Smith’s (now in the Oxford Museum). PP.
deceptrix is from Celebes.

SPHEGID/:.
LARRADA EXTENSA Walker.
This species is omitted by Bingham. It is from
Ceylon. (Cf. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Vol. v.(1860), p. 305.)

24 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalia.

SPHEX ROTHNEYI Cam.

Bingham regards this as identical with Sphex vicenus
Lep., a species very badly described, and placed by Kohl
in his Monograph among the unidentifiable species. SS.
rothneyt is, however, very probably only a local form of
Sphex pruinosus Germar, a species recorded from South
Eastern Europe, Western Asia, and North Africa (Syria,
Caucasus, Soudan). If the two be identical S. pruznosus
has a very wide range, as have a few other species of the

same genus.

SPHEX XANTHOPTERUS Cam.

When I described this species as new (Wanch. Memz.,
(4) li, p. 109) I was quite justified in doing so, as no such
species had been recorded from the old world, and my
name has been adopted by Kohl and Bingham. Kohl,
however, has since (Ann. £.4. flofmus. Ween, x., p. 52)
recognized it, by an examination of the type in the Berlin
Museum, as the same as Sphex cinerascens Dahlbom (Hym.
Eur. i, pp. 25 and 436). From this it follows that the
American locality given by Dahlbom must have been

erroneous.

SPHEX FLAVOVESTITUS Sm.

This Indian species is omitted by Bingham. The
description (Cat. Hym. Ins. Brit. Mus., iv., p. 253) is not
very Satisfactory; but, as the type is in the British Museum,
an examination of it would either establish its specific
distinctness, or give it decent burial in the synonomy. _

SPHEX DEPLANATUS Kohl.

This species is omitted by Bingham. The following
is Kohl’s description (Aun. k.k. Hofmus. Wren, X., p. 53).

“3S. Niger; abdomen ex parte rufum. Pedes nigrt.
Ale infuscate violaceo-resplendentes. Caput et thorax

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. Ul. 25

albopilosa, segmentum medianum supra albo-villosa. Clypeus
pubescentia argenteo-alba adpressa. Oculorum margines
interiores ad verticem longitudine flagelli articuli 2% +
duarum tertiarum 3 ad clypeum paullulo minus approxt-
mati sunt. Scutellum haud convexum, fere deplanatum.
Post-scutellum non selle instar ut tn Sph. aurulento
empressum. Area dorsalis seginentt mediant rugis quinque
transverse rugosa. fetiolus aliquantum brevior est quam
2m Sph. aurulento /, sulto brevior quam in Sph. pruinoso
G.: longitudine antennarum flagelli articulo secundo
aegualis; paullulum brevior tarsz postict secund, sed paullulo
longior tertio.”

Long. 20 mm.

flab. Ceylon.

Allied to S. pruznosus and S. aurulentus.

ALYSON RUFICOLLE, sp. nov.

Nigrum, prothorace, mesonoto cum scutello mesopleuris-
gue rufis, ore flagelloque antennarum subtus flavis; alis
hyalinis, nervis fuscis. &.

Long. fere 5 mm.

Hab. Kandy, Ceylon ( Yerbury).

Head black ; a line on the inner orbits of the eyes
from. near the top, labrum, clypeus, mandibles, and
palpi, yellow ; the tips of the mandibles black ; front and
vertex closely punctured, thickly covered with black hair ;
the clypeus and mandibles with much longer white hair.
Pro- and meso-notum closely, but not strongly, punctured ;
the prothorax entirely, except a black mark on the base in
front, the mesonotum with the scutellum and_ post-
scutellum and the mesopleure, red ; the median segment
with two stout converging (but not uniting) keels in the
centre, inside of which are two oblique keels, which unite
to them shortly beyond the middle of the basal region ;
inside of these there are some stout transverse keels,

26 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalza.

except at the apex; the apex is rounded; down the
middle is a straight stout keel; across the middle a stout,
transverse one, at the side of this are two short, curved,
irresular keels; at the “apex itself there is,.om Weaem
side, a stout, oblique keel. The base of the propleure
distinctly aciculated ; in the centre of the mesopleure is
a wide, moderately deep, oblique depression. Legs black;
the apex of the anterior coxz white; the anterior knees,
tibize and tarsi pale testaceous ; the apex of the posterior
coxe, the apex of the trochanters and a broad band near
the apex of the tibiz, testaceous ; the extreme apex of
the hinder femora and its large tooth, piceous. Wings
hyaline, but with a faint fuscous tint; the mnervures
fuscous; the recurrent nervures interstitial; abdomen
shining, impunctate ; the maculz large, pallid yellow.

A very distinct species from A. annulipes, being
readily known from it by the red collar, and by the
absence of a fascia in the anterior wings.

DIODONTUS GENICULATUS, sp. nov.

Niger, nitidus, segmento mediano striolato; mandibults
tegulisque flavis; bast tebiarum testaceo; alis hyalinis,
neruts fuscis, stigmate nigro. 9.

Long. 4-5 mm.

flab. Mussooree, 6,000 ft. (Rothney).

-Comes near to D. striolatus Cam. from Lahore (Man-
chester Memoirs, xl., p. 19), but readily separated from it
by the pro- and meso-pleure not being striated, by the
four hinder tibiz being black, except at the base, and by
the strongly transversely and longitudinally striolated
median segment.

Head large, wider than the thorax; almost shining,
bearing some shallow, not very distinct, punctures; the
front and vertex with a sparse, microscopic black pile; the
oral region with a silvery pubescence and with long, white,

Manchester Memotrs, Vol. xlitz. (1898), No. Ul. 27

soft hairs ; the clypeus with a small tooth on either side,
the centre not being incised. Mandibles large; the basal
half yellow ; the apical piceous; the palpi dirty yellow ;
antenne entirely black; the scape shining, bare, im-
punctate; the flagellum covered with a microscopic down;
the third and fourth joints equal in length. Thorax shining,
glabrous, except for a very slight microscopic pile; the
median segment strongly aciculated, and with six longish,
and three very short, irregular, longitudinal keels in the
centre, the lateral pairs being united at the apices bya
curved keel; the apex has an oblique slope, is irregularly
transversely striated and has an elongated fovea in the
middle; it is closely covered with a short, fuscous pile.
Pro- and meta-pleure shining; the mesopleurz sha-
greened ; the metapleure with a few oblique, not very
distinct, keels. Wings clear hyaline ; the second cubital
cellule half as long at the top as it is at the bottom; the
second recurrent nervure is received very shortly beyond
the middle of the cellule. Legs stout, covered with a
white pubescence; the tarsi more or less rufo-testaceous ;
the base of all the tibiz testaceous all round ; and the
anterior more or less testaceous in front; the hinder pair
only testaceous at the base and bearing fine stout spines.
Abdomen somewhat shorter than the head and thorax
united, shining, pruinose; the pygidial area strongly
aciculated ; the sides distinctly keeled.

PASSALOECUS RETICULATUS, sf. mov. (PI. 4, fig. 2.)

Nigro-caeruleus ; geniculis, tzbits tarsisque testacets,
alis hyalinis, stigmate fusco, nervis pallide flavis. 9.

Long. 5 mm.

Hab. Barrackpore (Rothney).

Head shining, apparently bare ; black with a greenish
hue ; the front broadly hollowed ; the hollow bordered by
a stout keel, which originates in the front of the anterior

28 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalha.

ocellus, where it bifurcates; from the side of the fore ocellus
a narrower keel runs to the side, uniting with the larger
keel before the eyes ; the space between the keel and the
eyes is stoutly crenulated. On the upper half of the eyes,
but not touching them, is a narrow furrow ; behind, on the
upper half is a much wider, deeper, crenulated furrow ;
the lower part of the eyes on the inner and apical side is
distinctly margined by a keel. Antenne black, the scape
slightly, the flagellum broadly, testaceous beneath. Thorax
black, with a greenish tinge; the mesonotum shagreened ;
a fitie transverse furrow at the base of the scutellum ;
down the centre of the mesonotum are two wide furrows
which slightly converge towards the scutellum and are,
towards the apex, slightly crenulated ; in the centre are
two obscure longitudinal furrows; and, outside the central,
there are two narrower, complete furrows, which are dis-
tinctly curved towards the base of the thorax. At the
base of the scutellum there is a wide, deep, straight furrow
behind the narrower one. Scutellum large, indistinctly
keeled down the middle; the sides straight, distinctly
margined ; post-scutellum distinct; the sides obliquely
truncated towards the apex. Median segment with a
decided coppery-greenish tint ; the base completely areo-
lated ; all the arez being distinctly defined ; the middle
portion is entirely occupied by a deep pentagonal area,
wider than long and, of which, the apex is rounded
inwardly ; down its centre is a narrow furrow, and near its
apex are two stout, transverse, somewhat curved keels ;
the apex itself is perpendicular and transversely roughened.
In front of the tegulz are two or three stout keels, and
inside of these a few large, round punctures. Wings clear ©
hyaline, the stigma fuscous, paler above; the costa in front of
it fuscous, the rest of it and the nervures yellow; the second
cubital nervure narrowed on the lower side ; the second
recurrent nervure almost interstitial Femora sparsely

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No.1. = 29

covered with white hair ; the trochanters, apex of femora,
tibiz, and tarsi rufo-testaceous. Petiole as long as the
hinder coxe ; coarsely shagreened, the sides distinctly
margined ; beneath, it is prolonged to the apex of the second
segment ; the base of the third segment being obliquely
truncated beneath, it forms, with the apex of the petiole, a
wide, triangular incision. The rest of the abdomen smooth
and shining ; the apex without a pygidial area.

In some respects this species is intermediate between
Pemphredon and Passaloecus, its petiole being longer
than it is in the latter, but much shorter than in
the former, from which it further differs in the hinder
tibia not being spined; in the head not being covered
with long hair; in the margined eyes, in the vertex
and hollowed front bearing keels; and in the median
segment having keels which form large distinct aree,
the lower part of the segment, too, being largely and
deeply hollowed. The labrum is not emarginate at the
apex, so far as I can make out from the dense silvery
pubescence which covers the mouth; the mandibles are
large, not furrowed ; oblique at the apex, where there is
one large, acute tooth, and a much smaller and blunter one,
next to it. The eyes reach to the base of the mandibles
and are parallel ; the antennze are situated quite close to
the base of the clypeus, but not touching it ; the transverse
basal nervure is interstitial ; on the mesopleure there is
one distinct, moderately wide and deep, complete, longi-
tudinal furrow. The second cubital cellule is much
narrower than it is in either Pemphredron or Passaloecus
proper, and is much narrowed on the lower side; the
stigma is large; the radial cellule elongate, lanceolate ;
in the female, there is no pygidial area. The tubercules
do not reach to the tegule.

This species, having only one longitudinal furrow on the
mesopieure, is a Passaloecus as limited by Verhoeff (Enz.

30 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalza.

Nachr., Xxiv., p. 383) who forms for the species having two
longitudinal furrows the sub-genus Coe/oecus and for those
having three the sub-genus Heroecus.

Only one oriental Passaloecus is known, viz., P. levipes
Bingham, (/¢., p. 267),from Karennee, Tenasserim, 4,000 ft.,
which is very different from the species here described ;
é.g., the median segment is tranversely striated, the head
is without keels, the thorax not punctured, &c. No
mention is made either in the generic or specific descriptions
of there being any furrows on the mesopleurz or on the
mesonotum.

CRABRO TAPROBANA, sp. mov.

Niger, scapo antennarum subtus, mandibulis, linea
pronott, maculis duabus scutellt, maculis 2 abdomenzs, tebzzs
tarsisque pro parte flavis ; alis hyalinis, nervis nigris. °.

Long fere hr mim:

flab. Trincomali, Ceylon ( Yerbury).

This species does not fit into any of the sections in
Bingham’s table (-., p. 321). The present species might be
‘following his table) characterized as follows:

Enclosed space at base of median segment with five
short, stout, widely separated strize ; coarsely aciculated ;
the sides of the segment next the enclosed space with
some oblique striz ; the third abdominal segments with two
transverse yellow lines at the base.

Black; alutaceous; the mandibles, except at the apex,
the scape of the antenne, a broad line, somewhat inter-
rupted in the middle, on the pronotum, the tubercles, a
somewhat smaller mark behind them under the tegule, a
mark on either side of the scutellum at the base, a smaller
mark on the mesonotum next to this and nearer the wings,
and an elongated line on either side of the third abdo-
minal segment at the base, yellow. Head large, aluta-
ceous, the front and vertex with a microscopic, fuscous

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. Uk. 31

pile; the lower three-fourths of the orbits densely covered
with a silvery pubescence; the clypeus covered with
a longer and denser silvery pubescence. Ocelli .°

Clypeus stoutly keeled in the middle, its apex slightly
projecting ; mandibles yellow; the teeth black, the part
at their base piceous. Scape of the antenne shining,
yellow, glabrous; the flagellum black, and covered with
a microscopic down. Pronotum thickly covered with
fuscous pubescence ; the mesonotum thickly covered with
a microscopic pile; the depression at the base of the
scutellum crenulated; the post-scutellum closely longitudi-
nally punctured ; median segment finelyrugosely punctured:
the enclosed space at the base with a shallow, somewhat
crenulated furrow in its centre; on either side of this are
one short, and four longer, longitudinal keels ; at the sides
are a few oblique keels; the apex of the segment has a
rounded, slightly oblique slope and is densely covered with
white pubescence ; its centre with a shallow furrow; its
sides with a sharp keel extending from the base to the
apex. Propleurz hollowed, glabrous; the base with three
stout, curved keels turned towards the base, and one
turned towards the apex; the mesopleure alutaceous,
densely covered with white pile ; behind the tubercles is a
sharp, distinct keel, oblique at the base, then following the
edge of the pleurz to the sternum ; immediately behind
the yellow mark is a distinct oblique furrow, running to
the sternum, where it joins the keel. Metapleurz closely
and uniformly obliquely striated, except at the base, where
there are, at the top, five longish, and, at the bottom, five
shorter striz ; the two sorts being separated by a space.
Legs black; the fore femora broadly yellow at the base
and with a line, contracted in the middle, on the outer
side at the apex ; the tibiz yellow, black behind ; the tarsi
yellow, more or less rufous towards the apex; the hind
tibiz spined ; the middle spines originating from tubercles.

32 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orzentalta.

Wings hyaline, with a faint fuscous tinge. Abdomen as—
long as the head and thorax united, alutaceous; the
petiole somewhat longer than the second segment, nodose
at the apex ; the third and fourth segments shining at the
base; the fifth segment thickly covered, especially towards
the apex, with fulvous pubescence, the apex of the seg-
ment itself being fulvous; the base of the pygidial area
closely rugosely punctured ; the narrowed apex shining,
smooth, except for a few indistinct striz ; the sides of the
segment fringed with long, stiff, pale fulvous hairs. On the
side of the third segment is a large mark broader than
long, the base rounded, narrowed in the middle, almost
heart-shaped; on the side of the fourth segment is a more
elongated yellow mark; the outer half broader, and dilated
posteriorly ; the mark on the side of the fifth segment
is larger, wider, and projecting backwards on the lower
side at the base. The ventral surface is sparsely covered
with longish fuscous hair.

Only one species of Cvadvo is recorded from Ceylon
by Col. Bingham, C. palztans Bing., which also is found
in North-West India. It is very different from C: taprobane,
having the abdomen not petiolated.

CRABRO YERBURII, sp. ov.

Long. 6 mm.

Hab. Trincomali, Ceylon ( Yerbury).

Belongs to Bingham’s section “A. 4. Petiole short,
subpyriform, gradually widened from base to apex.” C.
odontophora differs from it in the twisted, dilated and, at
base, dentate basal joint of anterior tarsi, in the median
segment being strongly aciculated; the hollows at its —
sides with stout keels. The “enclosed space” on the
median segment very smooth, shining and glabrous ;
surrounded by a wide, moderately deep, crenulated furrow,
and having a similar crenulated furrow down its centre ;

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. Wl. 33

the sides of the segments are finely transversely aciculated ;
the apex has an oblique slope .and is widely hollowed
in the middle. Mesopleurze shining, minutely punctured,
thickly covered with short, silvery pubescence; the oblique
furrow shallow, densely covered with longish silvery hair ;
the metapleure shining, almost glabrous, the basal portion
hollowed ; there is an oblique, not very clearly defined,
keel over the hinder coxe, above which isa line of fine
transverse striations. Legs thickly covered with white
pubescence ; the apices of the four anterior coxe and of
their trochanters, the apex of the fore femora, and the four
front tibiz and tarsi, yellow; the tibiz broadly lined with
black behind ; the hinder tibiz black, broadly yellow at
the base; their spines longish, pale; their calcaria large,
the inner one being, at the sides and base, finely rugose ; _
the abdomen is marked with yellow.

C. ardens also differs from it in the base of the median
segment being finely longitudinally striated, and it has
“a medial vertically impressed line from the anterior
ocellus to between the antenne,’ while the legs and
antennez are devoid of yellow.

Head shining, impunctate; except on the lower part
of the front, where it is obscurely punctured ; the clypeus
hidden by dense silvery pubescence; the vertex with a dense
microscopic down ; the space between the eyes over the
antennz bare, glabrous, except at the sides, where there is
a narrow edging of silvery pubescence; the mandibles
yellow, their apices rufo-piceous; palpi yellow. Prothorax
shining, neither punctured nor striated ; the apical part
thickly covered with minute pubescence ; the mesonotum
with shallow minute punctures; sparsely covered with a
microscopic down; the scutellum, if anything, more
strongly punctured ; a broad, irregular, yellow, transverse
mark at its base; the post-scutellum broad at base,
narrowed towards the apex; the apices of all the tarsi

34 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalza.

incline to rufous. Wings clear hyaline, the stigma
and nervures fuscous ; the apical abscissa of the radius
straight, oblique; the appendicular cellule incomplete |
at the apex. Abdomen nearly as long as the head
and thorax united; the petiole slightly longer than
the second segment, narrowed at the base, gradually
widened towards the apex; the apical segments thickly
covered with a white pubescence; the pygidial area
smooth, except for a double row of five large, round
punctures down the outer side of the centre; the sides
keeled ; the ventral segments shining, the apices of the
segments pale piceous; the apical half of the hypopygium
punctured. adi

NVote.—I have stated above that only one Ceylonese species
of Crabro is recorded by Col. Bingham in his Manual ; but
he has omitted from that work all mention of Dasyproctus
ceylonicus Saussure, described from Ceylon in the esse der
Novara ; Hymen. p. 85, pl. tv. f. 52. Dasyproctus is a Crabro
with a very long, narrow petiole, not dilated towards the apex,
as it isin Rhopalum. It is regarded by Kohl in his generic
revision as a section of Cradvo only.

CRABRO REVELATUS, Sp. nov.

Long. to apex of petiole 6 mm. (in C. taprobane it is
7 sa)

Hab. Trincomali, Ceylon ( Yerbury).

Comes near to C. taprobane, and, like that species,
has an elongate petiole, but here it is more slender; it
differs further in the post-scutellum being coarsely longi-
tudinally striated; in the vertex at the edge of the frontal
depression being distinctly margined; and in the furrow
on the middle of the apex of the median segment being |
wider.

Scape of antennz lemon-yellow, shining, glabrous;
the flagellum black, sparsely covered with a pale down;
the second joint yellow beneath ; the third only very little

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. #liz. (1898), No. 11. 35

longer than the fourth. Head black; alutaceous, the vertex
covered with a dark, microscopic down; the front deeply
_ excavated; thickly covered with depressed, silvery pubes-
cence, as is also the clypeus; the frontal depression at the
top with a distinctly-defined margin, the centre of which,
looked at from beneath, is slightly curved; the eyes on
the upper part on the inner side are slightly margined;
below the middle is a small, human-ear-shaped fovea; the
ocelli are in a curve. Mandibles lemon-yellow; the apex
piceous-black; the basal part sparsely covered with long,
white hairs. _Mesonotum alutaceous, thickly covered
with a microscopic, fuscous down; the pronotum with
longer, fuscous hair; the scutellum like the mesonotum,
its apex with some longitudinal striz, and a thin keel runs
down its middle; on its base at the side is a small, and,
behind this, a iarger, transverse yellow mark; the post-
scutellum finely rugose; coarsely longitudinally striolate.
Median segment with a rounded slope; the basal area
clearly defined; bearing a few oblique, widely separated
keels; those at the sides being more distinct than those in
the middle and extend beyond the area, outside of which
the segment is closely, but not very distinctly, punctured ;
the middle of the apical part has a wide, deep furrow.
The propleure at the top have a few fine, indistinct striae,
the lower part in the centre has a few stout, longitudinal
strie. The tubercles are yellow; the oblique furrow
behind them straight, narrow; the longitudinal furrow
narrow, shining; the oblique furrow on the mesopleurz
wide, deep, indistinctly crenulated; the apical semi-vertical
furrow wider, deeper, and distinctly crenulated; the meta-
pleure at the base shining, strongly closely obliquely
striated, the rest of it finely and closely longitudinally
striated, the striae stronger on the lower side. Legs: the
apices of the coxz, of the femora, and the tibiz lemon-
yellow; the tibiz for the greater part black beneath ; the

36 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orzentalia.

tarsi yellow, suffused with rufous; the femora covered with
long, white hair. Wings hyaline, the nervures and stigma
fuscous. Petiole covered with long, white, soft hair; aluta-
ceous, the base closely longitudinally striated; its under
part keeled down the centre and with a lateral keel between
it and the edge. In this latter point—in the under side of
the petiole being distinctly keeled down the centre—it
differs from C. taprobane.

DIPLORTER A
EUMENID&.
EUMENES BUDDHA Cam.

This species is omitted entirely by Col. Bingham. It
comes into his section “C: median segment convex,
vertical, with a well-marked groove down the middle,
widening at apex into a deep /\-shaped hollow”: and to
sub-section “a: Petiole long, gradually widening to the
apex, longer, never shorter than the thorax and median
segment united” ; but it can hardly be said to be “medially
with well developed, prominent lateral tubercles.” The
petiole is distinctly longer than the head and thorax but
not longer than the other segments united; its basal third
is distinctly narrowed, becoming gradually wider; the
apical third is of uniform thickness.

It has pretty much the same form and size and colour
of the wings as &. vzshnu; but differs altogether in the
colour of the legs, and in the form of the antennal tubercle,
which here is rounded at the top and has a long pedicle ;
while in #. wzsknu it is much shorter, broader and
triangular at the top and with a short, broad pedicle.

EUMENES VISHNU, SP. nov.
Niger, thorace abdomineque flavo-maculatis,; alis vi0-
lacets ; pedibus rufis. .
Long. Io mm.
Fab. Allahabad (Rothney).

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No.Ul. = 37

Belongs to the small group with red legs. 4&.
erythropoda differs from it in being larger, in the thorax
being largely marked with red; and in the petiole not
being distinctly narrowed at the base and in being coarsely
rugose. The form of the median segment is the same—
rounded at the base, oblique at the apex—but it differs
in the middle of the apex, having a deep triangular
depression.

Antenne black, distinctly thickened towards the
apex; the scape shining, covered with black, short hair ;
the flagellum bare, not shining. Front and vertex strongly
punctured, shining, sparsely covered with longish, fuscous
hair; the antennal tubercles yellow, large, rounded at the
base, gradually narrowed from the end of the rounded
part to the apex. Clypeus with the middle of the apex
curved, the sides oblique; thickly covered with silvery
pubescence ; at its base are two large, oblique, yellow
marks narrowed on the inner side; the apex of the labrum
rufous, as is also the apical half of the mandibles. Thorax
coarsely punctured; closely covered with white pubes-
cence; that on the median segment being the longer. On
the centre of the pronotum is a complete yellow line, a
little curved round at the edges; on the sides joined to the
central line is a shorter, yellow mark, narrow at the base,
widened gradually to near the apex, which again is slightly
narrowed, broadly obliquely on the hinder side, more
rounded on the outer and at the apex; yellow also is a line
on the keel at the side of the apex of the scutellum; the
post-scutellum, a thin line at its side, a mark in front of
this, a somewhat oval mark on either side near the apex
of the median segment, and a bullet-shaped mark on the
mesopleure, near the tubercles. In the centre of the
mesopleure is a furrow, obscurely crenulated at the base,
widened and smooth at the apex. The base of the meta-
pleure smooth and impunctate, except the space over the

38 CAMERON, flymenoptera Orientalia.

coxz, which has some large punctures; the rest coarsely
punctured, at the apex running into reticulations. Legs
ferruginous, the coxe and the four hinder trochanters
black; the hinder tarsi fuscous. Wings uniformly viola-
ceous; the nervures and stigma black; at the top the
second cubital cellule is only very slightly longer than the
space bounded by the first recurrent and first transverse
cubital nervures. Petiole slightly longer than the head
and thorax united; the basal third almost impunctate;
the rest strongly punctured; the part behind the tubercles
distinctly narrowed; the tubercles indistinct; the second
segment is closely and strongly punctured; the other
smooth and shining; shortly beyond the middle of the
petiole is an oval mark on either side; the apex is banded
with yellow; in front of the middle and second segment
is, on either side, an irregularly triangular mark; its apex
is belted all round with yellow.

EUMENES ERYTHROPODA, sf. ov.

Niger, bast clypet, pronoto, scutellis maculis duobus,
metanoto pedibusque rufis ; alts violacezs. °.

Long. 15 mm.

Hab. Malacca.

Head coarsely punctured, the apex of the clypeus and
the labrum smooth ; the front and vertex thickly covered
with long, fuscous hair; the clypeus and labrum with
white depressed pubescence ; black; the wedge-shaped
space between the antenne, almost the basal half of the
clypeus, its apex and the labrum, rufous; the basal mark
on the clypeus with two triangular expansions in its
apex; the apex of the clypeus with a shallow, waved.
incision, the sides of which do not form teeth; the apex
of the labrum rounded. The base of the mandibles
broadly black ; the rest rufous, slightly fringed with long,
white hair; the palpi obscure testaceous. Antennz black;

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. Ul. = 39

the basal two-thirds of the scape rufous. Thorax coarsely
punctured all over; the prothorax rufous, except beneath ;
the scutellum with two closely joined marks; the post-
scutellum, the sides of the metanotum, the apex of the
metapleure, and a large mark—longer than broad, slightly
narrowed on the lower side,and with all the sides straight— .
rufous. The median segment has a gradually rounded
slope, the apical half being straight, oblique; the whole
segment rather closely covered with long fuscous hair, and
towards the apex with a white pubescence; the centre
at the apex is excavated and projects (as seen from above)
into triangular projections between the base of the
abdomen. On the metapleure the rufous colour does not
extend on to the lower side at the base. Legs rufous ;
the coxe and trochanters black ; the apices of the hinder
tibiz and the tarsi fuscous. Wings violaceous, lighter,
almost hyaline, at the extreme base. Petiole as long as
the rest of the abdomen; closely and coarsely punctured ;
at the base sparsely covered with longish, fuscous hair ;
the extreme apex with a narrow, rufous band ; the second
segment coarsely punctured; its apex depressed; the
third and following segments impunctate; the ventral
segments impunctate.

The only species with which it can be compared is
the Ceylonese &. humbertzana Sauss., which is, however,
very different ; ¢.g¢., the thorax is nearly as wide as long,
the clypeus is smooth, and only ferruginous at the apex ;
there is only “a narrow, twice-interrupted line on the
margin of the pronotum,” the clypeus ends in two blunt
teeth, &c.

PTEROCHILUS FULVIPENNIS, sp.nov. (PI. 4, fig. 3, 3a, 2.)

Hab. Poona (Wvroughton).
Only one species of Pzerochilus is recorded from India—
P. pulchellus Sm., known from N. W. India. It, and the

40 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalia.

species here described, may be separated as follows, apart
from the oral characters noted below.

Black, the base of the abdomen red ; the wings hyaline,
abdomen not pedunculate, length, 7-8 mm.

P, pulchellus Sm.

Fulvous, the head, pronotum and apex of abdomen

broadly yellow; wings fulvous; abdomen pedunculate ;

length, 24 mm. LP. fulvipennis.

Belongs to Saussure’s first division: labial palpi large,
not plumose, carrying only stiff hairs; mandibles short ;
abdomen pedunculate. Dark rufous: the head, except a
transverse stripe on the vertex uniting the eyes, the
pronotum, two marks near the apex of the second
abdominal segment, and the four apical segments broadly,
lemon-yellow; wings fulvo-hyaline, the apex smoky ; the
costa and stigma fulvous ; the nervures fuscous.

Antenne fulvous, the scape lemon-yellow, except at
the extreme apex ; bare except for a pale, microscopic
down on the apical joints. Head lemon-yellow, shining ;
the front and vertex bearing a short, pale pubescence ; a
rufous band across the vertex behind the ocelli joining the
eyes ; in the middle, it is prolonged to enclose the ocelli,
from the sides of which runs a short, oblique line of the
same colour. Mandibles dark rufous; the teeth black ;
on their apices are four short, distinct, blunt teeth ; the
apical rounded ; the palpi rufo-testaceous ; the hairs long,
stiff, pale. Clypeus bare; bearing scattered, shallow
punctures; the apex with the sides almost straight,
oblique ; the centre roundly incised, the incision at the
sides ending in somewhat triangular, sharp teeth. Thorax
rufous, except for a broad lemon-yellow mark on the ~
pronotum ; the mark does not reach the apex of the
segment and is bluntly rounded and narrowed at its
apex. Mesonotum with scutellum densely covered with
a fuscous, microscopic pile; at the apex, touching

Manchester Menoirs, Vol. xlzz. (1898), No. Wl. = 4t

the scutellum, are two straight, distinct, moderately deep
and wide furrows ; and opposite the apex of the tegule,
but not reaching the scutellum, is a shorter more indistinct
furrow. Scutellum flat, shining; post-scutellum with a
rounded slope; its apex bordered by oblique furrows,
which unite at the top with the wider and deeper furrow
down the centre of the median segment. Pro- and meso-
pleurz with a few scattered shallow punctures ; shortly
behind the middle of the mesopleure is an oblique,
moderately wide and deep, crenulated furrow, which unites
with a narrower oblique crenulated one oviginating at the
base of the mesopleure ; from the posterior part of the
upper furrow runs a short, much wider and deeper, oblique
furrow. At the base of the median segment is a crenulated,
slightly oblique furrow, wide at the top, much narrower
and more distinctly crenulated at the bottom. In front
of the hinder coxz are two stout teeth; the hinder being
narrower, sharper and longer than the anterior. Metapleure
smooth, the middle aciculated ; the apex punctured ; the
apical half of the median segment being also marked with
punctures ; and rather thickly covered with longish, pale
hairs. Legs coloured like the body ; the femora sparsely
covered with longish, pale hairs; the tibiz and tarsi more
thickly with pale pubescence. Second cubital cellule
much narrowed at the top, being there slightly shorter
than the space bounded by the second recurrent and the
second transverse cubital nervures. Petiole elongate,
slightly, but distinctly, longer than the second segment,
becoming gradually wider from the base to the apex; the
apex with distinct punctures; and having in the centre a
deep, short, longitudinal furrow ; the lateral teeth, before
the middle, large, triangular. Second segment obscurely
punctured ; in front of the middle are two moderately
large, transverse marks ; the third segment broadly lemon-
yellow at the apex; the base black, rufous at the sides ;

42 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orzentalza.

the fourth segment broadly yellow, a narrow, short, rufous
line down the middle at the base, and a rufous mark on
each side; the fifth segment broadly yellow, in the middle;
the rufous triangularly projecting into it at the sides and
at the base in the middle; the last segment broadly
yellow ; there is a transverse depression at the apex. The
sides, base and apex of the lower side of the petiole
smooth, impunctate, the rest with stout, slightly curved
keels. The second segment, except in the middle, with
shallow, rather widely separated, punctures; the other
segments much more closely and strongly punctured.

What is no doubt a variety has the apex of the second
abdominal segment broadly lemon-yellow, while in its
centre, at the base, isa large, somewhat triangular, black
mark, the narrow part of which is at the base; its fourth
segment is black at the base.

Note.—This species may not be a true Prevochilus. The
maxillary palpi are 6-jointed as in the typical species ; but the
labial are distinctly 4-jointed, whereas in Perochilus proper they
are 3-jointed only. On the basal joint of the Jabial palpi there are
two or three hairs near the middle; and at the apices of the first,
second, and third joints are two or three long, stiff, bristle-like
hairs. The fourth joint is bare and 1s nearly half the length of the
third. In addition to the four large apical teeth on the man-
dibles, there are two small ones and a much larger rounded one.

The number of joints in the labial palpi and their clothing
do not appear to be features of generic importance. Saussure
says (Monog. des Guépes, ill., p. 321) : “On remarque des espéces
dont les palpes labiaux sont a peine comprimés et a peine
plumeux ; on apercoit méme parfois un quatriéme article rudi- ©
mentaire ;” but in our species the fourth joint cannot be called
“rudimentary,” being quite distinct.

ODYNERUS.
ODYNERUS EREBODES, sp. nov.

Niger, capite thoraceque distincte punctatis ; abdominis
segmentis 1-3 pallide flavo-balteats ; pedibus sordide rufis;

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No.Ul. = 43

bast clypet scapoque antennarum subtus pallide flavis ; alts
violaceo-fumatis. 2.

Long. 9 mm.

Hab. Poona ( Wroughton ).

In Bingham’s table (Zc. p. 362) it comes in “a*. Third
abdominal segment with a transverse yellow fascia on the
middle of its posterior margin” which may now be sub-
divided as follows :

Scape of antenneze black ; tegulze yellow, post-scutellum
with a yellow spot on the angles, wings clear hyaline.
O. burmanicus Bing.

Scape of antennz yellow beneath; tegulez entirely
black; post-scutellum impunctate, wings smoky. O. evebodes.
Head coarsely punctured ; the punctures large, round |

and deep; black ; a large, curved band on the base of the
clypeus, a small, heart-shaped mark between the antenne, a
line along the lower curve of the eye, and two small marks,
longer than broad, on the apex of clypeus, pallid yellow ;
mandibles black, the apex broadly piceous ; an elongate,
yellow mark in the middle at the base ; this mark being
sharply pointed at the apex. Palpi testaceous. Clypeus
as long as its breadth in the middle; the apex narrowed,
the sides oblique; the middle with a shallow, rounded
incision, the sides of which form triangular teeth. The
clypeus has a few shallow punctures and is densely covered
with silvery pubescence. Front and vertex bearing large,
deep, distinctly separated punctures; the front very
thickly, the vertex more sparsely, covered with silvery
pubescence and hairs; the eye orbits, on the lower side
behind, thickly covered with silvery pubescence ; a little
above the middle, there is a small, yellow mark. Antenne
covered with a white down; the scape yellow beneath. Pro-
and meso-notum with scutellum bearing all over deep, large
punctures, those on the apical part of the mesonotum being
the larger; thickly covered with short fuscous pubescence,

44 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalia.

the pronotum transverse in front, and bearing two short,
yellow lines in the middle; the post-scutellum coarsely
rugosely punctured, thickly covered with black hair; the
sides oblique, the middle depressed ; the median segment
with an oblique slope, the centre not excavated ; in the
middle deeply furrowed. Pleurz coarsely punctured like
the mesonotum, the punctures on the metapleure towards
the apex running into reticulations. Legs dark rufous ;
the coxz blackish ; the femora and tibiz in front blackish;
the extreme apices of the femora yellow ; the four hinder
tibiz with a yellow line in the middle in front ; the tarsi
infuscated. The wings are lighter in tint behind and at
the base ; the nervures and stigma black. Abdomen with
the basal segment behind and at the sides, the second
with the apex all round and the third with a band in the
centre, pale yellow; the basal segment rounded at the
base ; sparsely punctured ; the second segment strongly
punctured ; the third still more strongly, the puncturing
on the other segments becoming gradually weaker ; the
basal segment yellow, suffused with blood-colour beneath.

ODYNERUS WROUGHTONI, sf. nov.

Lone. 3 mm:

flab. Poona ( Wroughton).

In Bingham’s table (2. c., p. 362) it comes in at “a2. Base
of Ist abdominal segment red; a*. abdomen petiolate”
which will now be sub-divided :

Median segment not reticulated at the base and with a
carina on either side; the three apical segments of the

abdomen not marked with white in the centre above.
O. miniatus Sauss.

Median segment reticulated at the base, without a keel -
on either side ; the three apical segments of the abdomen
marked with yellow in the middle. O. wroughtont.

The antenne black; the scape clear yellow; the
flagellum brownish beneath; the flagellum bearing a

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. Uh. 45

sparse, white, microscopic pile. Head coarsely punctured,
sparsely covered with short, white hair; the hinder ocelli
in large deep pits. The centre of the clypeus black,
except the apex, which is red; this black and red part
coarsely and strongly punctured ; the black narrowed at
the base and not keeled laterally; but the rest is bordered
by distinct, reddish, straight keels which converge slightly
towards the apex, which is transverse ; its sides, except at
the apex, yellow; and punctured on the outer side.
Mandibles red, yellow at the base ; the palpi yellow; above
the antennz is a yellow mark, mitre-shaped, except that it
is roundly produced beneath. Thorax black; two large
marks on the middle of the pronotum—narrow at the base,
wide, and oblique at the apex, the post-scutellum, and a
somewhat pyriform mark, below and in front of the
tegule, yellow. Pro- and meso-notum with the scutella
strongly punctured ; the base of the median segment in
the centre reticulated, densely covered with white pubes-
cence, especially at the centre of the base, where it almost
hides the surface. Pro- and meso-pleure strongly
punctured, covered with silvery hair; the metapleure
apparently impunctate, the surface hidden by silvery pubes-
cence. Tegulz yellow, reddish in middle. Wings hyaline ;
the nervures and costa blackish ; the stigma fuscous ; the
second cubital cellule at the top narrowed, being there
not much wider than the space bounded by the first
transverse cubital and the first recurrent nervures. Legs
red, the tibiz yellow on the outside, this being also, to a
less extent, the case with the tarsi at the base. Petiole
red ; yellow at the apex above ; shining, punctured towards
the apex ; the second segment obscurely punctured at
the base, more strongly towards the apex; an oval,
irregular spot on either side near the apical third; its
apex with a moderately broad, yellow band, slightly
dilated at the sides, and at the middle ; the 3—5 segments

46 CAMERON, Aymenoptera Orzentalia.

more strongly and closely punctured ; on the apex of the
third segment in the middle are two small, yellow marks ;
on the fourth segment in the centre is a much larger mark,
transverse at the apex, contracted in the middle at the
the base and with the sides rounded ; on the apex of the
last segment is a larger yellow mark rounded at the base,
the apex roundly projecting in the middle. Beneath, the
basal segment is red ; the apex of the second, yellow.

VWESEUDAS
ICARIA JUCUNDA, sf. nov.

Long. 15 mm. (worker).

Hab. New Guinea (Cuthbertson).

Agrees closely in size, form and coloration with
I. ferruginea; but may be known from it by the
scutellum and post-scutellum being furrowed down the
centre; by the middle of the median segment being much
more strongly and broadly transversely striated, by the
petiole being longer, by its narrowed basal half being
narrower compared with the apical and more distinctly
separated from it; by the yellow band on the second
abdominal segment being much narrower and by the
wings being much lighter in tint, their apex being only
lightly infuscated.

Several species of J/caria are known from New
Guinea and the neighbouring Islands; but the present
species does not agree with any of them. Smith’s
catalogue (Proc. Linn. Soc. (Zool.), 1869) is not trustworthy.
In /caria there are several noteworthy omissions; e4.g., /.
festina Sm., L. becolor Sm. (Proc. Linn. Soc. (Zool.), 1864, p.
go), from New Guinea, and /. australzs Sauss , from Dorey. —

Rufo-ferruginous ; the apex of the clypeus all round,
the base of the mandibles broadly, the edge of the thorax
all round in front, scutellum, post-scutellum, two mode-
rately large, oblique marks on the apex of the median

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No.4. 47

segment, a large mark on the base of the mesopleure
immediately under the wings, a more obscure one above
the middle coxe, a narrow line on the apex of the petiole
and the apical fourth of the second segment above and the
apical eighth below, yellow. Head coarsely, but not very
distinctly, punctured; the front and vertex sparsely
covered with a short, sparse, pale pubescence ; the face
with the pubescence much thicker and with a fulvous hue;
the clypeus covered with long, bright golden hairs.
Antennal fovea deeply furrowed in the middle above.
Sides of the clypeus straight, oblique, its centre not ending
in a point or tooth. Mandibles ferruginous, the teeth
black ; a large, somewhat triangular, yellow mark on the
base above, its apex reaching beyond the middle. Antennz
ferruginous, the scape somewhat darkerin tint; the flagellum,
especially towards the apex, densely covered with a white
down. The edge of the pronotum sharply carinate. Pro-
and meso-notum coarsely punctured, running into obscure
reticulations towards the apex ; the edge of the pronotum
narrowly depressed, the depression forming a furrow and
black. Scutellum and post-scutellum rather strongly, but
not closely, punctured; the central furrow on the scutellum
deep, shining, rufo-piceous ; that on the post-scutellum
broader but not quite so deep. Median segment with an
oblique slope ; its centre appearing raised through being
transversely striated, and bordered by a distinct margin
or furrow; the centre at the apex deeply excavated, and
with a distinct furrow in the middle. Pro- and meso-
pleurz coarsely punctured. The base of the metapleurz
strongly, coarsely and irregularly longitudinally striated,
bordered behind by a black furrow, and below by a short,
oblique, shining furrow, from which a curved, not very
distinct, furrow runs to the hinder coxe. Legs ferruginous;
the coxz densely covered with fulvous pile, especially at
the base on the under side. Wings hyaline, the costal and

48 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalia.

radial cellules smoky; the stigma flavo-testaceous; the
nervures blackish. Petiole elongate, the basal third dis-
tinctly narrowed and separated from the rest ; the narrow
yellow apex being also slightly narrowed; shining, impunc-
tate ; towards the apex thickly covered with depressed,
fulvous hair. The other segments closely and rather
strongly punctured, particularly the third and following.

ICARIA CEYLONICA, sf. nov.

Long. fere 9 mm. (worker).

“ab. Periyakullam, Ceylon ( Yerbury).

In Bingham’s table (Zc, p. 386), this species can be
referred to “A. Reddish or reddish-brown, with yellow
markings,” and to subsection “a. second abdominal seg-
ment with no transverse yellow band on its apical margin,”
which will now be subdivided :—

Head and thorax rufous ; abdomen black; hind legs for

the greater part black. LT. guttatipennis.
Entirely rufous, except the second abdominal segment,
which is infuscated ; legs without black. TL. ceylonica.

Head reddish, sparsely covered with short, glistening white
pubescence ; the front and vertex with moderately large,
rather widely separated punctures, the ocellar space
fuscous; the antennal tubercle bare; furrowed above; the
clypeus almost bare at the apex, its sides oblique, the
middle ending in a tooth, and with some large punctures;
at the base of the mandibles is a black spot. Scape of
antennz rufous, infuscated above; the flagellum paler,
infuscated above, especially towards the apex. Pro- and
meso-notum with shallow, rather large punctures all over;
the mesonotum darker in tint, thickly covered with a
microscopic, white pile; the base of the post-scutellum
black, obscurely crenulated; the median segment with a
large, wide, deep, black depression in the middle; the
depression becoming gradually, but not very greatly, nar-

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. 11. AQ

rowed towards the apex; its centre itself has a furrow, and
it is obscurely transversely striated. Pleure somewhat
infuscated except at the base of the pro- and the middle
of the meso- above; the mesonotum black. Legs pale
rufo-testaceous, the tarsi paler ; the hinder coxe black
beneath; the fore femora slightly, the four hinder more
broadly, lined with black beneath. Wings hyaline; the
apex with a blackish cloud extending from the second
transverse cubital nervure to the apex; dark in the radial
cellule, more obscure in the cubital; the nervures blackish;
the stigma testaceous; darker along the upper border.
Petiole with a distinct, narrow neck, from which it becomes
gradually wider to the apex, which has a narrow, pale
border; the second segment has the basal three-fourths or
so obscure black, except on either side at the base; the
third segment is blackish at the base; the fourth and fifth
at the apex, laterally, the apical segments thickly covered
with white hair. On the ventral side the apical four seg-
ments are black.

ANTHOPHILA.
COLLETIDAE.
COLLETES DENTATA, Sf. mov.
Long. II—I2 mm. @ et ¢.
Hab. Poona, Bombay ( Wroughtoz).

The only Indian species of Col/etes may be separated
from the present as follows : —

Vertex with “‘a few fine punctures”: the median
segment at base longitudinally rugose, the apex with the
sides smooth. C. dudgeonit Bng.

Vertex coarsely punctured, the median segment strongly
reticulated ; the sides of the apex transversely striated.

C. dentata.

Clypeus apparently closely and rather strongly
punctured, but the surface cannot be properly observed
from the matting of the hairs; the front and vertex

50 CAMERON, Aymenoptera Orientalza.

strongly punctured; thickly covered with long, white
hairs; a straight, narrow furrow runs from the ocelli to
the antenne; the hair on the sides longer and thicker
than on the vertex. The scape of the antennz covered
with longish, stiff, black hairs; the flagellum glabrous.
Thorax black; the pro- and meso-notum and scutellum
strongly punctured; the pronotum thickly covered with
long, white hair. The edges of the pronotum on either
side project into a large, sharp plate, the base of which
projects into a sharp, triangular tooth. Metanotum at
the base with a strongly reticulated area, which, at the
apex, is narrowed and runs into a wide, deep, and smooth
furrow, slightly narrowed towards the apex and bordered
by stout keels ; on either side of this furrow it is smooth ;
on the outer side it is apparently punctured, but the
punctuation, if present, is hidden by a thick covering of long,
white hair. Propleure almost impunctate, at the apex
thickly covered with long, white hair; the mesopleurz
coarsely punctured, the punctures large and clearly
separated ; an obscure, vertical furrow down it behind
the tubercles, and an oblique, longitudinal one above the
middle ; the metapleurz finely and closely rugose ; a few
oblique, short keels above the coxe. Legs black; the
calcaria pale; the femora sparsely covered with longish,
white hair; the tibiz and tarsi thickly with shorter pale
hair, which has on the tarsi a fulvous tint. Wings dark
fuscous, with a violaceous tinge; the base paler, the apex
from the end of the radial cellule hyaline; the stigma and
nervures black. Abdomen smooth, almost shining; all
the segments fringed with a dense band of depressed,
white pubescence; except the last, which is closely punc-
tured; the apical three segments sparsely covered with
black hair; the ventral segments fringed with white pubes-
cence; the hypopygium very smooth and shining; its
sides at the apex fringed with long, white hair.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. Uk. 51

If Bingham’s fig. 127 (2.c.,,p.408) represents the labium of
C. dudgeonzz, then that of the species here described differs
from it in the labium being much wider than the mentum,
and more widely and deeply divided at the apex. The
same remark applies to Smith’s figure (Cat. Hym. Ins., i.,
pl. 1.,f1). Bingham makes no mention of the fore wings
having an appendicular cellule, nor is one indicated in his
figure. In C. dentata the appendicular cellule is quite
distinct, but open at the apex. The head and thorax are
not very pubescent for a Cod/ezes, but this may be through
wear and tear. The wings vary in tint.

gue LAS.
HALICTUS TORRIDUS, sf. nov.

Long. 5-6 mm.

Hab. Poona ( Wroughton).

In Bingham’s table (Zc, p. 421) it comes in at “C.
Enclosed space at base of median segment with longitu-
dinal strie. 4%. Abdomen impunctate,” which contains two
species ;—H7. t2mzdus, which differs in having the abdomen
and legs rufo-testaceous, and the Burmese Z. gutturosus,
which differs in having the eyes only very slightly con-
vergent below; while here they are very distinctly conver-
gent below; the pubescence on the head and thorax is
“thin;” here it is dense and long.

Head closely and distinctly punctured in front ; the
clypeus thickly covered with depressed, white pubescence;
the front, vertex, and hinder parts with the hair longer, more
erect, and not quite so dense; eyes distinctly converging
on the lower side, the space separating them there being
about half the length of the vertex ; they have a distinct
curve near the top on the inner side. The face, below the
antenne in the centre, projects; the projection being wider
at the apex, where it is clearly separated from the clypeus,
which is as long as the space between its base and

52 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalia.

the antennz; its sides oblique, very slightly rounded
towards the apex, which is transverse; the sides of the
apex rounded; not so closely punctured as the front,
but the punctures are as large. Antennz as long as the
head and thorax united; black; the scape with longish,
white hair; the flagellum with a close down, which is
especially thick on the lower side, giving it a fuscous
appearance. Thorax shining, thickly covered with long,
soft, white hair; the mesonotum and scutellum with
shallow, not very large punctures; the apex of the median
segment with an oblique slope; the enclosed space at the
base finely rugose, the sides with some nearly straight,
longitudinal strie; the propleure almost impunctate ;
the mesopleurz closely and rather strongly punctured;
shining, sparsely covered with long, white, soft hair; the
depression at its base wide, deep; the part above it
bounded by narrow, oblique furrows, which converge
slightly towards the top. Legs thickly pilose; the hair
on the femora and tibiz long and white, that on the tarsi
very dense, pale golden. Wings clear hyaline; the
nervures pale; the stigma darker at top and bottom; the
second cubital cellule narrowed at the top; it is there half
the length of the third at the top; the first transverse
cubital nervure straight, oblique; the second and third
curved; the first recurrent nervure is interstitial. Abdomen
shining, impunctate; the apical segments sparsely covered
with long, white hair. The first submedian nervure is

interstitial.

ANDRENA EXAGENS Walker.

This bee, described by Walker, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hzst.,
1860, from Ceylon, is omitted by Bingham.

SUDILA, gen. nov.

Head in ? elongate, narrower than the thorax; in 6

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 11 53

broader than it, largely developed behind the eyes; the
apex of the clypeus in ¢ produced into two stout teeth;
the sides of the head, on the lower side behind, largely
triangularly produced. Labial palpi 4-, maxillary 6-
jointed; the first joint of maxillary half the length of the
2nd; the 2nd to 5th almost equal in length; the 6tha
little longer. Mandibles in ¢ very large, curved, dilated
towards the apex, which is itself prolonged into a long,
stout tooth issuing from the middle of the dilated part;
the middle with a long furrow in the centre. Labrum at
top ending in a triangular point; the maxilla moderately
large; the 2-5 joints almost equal in length, the 6th joint
alittle longer than the first. Bodyin ? and 6 moderately,
the legs densely, pilose; the claws with a stout tooth in
the middle. Mesonotum with a narrow, but distinct,
furrow down the sides, but not reaching the base or apex,
and a less distinct, shallower furrow down the middle.
Median segment without a distinct enclosed or striated
space in the centre at the base. Prothorax transverse at
the top, sharply raised there and at the sides. Pterostigma
moderately large and elongate; the first cubital cellule
somewhat longer than the second and third cellules united ;
the third cubital cellule narrow, not much more than half
the length of the first; the first recurrent nervure almost
interstitial; the second received close to the third trans-
verse cubital nervure. Abdomen smooth and shining; the
apical segments densely covered with long hair; the
ventral segments densely fringed with long hair; the
apical segments with a rima, as in Halectus.

The presence of a rima on the apical abdominal seg-
ment and the form of the alar neuration ally this genus
to Halictus, nor is the structure of the trophi enough to
separate it generically from that genus, while the 2? again
agrees with it in having an elongated face; the median
segment in both sexes wants the enclosed space at the

54 CAMERON, Aymenoptera Orientalia.

base; so that the absence of the enclosed space on the
median segment, and, more particularly, the presence of
the longitudinal furrows on the mesonotum, which are not
found, so far as I know, in H/alctus, are the only points
of distinction between them so far as regards the females.
On the other hand the form of the head in the 6 is so very
different from what it is in Halctus, or indeed in any
allied genus, that it cannot be included in it.

SUDILA BIDENTATA, SP. nov. (PI. 4, f. 5, 52.)
Nigra, nitzda, sparse pallide hirta,; alis hyalints.
one, tere 1© tai,

Fab. Ceylon (Rothney).

3. Head shining, impunctate, sparsely covered with
long, fuscous-black hair; a narrow, but distinct, furrow
runs from the ocelli, which are bordered behind by a wider
and deeper furrow. Mandibles piceous-red, except at the
base and apex. Scape of antenne sparsely covered
with long black hairs; the base of the flagellum with
short, stiff hairs; the rest of it bearing a pale down.
Prothorax almost glabrous; its basal edge piceous; the
mesonotum and scutella sparsely covered with long,
black hairs. Median segment with a gradually rounded
slope; its apex covered with long, white hairs. Mesopleurze
and mesosternum shining, impunctate, sparsely covered
with long, white hairs. On the mesopleurz, near the top,
is a wide, oblique, deep furrow, which reaches near to the
apex. Wings hyaline, the nervures and stigma black; the
first transverse cubital nervure is oblique, straight; the
second slightly, the thirdly distinctly, curved. The hair
on the legs thick, longish, white on the femora, much
thicker and darker coloured on the tibiz and tarsi; the
spurs and claws reddish. Abdomen very smooth and
shining, the base glabrous, the apex thickly covered with
long, stiff, fuscous-black hairs; the apical ventral segments
thickly covered with long, fuscous hairs.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 11. 55

SUDILA FUSCIPENNIS, sf. ov.

Long. Iomm. 6.

flab. Ceylon (Rothney).

This species differs markedly from the preceding
in the form of the head; it is not so shining; the apex of
the clypeus, instead of ending in the middle in two sharp
teeth, has only a semicircular incision, the edges of which
do not project; the lower part of the head at the sides has
the projecting part not quite so lengthened, and is sharper
pointed at the apex ; the apex of the mandible is rounded
in S. dzdentata, here it is distinctly transverse and not so
much narrowed; another marked distinction is found in
the median segment; here its sides are bordered by a
furrow, which is hardly visible in the other; the legs are
distinctly fuscous, or rather piceous; the wings are dis-
tinctly smoky, being much darker coloured than in S.
bidentata,; the second cubital cellule is perceptibly shorter
above and beneath than the third; the two being conse-
quently together shorter than the first; the second trans-
verse cubital nervure is straight, more oblique and more
narrowed towards the first at the top.

If I had only S. dzdentata to deal with, I should have
inferred that the female described below was its female ;
but having two undoubted males of distinct species, I am
unable to say to which of them it belongs, if indeed it
may not pertain to a third unknown male. I therefore
am compelled to treat it as a separate species.

SUDILA CEYLONICA, sf. nov. (PI. 4, fig. 4.)

Nigra, nitida, sterno pleurisque longe albo-lirtis ; ales
hyalinis, stigmate Jusco, nervis nigris. &.

Long. 10-I1I mm.

Hab. Ceylon (Rothney).

Front and vertex sparsely covered with longish black
hair; the front opaque, shagreened; a distinct, narrow

56 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalia.

furrow runs down from the ocelli; the clypeus: very
shining, bearing some large, deep, widely separated
punctures ; its apex with two large, oval fovez in the
centre, and fringed with long, reddish-fulvous hair, as is
also the labrum. The apex of the mandibles piceous,
fringed at the base with a few long, fulvous hairs.
Flagellum shining, sparsely covered with a few black
hairs. Pronotum at the sides above triangular; the
angles sharp; the propleurz excavated, shining, im-
punctate, glabrous ; the mesonotum shining, impunctate ;
thickly covered with fuscous-hair, the hair on the sides to
the teguiz much thicker and paler; the middle towards
the base with a shallow, not very distinct, furrow ; and
there is on either side, extending from im front jonseme
tegulz to the scutellum, a narrow, more distinctly defined
furrow; scutellum and post-scutellum impunctate, thickly
covered (especially the post-scutellum) with long, fuscous
hair. The base of the mesopleure thickly covered with
long, pale hair, the rest of it with the hair sparser.
Median segment shagreened, the base without any
enclosed or punctured space; sparsely haired; the apex
thickly covered with long, white hair. Tegule very
shining, impunctate. Wings hyaline; the nervures dark
fuscous. Legs, especially the hinder, covered with long,
white hair; the hair on the hinder tarsi very thick and
long, and having a faint fulvous tinge. Abdomen shining,
smooth; the base with a few scattered hairs; the apex
thickly covered with long, fuscous hair; the ventral
surface covered thickly with long, pale hair. |

STEGANOMUS FULVIPENNIS, SP. NOV.

Long. 7 mm.
flab. Poona, Bombay (Wroughton).
The two new species here described may be separated

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 11. 57

from S. xodicornis Sm., the only known Indian species of
the genus, by the under-noted characters :—

Scape of the antennz rufous, wings with the apex dis-
tinctly smoky ; the basal area of the median segment only
impunctate. S. nodicornis.

Scape of the antennz black ; wings not smoky at the
apex; the base of the median segment impunctate.

S. fuloipennis and SS. gracilis.

Black; the antenne, except at base and apex, the
femora, tibiz, and tarsi rufo-testaceous ; wings hyaline,
the stigmal region slightly smoky; the stigma testaceous,
the nervures at the base pale testaceous, darker towards
the apex of the wings.

6. The scape of the antenne black, bearing long,
white hair; the second joint infuscated; the flagellum
almost bare, finely punctured; the terminal joint black ;
the fourth joint is slightly longer than the third. Head
black, the front, cheeks, and clypeus densely covered with
pale fulvous hair; the front very closely punctured ; the
vertex at the sides of the ocelli with large, clearly separated
punctures; the part behind the ocelli closely punctured,
the punctures slightly larger and more distinctly separated
than those in front of the ocelli, and much smaller than
those on the sides. The pro- and meso-notum thickly
covered with short, fulvous pubescence, this being also the
case with the scutellum and base of post-scutellum; the
latter is minutely and closely punctured. Median seg-
ment shining, almost bare ; the base impunctate, the rest
with moderately large, distinctly separated punctures; the
apex with an indistinct, shallow furrow down the centre.
Propleure impunctate, slightly shagreened; bare; meso-
pleure strongly punctured, densely covered with long,
pale hair; the metapleurz sparsely covered with long, pale
fulvous hair and strongly punctured. Legs fulvous; the
cox, trochanters, and base of four anterior femora black;

58 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalia.

the femora on the lower side fringed with white hair; the
tibiz and tarsi thickly covered with white pubescence.
The first recurrent nervure is received at a slightly less
distance from the base than is the second from the apex
of the cellule. Abdomen black, the ventral segments
more or less ferruginous, the dorsal segments with broad
belts of white, depressed pubescence at their bases, all the
segments strongly and closely punctured, except at their
extreme bases and apices.

The ? has the flagellum of the antennz black above ;
the abdomen above much less strongly punctured; the
legs thickly covered with long, fulvous hair; and the basal
abdominal segments fringed with golden hair; the apical
covered densely all over with pale, golden hair.

STEGANOMUS GRACILIS, sf. mov. (PI. 4, f. 16.)

Bone, 6 mam ot

Hab. Mussooree (othney).

Agrees with S. /ulvipennis in having the base and
apex of the antenne black and the apex of the wings not
smoky ; but is smaller and more slender, the third joint
of the antennz is not distinctly shorter than the fourth,
the median segment is impunctate, the second recurrent
nervure is received at a distinctly greater distance from
- the apex than is the first from the base of the cellule ;
and the abdominal segments are very much less strongly
punctured.

Antenne slender, testaceous, the apical two joints
black; the scape broadly infuscated in the middle;
punctured, sparsely covered with long, white hair. Front
and oral region densely covered with pale fulvous’
pubescence ; the vertex much more sparsely covered
with longer hair, uniformly, but not very strongly,
punctured. Mandibles broadly ferruginous in the middle.
The base and apex of the mesonotum, the scutellum and

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. liz. (1898), No. 11. 59

post-scutellum densely covered with pale, fulvous pubes-
cence; the centre much more sparsely with shorter,
darker pubescence, and closely and minutely punctured.
Median segment very shining, the base impunctate,
the rest with minute, scattered, shallow punctures. Pro-
pleure impunctate, glabrous ; the basal three-fourths of
the mesopleure covered thickly with pale fulvous hair ;
the apex and the metapleure sparsely covered with long,
pale fulvous hair. Legs: the coxe, trochanters, and the
greater part of the femora, black ; the tibize and tarsi rufo-
testaceous ; the femora sparsely, the tibize and tarsi very
thickly covered with long, white hair, almost hiding the
colour. Abdomen black, the ventral surface for the greater
part ferruginous, the basal four segments closely punctured,
fringed at the base with white hair ; the apical segments
impunctate, clothed with soft, white hair ; the penultimate
ventral segment is depressed in the middle, and with two
large tubercles on either side. Wings hyaline, the stigma
testaceous, the nervures blackish, the recurrent nervures
are received about the same distance from the base and
apex of the cellule.

NOMIA AUREOHIRTA, sp. nov. (PI. 4, f. 7.)

Long. 10mm. gd.

Hab. Poona (Wroughton).

In Bingham’s table (Zc, p. 448), this species comes into
b. a.” and into a new section C*:—Enclosed space at base
of median segment transversely striated. In the form of
the hinder femora in the ¢ it resembles WV. fervida, but
the form of the tibiz is different; in JV. fervida it is broadly
dilated in the middle; in the present species there is no
dilatation, but a gradual curve from the base to the apex;
the under side of the femora also is straight to the keel,
while in JV. fervzda the base is curved inwardly and the
middle dilated slightly.

60 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalza.

Head below the antenne thickly covered with mode-
rately long, golden pubescence ; the front and the occiput
thickly with longer, dark fulvous hair; the vertex rugosely
punctured, sparsely covered with darker hair. Mandibles
on the lower side with some long, fulvous hairs; black,
piceous near the apex; the hinder orbits thickly covered
with pale fulvous hair. Antennal scape lemon-yellow ;
thickly covered with long, fulvous hairs; the flagellum
punctured, rufo-fulvous, darker above. The collar covered
with depressed, yellow pubescence, behind fringed with
long, dark fulvous hair; the mesonotum and scutellum
thickly covered with a short, depressed, dark fulvous pile
completely hiding their texture; the post-scutellum with
a similar covering, but longer, and intersected with some
fuscous hairs. The basal area on the median segment
triangularly dilated in the middle at the apex; the middle
at the apex with some short, transverse striz; the sides
_ obscurely striated. Mesopleure thickly covered with
fulvous hair ; more sparsely at the apex, perhaps through
being rubbed; the metapleure covered with long, fulvous
hair above. Legs, except the coxz and trochanters,
lemon-yellow; the femora and tibiz at the base suffused
with ferruginous; the fore tarsi fringed behind with long,
pale fulvous hair; the hind femora semicircularly curved
above, straight on the lower side, and with a small, oblique
tooth near the apex; the tibiz produced, at the apex in
front, into a somewhat triangular projection which is
gradually widened from the base of the tibiz to the apex,
the apex itself being rather acute. Wings with a fusco-
fulvous tinge, darker at the apex; the stigma obscure
fulvous; the second cubital celulle at the top about two-
thirds of the length of the top of the third; the first
recurrent nervure is received in the apical third of the ~
cellule. The basal segment of the abdomen, broadly at
the apex, and the second and third segments, in the

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. V4. 61

middle, thickly covered with fulvous hair; the apices of
the first to fourth segments with a broad band of rich
fulvous, depressed pubescence ; the two apical segments
thickly covered with long, pale fulvous hair. The ventral
segments fringed at the apex with pale hair; the last
deeply depressed in the middle, and having there a stout
triangular projection.

NOMIA ERYTHROGASTER, Sf. mov. (PI. 4, f. 10.)

Long. 9-Io mm. ¢.

Hab. Poona (Wroughton).

Comes into Bingham’s Section A (Ze, p. 448).
“q@. Scutellum armed with two spines or teeth posteriorly,”
and “6. Abdomen beneath and posterior legs rufo-
testaceous,” which is now subdivided :—

Apex of post-scutellum distinctly bidentate ; the second
cubital cellule not one-half the length of the third on the
top. Length, 7-8 mm. LV. westwood.

Apex of post-scutellum not distinctly bidentate; the
second cubital cellule more than one one-half the length of
the third on top. Length, ro mm. LV. erythrogaster.

Head in front from near the ocelli thickly covered
with white hair, that over the antenne being much the
longer; the vertex closely, but not deeply, punctured.
Mandibles obscure ferruginous before the apex. The
centre of the clypeus with a narrow keel; above this is a
stouter keel reaching to the antennz. Scape of antenne
covered above with long, white hair; the flagellum obscure
brownish beneath. Mesonotum uniformly covered with
shallow punctures ; alutaceous ; the base, sides, and apex
thickly covered with white hair; the scutellum similarly
punctured to the mesonotum, but with the punctures
somewhat larger; the apex with the middle slightly
depressed ; post-scutellum thickly covered with white
hair; the apex armed with two large, flat, slightly con-

62 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalza.

verging teeth, which project backwards and are a little
narrowed at the top. The basal ‘area on the median
segment long and narrow, bearing stout, longitudinal
keels, widely separated in the middle, closer together at
the sides. The sides of the median segment are strongly,
but not closely, punctured, and covered with long, white
hair. Pleurze rugosely punctured, thickly covered with
white hair. Wings hyaline, the costa and nervures
fuscous ; the second cubital cellule at the top half the
length of the top of the third ; the recurrent nervures are
received in the apical third of the cellules. Legs thickly
covered with white hair ; the hind femora and tibiz red,
except the apex of the femora above, which is black; the
hind femora dilated above ; the apex of the hind tibize
gradually dilated to the apex, the dilation a little longer
than broad, transverse at the apex, with the sides rounded.
Abdomen shining, impunctate, marked with four greenish
blue belts; the ventral surface, except at the wapes
rufous; the apex of the segments pale, thickly fringed
with white hair.

NOMIA PURPUREO-LINEATA, sf. nov. (PI. 4, f. 15.)*

Long: jou, 2:

flab. Barrackpore (Rothney).

In Bingham’s table (Zc, p. 458), this species fits into
“6,6'". Thorax with griseous or white pubescence,” and
“a. Clypeus with a medial vertical furrow,” which now
stands as follows :—

Clypeus coarsely punctured ; abdominal segments 2-4

with blue or green transverse lines, wings hyaline.
LV. ividescens Sm.

Clypeus coarsely longitudinally striated ; abdominal —

segments 1-5 with purple transverse lines; wings deeply
fuscous except at extreme apex. | | JV. purpureo-lineata.

Pf * This group (that of WV. chalybeata Sm.) forms the sub-genus Paranomia
riese.

oa

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xli#. (1898), No. U1. 63

Antenne black; the flagellum obscure brownish
beneath, bare; the scape with a few long, white hairs.
Face elongate; keeled down the middle of the clypeus,
closely longitudinally striated from the antenne to the
apex of the clypeus; the labrum smooth, shining, fringed
at the apex with long, golden hair. Mandibles entirely
black; the base with some long, white hairs. Front and
vertex closely punctured; the sides, behind the antenne,
thickly covered with short, pale golden hair. Mesonotum
alutaceous, closely punctured; an indistinct furrow down
the sides; the scutellum punctured like the mesonotum,
slightly depressed in the middle. Post-scutellum thickly
covered with pale fulvous pubescence. The basal area on
the median segment extending from side to side; sharply
keeled at base and apex; irregularly longitudinally strio-
lated; the segments from the area thickly covered with
long, pale fulvous hair, and bearing large shallow punc-
tures. Pleurez shagreened ; the mesopleurz punctured,
thickly covered with long, pale fulvous hair. Legs entirely
black, except the claws, which are piceous; thickly covered
with pale pubescence. Wings fuscous, tinged with fulvous;
the costa and stigma black; the nervures fuscous; the
second cubital cellule hardly narrower at top than at
bottom; at top slightly more than one-half the length of
the top of the third; the first recurrent nervure is received
quite close to the transverse cubital. Abdomen shining,
very minutely punctured; all the segments with a smooth
belt of purple at their apices; the base of the petiole
covered with longish, pale golden hair; the others at the
base sparsely covered with long, black hair. Ventral
segments obscure brownish; shining, the apices of the
segments pale.

A very distinct species, easily separated by the
violaceous bands on the abdomen and by the fuscous
wings.

64 CAMERON, Alymenoptera Orzentalia.

NOMIA LATISPINA, Sp) wou, (CRIA te oe acy)

Long. 7 mimi

Hab. Allahabad (Rothney).

Comes into a new section on foot of p. 448 (Ze);
C4, Enclosed space at base of abdominal segment smooth,
neither punctured nor striated ; apices of abdominal seg-
ments strongly punctured.

Head narrow, sharply oblique behind the eyes; the
front and vertex with large, widely separated punctures ;
the front thickly, the vertex more thinly, covered with
fulvous hair; the face and clypeus thickly with shorter,
cream-coloured pubescence ; the apex of the clypeus bare,
rather strongly punctured ; the mandibles shining, broadly
rufous in the middle. Antennz entirely black, except the
flagellum on the under side, which is brownish ; the scape
bearing long, white hair. Thorax sharply transverse in
front; the mesonotum thickly covered with depressed,
scale-like, fulvous hair; the scutellum with only a few
hairs ; the post-scutellum covered thickly with long, pale
fulvous hair. Mesonotum closely, rather strongly and
uniformly punctured ; the scutellum with the punctures,
if anything, larger, and more widely separated. Median
segment shining; the sides and apex with a few pale
golden hairs ; the basal area smooth, impunctate, trian-
cular; the rest of the segment bearing large, deep, distinctiy
separated punctures. Meso- and meta-pleure thickly
covered with pale fulvous hair. Legs black; the anterior
tibiz and base of tarsi rufous in front; the hinder tibial
spine and metatarsus white; the hinder tibial process
reaching to the apex of the metatarsus, very broad, not
much narrowed towards the apex, which is rounded. The ~
hinder tibiz with a distinct, narrow keel down the middle
on the outer side; the hinder femora largely dilated,
becoming wider to near the apex, which is oblique on
their under side; in the middle, near the apex, is a small

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. Uk. = 65

triangular tooth. Wings hyaline, the stigma and nervures
black; the second cubital cellule small, shorter than
broad ; the first transverse cubital nervure straight ; the
second roundly curved, interstitial with the recurrent
nervure. Abdomen shining, strongly punctured; the
punctures large and deep on the basal three segments ;
the apex of the basal segment with long, fulvous hair ; the
base of the second, third and apical segments entirely
covered with grey pubescence.

The form of the ¢ hind legs resembles that of
NV. chalybeata Sm. as figured by Smith (Trans. Ent. Soc.,

wags, pl, 11, f. 5).

NOMIA FULVOHIRTA, sp. zov. (PI. 4, f. 9.)

Long.12mm. 6.

flab. Allahabad (Rothney).

Comes into Bingham’s Section (4c.) “A. 0. Post-scu-
tellum unarmed posteriorly. a’. Thorax with more or less
fulvous pubescence,” consisting of JV. curuvzpes Fab., the ¢
of which differs in having the hinder femora “rufo-
piceous, with their apical-half yellow,” here black, yellow
at the apex, and the hinder tibiz are broadly black at the
base; lV. chalybeata differs from it in having the
femora not so much swollen nor toothed; JV. varzpes
Cam. agrees with it closely ; but may be separated by
the rufous, not black, base of the hinder femora and by
their having only one large tooth.

Head, except on the sides of the vertex, densely
covered with long, fulvous hair; the vertex, except near
the ocelli, bearing rather large, distinctly separated,
punctures ; the base of the mandibles yellow, the middle
piceous, the apex black. The scape of antennz yellow,
except on the apex above; the flagellum fulvous, black
above to near the apex. Thorax densely covered with
long, fulvous hair ; the basal area of the median segment

66 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Ortentata,

bearing stout, longitudinal keels. Legs yellow, thickly
covered with fulvous hair; the cox, trochanters, the
basal three-fourths of the four anterior femora and the
basal half of the posterior femora, black; the hinder
femora largely thickened ; on the lower side near the apex
are two stout teeth, separated by a semicircular space, the -
inner tooth being the larger ; the teeth are black, as is also
the under side of the femora, Hinder ‘tibia:viereanly,
dilated towards the apex, ending there in a large curved,
triangular tooth. Wings hyaline, with a slight fulvous
tinge; the apex, from the radial cellule, infuscated ; the
costa, stigma and nervures fulvous; the second and third
cubital cellules at the top are equal in length. The basal
segment of the abdomen black ; the apex greenish-yellow ;
strongly punctured ; the base at the sides covered with
short, the middle with long, fulvous hair; the second
and third segments black, the apices greenish-yellow ; the
other segments greenish-yellow ; the base of all the seg-
ments covered with fulvous pubescence; the apices
slabrous ; the ventral segments castaneous.

NOMIA VARIPES, sp. xov. (P1.'4, f. 8.)

Lone: 10 tam. ¢*

Fab. Allahabad (Rothney).

In Bingham’s table (Zc., p. 448), this species comes into
“4. Abdomen with non-pubescent transverse fasciz,”
and “4, a’. Thorax with more or less fulvous pubescence,”
“q@?, Legs rufo-fulvous or ferruginous,” presently repre-
sented by JV. chalybeata Sm. and NV. curvipes Fab., from
either of which it is very different ; from WV. chalybeata by
the abdomen not having blue-green fasciz and by the.
spined femora; from WV. curvipes by the femora having a
large projecting tooth and not a semicircular incision,
and by the apical projection on the hinder tibiz being
broader and blunter, not ending in a sharp curved tooth.

Manchester Memotrs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. il. 67

The form of the hinder femora and tibiz most nearly
resembles those of the Indian JV. combusta and the African
N. calida, but otherwise it is very distinct. The femora
are formed pretty much as in J. chrysopa, but otherwise
there is no resemblance.

Head black; front and vertex strongly punctured ;
sparsely covered with short, fuscous hair; a smooth furrow
runs down from the ocelli ; the face and clypeus densely
covered with pale golden pubescence; the base of the
clypeus yellow, the middle rufous, the apex black. The
scape of the antenne yellow, rather thickly covered with
long, white hair ; the flagellum rufous, slightly darker in
the middle above. Pro- and meso-notum with the scutel-
lum thickly covered with short, dark fulvous pubescence,
and strengly and uniformly punctured ; the median seg-
ment thickly covered with long, pale fulvous hair; the base
with a row of stout,straight,short keels. Mesopleure thickly
covered with pale fulvous pubescence ; the metapleure at
the base and apex fringed with long, pale fulvous hair.
Wings hyaline; the apex distinctly smoky; the costa,
stigma, and nervures fulvous; the second cubital cellule
at the top equal in length to the top of the third ; the first
recurrent nervure is received near the apical fourth; the
second in the apical third of the cellule. Legs yellow;
the coxe and trochanters black ; the four anterior femora
for the greater part above ; and the basal two-thirds of the
hinder femora ferruginous; the hinder femora large,
broadly rounded above; the base, before the tooth,
straight; the tooth oblique, directed towards the apex ;
the outer side of the apex of the hinder tibiz curved ;
the inner projecting, in width not much less than half of
the outer ; its apex oblique, the inner side rounded ; near
the base of the hinder tibiz on the posterior side is a large,
black, oval mark, brownish on the outer edge. Abdomen
shining, black ; the apex of the basal segment covered

68 CAMERON, /ymenoptera Orientalia.

thickly with depressed, fulvous pubescence ; the apices of
the first and fourth segments broadly fulvous-yellow ; the
apical segments entirely of that colour ; the apical segment
thickly covered with long, golden hair; the ventral seg-
ments black.

NOMIA MAHRATTA, Sp. zov.

Lone xd mim" 727

Hab. Bombay (Wroughion).

In Bingham’s table (Zc, p. 449), this species comes into
“64, Thorax above with thin cinereous pubescence” which
is now divided into :— )

1, Area at base of median segment finely reticulate ;
the legs rufo-testaceous ; the pubescence on the ventral
segments cinereous. LV. aurata.

2. Area at base of median segment finely longitudinally
striated ; only the hinder tibize and tarsi rufo-testaceous ;
the pubescence on theventral segments dense, ferruginous.

LV. mahraita.

Head, from a little above the antenne, thickly covered
with white pubescence; the apex of the clypeus fringed
with long, golden hair. The mandibles, before the middle,
piceous ; the front and vertex impunctate. Antenne:
rather slender, black, the scape almost bare ; the apical
joint rufous. Thorax thickly covered with longish hair ;
fuscous in colour above, almost white on the sides; the
mesonotum opaque, finely rugose, almost transversely
striated ; the scutellum shining, bearing shallow, scattered
punctures, and sparsely covered with long, fuscous hair ;
the post-scutellum thickly covered with white pubescence.
Median segment with an abrupt, oblique slope; opaque,
finely and closely shagreened ; the base with the area not
clearly limited, and closely longitudinally striolated ; the
furrow on the apical half wide and deep at the base. Pro-
pleurz shining, coarsely aciculated; the mesopleure
at the tubercules thickly covered with white pubescence ;

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), Vo. il. 69

the metapleurz covered with long, white hair. Legs black;
the hinder tibiz and tarsi rufous ; the coxz and femora
covered with long, white hair; the tibiz and tarsi more
thickly covered with shorter hair; the hair on the hinder
tibiz being longer and thicker ; the claws rufous. Wings
hyaline, the apex slightly infuscated ; the second cellule
scarcely half the length of the top of the third ; the costa
and stigma black; the nervures fuscous; the second
recurrent nervure is received the length of the second
cubital cellule from the apex of the third cellule. Abdo-
men shining, impunctate ; the base and sides of the basal
segment covered with long, white hair; the sides and
apices of the other segments fringed with white pubescence;
the ventral segments thickly covered with dark rufous
hair.

The antennz in this species are more slender and the
ventral surface of the abdomen more thickly pilose than
usual, ¢.¢., than in JV. edlzottz.

NOMIA CHRYSOPA, sf. zov. (PI. 4, f. 13.)

Long.6 mm. 4d.

Fab. Allahabad (Xothney).

In the Key (4c, p. 449) it forms a new group of the
species with the abdominal fascize white ; “d%. Enclosed
space at base of median segment, with stout, oblique
keels,” not punctured as in JV. orybeloides, nor obscurely
transversely striated as in JV. rustzca.

Head black; from shortly above the base of the
antenne, thickly covered with golden pubescence, behind
the eyes with longish, white pubescence; the vertex with
longish, fuscous hair, longer and paler behind. Front
and vertex closely and strongly punctured, except a small,
smooth spot outside the hinder ocelli. Mandibles black;
bearing at the base long, pale fulvous hair. The scape

70 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalia.

yellow; the flagellum yellowish-ochraceous beneath ;
blackish above ; the flagellum bare; the scape with long,
pale hair. The edge of the pronotum on the top covered
with a distinct line of dirty-yellow, depressed pubescence,
in front of which is a narrow belt of long, pale hairs.
Mesonotum closely and somewhat strongly punctured,
Opaque; sparsely covered with short, fuscous pubescence;
the post-scutellum covered with longer, stiff, pale hair on
the top. The “enclosed space” on the base of the median
segment shining; distinctly margined behind: and having
stout, slightly oblique, widely separated keels; the median
segment with an oblique slope; rugose, obscurely reticu-
lated at the top, and indistinctly keeled down the middle.
Mesopleurz thickly covered with long, pale fulvous hair.
Legs bright lemon-yellow; the coxz and trochanters
black ; the base of the femora broadly black, tinged with
brown; a brownish mark on the outer and inner side of
the hinder tibia; the hinder femora have, shortly beyond
the middle, a large, oblique, triangular tooth; the hinder
tibiz gradually dilated to the apex, which ends on the
inner side in a large, triangular tooth. Wings hyaline,
slightly infuscated, especially towards the apex. Abdomen
black, the apex of the basal three segments with a belt of
white, depressed pubescence; the apical three covered
entirely with similar pubescence; the first and second seg-
ments coarsely punctured; the third and fourth finely and
closely punctured; the last rufous round the apex; the
apices of the basal three segments covered with long,
white hair, as is also the apical segment. |

The form of the hind legs is not unlike those of JV.
combusta, with which it otherwise is closely related ; but
the shape of the femora serves to separate (elaveroal 3 sia
NV. combusta they are roundly curved before the tooth;
in WV. chrysopa they are perfectly straight, not curved in
any way.

Manchester Memotrs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No.1. 71

NOMIA MACULITARSIS, sp. mov. (Pl. 4, f. 12.)

Long. 8 mm. ¢.

Hab. Poona (Wroughion).

Agrees with WV. foralis Sm. and JV. pzlzpes Sm. in
having the base of the abdomen red ; only the females of
these two species are known, but it can hardly be the ¢ of
either of them. It comes nearest in those characters
common to both sexes to JV. floralts, from which it may
be separated as follows:

Median segment with a median vertical keel, the area
at base densely punctured ; the legs rufo-piceous.

NV. floralis Sm.

Median segment without a median vertical keel, the

basal area distinctly striolated ; the legs black, the tarsi

rufous. LV. maculitarsis.

LV. piltpes Sm. has the basal two and the basal two-
thirds of the third abdominal segments pale-red, and the
basal area of the median segment is “very coarsely
punctured.”

The head in front from shortly below the ocelli
densely covered with fulvous hair; the front and vertex
shining, impunctate. Mandibles black, striated ; the striz
curved at the top. The propleure shining, impunctate,
the apex only covered with long, white hair; the meso-
and meta-pleure thickly covered with long, white hair.
Wings hyaline, the costa, stigma, and nervures pale
fuscous ; the second cubital cellule at the top not half the
length of the third at the top; the first recurrent nervure
is received shortly beyond the middle of the cellule.
Abdomen shining, the base and the sides covered with
white hair; the basal segment entirely red, closely and
finely punctured ; the base and sides of the second rufous,
the rest of it piceous ; the apices of the second and follow-
ing segments smooth, silvery white ; the ventral surface
entirely red. Legs black, the tarsi pale rufous, the hinder

iD CAMERON, A/ymenoptera Orientalia.

infuscated towards the apex ; the hinder femora trian-
cularly dilated above, below straight,,except for a slight,
blunt, somewhat triangular projection near the base; the
apex of the hinder tibiz ends in a stout triangle, which
behind is prolonged into a stout, roundly curved process,
rounded at the end and piceous at the base of the apical
tooth ; sparsely covered with long, pale fulvous hair ; the
outer orbits bearing long, white hairs, which are longer
and more numerous on the lower part. The scape and
second joint of the antennz entirely black ; the flagellum
fulvo-brownish, blackish above; the scape with a few
fuscous hairs; the flagellum bare. The pro- and part of
meso-notum densely covered with long, fulvous hair; the
rest of the mesonotum with shorter hair ; in the middle of
the mesonotum are two narrow furrows ; near the sides,
opposite the tegulz, is aslightly wider and deeper furrow;
the scutellum is sparsely covered with very long, pale
hair; the post-scutellum covered with white, woolly
pubescence, and bearing also some long, white hairs ; the
mesonotum is closely, but not very strongly, punctured ;
the scutellum impunctate. The median segment is
rounded at the base, semiperpendicular at the apex ;
punctured, but not strongly ; the sides and apex covered
with long, soft, white hair; the basal area strongly obliquely
distinctly margined on either side, the hinder trochanters
are rufous ; the femora are sparsely covered with long, the
tibiz and tarsi thickly with short, white pubescence.

NOMIA (?) ALIENA, sf. zov. (PI. 4, f. 14.)

Long, aims 2:

flab. Poona (Wroughton).

The undernoted species comes into Bingham’s Section
Biss Nomza, having the abdominal segments fringed with
hair; but it differs from all the species in the prothorax
having in front of the tegulz a curved, thin, horn-like,

Manchester Memoirs, Voi. liz. (1898), No. Uk. = 73

semitransparent projection, extending equally on both
sides of the tegule. Behind the eyes thereisa sharp keel
extending their entire length, and separated from them by
a clear space.

- Head as wide as the mesothorax ; the front and vertex
coarsely punctured, sparsely covered with short, fuscous
hair ; the centre below the antennz shining, its middle
almost impunctate ; the base and apex with large, deep,
widely separated punctures; the part next the eyes
closely rugosely punctured, almost longitudinally striated.
Clypeus with large, deep punctures, except near the eyes,
where the punctures are smaller and closer. Labrum
fringed with long, fulvous hair. Mandibles black, piceous
at the apex ; the base opaque, finely striated ; with one
large apical,and a smaller subapical tooth. Scape of
antenne fringed with longish pale hair above; the
flagellum brownish beneath towards the apex. Pro- and
meso-notum and scutellum shining, smooth; the meso-
notum with three shallow furrows in front; the apex of
the scutellum with a row of shallow, large, round
punctures; the post-scutellum covered with white
pubescence. Median segment with an oblique slope at
the apex ; without any basal area, but with a faint indi-
cation of two converging furrows. The mesopleure
coarsely punctured at the base; the apex with a broad
clearly defined space, broad at the top, gradually narrowed
to the bottom, and bearing stout, longitudinal, distinctly
separated keels. Metapleure shining, uniformly marked
with shallow punctures and with a broad, shallow furrow
at the base. Wings hyaline, the costa, stigma and nervures
testaceous ; the second cubital cellule is of nearly equal
width, and scarcely one-half the length of the top of the
third cellule ; the first recurrent nervure is interstitial ; the ©
second received at the end of the second cellule, the trans-
verse cubital nervure turning up sharply obliquely from it,

74 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalia.

and not continued in a straight, or but slightly oblique,
line from it as usual. In the hind wings, the nervures are
not continued to the end of the wings. Legs densely
covered with long, pale or pale fulvous hair; the hinder
tarsi have the basal joint dilated above and compressed ;
the second joint is obliquely dilated above, both more so
than usual.

NOMIA (?) INTERSTITIALIS, sp. xov.

Nigra, flagello antennarum rufo,; alts hyalinis, nerves
stzgmateque nigris. 6.

Bons: 7-5 mm:

Hab. Allahabad (Rothney).

Scape of antennz black; sparsely covered with long,
white hair; the flagellum almost bare, infuscated above
towards the apex. Face and clypeus sparsely covered
with long, white hair. Clypeus finely punctured, finely
longitudinally striated ; the anterior ocelli with a curved
furrow in front; behind them is a narrow ——-shaped one.
Mandibles at the base covered sparsely with long, white
hairs. Thorax above with short, fuscous pubescence ;
sparsely and shortly pilose; the hair on the scutellum
longer; the basal area on the median segment large,
closely and finely longitudinally striated, and bordered by
a rather deep furrow, which is continued down the middle
of the segment. Pleurze densely covered with short pubes-
cence. Wings short, reaching only to the fourth abdominal
segment; the second cubital cellule small, shorter than
broad; above one-half the length of the third; the first
recurrent nervure is almost interstitial ; but received nearer
the base than the apex of the nervure ; the second is.
received the length of the second cellule from the apex
of the third. Legs black; the calcaria white; the coxe
thickly, the femora sparsely, covered with long, white hair;
the tibiz and tarsi very thickly with shorter, white hair;

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xl. (1898), No. UN. 75

the hair on the under side of the metatarsus rufous; the
apex of the tarsi rufous. The femora and tibiae are normal,
not dilated, except that the hinder tibiz on the inner side
are triangularly produced, but not sharply, the apex being
rounded. Abdomen shining, impunctate; the base of the
segments belted with white, depressed pile; the second to
fourth segment with wide transverse furrows near the
base ; the ventral segments smooth, shining; their apices
fringed with short, white hair; the sides of the third and
fourth with long, white hair; the penultimate segment
broadly depressed in the middle, with a smaller, somewhat
pear-shaped, depression on either side at the apex.

This is perhaps not a true Vomza. The trophi do not
differ in form from those of that genus. The only point
in which the legs agree with those of Vomza is in the
projecting apex of the hinder tibiz. It differs in the
interstitial first recurrent nervure and in the shorter wings.

MEGACHILE NIGRICANS, Spf. nov.

Nigra, capite thoraceque pallide hirtis ; alts hyalinis. .

Long. II mm.

Flab. Trincomali, Ceylon ( Yerbury).

In Bingham’s Key (4c., p. 471) it comes in “ A. Abdo-
men black, with entirely black pubescence above,”
and “C. wings hyaline,” which only contains the ¢6 of
M. anthracina, a very different species from JZ. nzgricans,
being much larger, the pubescence on the face bright
fulvous, the fore legs more or less rufo-testaceous, the
wings infuscated at the apex, the fore legs spined, &c.

Entirely black, the wings hyaline, the costa and
nervures fuscous, darker at the base. Head below the
ocelli thickly covered with long, pale, behind the ocelli
more sparsely with longish, black, hair ; front and vertex
strongly punctured, except a smooth, shining space on
the outer side of the hinder ocelli; the clypeus strongly

70, CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orzentalza.

punctured; the labrum fringed with long, pale hair.
Mandibles black, shining, the base covered with long,
fuscous, intermixed with shorter, silvery hair; their apices
shining, armed with one large, somewhat triangular, tooth
at the apex; the base strongly punctured. Antenne
short, black, the apical half dull rufous on the under side ;
the scape with a few short hairs; the flagellum bare,
shining. Pro- and meso-notum thickly covered with
longish hair ; longer and paler on the pronotum ; closely
rugose ; the scutellum, if anything, more strongly rugose
and with the hair longer; the median segment with a
perpendicular slope, thickly covered with long, pale hair.
Pleurze thickly covered with long, black hair; the lower
part of the mesopleure excavated, shining; the lower part
of the metapleurze smooth. Abdomen shining, pilose, the
segments fringed with white hair; the ventral surface
thickly covered with longish, stiff, blackish hair. Femora
sparsely; the tibiz and tarsi very thickly covered with
long, black hair; the fore coxe simple, not spined.

TETRALONIA.

Under this generic name Bingham describes two
species—7. duvancelzt Lep.=elegans Sm.,and T. hima-
layensis Bing. In these two species the maxillary palpi
are said to be 6-jointed. Whether this is an original
observation, or merely copied from Smith (Caz. Hym., ii.,
p. 297), who also gives six joints to the maxillary palpi of
Letralonza, | am unable to say. Apart from the difference
in the number of palpal joints, my species agrees in the
other generic characters with Tetvalonza as given by
Bingham. In both the species here described the maxil-
lary palpi have only four joints, as have also the labial.
Latreille, who first described 7etralonza, gives five as the
number of joints in the maxillary palpi, this being likewise
the number in Smith’s genus XYenoglossa. Mr.W.H. Patton

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. Ul. 77

(Generic Arrangement of the Bees allied to Welissodes and
Anthophora. Bull. U.S. Geol. Surv. Territ.,v., p. 471) gives
also five joints for 7ezra/onia, but it is not clear to me if he
has himself examined the genus or gives a quotation from
Latreille. Mel¢ssodes Latr. is described in full by Patton
(Zc, p. 472); it has, like our species, 4-jointed maxillary
palpi, “the fourth joint often minute,” which does not
conform to our Indian species any more than does his
description of the first joint of the labial palpi being twice
the length of the second. In other respects our species do
not quite fit into Patton’s diagnosis. Further, they do
not agree with each other in the form of the palpi. For
those species with 6-jointed maxillary palpi, Patton estab-
lished (2c, p. 473) the genus Syzhalonia, representing
Macrocera Lep., Tetralonia Sm., and Melissodes Cresson,
nec Latr.; but it can hardly be regarded as generically
identical with our species. Taschenberg (Lerl, Entom.
Zeits., XXVii., p. 78) groups the genera under MWacrocera
(an inadmissible name, being preoccupied in Dzpétera);
Melissodes Latr. with 4-jointed maxillary palpi; WZacroceia
sen. str. with them 5-jointed ; Xezoglossa Sm. with them
also 5-jointed; Syzhalonza with them 6-jointed and
Ancyloscelis, of which the palpal characters are not given,
but which is treated by Smith (Cat. Hym., ii., p. 365) as a
doubtful synonym of TJetrapedia Klug, a very different
genus from Tetralonza. As Mr. Rothney’s 9 differs in
many respects from Mr. Wroughton’s male and from the
described genera, I give a generic description of it here,
leaving it for further investigation to decide whether the
points of difference in the palpal and other characters are
of generic, sub-generic, or of mere specific importance.

?. Antenne shorter than the thorax; ocelli ... Man-
dibles without teeth. Tongue not elongate, if anything
shorter than the palpi; the apex ending in a button;
paraglosse a little longer than the tongue; densely pilose ;

78 CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalia.

the two basal palpal joints greatly enlarged and thickened;
the basal slightly longer than the second ; the apical two
joints of nearly equal length. The stipes longer and
broader than the galea by about one-fourth ; the top on
the inner. side rounded inwardly and fringed with long,
stout, stiff hairs; the first and third joints of the palpi are
nearly equal in length ; the fourth is slightly shorter ; the
second is the longest. Wings very short, not reaching to
the apex of the second abdominal segment; the two
recurrent nervures received quite close to the transverse
cubital nervures. Fore wings with three cubital cellules ;
the third at the top scarcely so long as the second ; at the
bottom nearly twice its length. Legs densely pilose ; the
hinder tibize and tarsi densely covered with long hair ; the
calcaria simple, of nearly equal length ; the claws with a
stout tooth near the base. Abdomen not densely pilose ;
the apical segment with a large, smooth, glabrous area in
the middle, somewhat triangular in shape, but with the
apex rounded.

TETRALONIA BREVIPENNIS, sp. mov. (Pl. 4, f. 6, 6a, 0.)

Nigra, flagello antennarum rufo, pedibus longe pallide
pilosis,; alts brevibus, costis, stigmate nervisque testacets. F.

Lone. 9); expy ah ommn:

Hab. Allahabad (Rothney).

Antennz black ; the flagellum from its second joint
rufous beneath ; bare ; the scape with a few short, black
hairs. Head strongly punctured; the clypeus more

strongly than the front; the sides of the vertex much

more finely ; the occiput fringed with long, erect, white
~ hair above ; the front and vertex with short, the sides of
the clypeus with much longer, white hair. Vhe apex of
the clypeus distinctly margined, ferruginous. Mandibles
rufous in the middle and fringed with long, fulvous hair on
the lower side. Mesonotum and scutellum closely punc-

Manchester Memozrs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 11. 79

tured ; the median segment at the apex with a steep, oblique
slope ; the base strongly and closely punctured ; the apex
with the sides less strongly punctured; the middle
impunctate; the apex at the sides thickly covered with
long, white hair. Legs thickly covered with long, pale
fulvous hair; the floccus very long and thick; the meta-
tarsus greatly enlarged, very thickly haired; the hair
mixed with stiffspines. Wings reaching not much beyond
the middle of the second abdominal segment ; the second
cubital cellule at top not much longer than the third at
the top; the first recurrent nervure is received near the
transverse cubital ; the second is interstitial. The first
tranverse basal is received before the basal, not joined to
it. The basal segment of the abdomen is covered with
long, white hair, almost bare in the middle at the apex,
perhaps through being rubbed; the second, third and
fourth covered with white, depressed pubescence; the
fifth thickly with fulvous pubescence ; the middle area on
the last segment smooth, glabrous; the sides of the
segment thickly covered with fulvous pubescence. The
bases of the ventral segments covered with white pubes-
cence ; the apices of the three basal segments brownish ;
the hypopygium bare, sharply separated from the sides
by a deep depression.

TETRALONIA PUNCTATA, Sp. nov.
Long. 8-9 mm.
Fab. Poona (Wvroughton).
In Bingham’s key (4¢., p. 520) 7. punctata will come in
as follows :—

Clypeus yellow.
Clypeus “very lightly punctured.” 7. duvanceliz Lep.
Clypeus very strongly punctured all over. TZ. punctata.

Antenne rufo-testaceous; bare, the basal joint black.
Head black; thickly covered with long, whitish hair,

80 CAMERON, Ay menoptera Orientalta.

except behind the ocelli; the clypeus and labrum lemon-
yellow ; the clypeus strongly and uniformly covered with
large, shallow punctures, its apex almost transverse ; the
labrum punctured like the clypeus, but not quite so
strongly, thickly fringed with long, white hair. Mandibles
for the greater part ferruginous, black at the base, with a
yellow mark in the centre. Thorax thickly covered all
over with long, pale fulvous hair; the tegule yellow.
Wings hyaline, the costa and stigma rufo-testaceous ; the
second and third cubital cellules almost equal in length at
the top; the second at the bottom hardly one-half the
length of the third. Legs thickly covered with pale hair;
on the under side of the tarsi with rufous hair; the apical
joints of the tarsi being rufous; the calcaria pale. Abdo-
men black ; the basal segment thickly covered with long,
pale hair; the second and third segments with a broad
beit of depressed fulvous down on their base; the fourth
and fifth covered entirely with pale, fulvous pile, the apical
segments with the pubescence rufous, not pale fulvous;
the ventral segments fringed with pale fulvous hair ; the
texture of the pygidium is hidden by the pubescence; the
hypopygium is smooth, bare, the base black, the rest
ferruginous. .

The ligula is elongated, extending considerably beyond
the palpi, is stout and densely haired ; the paraglossz are
also hairy and are slightly longer than the palpi; the basal
joint of the palpi is about one-half longer than the second ;
the apical two minute, the last shorter than the preceding.

The second joint of the maxillary palpi is the longer, the

rest subequal.

ANTHOPHORA CELLULARIS, sf. 70v.

one. 7-3 mimge
flab. Poona (Wroughton).
In the table (Zc, p. 525) this Species comes ineaE

Manchester Memozrs, Vol. xlit. (1898), Wo. 11. SI

«“%2, Abdomen beneath black,” which will now be sub-
divided into :—

Clypeus bimaculate ; the second and third cubital cel-
lules subequal. A. confusa Sm. and A. fallax Sm.

Clypeus immaculate ; second cubital cellule not one-half
the length of the third. A. cellularis.

Head black, the vertex and front closely, but not
strongly, punctured ; the cheeks impunctuate ; the clypeus
with some large, widely separated, punctures ; the clypeus,
a somewhat triangular mark above it, the sides from a
little above the base of the antenne, dilated in the middle
to meet the upper mark, the labrum and the base of the
mandibles, yellow; the mandibles piceous, intermixed
with black. The front and vertex and the outer orbits
thickly covered with long, griseous hair; the clypeus
bearing a sparse pubescence; the labrum fringed with long,
white hair. The scape of the antenne yellow beneath;
the flagellum brownish. The pro- and meso-notum
thickly covered with short, dark griseous hair; the
scutelia with much longer white, the sides of the median
segment and the pleure with long, white hair; the
median segment closely punctured ; the pleure are much
more strongly punctured; the lower part of the meta-
pleurz obscurely longitudinally striated. The outer sides
of the tibiz and tarsi thickly covered with long, white
hair; the metatarsus thickly covered on the inner side
with long, bright rufous hair ; the claws rufous. Wings
hyaline ; the stigma and nervures blackish ; the second
cubital cellule at top and bottom hardly one-half the
length of the third; at the top it is half the length it
is at the bottom ; the first recurrent nervure is received
near the middle of the cellule; the second distinctly in
front of the third transverse cubital nervure, and not
interstitial as it is with A. fal/ax, &c. Abdomen shining,

UO CPT seh) EN ne Revere vi aS a
‘ ; ’ 0. Ale § a) -s)

82 | CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orientalia. — 7

closely but not strongly punctured; the first to fifth q

segments banded with white pubescence, the last closely
and strongly punctured above, the apex rufous; the
hypopygium dark rufous, the middle carinate ; the sides
fringed with long, white hairs, the third to fifth ventral
segments fringed with long, white hairs; the basal seg-
ments piceous. | hes ie

84

=

CAMERON, Hymenoptera Orzentatza.

EXPLANATION OF PEATE:

. Mutilla indecora, 2.
. Passaloecus veteculatus, &.
. Pterochilus fulvipennis, 3. 3a, labial; 36, maxil-

lary palpus.

. Sudila ceylonica, 2.

,» Otdentata, 6. head from the front; 5a from
the side.

. Letralonia brevipennts, 2. 6a, maxillary ; 60, labium

and palpi.

. Hind leg of 6 Noma aureohirta.

9 3 » varipes.

» fulvohirta.

» erythrogaster.
latispina, and Ila 6.
» maculitarsts.

Oy, Os +O OQ, Oy

» chrysopa.

. Nomia altena, §.

» purpureo-lineata, @.

. Steganomus gracilis. s.

ae!
,

ge Memoirs. Vol. XLIL

6a.

W. Purktss, del. et lith

HYMENOPTERA ORIENTALIA.

oy fe *
ie Me

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. 12.

THE- WILDE LECTURE.
XII. ‘ Onthe Physical Basis of Psychical Events.”
By Professor MICHAEL FOSTER, Sec.R.S.
Delivered March 29th, 1898.

I very much fear that the title of my lecture (though
I have found no better one) may have raised expectations
which I cannot fulfil. We all know that what we subjec-
tively recognise in ourselves and infer in others as
psychical life, willing, feeling, thinking, is dependent on
the integrity of that superficial layer of nervous material
which we call the cortex of the cerebral hemispheres ; by
integrity I mean the well-being not only of the layer itself
but of all its connections. We all know that physical
changes in the cortex and changes in psychical life may
be said, in a broad way, to accompany each other. I do
not propose, in what I now have to say, to discuss what is
sometimes spoken of as the connection of body and mind.
I do not wish to make any attempt at throwing a bridge
over the gap between the objective event and its subjective
correlative. The task I have in hand is the simple and
modest one of gathering together the fragments of know-
ledge which we at present possess as to what changes
capable of objective appreciation, changes which we may
accordingly speak of as physical, are going on in the
cortex, while psychical developments are taking place,
studying the parallelism between the one and the other,
without daring to lay hold of the bonds which tie the two
together.

September 13th, 1898.

2 FOSTER, Physical Basis of Psychical Events.

And I am given to understand that I am to speak not
so much to those who already know as to those who
desire to learn. |

I will take as a sort of text the physical events which
lie at the bottom of that element of psychical life which
we call a visual sensation. When ‘light falls upon’ the eye
it produces in us, under ordinary circumstances, a psychical
effect, a visual sensation. In order that the effect may be
produced, the integrity of certain nervous structures is
necessary. The retina within the eye is connected by
the optic nerve and optic tract with the three nervous
bodies called the corpus geniculatum, the corpus
quadrigeminum and the pulvinar or hind part of the
optic thalamus. Each of these three bodies is in turn
connected by nervous strands with the superficial grey
matter or cortex of the cerebral hemisphere in the
occipital region. These nervous structures, the retina, the
optic nerve and tract, the three bodies just spoken of,
which I may call the intermediate bodies, and the
occipital cortex constitute together a nervous mechanism,
a visual mechanism, the integrity of which is essential
to the development of visual sensations. Destruction
of or interference with any part of this mechanism at
once does away with or modifies the development of visual
sensations, brings about blindness or defective sight ;
whereas on the other hand destruction of or interference
with any other part of the nervous system does not
necessarily and directly do away with or interfere with the
mere development of visual sensations, though it may, in
one way or another, indirectly affect vision. Obviously,
when ‘we see’, the vibrations of the ether impinging on
the retina give rise in this mechanism to events, the
issue of which is a visual sensation. The visual
sensation is a psychical thing. What are the physical
changes, the changes which we can objectively lay hold

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 12. 3

of, taking place in the mechanism during the development
of the psychical effect ?

The mechanism may be briefly described as a chain
of linked units, the unit being the nerve cell, or, as it is
sometimes called, the zeurone. In order to make clear
the characteristic features and properties of the neurone,
I must for a while pass away from the special visual
mechanism to the general nervous system.

A nerve cell consists, like the cell or unit of any other
of the tissues of the body, of a zucleus lying in the midst
of a mass of material spoken of as the cell body. In
the typical nerve cell the cell body is prolonged into a
number of processes, it may be many, it may be few,
stretching away from the neighbourhood of the nucleus.
The majority of these processes, all in fact but one,
branching rapidly and extensively in ramifications or
arborisations, end in fine points at no very great distance
from the nucleus; these processes are called dendrites or den-
drons. One process does not ramify in this way; it pursues
an undivided course, it may be for a very long distance from
the nucleus. Moreover, the material of which it is com-
posed differs in microscopic appearance and in its reac-
tions towards colouring and other chemical reagents from
the material of the dendrites. Further, unlike, at least,
the typical dendrite, it usually developes at a greater or less
distance from the nucleus, around the material which is
the prolongation of the substance of the cell body, a
coating of a peculiar, largely fatty nature, spoken of as
myelin or medulla. This undivided process is called the
axts-cylinder process, or neuraxon, or, more briefly, axon;
it has also been called the zeurzte. Though not ramifying
like the typical dendrites, the axon not unfrequently, indeed
usually, sends off at intervals, generally at right angles to
itself, fine lateral twigs resembling itself, but more
delicate, called collaterals, and, after pursuing its

4. FosTER, Physical Basis of Psychical Events.

unbranched course, it may be for a short, it may be for an
exceedingly long distance, eventually ends in a terminal
branching arborisation. Such are the main features of a
typical nerve cell or neurone, a nucleated cell body giving
off on the one hand branched dendrites, and on the other
hand an undivided axon. There are, I need hardly say,
variations from the type, but on these I need not now
dwell.

The nerve cell or neurone is the unit of the nervous
system in the sense that the whole system is made up of
neurones, linked together in aspecial way, and surrounded
by or embedded in a ground work, consisting of connective
tissue carrying blood vessels and lymphatics, and of a
special tissue called neuroglia, which ground work supports
and nourishes the active real nervous tissue and at the
same time serves to isolate each nervous element from its
neighbours.

The mode of linkage deserves attention. In so many
cases has it been observed that the terminals of an axon,
either of the stem or of the collaterals, by means of
branching or arborisation, more or less complex, impinge
upon or surround or intertwine with the dendrites or some
part of the cell not itself an axon, that this may be con-
sidered as the mode in which the cells are connected
together. Axon does not link with axon, or dendrite with
dendrite, the linkage is that of axon with dendrite.
Further, in so many cases the connection has been found
to be one not of fusion but of contact, there being a break
of continuity at. the linkage between the material of the
axon and that of the dendrite, that this, too, has been
assumed to be an essential feature of the linkage. This
assumption, however, must be received with caution;
indeed, it is maintained by some observers that in certain
cases distinct fusion may be observed. But it may be
argued that these cases are only apparent exceptions, the

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 12. 5

difficulty of distinguishing between actual fusion and mere
contact being in many situations exceedingly great, and
the instances where the linkage is obviously one of contact
only being exceedingly numerous. And, indeed, while
admitting that the existence of a distinct mechanical gap
is not an essential feature of the linkage, we may still
assume that at each linkage there is between the linked
units a line of demarcation, the material on the one side
of which differs from that on the other.

Passing now to the question, what are the physical
events, the events which we can lay hold of objectively,
which take place during the life of a nerve cell, and
which we may assume to be different when the nerve
cell is at rest from what they are when the nerve cell
is in a state of activity, we find that nearly all our
exact knowledge is derived from observations made
on nerve cells or parts of nerve cells prolonged outside the
central nervous system as nerve fibres connecting that
central nervous system, the brain or the spinal cord, with the
various tissues of the body. These nerve fibres are on the
one hand efferent fibres, the channels or instruments by
which the central nervous system transmits influences to,
or acts upon muscular and other tissues; and, on the other
hand, afferent fibres, the channels or instruments by which
various tissues, as the result of changes taking place in
them, transmit influences to, or produce effects in the
central nervous system.

The efferent nerve fibre is simply the prolonged axon
of a nerve cell lying in the spinal cord or brain; the axon,
for instance, of a cell whose nucleus and dendrites lie
wholly within the spinal cord, leaves the spinal cord, and
pursues its way, clothed with myelin or medulla and sup-
ported by connective tissue, until it reaches its destination,
a muscular fibre for example, in which, after previous
division, it ends in a terminal arborescence in connection

6 FostTER, Physzcal Baszs of Psychical Events.

with the substance of the muscular fibre. The nature of
an afferent nerve fibre is not so obvious. If we take a
fibre of the auditory nerve, we find that it begins as
a branched set of delicate filaments surrounding an
auditory epithelial cell. These unite into a fibre which,
becoming clothed with myelin, has in this and other
respects at least a great resemblance to an axon. The
fibre, pursuing its course, passes into a nerve cell
of the so-called spiral ganglion, entering at one pole,
while from the opposite pole of the cell proceeds a nerve
fibre, an indubitable axon, which, making its way toa
particular part of the brain, ends after the manner of an
axon, by linkage with another nerve cell. The fibre which
joins the nerve cell in the spiral ganglion to the brain is, as I
just now said, indubitably an axon; the nature of the fibre
which joins the auditory epithelial cell to the nerve cell of
the spiral ganglion has been debated. It has been urged
that it is an axon because it is clothed with myelin; for, in
the case of the nerve cells lying within the central nervous
system, the part which is clothed with myelin is always an
axon; the dendrites are never soclothed. But all axons are
not clothed with myelin; on the other hand, within the
central nervous system, where the dendrites are devoid ofa
myelin coating, no instances are known of a dendrite being
prolonged as a fibre to a considerable distance from the
nucleus or main body of the cell to which it belongs, yet
this is the case with this part of the auditory fibre, if
we consider it as a dendrite of the nerve cell in the spiral.
ganglion. Moreover, at its beginning as an arborescence
round the auditory epithelial cell, this fibre has the
appearance of a dendrite; for that epithelial cell may
be regarded as a potential nerve cell, without either
axon or dendrites, as are all nerve cells at an early stage
of their existence. Hence we may regard the fibre, the
nature of which we are discussing, as the dendritic moiety

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 12. 7

of a nerve cell linking the auditory epithelial cell with a
nerve cell in the auditory territory of the brain, though its
dendritic nature is obscured save at its very beginning.

Analogous to the auditory afferent fibre is the common
sensory afferent fibre, connecting the skin with the spinal
cord or brain. This, too, begins as a dendritic branching
in connection with the epithelial cells of the epidermis,
pursues its way as a myelinated axon-like nerve fibre
belonging to a nerve cell in the posterior ganglion of
a spinal nerve (or its analogue in the case of the cranial
nerves), which nerve cell sends forth an indubitable axon
to end by linkage with some cell or cells within the central
nervous system. A special feature, however, of these
ordinary sensory fibres is that, in animals above fishes, the
nucleus with the surrounding part of the cell body does
not lie in the course of the fibre, the fibre entering at
one pole and issuing at the other, but is drawn away all
together from the fibre with which it is connected
after the fashion of a T-piece; hence the main cell body
seems to give rise to one fibre which divides into two,
each pursuing a different course. But this special dispo-
sition of the nucleus is of very secondary importance.

Of more importance is the consideration that, at least
in ordinary circumstances, while an efferent fibre seems to
be engaged in transmitting influences along itself from a
cell in the central nervous system to a muscular fibre or
other peripheral tissue, an afferent fibre is engaged
in transmitting influences from the skin or other peripheral
tissue to the central nervous system. Hence, if we adopt
the view that in the afferent fibre the part peripheral to
the nucleus is of the nature of a dendrite, in spite of its
being clothed with myelin along by far the greater part
of its course, we may say that in both cases the influences
are transmitted along the axon away from the nucleus or
its neighbourhood, and along the dendrite towards the

8 FOSTER, Physical Baszs of Psychical Events.

nucleus, or at all events towards the beginning of the axon.

It is in our power to excite or stimulate by artificial
means, by electric currents or by other forms of stimulus,
these nerve fibres lying outside the central nervous system.
And we find invariably that, whatever part of the course
of a fibre we may artificially stimulate, we produce by
means of afferent fibres effects in the central nervous
system only, none in the periphery, and by means of the
efferent fibres, effects in the periphery only, none in the
central nervous system. The former acts apparently in
a centripetal manner only, the latter in a centrifugal
manner only.

I may now return to the question—What events can
be ascertained to take place in a nerve fibre when it is
stimulated ? |

When we study the events taking place in other tissues,
in muscular fibres, gland cells, and the like, we find clear
evidence that the phase of activity, the contraction of a
muscular fibre, the act of secretion in a gland cell, isaccom-_
panied by chemical changes, by electric changes, and by
the setting free of energy in the form of heat. In the gland,
where chemical change is the goal of activity, the develop-
ment of heat is economised or even minimised ; in the
muscle, where energy is in like manner the goal, the
development of heat is larger, and is utilised for the good
of the economy. When, on the other hand, a nerve fibre
is stimulated, the most careful examination fails to detect
either chemical change or the setting free of heat. The
phase of activity of a nerve fibre is marked by one objec-
tive token and by one only, an electric change giving rise
to an electric current known as the current of action. This
electric change is witnessed during the activity of a nerve
fibre in all cases, not only when the nerve is excited arti-
ficially, but also when it is the instrument of natural
nervous events, of sensation, and of movement. Moreover,

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 12, 9

as has been especially shewn by the researches of Waller,
this current of action may be taken not only as the token,
but also as an exact measure of vital activity; the sweep
of the current rises or falls as the power of the nerve fibre
waxes or wanes.

Taking this electric change as the sign and, indeed, as
the measure of the events in a nerve fibre which constitute
its phase of activity, and which we speak of as a “ nervous
impulse,” we are able to estimate the features of nervous
impulses, the rate at which they travel along a nerve fibre,
the length of nerve fibre occupied by a nervous impulse
as it sweeps like a wave along its course, and such rises
or falls of its amplitude as may from time to time occur.

In this way we find no essential differences between a
nervous impulse of natural or of artificial origin. Whena
nerve fibre is stimulated at any point of its course by an
electric current or other artificial stimulus, or when it is
thrown into action in a natural way, and is the instrument
of sensations or of voluntary or other movements, the
nervous impulse, as shewn by the electric change, possesses
the same essential features, such difference as occurs being
one of energy only. Further, we have reason, by the same
token, to think that when a nervous impulse sweeps along
even a great length of fibre, it does not materially change
otherwise than perhaps by somewhat diminishing as it
passes along.

Further, while it is a prominent characteristic of the
tissues of the living body in general that activity, whether
natural or artificial, when carried beyond certain narrow
limits, leads to fatigue and ultimately to exhaustion,
careful observations shew that to the nerve fibre under
artificial stimulation exhaustion is unknown. Every com-
plete nervous mechanism, involving more than the mere
nerve fibre, is not only subject to fatigue, but is perhaps more
readily subject than are even other tissues, as is notably

IO FOSTER, Physical Basis of Psychical Events.

seen in the nervous mechanisms of sensation; and fatigue
is more readily induced by artificial than by natural stimu-
lation; but when we come to deal with the nerve fibre by
itself (and in such cases the stimulation is almost neces-
sarily artificial), and with the mere transmission of nervous
impulses, apart from their terminal effects, we find that
exhaustion cannot be induced by even the most powerful
and prolonged excitation.

Two views may be taken as to the nature of this
untiredness of the nerve fibre. It has been supposed on
the one hand that the molecular changes which constitute
the nervous impulse are of a nature wholly unlike the
changes which in all other living tissues lie at the bottom
of activity, that the changes in the nerve fibre involve no
consumption of energy. On the other hand it may be
urged that in the nerve fibre the nutritive changes are so
admirably balanced, and respond to the demands made
upon them with such exquisitely arranged swiftness, that
what is lost by action (and that we may assume to be
little, for the change of electric potential, even though
conspicuous, is exceedingly small) is at once, without loss
of time, made good. So far as I know, we do not possess
any crucial test to decide between these two views; we
have no exact proof in one direction or the other; but, on
the whole, the latter view may, from many considerations,
be taken as the more probable one.

If, for instance, we pass from the nerve fibre itself,
which, as we have seen, is a part only of the nerve unit to
the whole unit, to the nerve cell or neurone in its entirety,
we find that the nutrition of this is exquisitely cared for.
In all living units, in all living cells, the nucleus presides,
governs, and determines the nutrition of the unit. Ifa
simple unicellular organism be divided into two parts, so
that the nucleus remains in one only of the two, the
nucleusless fragment, even though it be the larger one,

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), Vo. 12. 11

may live for a brief period on its accumulated vital capital,
but when this is expended perishes; it cannot live of itself,
it cannot grow, it cannot reproduce itself. The fragment
containing the nucleus, however, can live of itself, can
grow, can reproduce itself. The nerve cell obeys the same
law; the nucleus governs the nutrition of the whole unit,
not only of the ordinary dendrites and of the cell body
immediately surrounding itself, but of the whole axon,
however long that be. The efferent nerve fibre is depen-
dent for its nutrition on the nucleus of the cell in the
spinal cord or brain, of which it isa prolonged axon. The
afferent nerve fibre is dependent for its nutrition on the
nucleus of the cell in the posterior spinal ganglion (or
analogous structure), of which it is, as we have seen, either
a prolonged and specialized dendrite or a portion of an
axon. If either fibre be cut off from its nucleus, it under-
goes degenerative changes, it dies, never to become alive
again, though it may be, and that even exactly, replaced
by a growth of the stump left behind still in connection
with the nucleus.

This nutrition of the long-extended nerve fibre, be it
called an axon or dendrite, is in many respects a complex
and peculiar business. The fibre along its whole length is
supplied with blood vessels and bathed in lymph; from
this lymph it takes up material, far away from the nucleus,
and by this lymph it is directly nourished; for if this local
nutriment be interfered with, it, the fibre suffers, however
intact may remain its ties with its nucleus. Yet it cannot
avail itself of this nourishment unless those ties be intact.
Something is continually going on between the nucleus
and far-distant parts of the axon which determines the
absorption and utilisation of the material lying to hand
around those distant parts.

Further, in all living units we are able, by careful
observation, to catch sight of visible tokens of the work of

12 FOSTER Physical Basis of Psychical Events.

nutrition. Scattered amidst the living, fully-elaborated
substance of the cell, in. which substance, and in which
substance alone, often apparently structureless, the living
powers seem to reside, we are able to detect granules and
heaps of granules of varying refractive power and varying
reaction towards colouring and other chemical reagents.
These we have reason to think are either food material
about to undergo further elaboration, or waste material
about to be further transformed and ejected. These
appreciable granules whose changes we can see, and many
other things which we cannot see and never shall see, are
tokens of the laboratory; they are signs of the nutritive
work which is going on. }

Now, in the nerve unit, the neurone, while we have like
abundant evidence, like conspicuous laboratory tokens of
nutritive labours in that part of the cell which surrounds
the nucleus, in what has been called the perikaryon, as
well as in the ordinary dendrites, all such tokens are
strikingly scanty if not entirely absent in the axon which
constitutes an efferent fibre, or the modified dendrite which
constitutes an afferent fibre. Indeed, while staining chro-
mophile granules, or groups of granules, small or large,
supply conspicuous features of the perikaryon of every
nerve cell as well as of the dendrites to even a long distance
from the nucleus, the axon, the axis cylinder process of
the cell is distinguished almost as soon as it separates off
from the perikaryon (or from the dendrite in the cases
where it seems to start from a dendrite) by the paucity or
even absence of such granules. In the perikaryon and in
the greater part of the dendrite, the elaborated, active,
truly nervous material is crowded and elbowed by the
grosser material out of which it is making itself, in the
axon as little as possible of this grosser material is left,
the greater part of the axon is sifted, elaborated matter
clogged as little as possible by coarser lower stuff.

Manchester Memoirs. Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 12. 13

It isonly by means of this coarser visible material that
we get ocular evidences of the work of nutrition. Hence
it is in the perikaryon and the clustering dendrites, not in
the long drawn-out axon that we get visible indications of
how the nutrition of the cell is influenced by circum-
stances, by rest or activity, by disease or by toxic
agents. But it is the evidence only which is thus limited,
not the effect. The work of the laboratory of the
perikaryon is carried on for the good not of itself only,
but of the whole unit, for the good not of the part close
round the nucleus only, but of the whole stretch of axon
or dendrite down to its furthest terminal twig. Our
knowledge of the intimate nature of this work of nutrition,
of the building up and clearing away of the exquisitely
organized, that is, molecularly organized, material which
alone does “ nervous work” is of the scantiest ; but it is
at least obvious that the processes of this nutrition are
complex. While in the nutrition of a distant portion of
the axon, part of the work is being done on the spot, part
is being done in some way or other by the perikaryon.
More than this we cannot at present say.

Moreover, not only is the axon dependent on the
perikaryon, but the latter also is dependent on the former.
When an axon is cut across, the portion in connection
with the perikaryon and nucleus does not degenerate and
perish like the peripheral portion. Nevertheless, the
perikaryon, indeed, the whole remaining nerve cell, does
undergo visible structural changes if it be deprived of the
nerve fibre which springs from it. This takes place not
only when an afferent fibre is cut away, in which case the
changes might be supposed to result from inaction, from
the absence of customary impulses passing towards the
nucleus along the fibre, but also when an efferent fibre is
cut away, in which case the cell within the central nervous
system is still subject to the influences which ordinarily

14 FOSTER, Physical Basis of Psychical Events.

play upon it, though it is unable to carry out the behests
of those influences.

Putting these various things together we are led to the
conclusion that quite apart from the grosser changes which
we call a nervous impulse, and which are signalled by an
electric change, by the current of action, there must be
passing to and fro between the several parts of the neurone,
between perikaryon and the farthest point of axon or of
dendrite, influences, actions, currents, call them what you
will, which are signalled by no appreciable electric change,
and of which we have at present no direct signs, no
indications beyond the phenomena on which I have just
dwelt.

The perikaryon seems to be the chief laboratory. It
is here that we find evidence of obvious chemical changes,
and especially of changes connected with activity. But
I venture to think it would be a mistake to infer, as some
seem inclined to do, that these metabolic events of the
perikaryon, because they make themselves visible there
and there only, produce their effects there only. One at
times meets with statements which seem to assume that
the perikaryon, that part of the nerve unit which is often
called the nerve cell as distinguished from the other parts
which are called nerve fibres, is alone the seat of the
setting free of energy. The facts, however, of which I
have been speaking, point to the conclusion that the
good of what is done in the perikaryon is, in some
way or other, shared by the whole unit. It may be
beyond our present knowledge to frame any hypothesis
as to how the chemical labours of the perikaryon are
made available for the distant parts of axon. As I
have just said, we have evidence that the nucleus is
in some way or other in touch with every part of the
axon along its whole length, but we are at present in
ignorance as to the exact nature of that touch ; we do not

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 12. 15

know how it is that the chemical change in the perikaryon
influences that chemical change at the periphery of the axon
which is the basis of the local nutrition of that structure.
Nevertheless it seems clear that the perikaryon does work
for the good of the whole unit and not for the good of
itself alone. This is incidentally shewn in the case of the
spinal ganglion of the lower vertebrates. In these the
cells of the ganglion are bipolar cells. The incoming axon
or axon-like dendrite reaching one pole of the perikaryon
spreads out, losing itself among it, and then is gathered
up at the opposite pole to issue as a veritable axon. Insuch
a case the afferent fibre passes through the substance of
the perikaryon, and we may assume that it passes along
definite paths, along strands of axon-like material im-
bedded in the perikaryonic laboratory mass. Yet we
have no evidence that this perikaryonic mass in any way
influences the impulses which sweep through the ganglion
on their way from the skin to the spinal cord. The peri-
karyonic mass influences the whole stretch of axonic
material which forms the axis cylinder of the nerve fibre
on this side and that side of the ganglion ; but it has no
direct and special local effect on the threads of axonic
material which traverse itself between the two poles of the
cell. It works not for that part of the unit alone but for
the whole unit along its whole length.

This, then, is one fundamental feature of the neurone,
that it is essentially a unit, all the various parts being
strikingly integrated into a whole, so that whatever affects
a part, affects not the part alone but the whole unit.

A second fundamental feature of the nervous system,
to which I now wish to call your attention, is one which
] may introduce under the term of “the differentiation of
units.” The whole nervous system is, as we have seen, a
linkage of units, the linkage being not by real fusion but
by contact, the break of continuity between link and link

16 FosTER, Physical Basis of Psychical Events.

being, at least in the majority of cases, obvious and
distinct.

The nerve fibres which compose the nerves are, as we
have seen, parts of units of two different functions, parts of
afferent or sensory units and parts of efferent or motor units.
Now, when we study nerve fibres by the help of artificial
stimulation, and take the current of action as the token of
the phase of nervous activity of the nervous impulse, we can
find no differentia between the sensory and motor unit.
In both, the nervous impulse travels with equal facility in
either. direction, and with the same features. We can
with ease drive a nervous impulse backwards towards
the periphery along an afferent fibre, and forwards
towards the spinal cord along an efferent. We can,
in certain cases, do the same thing along fibres running
within the central nervous system, and the nervous
impulse thus propagated in what appears to be an inverse
direction, may manifest itself by other effects than the
mere current of action.

Nevertheless, when we deal not with parts of units but
with units linked together, the nervous impulses, nervous
changes, nervous influences, call them what you will, pass
across the linkages in one direction only, and that may
be broadly defined as the direction from the sensory or
afferent unit to the motor or efferent unit. Not only
natural but artificial impulses readily pass from the
afferent axon to the motor units, with which that axon is
linked. They do this irrespective of the direction in
which they are passing along the axon. The afferent
axons of the cells in posterior spinal ganglia pursue a long
course within the spinal cord, constituting definite strands.
As each axon passes along, it gives off collaterals, which,
in many cases, form linkages with motor units. Natural
impulses flowing up the axon from the ganglion, and
coming ultimately from the periphery, may pass into a

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «lit. (1898), No. 12. 17

collateral, and if so, may, under favourable circumstances,
excite to motor activity the motor unit with which
the collateral is linked So also, artificial impulses
passing down the same axon from higher parts of the spinal
cord towards the ganglion and periphery, and flowing
into the same collaterals, may produce just the same
motor effects. Any impulse, however produced and in
whatever direction flowing, can pass from unit to unit
across the linkages in the direction from afferent to effe-
rent. But in no single case has it been found possible to
drive an impulse across a linkage in the contrary direction,
from the efferent to the afferent unit; or, speaking more
generally, from the efferent unit to any of the other units
with which it is linked. This general feature is known
under the name of “Bell’s Law.” Stimulate a motor nerve
fibre as much as you please, you will obtain abundant evi-
dence that the nervous impulses, as indicated by currents
of action, are flowing inwards towards the cell from which
the fibre arises, towards the perikaryon of which the fibre
is the axon. You may be sure that the impulses reach
the nerve cell, but there they stop. You will not find the
slightest evidence of any other units being in any way
influenced. So far, at least, as gross nervous impulses are
concerned, the linkage is a valve admitting passage in one
direction only.

Further, at the linkage there is a change in the nature
and character of the impulse. As I have already said,
all the evidence goes to shew that an impulse as it travels
along a nerve fibre undergoes no material change. So
long as it merely passes along an axon, so long as it is
confined to a unit, it may perhaps be slightly diminished
in intensity, but otherwise is not changed. When, how-
ever, it leaps from one unit to another, a change does
take place. This is seen in the relatively simple action of
unit upon unit, commonly called a reflex action. An

18 FosTER, Physical Basis of Psychical Events.

impulse, or a group or series of impulses travelling along a
sensory fibre, along the axon of a sensory afferent unit,
impinges on the body or dendrites of one or of more than
one motor unit; forthwith there issue along the axons of
these motor units, impulses which are wholly incommen-
surate with the exciting impulse. That exciting impulse
or that series of exciting impulses may be exceedingly
feeble and yet may, under suitable circumstances affecting
the motor unit, give rise not only to numerous but to most
powerful impulses in the motor unit. A reflex action is
not, as the term would seem to imply, the mere reflection —
of a centripetal afferent sensory impulse into a centrifugal
efferent motor impulse. The issuing motor impulses of a
reflex action are the outcome of the special activity of the
motor unit. The characters of that activity are, in the
main, determined by the features, properties, circum-
stances of the motor unit itself; the afferent impulses
do little more than start the activity of the motor
unit, they are to be regarded as of the nature of a
stimulus which awakes the irritability of the motor unit,
somewhat as they themselves were started by an external
stimulus applied to a sensory unit. The manifestations of
the motor unit may, it is true, be not only started, but also
in a measure determined by the characters of the sensory
impulses, a strong, sensory impulse producing effects
different from those of a weak one, and so on; but the real
features of the motor act are determined by the individu-
ality of the motor unit.

Moreover, the effect of the advent of afferent impulses
at the doors of a motor unit may be, not as in an ordinary
reflex act, the development of motor impulses, and so of .
movement, but the very reverse, the arrest of movement ;
the effect may be inhibitory. And this, we have reason
to think, may take place without our being able to detect
any differences in the nature of the afferent impulses

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. ¥2. 19

themselves, in the two cases of movement and of
inhibition. Whether an afferent impulse stirs up a motor
unit to activity or checks an activity already in play, is
determined by the relations of the afferent impulse to the
condition and circumstances of the motor unit, not by any
essential differences in the nature of the afferent impulse
in the two cases.

This is true, at least, so long as we judge of the nature
of a nervous impulse by what we have seen te be the only
objective token in our possession, the electric current of
action.

We must not, however, trust too much to these currents
of action. We certainly are not justified in assuming that
the only phases of a nerve unit are the two phases, the
one of rest, in which no currents of action are developed,
the one of activity, signalled by a current of action. We
have increasing evidence of cases in which a motor unit,
quite apart from its being thrown into an activity mani-
fested as movement, exerts on the peripheral, muscular or
other elements with which it is connected, a more gentle
continued influence, commonly spoken of as ¢onzc actzon.
Now this tonic action, so far as we know, is not accom-
panied by any such electric change as that which marks
the grosser ordinary nervous impulse. It is the effect of
gentler, subtler influences passing along the axon, influences
more nearly allied, of which we spoke a little while back
as concerned in the nutrition of the unit.

Such a tonic influence exerted by a unit may be
modified positively or negatively, may be increased,
augmented, or may be diminished, inhibited, by various
influences ; and in many cases these influences are of the
nature of gross nervous impulses brought to bear on the
unit by other afferent units. In such cases there can be
no question of a mere reflection. The individuality of
the efferent unit is stamped on all its work.

20 ~2.FOSTER, Physical Basis of Psychical Events.

These, then, are the fundamental principles of the
action of the nervous system on which I wish to insist as
a basis for any further considerations. The nervous
system is a congeries of chains of units, linked together in
definite ways. Each unit possesses individual powers and
characters, in part born with it, the outcome of events in
past times, in part developed during its own growth, as
determined by its own individual circumstances. The
several units act the one on the other,and the manifestations
of nervous life are brought out by the integration of the
differentiated activities of the individual units. Each unit
is essentially a unit acting as a whole, with all its parts
accordant. Any change of activity which occurs takes
place not within the unit while the phase of activity is
sweeping along the unit, but at the linkage where unit
joins on to unit. Further, the action of unit on unit is
varied; it may be the inducement of that grosser kind of
activity, marked by an electric current of action which we
call a nervous impulse, it may be something else; it may
be one of the many things of which we possess no clear
objective token, such as is supplied by the electric change,
and about which, therefore, we are as yet greatly in the
dark.

Let me now turn to apply these general principles to
the problem of visual sensations.

Put in its simplest form, what takes place in the
nervous mechanism of vision is somewhat as follows.

Light falling on a cone (or rod, but for simplicity’s sake
we may omit the double character of the initial elements)
sets up in this changes which are propagated along
the cone fibres. The cone and cone fibre are the respective -
parts of an epithelial nervous unit or neurone, the cone
fibre being the axon. By the terminals of the axonic
cone fibre this first unit is linked on to a second unit, the

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. 12, = 21

“bipolar cell.” (I am purposely omitting various com-
plications existing in the retina, as not bearing directly
on my theme.) This, again, by the terminals of its axon
is linked on to a “ganglionic cell,’ whose axon is a fibre
first of the optic nerve and then of the optic tract. This
constitutes the first or retinal portion of the mechanism.

Now, we can easily obtain evidence that when the
retina is stimulated, either naturally by light or artificially
by other means, currents of action are developed in the
optic fibres. We may take these currents as the objective
tokens of what we have called nervous impulses passing
along those fibres. Consequent upon the development of
these nervous impulses in the optic fibres, visual sensations
are developed if the remaining cerebral portion of the
mechanism be intact; the nervous impulses in the optic
fibres give rise in the cerebral mechanism to visual sen-
sations.

So far as the objective token of the electric current
is concerned, we can find no difference between these
optic impulses, these nervous impulses along the optic
fibres, and the nervous impulses of an ordinary nerve.

And yet they are different. If we stimulate artificially
an ordinary nerve fibre at any part of its course, we can
produce effects which, within certain limits, are identical
with the effects of natural stimulation. If we artificially
stimulate a motor nerve, we can almost if not quite com-
pletely reproduce natural effects, movement and the like.
If we stimulate a sensory nerve, wecanat least reproduce
the natural effect of pain, and many other natural effects.
If, on the other hand, we stimulate artificially the optic
nerve at any part of its course, we do not (according to
the most trustworthy observations, though all observers
are not agreed) give rise to visual sensations ; so far as
can be ascertained we do not produce any psychical effect
whatever. If the retina be stimulated, whether the stimulus

22 Foster, Physical Basis of Psychical Events.

be the natural one of light or an artificial one, such as
pressure, an electric current, a chemical agent and the like,
we do get psychical effects, we do produce visual sensations,
and the visual sensations resulting from an artificial stimu-
lation are, in their essential features, identical with those
resulting from natural stimulation. But ifthe optic fibres be
stimulated directly, no psychical effect is produced, neither
sensations of light, nor sensations of pain, nor sensations
of any kind. We infer that the natural nervous impulses
which sweep along the optic fibres when the retina is
stimulated are of a different nature from those which sweep
along it when it is directly stimulated by artificial means,
though both give the same token of currents of action.
The former are differentiated impulses, and it is differ-
entiated impulses alone which can so act upon the central
cerebral portion of the visual mechanism as to give rise
to psychical effects.

I may here remark in passing that a similar arrange-
ment probably obtains in regard to the psychical effects
of sensation, of touch proper, and of temperature, as
developed in ordinary sensory cutaneous nerves ; artificial
stimulation will produce pain, but not the specific tactile
or temperature sensation. The case, however, is not so
clear here as it appears to be in vision, and) I ely,
mention it incidentally.

To return to visual matters. The optic impulses, as
they travel along the optic nerve, have already become
differentiated. Though we possess no experimental
evidence on the matter, we may infer that the differentia-
tion is effected by successive steps at the several linkages.
We do not know the details of the changes which take -
place in the cone cell, in the primary visual unit when
light falls upon it ; somehow or other the disturbances of
the ether give rise to material changes, changes which we
may probably characterise as nervous, travelling along

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 12. 23

the cone fibre. At the linkage of the cone fibre with the
bipolar cell there takes place, we may infer, the first
differentiation. We may assume that whatever be the
exact nature of the changes which take place in the
bipolar cell, these are different from those taking place in
the cone cell. At the linkage of the bipolar cell with the
ganglionic cell, a second differentiation takes place.
Through the two linkages, in accordance with the general
principles on which, a little while back, I dwelt so long,
the simpler events started in the cone cell give rise to the
subtler events which travel onwards from the ganglion
cell along its axon, the optic fibre.

The differentiation thus begun in the retinal portion
of the mechanism is continued in the central cerebral
portion. The optic fibre, the axon of the ganglion cell,
runs a course the length of which is immense compared
with that of the axon of the bipolar cell. But that is
simply due to mechanical morphological causes ; the optic
nerve and tract are long in order to place the retina in a
suitable position for being affected by light. We have no
reason whatever for thinking that visual impulses, the
differentiated nervous impulses or nervous changes which
sweep along the optic fibre are in any way essentially
changed from the time they leave the perikaryon of the
retinal ganglionic cell until they reach their furthest
terminals. Each optic fibre ends by linking itself with some
cell, some nerve unit in one or other of the three nervous
masses of which I spoke at the beginning, in the corpus
quadrigeminum, in the corpus geniculatum, or in the
pulvinar of the optic thalamus. Here again, a further
differentiation, we may assume, takes place. Confining our-
selves, for simplicity’s sake, to one of the three bodies, say
the corpus geniculatum, we find that the terminal of the
optic fibre links itself to a cell or, rather, to more than one
cell. The axon ofthat cell (or of each of those cells) either

24 FosTER, Physical Basis of Psychical Events.

proceeds direct as one of the so-called ‘ optic radiations’ to
the cortex of the occipital lobe, or, what appears to be the
more ordinary, if not the only course, links itself to another
unit, another nerve cell, also lying within the corpus geni-
culatum, it being the axon of this second cell which is |
prolonged as a fibre of the optic radiations. Possibly
even still another unit may be intercalated in the chain,
within the corpus geniculatum.

In any case, a differentiation, probably a large and
yet subtle one, takes place in this corpus geniculatum, and
the nervous impulses or nervous changes which are
produced along the optic radiations are of a very different
nature from those which travelled along the fibres of the
optic nerve and tract.

The fibres of the optic radiations having reached the
cortex in the occipital region of the brain (we may leave
on one side for the present the topographical limitations
of the region), link themselves to cells in that cortex, and,
so far as mere visual sensations are concerned, the final
differentiation takes place here. For, as I said at the
beginning of this lecture, the integrity of the occipital
cortex, and this part alone of the cortex, is essential for
the development of visual sensations. Remove, destroy,
or injure this part of the cortex, and this part only of the
cortex, indeed, this part only of the whole nervous system,
and blindness, or imperfect vision, is the result. Remove,
destroy, or injure any other part of the nervous system,
save and except this occipital cortex, and the nervous
visual mechanism of which it forms the head, the develop-
ment of psychical visual sensations, if affected at all, is
affected in an indirect manner only. |

The visual mechanism is a chain of nervous units
beginning with the cone (or rod) and ending in the
occipital cortex. The psychical event which we call a
visual sensation is the culmination of a series of differen-

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 12. 25

tiations which the simpler events begun in the cone
undergo as they pass through the successive links of the
chain.

What can be said about the several differentiations ?
Some writers, influenced by the experience that in
monkeys and some other animals removal of the occipital
cortex immediately produces total blindness, the absence
of all visual sensations, seem from their writings to hold
the view that the psychical feature is introduced into the
whole business at the cortex, and at the cortex alone.
Such writers use expressions which seem to imply that
all the events which take place in the mechanism, in the
retina, optic nerve and lower bodies are purely physical
changes, unaccompanied by any psychical development,
and that it is only when these purely nervous changes
reach the cortex that they suddenly put on psychical
characters, as if up to the cortex what was going on was
mere invisible heat which in the cortex suddenly burst out
into visible flame.

But if we turn to lower animals, such as rabbits, birds,
and the like, we find that careful observers have found
what appears to be unassailable evidence that these animals
are influenced in a remarkable and complex manner by
retinal impressions, even after the occipital cortex, and
indeed the whole of both cerebral hemispheres have been
removed. In such animals, while in this condition, some-
thing takes place in the cerebral structures still left in the
corpora quadrigemina or optic lobes, for instance, which
influences and guides the movements of these animals
in a manner strikingly analogous to the guidance of
movements by visual sensations. So strong is the
analogy that the oxus probandi must be considered as
resting on those who maintain that the events taking
place in the visual mechanism in this condition are of a
wholly different character from those taking place when
the mechanism is entire.

26 FostTER, Physical Basis of Psychical Events.

Moreover, when we come to inquire why, in the monkey
and in ourselves, injury to or disease of the occipital
cortex abolishes or interferes with visual sensations, we
have to bear in mind the following important facts.
Removal or disease of the occipital cortex in such cases
has effects which are not confined to the cortex; the lower
bodies, the corpus geniculatum, the pulvinar and, in part,
the corpus quadrigeminum are secondarily affected; their
nutrition and life is interfered with, they undergo degene-
ration. The life of the nerve cell in the corpus genicu-
Jatum, whose axon stretches away to end in the occipital
cortex, is in some way dependent on the integrity of the
termination of that axon in the cortex; cut away that
termination and the whole unit suffers. In such cases the
removal of the cortex means more than mere absence of the
cortex, it means interference with the rest of the mechan-
ism. The absence of visual sensations in these circum-
stances cannot be attributed to mere absence of cortex; it
may be in part due to changes in the lower part of the
mechanism—changes which early manifest themselves by
functional deficiencies, and later on by visible structural
alterations. Indeed, the difference between the effects of
removing the cortex in the monkey and those of the same
operation in the rabbit or bird may be simply an expres-_
sion cf the much closer dependence on each other of the
several parts of the mechanism in the one case than in the
other, the dependence being itself the outcome of a higher
psychical development. |

So close, indeed, is this dependence of the lower visual
body on the cortex, so delicate the ties which bind them
together, as to justify the doubt whether the nervous events
which take place in this part of the visual mechanism are
to be considered as of the same order as the more ordinary
nervous impulses known to us by our studies on ordinary
nerves. Some time back I gave a warning, that such an

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. liz. (1898), No. 12. 27

ordinary nervous impulse must not be considered as the
only kind of event even in an ordinary nerve. That warn-
ing may be emphasized when we are dealing with the
structures of which I am now speaking. We may perhaps
go so far as to say that we probably err in supposing that
a visual sensation is the result of a nervous impulse, a
something with a definite length and amplitude of wave,
sweeping up from the corpus geniculatum to the occipital
cortex, leaving the one to pass to the other, and only
producing its effect when it reaches its goal. It is more
probable that the two structures, the cortex and the
lower body, in some way work together, and that a visual
sensation of a complete character is an expression not of
the cortex being affected by something merely passing to
it from the lower body, but of something passing to and
fro between the two. If it be permitted to adopt a
popular phraseology, we may say that the seat of visual
sensation is not in the cortex alone, but in the cortex
and the lower bodies.

Before, however, we consider this matter any further,
let me turn to the cortex itself, to the occipital cortex. (1
will continue to use the general term “occipital cortex,”
because, in the first place, the topographical limits of the
particularareaof the wholeoccipitalregion which is specially
concerned in vision has not,as yet, been exactly determined,
and,in the second place,such topographical exactitude isnot
necessary for the theme which I have in hand.) The domi-
nant structural feature of the whole cerebral cortex is the
multitude of linkages between dendrites and the terminal
branchings of axons. And this is, perhaps, especially true
of the occipital cortex. Cells of different form send out
in various directions much-branched, far-reaching den-
drites, and intertwining with the apparently inextricable
tangle thus constituted run a multitude of branching axons,
partly belonging to cells lying in the cortex itself, partly

28 FostTER, Physzcal Baszs of Psychical Events.

coming up into the cortex from the white matter below
and belonging to cells placed, it may be, in distant
parts. In the occipital cortex, the axons Sof Veells mim
the corpus geniculatum and its fellows, axons consti-
tuting the optic radiations, pass into this tangle and link
themselves with the cortical cells. These cells, as I
have said, are of different forms. Conspicuous among
them, and especially numerous in the occipital region,
are the “pyramidal cells,’ so-called from their shape,
that of a pyramid sending out basal dendrites from the
angles at the base and an extended apical dendrite
from its apex. So crowded and conspicuous in the
occipital cortex are these pyramidal cells, especially
of the smaller variety, that we may probably, without
great error, assume that these are specially concerned in
vision, though we are not justified in excluding from the
same labours the various other kinds of cells also present,
into the detailed features of which I need not go.

We may assume, I say, that these pyramidal cells are
concerned in vision. Whatever be the exact nature of the
events taking place in the axons of the optic radiations,
these reaching the terminal divisions of those axons in the
cortex, affect in some way the dendrites of the cells with
which those divisions are linked. We may say pro-
visionally, that through the axons of the optic radiations
these pyramidal cells are thrown into activity.

What can we say about that activity ? Let me first of
all insist on the fact that the axons of these cells all lead
away from the part of the cortex in which the cells lie to
some other part of the nervous system. Ifthe apparently
somewhat common view to which I alluded a little while
back were correct, if the process of vision were such, that
apsychical, simply neural events propagated along the
lower tracts of the mechanism suddenly culminated in the
cortex into psychical visual sensations, we should expect

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 12. 29

to find in the occipital cortex cells possessing characters
which we might regard as conspicuously receptive. If
we examine the nature of the terminal organs in which
axons are definitely known to end, on which they work,
on which they spend their neural energies, producing
something unlike their own actions, we find these to
be either muscular fibres or epithelial glandular cells or
analogous elements. If there were between the neural
events of the axon in the optic radiations and the psy-
chical labours of the cortical cell some such a difference as
exists between the changes which constitute the nervous
impulses of a spinal efferent nerve fibre and the changes
which constitute contraction of a muscular fibre, or the
secreting activity of a gland cell, and the view of which I
am speaking seems to indicate such a difference, then, I
Say, we should expect to find in the occipital cortex, cells
whose bodies, even if not of large dimensions, at all
events possessed characters indicating that they were
the seats of important specific activities.

As a matter of fact, we find no such cells, no cells
whose bodies even suggest such specific characters. Indeed,
here, as elsewhere throughout the nervous system, the
cell body, the nucleus with its perikaryon exists, as I
insisted upon in the earlier general discussion, for the
good of the axon, and its characters seem to be deter-
mined by the work which the axon has to do. In
illustration of this I might quote the fact that large
conspicuous pyramidal cells, though scanty in number,
are found in the occipital cortex. These, however, are
not receptive cells, the workshops of psychical sensations ;
they are motor cells, or, more exactly, they are cells whose
axons pass directly to motor mechanisms, and _ their
relatively large size is a feature which seems common to, at
least, most distinctly motor cells, and is probably connected
with the fact that the axons of these are usually of con-

30 Foster, Physzcal Basts.of Psychical Events.

siderable length. The most common cell on the other
hand in the occipital cortex, the one which we may
assume is concerned in thedevelopment of visual sensations,
is a small or moderate sized pyramidal cell.

Let me not be misunderstood here. I am not arguing
against the absolute specific character of the cortical cell.
On the contrary, as I ‘insisted a little while back, the
essential note of the whole nervous system is that in the
chain of linked units, each unit is marked by specific
features, by features unlike those of its predecessor or of its
successor. What I am arguing against is the view that in the
visual chain such specific characters are to be found alone
in the cortical link, or are alone conspicuous in this. And
I am perhaps arguing still more against the view that the
cortical cell is, as it were, in any sense a terminal, even a
temporary terminal link, where alone important psychical
labours are commenced, all the preceding links being
engaged in nothing more than obscure neural work.

Indeed, this cortical cell is but one link “in asehamn
with other links to follow. As I was saying, the axons,
the essential part of all these occipital pyramidal cells
(and of others not pyramidal), lead away from the occipital
cortex to elsewhere. Their goal is threefold.

In the first place, some lead to cerebral structures
lying below the cerebral hemispheres, to the corpus quadri-
geminum and other bodies. Among these are the axons
of the large motor cells of which I have just spoken ; and,
indeed, all the axons taking this course are probably linked,
by a course more or less short, with motor mechanisms,
notably with the mechanisms for movements of the eyes,
but probably also with others. Some few, we have reason
to think, are the instruments for carrying out, through
efferent action, changes in the retina, by which the receptive
cones, and possibly other structures, are tuned to their
work, but concerning this our knowledge is imperfect.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 12. 31

In the second place, others lead away to the cortex
of the opposite hemisphere, forming part of that great band
of fibres, the corpus callosum, which ties together the two
halves of the brain. How far the “callosal fibres” are
concerned in bringing it about that, while having two
brains we have only one mind, or that, in vision in parti-
cular, our daily life makes us no sign of the fact that
of the fibres coming from the retina half are gathered up
into one hemisphere and the other half into the other, is a
matter on which I must not dwell here.

In the third place, others, and those by far the most
numerous, lead to other parts of the cortex of the same
side. Such axons, known by the not very satisfactory
name of “association fibres,” link themselves by their ter-
minals or collaterals with cells in some part of the cortex
other than the occipital, with cells having functions other
than those of the occipital cells. Accepting the general
principles on which I dwelt so long, we may infer that
whatever be the exact nature of the events which take
place in such an “association fibre” from the occipital
cortex, as the result of other and different events reaching
the cell of which it is the axon, those events lead to events
again different in the axon of the cell on which that
association fibre impinges. I purposely say events in the
axon, rather than events in the cell, meaning by cell the cell
body; for those association cells are no more terminal
cells than are the occipital cells; in the one and in the
other the cell body, with its nucleus, and the den-
drites are only means for securing the occurrence of
events sweeping along the axon. Indeed, within the
central nervous system there are no terminal cells, no
terminal units at all. As I have now repeatedly said,
the whole nervous system is a congeries of chains, some
long, some short. In each chain, whether long or short,
there is one kind of beginning, a sensory cell, generally a

32 FosTER, Physical Basis of Psychical Events.

modified epithelial cell, receptive of the external influence,
the stimulus, and one kind of end, a muscular fibre, or a
gland cell, or some analogous structure, something
outside the nervous system itself, on which the terminals
of the final axon play. Every cell within the whole nervous
system, be it in the spinal cord or lower cerebral structures,
be it in the cerebral cortex is, I repeat, essentially one link
in the chain which begins in a sensory receptive cell, and
ends in a motor or analogous effective cell. The funda-
mental action of the nervous system, whether the links be
many or few, is government of the effective cell by the
receptive cell ; the most common mode of government is an
activity of the effective cell in response to changes in the
sensory cell. Inthe simplest form, where the chain consists
of one link only, of one nerve cell intercalated between the
receptive and the effective cells, where the activities of the
whole mechanism are limited to mere degrees of activity of
the nerve cell and to the specific activities of its two agents,
the response of the effective cell to changes in the receptive
cell is simple and direct. As link is added to link, each new
link, with its differential characters, enlarges the potenti-
alities of the whole mechanism, rendering the dependence
of the effective on the receptive cell more and more indirect.
In the simple mechanism, response of the effective cell to
events in the receptive cell is almost imperative, and is
largely shaped by those events. In the complex mechanism,
not only the character of the response, but also when it comes
or whether it comes at all, is determined mainly by what
takes place in the chain of links. In the one case, the event
is flashed straight across the one link ; in the other, it is
reflected and refracted among a multitude of links, until
often it seems to be lost in the nervous system itself.

To this, the visual nervous chain is no exception. The
primary fundamental use of the chain is to govern
effective units, which are, in the main, muscular units.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlzz. (1898), No. 12. = 33

Trace out the varied chain, and whether you follow the
short loops or the long ones you will come back to a
muscle or some analogous effective unit. Run along the
optic fibre and tract to the corpus quadrigeminum, a short
loop brings you back to ocular and other muscles (there
may be a still shorter loop within the retina itself). Pass
upward to the occipital cortex, a longer loop brings you
back once more. Pass on from the occipital cortex along
the association fibres first to one and then to another part
of the cortex, loops, longer it is true, but still loops bring
you back to muscle. During all this, at each link of the
chain, the differentiation pertaining to each unit brings
about a change in the nature of the events taking place.
At the beginning we call the events simply neural. Later
on we recognize them as psychical. As we have seen, we
seem to have clear reason to conclude that in the occipital
units the threshold of the psychical has been reached,
but we have also seen reasons to think that it has not
been reached at one jump, but rather by successive
differentiations. We may infer that in the so called
“associations ” loops, further successive psychical differen-
tiation is effected. And, indeed, positive evidence is being
gathered that this is the case.

I must not enter fully into this part of my subject,
since I have other points to dwell on; I must content
myself with one example.

One of the muscular mechanisms with which the visual,
nervous chain is connected is that of speech. When a
person in reading speaks the word which he sees before him,
a nervous machinery of many links intervenes between
the image of the word thrown on the retina, and the mus-
cular contractions which give rise to the sound of the
spoken word. That machinery may be damaged by injury
or disease in many ways, the chain may be broken in one or

* other of the many links. It may be broken in the following

34 Foster, Physzcal Basis of Psychical Events.

way. The person may have no mere vocal difficulty
whatever ; the machinery for speech as speech, and this
we have reason to think is made up of nerve units lying in
the frontal region of the brain in one of the so-called frontal
convolutions, may be intact. On the other hand, his mere
visual sensations may be also intact: there may be every
evidence that he “sees” everything perfectly, including the
printed word. He is in this condition ; he can pronounce
the word, he can see the word, but he cannot pronounce
the word as the result of seeing it. He can pronounce
the word perfectly when the motive for speaking it is
hearing it, or some other motive than the seeing it.
Between the seeing and the speaking some link is snapped.
I bring this “word-blindness,” as it is called, to your notice
because, in respect to it, we have evidence from cases of
disease that the nervous link which is snapped lies in the
cerebral cortex, not in the occipital area concerned in the
development of visual sensations, not in the frontal convo-
lution where the nervous processes which issue in the vocal
utterance are marshalled, but in a limited spot of the
cortex situate between the two, in what is called the angular
gyrus. When this is damaged, word-blindness results, and
the more the damage is limited to this spot, the more
clearly the psychical defect appears as mere word-blindness.
As we have seen, the occipital cortex is concerned in
visual sensations. I might add that most probably it, too,
is mainly concerned in visual perceptions. Not only are the
crude sensations excited by the arrangements of black and
white of the component letters developed by means of it
in the manner which I have attempted to indicate, but by
means of it also, or of some part of it most probably (I am
speaking now of a matter of which our knowledge is very
vague), in some way or other takes place the further
psychical elaboration of the constituent sensations into the
apperception of the word as a whole. But in order to

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 12. 35

speak the word thus perceived some further psychical act
is necessary ; and the neural events which form the basis
of this seem to be carried out by the “association ” fibres
which pass from the visual area of the occipital cortex to
the other units in the area in the angular gyrus, and by
those other units. We have here, then, an instance of at
least two stages of psychical differentiation. And I might
quote other instances.

I am aware that what I have just said is psychologi-
cally vague and imperfect. I do not pretend that it is
anything more. But I think I may venture to say that,
imperfect as it is, it seems to open up the possibility of our
gaining, perhaps at no distant date, clearer knowledge. If
I have carried you with me in my earlier arguments, we
have gained this position, that in the visual neural chain
from the retina to the occipital cortex, through the action
of unit on unit, neural events in some way or other give
rise to visual sensations. Somewhere in this chain the
psychical threshold is distinctly passed;.the neural
event, the neural ‘‘thing” gives rise to, is accompanied by,
manifests itself through conscious sensation. I am pur-
posely vague in the ase of words to denote the bond
between the two. Nevertheless, the psychical event, so far
as we can see, is commensurate in magnitude with the
neural event, follows it as effect follows cause. But if
particular structures, particular units are thus specially
associated with the simple elements of psychical life,
namely with sensations, it is not too much to conclude
that the mere complex psychical factors are similarly
associated with particular structures, and that in some
such way as the initial purely physical effect of light on
the front part of the cone, by means of successive
differentiations of that initial effect, through a chain of
units gives rise to the undeniably psychical effect, so by
successive differentiations through complex chains of

36 FOSTER, Physical Basis of Psychical Events.

units, the simple sensation gives rise to “higher” psychical
life. What is wanted is a careful analysis (as yet only
just begun) of the complex tangle of neural units which
make up the brain, an analysis at once physiological and
anatomical. And what perhaps is wanted even more is
that this objective analysis should be guided and, if need
be, corrected by an adequate subjective analysis on the
purely psychological side, for hitherto these have not been
found too often in company. The instance of word-blind-
ness on which I just now dwelt, and I might bring forward
others, gives us, I say, great hope for the fruitfulness of
future inquiry.

I must now turn to another aspect of my subject.
Leaving the higher psychical development, and returning
to the general characters of simple sensation, I will ask
your attention to the influence of various circumstances
and conditions on the production of psychical effects.

I have spoken of the visual mechanism as a bundle of
chains of units. But it must not be inferred from this
that such chain in the optic bundle is wholly separate
from its neighbours. It is not the case that one cone
unit is linked to one bipolar unit only in the retina, this
to one ganglion unit only, this to one unit only in the
corpus geniculatum, and this to one unit only in the
cortex; so that in the cortex each cone’ (or fod)iMs
represented by one unit only, apart from and distinct from
neighbouring units. On the contrary, there is a mingling
at the very outset ; each cone fibre is linked to and can
influence more than one bipolar unit. The mingling is
repeated at each successive link, and is especially
prominent in the corpus geniculatum and its allies. Now,
when two parts of the retina are stimulated by light at
the same time, the condition that two distinct sensations
are produced is that the two points should be separated

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 12. = 37

by a distance at least not less than the distance between
two cones. Had the visual mechanism been such that
each chain of units, with acone at one end anda receptive
cortical cell at the other, was quite separate from its
neighbours an anatomical explanation of separate sensa-
tions might have seemed possible. But such an explana-
tion, quite apart from all other objections, is rendered
impossible by the mingling just spoken of. Obviously,
even supposing that a single cone can be stimulated
alone, all its neighbours remaining at rest, the effect will
become a diffuse one as it is propagated along the mecha-
nism; and the effects of the simultaneous stimulation of
two cones, even at some distance apart, will overlap. I will
not attempt to discuss what are the conditions which really
determine that two sensations shall be distinct. I have
brought these matters forward because they seem to
further illustrate the incorrectness of the view, that a sen-
sation is brought about by nervous impulses reaching
some cortical station, and there becoming suddenly trans-
formed, as if there were a sort of mosaic of sensations
corresponding to the retinal mosaic. It would seem pro-
bable that, in the development of any visual sensation,
several elements, several units for example of the corpus
geniculatum are concerned. Further, the phenomena of
simultaneous contact shew that all those elements are not
concerned in the same way; in some, effects are produced
which appear the very opposite to those produced in
others. And, indeed, there seem some reasons for
believing that no one spot of the retina can be affected by
light, without the whole mechanism, without the elernents
connected with the whole retina, being also affected in
some way or other at the same time.

Assuming the truth of the view which I put before you
at an early part of the lecture, that differentiation of action
takes place not in any part of a unit rather than in any

38 FOSTER, Physical Basis of Psychical Events.

other but at the linkage of unit with unit, each unit acting
as an individual differentiated whole, the circumstances
attending linkage deserve attention. As we have seen,
the mode of linkage, which, if not universal, is at least
usual, is that the terminals of an axon (ofthe stem or of a
collateral) link with the dendrites or perikaryon of another
unit, so that the axon of one unit works on the axon of
another unit, not directly, but through the means of the
dendrites or perikaryon, the direction of activity being
centrifugal away from the nucleus along the axon.. We
have no evidence of the terminals of one axon linking on
to the terminals of another axon so as to suggest that an
axon can work directly on an axon, or start an action
which proceeds centripetally towards the nucleus. This
however is perhaps not a matter of vital importance. We
came to the conclusion some time back that the unit acts
as a whole, that the axon does not act apart from the rest
of the unit, and that dendrite and perikaryon act for and
through the axon. Hence we may further conclude that, |
to whatever part of one unit another be linked, the effect,
which is an activity of the axon, is in the main the same.
We have further seen that a linkage is in the vast
majority of cases, if not universally, a thing of contact not
of fusion; that is to say there exists an obvious gap
between the nervous material of the one unit and
that of the other .And we may conclude ‘thatyjilre
existence of this gap is one of the conditions deter-
mining the differentiation of action which takes place
or begins at the linkage. Such a palpable gap is not
essential to the occurrence of differentiation. That
is the result of the individuality of each of the two linked -
units, is the outcome of the fact that the powers of the one
unit are not identical with those of the other. Even in
the case where one unit seems to fuse wholly with the
other, where the best optical analysis can detect no sepa-

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 12. 39

ration between the material of the two, general con-
siderations would lead us to conclude that a line of
demarcation does exist on the one side of which the
molecules belong to the one unit and obey the one nucleus,
and on the other side belong to the other unit and obey
the other nucleus. In no tissue, whether animal or vege-
table, is an instance known of a common border-land
between two cells, belonging to both cells and governed
by the nuclei of the two. Hence we may infer that apparent
structural fusion does not imply functional fusion, that the
molecules on one side of the functional line of demar-
cation behave or may behave differently from those on the
other side. We may still infer, however, that a palpable
structural gap, though not essential to the mere occurrence
of differentiation, must in some way determine the extent
or character of the differentiation. Knowing, as we do,
so little of the actual nature of the molecular changes
which underlie neural events, our ideas as to how such an
obvious gap affects the transference of events from one
unit to another must necessarily be vague and obscure ;
but we cannot do otherwise than suppose that the trans-
ference is different when it proceeds along a tract of
nervous material, continuous as mere nervous material
though changing in character where the tract leaves one
unit to join the other, from what it is when it has in some
way or other to pass across a bridge composed of material
not nervous at all. As we have seen, the one objective
token of a nervous impulse is an electric change, and though
nervous events cannot be identified with ordinary electric
events as at present known, yet the similarity of nervous
events to electric events is greater than their similarity to
any other physical events ; and we may perhaps, leaning
on this similarity, illustrate the possible influence of such
a bridge of non-nervous material in the course of a nervous
tract by saying, that the difference which it introduces is

4O FosTER, Physical Basis of Psychical Events.

analogous to that between electric induction and con-
duction. But this, it must be remembered, is nothing
more than a vague illustration.

I have alluded to this bridge because, recently, great
importance has been attached to the possibility of the
transference of one unit to another being directly and
boldly modified through the bridge being made longer or
shorter by the physiological processes of contraction and
relaxation of the nervous material. In the case of many
cells, notably the pyramidal cells of the cortex, the den-
drites are furnished with minute, rod-like appendages,
sometimes spoken of as “thorns.” Now, making every
allowance for changes in appearance being simply
the result of differences in the mode of preparation of
microscopical specimens (and the technique of the micros-
copical study of nervous structures is undoubtedly com-
plex and uncertain), it seems to be established that these
minute appendages while at one time conspicuous, may
be at other times inconspicuous, as if they had been with-
drawn or retracted. And it is maintained that the retracted
condition may be brought about by influences, generally
rough and powerful ones, such as electric shocks or poisons
brought to bear on the nervous system, or even on the
organism as a whole. The retraction of such an
appendage will increase the length of the bridge spoken
of above, or will establish a bridge where no obvious one
existed before, and hence may be supposed largely to
modify, or even to abolish altogether the transference
of neural events from one unit to another. And, indeed,
some writers have boldly used this phenomenon as a
mechanical explanation of neural, and so, of psychical
events. It has been suggested, for instance, that, as the ,
result of fatigue, these appendages to the dendrites of a
cortical cell are retracted after prolonged activity of the
cell, that the transference of neural changes from the

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 12, 41

- linked axon is thereby interrupted, and the activity of the
cell suspended, and that this is the basis of sleep.

I am free to confess that, so far as I know, no adequate
proof has, as yet, been offered, that under ordinary, what
we may call natural, influences any such retraction does
take place. Moreover, while it is true that the power to
change its form, as seen in amceboid movement and in
muscular contraction and relaxation, seems a fundamental
attribute of undifferentiated living matter or protoplasm, as
it is sometimes called, it is also true that the differentiation
of protoplasm means the exaltation of certain powers at
the expense of others ; and in that extreme differentiation
which protoplasm undergoes in being fashioned into
nervous material, especially into the nervous material
whose activity is manifested by psychical events, we
should have expected that the law of economy would have
extinguished, even to almost the last remnant, the
lower function of mere movement. Indeed, it seems
probable that the diminution or suspense of neural
changes, especially those manifesting themselves in
psychical events, would be achieved by diminishing the
molecular changes, to carry on which the material is so
exquisitely fashioned, rather than still burdening that
material with the grosser labour involved in a change of
form. We should expect a cessation of activity in a
unit to be brought about by dulness of the appendage
to a dendrite towards the influences exerted by the
terminal of an axon, a dulness which is a mere phase
of its normal molecular processes, rather than by bodily
retraction, which must call into play molecular processes
of a wholly different nature.

Indeed, this hypothesis of gross change of form as an
explanation of psychical events may be objected to on
the very ground that it leads us away from a line of
thought which is probably far more fruitful, namely, that

42 FOSTER, Physical Baszts of Psychical Events.

of the delicately varied and exquisitely cared for nutrition
of the nervous unit, in view of the molecular labours,
other than those issuing in change of form, which it has
to carryout 0 j Wo -

I have just urged that the fine differentiation of
nervous material entails the suppression of the funda-
mental primeval power of change of form. I may now
add that the differentiation entails the loss of another
fundamental property, that of reproduction. While in
other tissues, notably in the skin and muscles, old units,
old cells worn out by use or by divers influences are
replaced by new ones, a fact broadly but incorrectly ex-
pressed in the popular statement that the whole body is
renewed every seven years, the evidence which we possess
goes to show that such a regeneration, that the appearance
of new units by birth from old ones, comes to an end at
an early period of life in the case of the nervous system.
Take away a piece of skin, of bone, or of connective
tissue, new stuff of the same kind makes good the loss ;
but a piece of brain once lost is lost for ever; the cells,
the units which made it up, are never replaced. Examine
almost any tissue of the body other than that of the
nervous system, at almost any period of life, and you will
find evidence in the changes going on in the nuclei that
old cells are giving birth to new ones. Examine in the
same way the nervous system for like signs, and after a
certain date, which we may probably fix as that of very
early youth, you will find none. Ata very early. date the
installation of nervous units is completed ; after that no
new units make their appearance. So far as the number
of units is concerned, the machinery is a finished one.
All the growth, all the increase of complexity, hence-
forward possible, is accomplished not by the introduction
of new units, but by the extension and development of
those already installed.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 12. 43

This, at first sight, seems inconsistent with the broad
experience that the work of the nervous system, above
that of all other parts of the body, becomes richer and
fuller as life advances. But it is only inconsistent with
the view that in the course of life there come to the indi-
vidual new powers, the outcome of new units of machinery.
It is not inconsistent with the view that new powers are
only the development of the potentialities of old units.
And, indeed, the failure to produce new units brings as a
recompense favourable conditions for the development of
such potentialities. In the nerve unit, the nerve cell, the,
to us, occult energies—which in another tissue lead to the
cell sacrificing itself in order to produce its kind—are
selfishly limited to the increase of its own mass and powers.
Barred from reproduction, the nerve-cell is conspicuous,
on the one hand, for its power to extend parts of its body
for enormous distances from its central nucleus, and to
repair any parts of itself which may be damaged or injured;
and, on the other hand, for the facility with which it adapts
its growth to the circumstances of its life.

Thus, the axon of a cell in the lumbar cord, or the
fibre, call it axon or dendrite, belonging to a cell in the
ganglion of the root of a lumbar nerve, may stretch away
from the nucleus by which its life is governed right down
to the toes, and, moreover, if divided close to the nucleus
so that the whole length dies away, will in a very short
time be renewed from the nucleus outwards to its very
end. Take away the nucleus and perikaryon, no new
nucleus, no new cell ever replaces the lost; but leave
the nucleus, and a great long axon, many times exceeding
the perikaryon in bulk, may be renewed again and again.

So, again, while, as I have said, we have no evidence
that after a certain date any new nerve cell ever makes
its appearance, we have abundant evidence that a nerve
cell, simple in form at its installation in early life, may

44 FOSTER, Physical Basis of Psychical Events.

grow in course of time into a very complex figure, and,
moreover, that the extent and character of its growth is
to a large extent determined by the demands for action
made upon the cell by the incidents of life. In all the
tissues of the body we may trace the influence of exercise
and the stimulating effect of the demand for action ; but
these are seen in their highest form in nervous tissue and
most conspicuously perhaps in the nerve cells of the
cerebral cortex. The nutrition of every tissue of the body
is determined by two factors, by the quantity and quality
of the blood supply and by the activity of the tissue itself.
But whereas in most tissues the former is the predom-
inating factor, in nervous tissue and especially in the
cortical cells, it is the latter which rules. As we have
incidentally seen, the nerve unit, so soon as it is cut off
from the play of its fellows upon it, begins to droop, how-
ever rich and full the blood stream which reaches it; it
droops the sooner and the more, the quicker was its life
before. The potentialites of the unit may have their
source in the blood supply which bathes it, but its
actualities are determined by the calls made upon it.
This, in fact, is the physical basis of education. The
material of the nerve cell renouncing the grosser duties of
bodily movement, of secretion, that is to say the production
of chemical substances destined for the good of units
other than itself, and of reproduction, concentrates its
energies of nutrition on making itself responsive by inner
molecular movement to the finest changes in its sur-
roundings. It is the seat of a finely balanced nutrition
wholly exceeding that of any other tissue. Every inci-
dent of its life stirs that nutrition, which indeed is directed
to being so stirred ; and, moreover, while producing an
immediate effect, leaves a trace behind. When the
blows of external influences are repeated often enough,
especially if they be heavy enough, the effects are mani-

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. U2. © 45

fested in the grosser changes which we call growth. But
such large effects are nothing more than the summation
of smaller changes; to produce the total each contri-
bution must have brought its share. And we shall
probably not err in supposing that every influence
brought to bear on a nerve unit produces an effect which
lasts far beyond the passing functional activity. When
light falls on sensitive retina for a moment only the effect
on the higher parts of the visual mechanism may be traced
long afterwards, under favourable circumstances, as a
gradually fading series of images alternating with rests or
rather with reversions, and even when the effects have
fallen below the threshold of consciousness, and thus
seem to have passed away, a study of the results of a
fresh stimulation shows that the machinery is not yet at
rest, is not as yet what it was before. Moreover,
the finer our means of testing, the longer may we
trace out the effects. Yet, in this visual mechanism
which supplies the earlier links of the nervous chain
for the production of psychical effects, which has to
be used again and again in order to feed the higher,
more distinctly psychical links, there must, we may
suppose, be agencies at work tending to wipe out all
previous effects in order to prepare for new events. In
the higher links the need of such tergative agencies will,
we may further suppose, become less and less. If so, in
them we may fairly expect that the effect of an influence
once brought to bear will last far longer, will last long
enough, may I say, to give us a glimpse of seeing what
may be the physical basis of the psychical fact of memory.

One word more. In the lower tissues, in undifferenti-
ated protoplasm, in muscle and the like, spontaneous
activity, automatism seems to be the direct outcome of
nutrition, the direct effect of the blood supply working on
the molecular machinery, and to be independent of the

46 FosTErR, Physical Basis of Psychical Events.

play of external influences on the tissue. But if there be
any truth in the views which I have been urging upon you,
we cannot transfer this conception to the working of the
brain. If in nervous tissue, as I have urged, the influence
of the blood supply is wholly subordinate to the influences
of incidents, the more so the higher the elements, we
must attach but little importance to the play in it of such
a direct nutritional automatism. We must regard that
psychical spontaneity which we call the will, as, at least in
the main, the outcome of complex influences.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 13.

XIII. Contribution to our Knowledge of the Marine
Fauna of the Falkland Islands.

ee epirn M. PRATT, B.Sc. (Vict).
Research Student in Zoology at The Owens College.

[Communicated by Professor S. J. Hickson, F.R.S.]

Received and read March 22nd, 1898.

The work in connection with this paper has been done
in the Zoological Laboratories of the Owens College,
Manchester, under the kind supervision of Professor
Hickson.

I must thank Dr. Harmer, of Cambridge, for his
great kindness in placing at my disposal his collection of
Bryozoa, and for his kind aid in identifying certain species.

My thanks are also due to Mr. Kirkpatrick for assist-
ing me in the examination of the “ Busk” Collection of
Bryozoa, at the British Museum.

The material at my disposal was collected by Miss
Blake, at Hill Cove, West Island, Falklands, during the
months of September and October, 1896, and the specimens
may be regarded as forming a typical common shore
collection of that region, the shore at Hill Cove being
sandy with small rocks.

Through the kindness of Mr. Standen, I have also
had access to a collection of Mollusca, on some of which
grew various Bryozoa, made by Miss Cobb at Lively
Island, Falklands. These were also shore forms.

In the Collection were the following species of
Bryozoa :—

December r4th, 1898.

2 PRATT, Marine Fauna of the Falkland Tslands.

CHEILOSTOMATA.

E

IT.

[{I.

WADE

XIII.

Beania magellanica MacGillivray
= Diachoris magellanica Busk,
Bret. Mus. Cat, \ omar
Beanta costata MacGillivray
= Diachoris costata Busk,
Challenger, Vol. X., Polyzoa, p. 60.
Cellaria malvinensis Busk
= Salicornaria malvinensis Busk,

Challenger, Vol. X., Polyzoa, p. Ql.

. Cellepora pustulata Busk,

Challenger, Vol. X., Polyzoa, p. 200.
Cellepora pumicosa Busk, var. eatonensis Busk,
Challenger, Vol. X., Polyzoa, p. 201.

. Cribrilina labiosa Busk

=Lepralia ladiosa Busk,
Brit, Mas. Cat, Ai preo
Challenger, Vol. X., Polyzoa, p. 133.
Cribrilina monoceros Busk,
Challenger, Vol. X., Polyzoa, p. 133;
Hincks, Aun. Mag. Nat. Hest.,(5) VIII, p. 57.

. Lepralia adpressa Busk, Brit. Mus. Cat. 11., p. 82;

Hincks, Brzt. Mar. Polyzoa, p. 307.

. Membranipora membranacea Linn.

Hincks, Brit. Mar. Polyzoa, p. 140.

. Micropora uncifera Busk,

Challenger, Vol. X., Polyzoa, p.7i

. Mucroporella ciliata Pallas.

Hincks, Brit. Mar. Polyzoa, p. 206.

. Microporella malusiz Audouin.

Hincks, Bret. Mar. Polyzoa, p. 211.
Mucronella tricuspis Hincks, 3 ;
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (5) VIIL., p. 66.

. Schizoporella hyalina Linn.

Hincks, Bret. Mar. Polyzoa, p. 271.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. 13. 3

XV. Schizoporella hyalina (variety).
XVI. Smittia landsborovid Johnston.
Hincks, Bret. Mar. Polygoa, p. 341.
XVII. Porella tridentata, sp. nov.
CTENOSTOMATA are only represented by some badly
preserved fragments of the genus Lowerbankza, the species
of which | have been unable to identify.

Of the preceding species, two are cosmopolitan in
shallow water and are also found in some regions in deep
water ; this fact is referred to later.

I. Microporella ciliata,on weed, among debris, and on
Mytilus.
II. Schizoporella hyalina, on weed and shell (Photznula).

It is noteworthy that both these forms occur on weed.

The following species are common to the northern
hemisphere, including Britain, and the Falklands :—
I. Lepralia adpressa, on shells (Photznula violacea and
Trophon murictformts).

Habitat: Britain (Torbay, Guernsey, Hastings). Medi-
terranean (Algiers, Naples, Bay of Gibraltar). Aus-
tralia. Chiloe. Falklands. Mazatlan.

Moderate to deep water. Fossil-—Italian pliocene.

Il. WMembranipora membranacea.

Habitat: Britain; universal and abundant. Hviding-
soe. Hougesund (Norway). Roscoff. Finisterre
(France). Adriatic. New Zealand. Australia.

Range in time—coralline crag. Paleolithic.

Occurs only in temperate seas in shallow water.

III. Microporella malusiz.
Habitat: Britain (widely distributed and abundant).
Gullmaren, Bahusia, 10-20 fath. Bergen. Fin-

4 PRATT, Marine Fauna of the Falkland Islands.

mark (Norway). Greenland. Mediterranean.
Adriatic. France ((S.W.))) Black Sea, )@Seusl
Patagonia, 48 fath. Vierra del Fuecso, ~ Balke
lands. Valparaiso. New Zealand.
Fossil—coralline crag, on Terebratula. Older pliocene.
(Castrocara).

The following occur in north and south temperate
seas, but not in Britain, nor the tropics :—
I. Beanta magellanica, growing on an Ascidian (Molgula
evegaria).
Habitat: Adriatic. Australia, 2-10 fath. New Zea-
land. Kerguelen. Cape Horn. Falkland Islands.
It appears to occur only in shallow water.
II. Cellepora pustulata, on Patella venosa.
Habitat: Island of Capri(Italy). Victoria (Australia).
New Zealand. Marion Island.
The specimen, though fairly large, is much water-worn.
It is interesting to note that the only known northern
habitat of these two species is the Mediterranean.

The following species is the only one which occurs in
north and south temperate and cold seas, and zn the tropics
(Florida).

Smittia landsborovit, on shell (Tvophon muriciformis).

Flabitat: Britain. Florida. Greenland. South Africa.

Falklands. Australia. Arctic Seas. Davis Strait.

Fossil—var. crystallina—Scottish glacial deposits.

The following species occur only in the southern
hemisphere :—
I. Beanta costata, on weed, in shallow water.

Flabitat: Australia. Kerguelen. Cape Horn. Falklands.
Il. Cellaria malvinensis, erect, in fairly shallow water.

Manchester Memortrs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. 13. 5

Habitat: Petane (New Zealand). Strait of Magellan,
45 fath. South Patagonia. Victoria (Australia).
Kerguelen. Marion Island. New Hebrides
f=. Pacific), 7o° fath. Cape Hiorn.”: Falklands.
Fossil in tertiary of New Zealand.

III. Cellepora pumiicosa, var. eatonensis, among debris, and

encrusting shell. |

flabitat: Kerguelen, 28 fath. and 45-127 fath. W. of
S. America, 45° 31. S.,78° 9 W. Falklands.

IV. Wicropora uncifera, on weed.
flabitat: Mid South Atlantic. Tristan D’Acunha.
Nightingale Island. Inaccessible Island. Cape
Horn.

V. Cribrilina Jlabiosa, on shells (Mytilus magellanicus
and Terebratula).
Habitat: Falklands. Simon’s Bay (Cape of Good
Hope).
VI. Cribrilina monoceros, on Mytilus edults.
Recorded from :—
Mid N. Pacific 3,125 fath. Australia, 35 fath. New
Zealand. Marion Island. Strait of Magellan, 175
fath. Between Strait of Magellan and Falklands.
Bass Strait. Cape Horn. Falklands, 12 fath.
Fossil: tertiary deposits. Bairnside, Victoria (Aus-
tralia). Napier and Petane (New Zealand).
VII. MWucronella tricuspis, on shell (Alytelus ungulatus).
Hlabttat : Australia, 38 fath. Simon’s Bay (Cape of
Good Hope). Prince Edward Island. Tierra del
Fuego. Chiloe. Falklands, 5-12 fath. S. America.
VIII. Porella tridentata, sp. nov. On shell (Euthria
antarctica) Falklands.
Of the foregoing list of species, the following have not,
I think, been hitherto recorded from the Falklands :—

6 PRATT, Marine Fauna of the Falkland Islands.

. Cellepora pustulata.

. Lepralia adpressa.

. Membranipora membranacea.

. Smittia landsborovit.

. Micropora uncifera. |

. Microporella ciliata. The variety personata was
recorded by Darwin from the Falklands, but not
the true species.

Of 16 species of Bryozoa in this collection, eight have

been found only in the southern hemisphere. Five have

been found in the north and south temperate regions.

One occurs in the north and south temperate regions and

in the tropics, and two are cosmopolitan.

Om B © HN 4

Notes on the Species of Bryozoa in thzs collection.

The zocecia of Microporella ctliata seem larger than
those of the British specimens. In structure I think they
more closely resemble those of the Californian specimens.

Lepratia adpressa var. Busk. The surface of the
zocecium is strongly grooved, as described by Busk of
the species occurring at Chiloe (see Busk, Brit. Mus. Cat.,
Vol. Tl, p. 82); butthere are, inladdition) certatamlanae
pores which occur round the margin of each zocecium, at
the base of each triangular furrow (see Fzgs. 1 and 2).
These’ “pores “I) have also” seen’ in’) Buskis = Clee.
specimen at the British Museum, but they are neither
sO numerous nor so well marked as in my specimen.

Avicularia (zg. 3) of two kinds occur, which have
not hitherto been’ described = ene! “appears to) bemune
ordinary beak-like form, but is often slightly irregular in
shape (/2g¢. 3, a@and 4); the other is circular in outline,
with a spatulate mandible (72g. 3,c and d). The avicu-
laria are very irregularly distributed over a colony;
sometimes five or six neighbouring zocecia possess one

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 13. 7

or even two, whilst not one of the remaining zocecia of
the colony bear any.

In one or two cases, knobbed cells are seen (F 7g. 1, a),
which are characteristic of the British species (see Hincks,
Brit. Mar. Polyzoa, p. 307). I have seen no trace of an
ovicell.

Porella tridentata, sp. nov.

Zocecia hexagonal, separated by fairly deep linear
furrows ; surface convex and punctured by large irregular
pores which, in some cases, are definitely arranged round
the margin.

Secondary orifice horse-shoe shaped or inversely
subtriangular, with a lateral raised collar meeting in a
sudden depression behind (72g. 4, 4), often a sinus in front,
containing a small avicularium with a rounded mandible
(Figs. 4 and 5,4). In many cases a spatulate avicularium is
present to the right of the secondary orifice (Fzgs.4 and 5,2).

Deep down in the orifice can be seen a large median
denticle with two lateral ones (/Fzgs. 4 and 5,c and @);
because of this feature it has been thought fit to call the
species “ trzdentata.”

The ovicell (zg. 5, Ov.) is semicircular in outline,
convex in front, somewhat granular, with one or two groups
of irregular punctures.

Zoarium encrusting shell (Photenula violacea) and of a
dirty pink colour.

Porella tridentata is somewhat like P. concinna (Hincks,
Brit. Mar. Polyzoa, p. 323). It differs from the latter in
having two lateral denticles in addition to the median one
which is present in P. concznna. It is also somewhat
larger, and the pores are bigger and irregular in shape.
The spatulate avicularium appears to be constant in posi-
tion, while the general shape of the secondary orifice seems
to be somewhat different.

8 PRATT, Marine Fauna of the Falkland Islands.

P. tridentata differs from Jullien’s P. malouinenszs (see
Cap Horn Expéd., p. 57) in that the pores are larger and
fewer in number. P. malouznensis appears to have no
spatulate avicularium or denticles, and the secondary orifice
is somewhat different. The ovicell agrees with Jullien’s
description of that in P. malouznenszs, which, however, he
does not figure.

A consideration of the geographical distribution of
the Bryozoa in this collection from the Falkland Islands,
is of special interest at the present time because of the
controversy about the origin of the north and south extra-
tropical marine faunas.

Murray* is of opinion that “if there were once a nearly
universal climate over the whole of the ocean, then it is
possible that there was a universal littoral marine fauna.”
When cooling set in at the Poles, then the animals with
pelagic larve would be killed out, or be forced to migrate
towards the warmer tropics. By limiting their reproduc-
tive process to the summer season, some of the organisms
with free swimming larvee would live on in the temperate
regions. With the disappearance of the shallow-water
fauna from the polar regions, its place would be occupied
by organisms from the deeper mud line, few of which have
pelagic larve. In this way the similarity and, in some
cases, identity between the polar faunas, and the likeness
of many shallow-water polar animals to deep-sea species,
might be explained. | |

The cooling of the waters at the Poles would cause vast
migrations of forms towards the warmer seas, where
metabolic changes would be greater; this would cause the

* Murray ‘‘On the Deep and Shallow-water Marine Fauna of the

Kerguelen Region of the Great Southern Ocean.” (Zvaus. R. Soc. Ed.,
Vol. 38 (1896), p. 3433 also Challenger Summary of Results.)

Manchester Memotrs, Vol. xliz..(1898), No. 13. 9

strugele for existence to be intensely severe in the tropics,
and would result in a rapid formation of species, while
many would become extinct. On the other hand, the
metabolism being less in the temperate and colder waters,
and the struggle for existence being less severe here than
in the warmer waters, there would be less tendency for the
species to become modified, and many would remain true;
hence the similarity between the North and South tem-
perate faunas.

Ortmann,* whilst acknowledging the possibility of the
existence at one time ofa universal fauna, contends that the
cooling at the Poles did not arrest the capability of
variation, but that the bipolar forms now existing must
have passed through a greater range of variation than the
tropical forms ; in other words, that the tropical fauna has
remained more or less true, while the temperate and
bipolar forms are derivatives of ancestral forms.

He admits that a form with a_ well-developed
adaptative faculty may have passed through all the
varying conditions of temperature, etc., without becoming
extinct. The changes due to climatic conditions being
similar at both Poles, two faunas resulted from the primi-
tive material, one Arctic, the other Antarctic.

He also holds that the likeness between the north
and south polar faunas, is in many cases a secondary
reappearance, and is dependent on the adaptative capa-
bility of the inhabitants of the Poles. He does not think
that identical species can result in both polar seas from a
common descent. He maintains that an exchange of both
polar forms can take place through the deep sea, on the
ground that, among Crustacea, the cosmopolitan genus
Pontophilus shows a decided tendency to retire into deep

* Ortmann ‘‘ Ueber ‘ Bipolaritat’ in der Verbreitung mariner Thiere.”
Zool. Jahrb. (Abth. f. Syst.) Bd. 9, (1896), p. 571.

10. © PRATT, Marine Fauna of the Falkland Islands.

water, but only occurs in the tropics in deep water. He
suggests that many forms which have been recorded from
northern and southern seas, but not from the tropics, may
occur in the tropics z~ deep water and have consequently
escaped capture.

Ortmann further maintains that the migration of
forms may take place from the northern hemisphere
through the tropics, to the southern hemisphere along the
west coasts of America and Africa, because of the compara-
tive low temperature in tropical regions along these coasts.
This is confirmed in the Decapods, and the reverse—z.e.
the migration of forms from the southern to the northern
hemisphere—in the case of the Isopod Sero/zs.

Before discussing the bearings of these two theories,
it would be useful to consider the distribution of the
genera in the collection.

The genera represented are:—
CHEILOSTOMATA.

Beanza, Cellaria, Cellepora, Cribrilina, Lepralia, Mem-
branipora, Micropora, Mucroporella, Mucronella, Schizo-
porella, Smittza, Porella ; and,among the CTENOSTOMATA, ~
Lowerbankia.

All the species of Beanza, with one exception (B.
hirtisstma), occur north and south of the tropics in
temperate regions, but not within the tropics. B. hzrtzssima
has been recorded from Cape Verde Islands, which lie
within the tropics. All the species, except the British B.
mtrabuts, occur in shallow water. |

The genus Ce/larza is cosmopolitan. It occurs in deep
and shallow water in the temperate zone. The depths at
which it occurs in the tropics I have not been able to
ascertain. It occurs in the fossil tertiary strata.

Cellepcra. The Challenger obtained 30 or 31 species

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 15. 11

of this genus, of which the North Atlantic yielded three,
from depths varying from 51-400 fath.
The South Atlantic yielded 9 species, 5-600 fath.
Wes eroucien recion: 4) (Gr | sy; 1205500...
madsttalian | ,, ies Ht Bad 2AOww, 32
(One species, an aberrant form, doubtfully referred to this
genus, was found in 2,600 fath.).
The North Pacific region, 4 species, 10-30 fath.
Se SoOutly ve ae Spe one from 45
fath., the other from 1,325 fath.

The genus is cosmopolitan, and appears to belong to
shallow water, yet evidence shows that it has a wide
bathymetrical range.

Cribrilina. This genus inhabits north and south tem-
perate regions, but only one species (C. flortdana) has
been recorded from the tropics (Gulf of Florida). The
genus is fossil, occurring in the French cretaceous, Austro-
Hungarian miocene (coral and red crag), Italian pliocene,
boulder clay (Wick).

The species C. monoceros is notable in that it occurs
in very shallow as well as in very deep water. Off the west
coast of the extreme south of South America it has been
found at a depth of 1,325 fath., in the North Pacific ata
depth of 3,125 fath., Strait of Magellan 25 fath., Tierra del
Fuego and Patagonia 19 fath., Cape Horn 4o fath., Falk-
lands 4-12 fath. My specimens were picked up on the
beach. The facts of its occurring in the tertiary deposits, its
presence in the north and south temperate regions, and
its absence from the tropics, tend to support Murray’s
argument, according to which C7zbrilina may be looked
upon as a true representative of a primitive, universal,
marine, littoral fauna.

On the other hand—and this is supported by the fact
that this species does occur in very deep water elsewhere—

12 PRATT, Marine Fauna of the Falkland [stands.

it may be that this species exists in the tropics at great
depths, and has thus escaped capture.
Lepralia. This genus occurs in the north and south
temperate zones, and within the tropics; all the deep-sea
forms occur in the temperate regions; the forms living in
shallow water occur in the tropics as well as in the tempe-
rate regions. This is rather interesting, for it shows that
the tropics do not form an insuperable barrier for all
species, between the two temperate zones. Then, again,
according to Ortmann’s view, one would expect to find
the deep-sea forms nearer the Equator, if the deep sea
affords a passage between the two temperate zones.
The species ZL. adpressa occurs north and south of, but
not within the tropics, in shallow and moderately-deep
water. It occurs fossil in Italian pliocene, Austrian
miocene, and tertiary formations at Reggio (Italy). The
distribution of this species gives evidence in support of
Murray’s view.
Membranipora. The genus is cosmopolitan, chiefly in
shallow water, but it also occurs in deep water.
M. albida, Tongatabu (Pacific), 21°S., 18-20 fath.
Bermuda, 38°37'N., 450 fath. Singapore.

MM. crasstmarginata, Bass Strait, 38-85 fath. Heard
Island, 75 fath. Tristan D’Acunha, 110-150 fath.
Gulf of Florida, 13-60 fath.

M. multifida, Cape of Good Hope, 450 fath. Chal-

lenger station 320, 37° 17’S., 600 fath., green mud.

It is notable that the species occurring at great depths
are found only in temperate regions. The ¢vopzcal forms
occur in fazrly shallow water.

Membranipora membranacea occurs in north and ©
south temperate zones, but not within the tropics.

Micropora. Genus extends back at least to the chalk
period. It occurs in north and south temperate zones,

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No. 13. 13

as well as the tropics, in shallow to fairly deep water
(greatest depth recorded, 150 fathoms). The species
M. uncifera is recorded only from the southern hemisphere.

Microporella. Genus cosmopolitan.

Microporella ciliata is also cosmopolitan; the speci-
mens taken at greatest depths have been limited to
temperate regions, namely: Bahusia, on the Falmouth
and Lisbon cable, 47° N., 89-205 fath.; and the coast of
Norway, 300 fath. The tropical specimens occur in fairly
shallow water.

The species WZ. maluszz occurs north and south of, but
not within, the tropics in fairly shallow water (10-50
fath.). It occurs fossil; coralline crag, older pliocene
(Castrocaro).

Mucronella. The genus is cosmopolitan, from fairly
deep water, but the species JV. ¢ricuspis appears to be
restricted to the southern hemisphere, from shallow to
fairly deep water, 12-150 fath. Fossil—tertiary-—-New
Zealand. The species occurring at the greatest depths
occur also in temperate regions, with one exception—
Challenger Station 122, off East coast of South America,
9° 5 S.; the species WV. castanea occurs from 32-400 fath.,
and, with this exception, all other tropical species occur in
fairly shallow water. Many of the species of this genus
are fossil, occurring in coralline crag, middle pliocene,
upper pliocene, palzeolithic, Scottish glacial deposits, &c.

Schizoporella. The genus is cosmopolitan. The
species S. /yalima is cosmopolitan, it occurs on shells,
stones, weed, etc., from shallow to deep water, it is fossil,
and occurs in coralline crag, Scottish glacial deposits.
post-pliocene deposits (Canada). Greatest depth: of
species 100 fath. (Davis St.), of the genus 300 fath. (off
Norway).

Both the cosmopolitan species Schzzoporella hyalina

14 PRATT, Marine Fauna of the Falkland Islands.

and MMucroporella ctlzata occur fossil, and might be rem-
nants of a once universal fauna. Evidence shows that
these forms have been able to withstand all changes of
temperature and altered conditions of life, without either
becoming extinct or undergoing modification so far as
the hard parts are concerned.

Smittia. The genus appears to be cosmopolitan. It
is found among the fossil tertiary deposits. It inhabits
shallow and moderately deep water, the greatest recorded
depth being 600 fath. (S. s#zttzana).

Smittza landsborovit appears to be characteristic of
north and south temperate and cold seas, from shallow
water to great depths. Fossil: Scottish glacial deposits.

The species S. ¢vzspznosa occurs in temperate and
tropical zones, in shallow water and at great depths.

Porella. The genus is cosmopolitan, and is represented
in the tertiary deposits. It occurs in shallow water chiefly,
but does also occur at moderate depths.

These results, as far as the Bryozoa are concerned, seem
to support Murray’s theory on geographical distribution.

Each genus represented in the collection occurs fossil,
and also occurs in the north and south temperate zones,
as well as in the tropics ; in fact, most of the genera are
cosmopolitan.

Many of the sfeczes are represented in the ¢dertzary
deposits. This shows that the changes of climate and —
altered conditions of life, have not affected their “tertiary”
structure ; as many of these forms occur only in the two
temperate zones, there is reason to believe that they have
retained their common ancestral structure.

The fact of many of the species oceurrine im the

Manchester Memozrs, Vol. liz. (1898), No.13. 15

deep sea hardly supports Ortmann’s theory, for many
of them occur at very great depths only in the temperate
regions; in the ¢rvopzcs they occur in shallow water. Their
presence in the deep sea is, I think, the result of accident.

ANTHOMEDUS&.

MARGELID&.

Hippocrene macloviana Haeckel, Das System der
Medusen,p.go. Peculiar to Falklands. Soledad
Bay (Lesson). Stanley Harbour.

The genus (after allowing for Haeckel’s weeding out
of synonyms) is curious in its distribution, in that the
species (7. macloviana is the only representative in
southern seas, and even this has, as yet, only been
recorded from the Falkland Islands. The other members
of this genus are found in the temperate and cold regions
of the northern hemisphere as well as in the north tropical
zone.

PORIFERA.

In the collection are two species of the genus Sycon :—

Sycon ciliatum Fleming. Habitat: Europe. New to
Falklands. |

Sycon ramsayt Lendenf. Hadztat: Australia. New to
Falklands.

One small specimen.

The genus is cosmopolitan in shallow to moderately
deep water.

POLYCHATA.
NEREIDIFORMIA.
I. NMerezs eatont M‘Intosh, Challenger, Vol. XII.,
p. 223. abttat: East of South America.
Fernando Noronhia, 25 fath. Marion Island,

16 PRATT, Marine Fauna of the Falkland Islands.

69 fath. Kerguelen, 20 fath. “Falklands,
5—10 fath.

Il. Merezs patagonica M‘Intosh, Challenger, Vol.
KIL. p. 228: Habztat: East ot | Stratos
Magellan. New to Falklands.

III. NMerezs kerguelensts Baird ?, Challenger, Vol.
XII, p.225.; /abztat: Kereuelen. , New to
Falklands.

IV. Nerezs atlantica M‘Intosh, Challenger, Vol. X1L.,
p. 219. Habttat: Cape Verde Islands. New
to Falklands.

The genus is widely distributed in north and south
temperate and tropical seas, from very shallow to very
deep water (1,520 fath.).

The Polychete species represented in the collection
from the Falkland Islands appear to be peculiar to the
southern temperate zone, although most of the genera are
widely distributed in the north and south temperate and
cold seas, as well as in the tropics.

V. Lagisca magellanica M‘Intosh, Challenger, Vol.
XII. p..82. Habitat - Stran of Magellan
175 fath. Kerguelen, 127 tath.

The genus appears to belong to the southern hemi- ©
sphere, being widely distributed in that region, and in the
tropics. It occurs also in the northern hemisphere, but
is rare.

There were also present in the collection some frag-
mentary specimens belonging to the genera Terebella
and Czrratulus, but they were too badly preserved for
identification.

GEPHYREA.
Phascolosoma capsiforme Baird, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1868,
p. 83; Selenka’s Szpunculiden, p. 27.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xlit. (1898), No. 13. = 17

Numerous specimens of this species were found on
roots of basket kelp after storms.

This species is peculiar to the Falkland Islands. The
genus is cosmopolitan in shallow to very deep water.

MOLLUSCA.

Out of 45 species of Mollusca from Lively Island,
Falklands, which Mr. Standen* has identified, 4 occur in
the tropics as well as in the southern hemisphere; one ranges
through the southern hemisphere, the tropics and the
northern hemisphere, C7vepzdula dilatata, which extends
all along the west coast of America from Patagonia to
Alaska, and also occurs in Kamtschatka ; 40 are found only
in the southern hemisphere, 29 of which occur only in
South America and the Strait of Magellan, whilst 5 are
peculiar to the Falklands.

ECHINOIDEA.
Gontociaarts canaliculata Agassiz, Revision of Echznz,
p- 395. A single, young, somewhat damaged
specimen.

This species has an extensive distribution. Southern
oceans, 1,600-1,975 fath. Sandwich and Navigator Islands.
Natal. Falklands, 5-12 fath.

It ranges along the southern extremities of all the
southern continents and extends north of the equator to
Japan.

G. canaliculata has a wider distribution than any
other species of this genus, which is restricted, with this
exception, to the southern hemisphere and to the tropics.

An interesting fact concerning this species is that it
extends through the tropics to the northern hemisphere

* Melvill, J. C., and Standen, R., ‘‘ Notes on a Collection of Marine
Shells from Lively Island, Falklands” (Yourn. Conchol., IX. 4).

18 PRATT, Marine Fauna of the Falkland Islands.

along the western shores of the Pacific, and not along the
eastern shores, as one would expect. This is still more
interesting when we note that this species occurs at the
southern extremities of America and Africa.

HOLOTHUROIDEA.

Cucumaria mendax Théel, Challenger, Vol. XIV.,
flolothuroidea, p. 65. The specimens are young and
under average size. The Species is restricted fomenre
Falklands. ‘The genus is cosmpolitan.

ASTEROIDEA.
I. Astertas cunningham Perrier, Arch. Zool. Expér.,
t. IV., p. 339. Hadbztat: Falklands and Strait of
Magellan. Peculiar to this region.
The genus is cosmopolitan, from shallow water to
1,250 fath.
Il. Porania magellanica Studer, Challenger, Vol. XXX.,
p. 363. Young specimen. Wabziat> W. of Ratae
gonia. Peculiar to the southern portion of South
America.
The genus is widely distributed in north and south
temperate and tropical seas, from 15 to 6,000 fath.

OPHIUROIDEA.

I. Ophtothrix magnifica Lyman, Challenger, Vol. V.,
Ophiurotdea, pp. 215, 216. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat.
Ffast, Vol. V11., 1860; p. 254. dfabzzat = Coastiet
Chili. Not previously recorded from Falklands.
Peculiar to South America.

The genus is cosmopolitan, from very shallow to fairly —

deep water.

Il. Ophiomyxia vivipara Studer, Monatsh. K. Akad.
Berlin, 1876, p. 462 ; Challenger, Vol. V., Ophiu-
roidea, p. 245. Habitat: Cape of Good Hope,
150 fath. Kerguelen. S. W. of South America.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. «liz. (1898), No.18.. 19

Strait of Magellan, 55-70 fath. Between Magellan
and Falklands. Has not been recorded from the
Falklands before.
Of the 4 species of this genus known :—
I. O. vivipara is only found in the southern

hemisphere.
II. O. australis occurs in South Australia and

south temperate region as well as the
tropics.

III. O. flaccida occurs off Bahia and off Bermudas,
Zé. in south tropical and north temperate
zone.

IV. O. pentagona occurs only in the northern
hemisphere.

From the preceding one may conclude that, while the
genus is widely distributed in temperate and tropical
regions, the species, though overlapping each other toa
certain extent, are somewhat limited in their distribution.

Of 6 representatives of the Echinoderms in the
collection, 3 species are peculiar to South America, 2 of
which are found in the Strait of Magellan, as well as the
Falklands ; one is peculiar to the Falkland Islands. Two
species are apparently distributed over the southern
hemisphere, one of them extending beyond the Equator
to the north temperate region.

BRACHYURA.
(a) CATOMETOPA.
PINNOTHERID&.
Flalicarcinus planatus White, Ann. Mag.

Ware 27st. VOlx %V ITI, (1846); a. 2738,
is widely distributed over the Antarctic
region, and is said to be the only
Brachyurous Decapod proper to that wide
area of distribution (Stebbing, Crustacea).

20 PRATT, Marine Fauna of the Falkland Islands.

(6) CYCLOMETOPA.
CANCRINEA.
CANCRID&.

Xantho crenatus Milne Edwards, Crus-
tacea, Vol. L., p. 396. Coasts of Peru. New
to Falklands.

MACKURKZ:
ANOMURA.
@) LitTHODEA
LITHODIDA:

Paralomis verrucosus Dana, U.S. Expl.
Exped. XIT1., Crust, ft. 1.3 pp 726.) Fale
lands. Common in E. portion of Strait of
Magellan, not further W. than C. Negro.
Genus taken south and north of tropics, but
not within tropics.

(0) PAGURODEA.
PAGURIDA,
Eupagurus comptus White. Peculiar to
Falklands, and Fuegian region.
ISOPOD
IDOTEID.
Edotia tuberculata Guérin-Méneville, /conographie
du Régne Animal de G. Cuvier, T. III., Crust,
p. 34. Habitat: Confined to Strait of Ma-
gellan and the Falklands.
SPHAROMID/.
Spheroma eigas Teach;.D7et, Sc, Natt) Aa
p. 346; Milne-Edwards, Crustacea, Vol. IIL, —
p. 205. Habztat: Strait of Magellan. Falk-
lands. Australia. New Zealand. Kerguelen.
Aucklands (Southern Hemisphere).

AMPHIPODA.
Orchestia chilensts Milne-Edwards, Crustacea,

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 13. 21

Vol. III, p. 18. Habetat: Mediterranean
and coasts of Chili; not previously recorded
from Falklands.

Of the seven species of Crustacea in this collection
of common shore fauna, one is common to the northern
and southern hemispheres (Orchestza chilensts), two are

_distributed over the temperate portion of the southern
hemisphere, and four are peculiar to the neighbourhood of
the Falklands.

Paralomzs. The genus occurs north and south of the
tropics but not within the tropics; of 3 species, 2 occur in
moderately deep to deep water, 310-600 fath.; the third,
P. verrucosus, appears to be a shallow-water form.

FHlalicarcinus. ‘The genus appears to be widely and
universally distributed over the southern portions of the
three great continents in the southern hemisphere.

Xantho. Genus cosmopolitan, and fossil.

Eupagurus. The genus is distributed in north and
south temperate regions as well as the tropics, but the
species of this genus appear to be very limited in their
distribution. The depths vary from o to 700 fathoms.

Edotia. The distribution of this genus appears to be
somewhat doubtful. A species, EF. dzcuspzda, occurs in
the Arctic seas. I have been unable to ascertain if the
genus is represented in the tropics.

Spheroma. The genus appears to be almost univer-
sally distributed over the temperate and tropical areas, but
the species appear to have a very limited distribution.

Orchestta, The genus appears to be cosmopolitan in
temperate and tropical littoral waters ; the species of this
genus, like those of other genera in this collection, are
limited in their distribution.

Regarding the seven genera represented in this collec-
tion: three (Eupagurus, Spheroma, and Orchestia) are

22 PRATT, Marine Fauna of the Falkland Islands.

widely distributed in temperate and tropical waters; one
(Xantho) is cosmopolitan; one (Paralomis) has been
recorded from the north and south temperate regions, but
not from the tropics. One (/alccarcinus) is confined to
the southern hemisphere; and the distribution of one
(Edotza) is doubtful.

The distribution of the genus Paralomts in northern
and southern temperate seas, but not in the tropics, cannot
be said to support Murray’s view, for I do not think this
genus has been recorded as occurring fossil. The tendency
of this genus to retire into deep water might be said to
support Ortmann’s view, but there is not much evidence
to turn the balance in favour of either one or the other.

There appears to be no evidence among the repre-
sentatives of Crustacea in this collection of a passage
from one temperate zone to the other, along the west

coasts of America or Africa.

TUNICATA

ASCIDILZ SIMPLICES.

LBoltenia legumen Lesson, Centurze Zoologique
(1830), p. 149; Challenger, Vol.V1., Tuntcata,
p. 88. Habdbztat: Falklands, and southern
extremity of South America.

The genus appears to be specially characteristic of
north and south temperate seas, but has not, I think, been
recorded from the tropics.

Molcula gregaria Lesson = Cynthia gregaria, Cent.
Zoolog., p.157; Challenger,Vol.V1., Tunicata,
p. 73. . Habetat: Limited to Strait of Maa
gellan and the Falkland Islands. It appears
to have been found only in shallow water.

The genus appears to be almost universally distributed
over the temperate portion of the southern hemisphere.

Manchester Memoirs, Vol. xliz. (1898), No. 13. 23

Comparison of the common shore fauna of the Falkland
Islands with that of Britain.

It is interesting to note that there is a certain
resemblance between these two faunas, but it is more
clearly marked in some groups than in others. This may
be due, to a certain extent, to the great or small number
of species of the groups represented in the collection.

Of the 16 species of Bryozoa represented, 6 (of which
two are cosmopolitan) are also found on our shores.

Of species belonging to other groups, one (Sycun
ctlzatum) is British.

’ All the genera (13) of Bryozoa in the collection are
represented in the British fauna; of these, 8 are cosmo-
politan, the remainder are found only in temperate and
tropical waters.

Of the 22 genera belonging to other groups, I5 are
British, 2 are restricted to the southern hemisphere, 4 are
found inthe southern hemisphere, tropicsand northernhemi-
sphere (Japan); the distribution of one (#dozza) is doubtful.

Of the 24 species, exclusive of the Bryozoa, occurring
in this collection, 19 have been found in the southern
hemisphere only; of these, 7 are more or less uniformly
distributed over the temperate portion, and 12 (three of
which are peculiar to the Falkland Islands) have been
recorded from and about the southern portion of South
America. Three have been recorded from north and
south temperate regions only; one from north and south
temperate regions and the tropics ; one from tropics and
southern hemisphere only.

The evidence gained from a study of the distribution
of the common shore fauna of the Falkland Islands,
points to a near and close relationship, among the majority
of forms, between the faunas of the temperate portions of
the three great continents, including the islands in tem-
perate latitudes of the southern hemisphere.

VINJUDIZD Sla4aAT

‘o19ydstwmey ULEyANOG
pue sordoxy,

“VS
[8}0L

‘UOT}IIIJOD 94} Url ‘eOZOAIG jo DAISNIIxX9 ‘SatIadS JO UOTINqIIISIq

: , ae
DIADSIAS VINSIOPY | uUIunsa CEES 55
VIVINIAIGN, DYOP A =
sngGutos snansvgng sasuagly? 2
SNSOINAAAL svsis viuosany gs wysayj4Q | ¢
sImojvsng | snygoung 8
SnpouUasI OYJUDKX SHUIIADINO ET :
DIYIUSDU tel
141/014 0) S
xopuaut vIUD {IAs DU DADGIAUL DIDINIUOUDI 5
DIAVDIUNING VIUDLOT pixduoiy dQ StADPIIOLUOL) e
1UODYSULUUNI 5
SILLS F .
es —
suusofisgo9 ac
f / e
DULOSOJOISOY I | Dele
'o
i}
DINUDIJIS VU By 5
DISISD aoe
wnuospywog siasany as es g.
: Sh | saswajanssae %
‘ ct
1U0gVA Stasa\T ©
—'U
ao
rpsios UOIS | Dpnu1) WOINS | 373,
on
| se
DUDULOJIOUL 3 8
£o
auatI0gGayy | ss
. e 6t
; “eOILEULy [INO -aL0dstwep, Ute INOS ‘sordoarg, + "97eIgd U9}
SLT CBE ‘oyerod ay, : ‘oyerod ud, “dus °-9 WN "CRN

206

Big 1.

Figs 2:

Fig. 3.

PRATT, Warine Fauna of the Falklands Islands.

EXPLANATION OF PEATE

Lepralia adpressa, var. Lusk. Group of zowcia,
magnified about 260 diam.

k, knobbed cell.

a, knobs. Characteristic of British spectes.

s, Spatulate avicularium.

D, pores round margin between furrows.

Single cell, magnified about 380 diam.

C. A., circular avicularium.

Ch.m., chitinous mandible.

Avicularia, magnified about 380 diam.

a and b are avicularia of the ordinary beak-like
Ly pe.

c and a are circular avicularta, showing mandible
zn two different positions.

Porella tridentata. Portion of colony showing dts-
position of zocwcia, magnified about 260 dram.

a, spatulate avicularium,

b, lateral raised collar, meeting behind in a
depression.

c, median dentzcle.

a, lateral denticles.

RA, median avicularium with rounded mandible.

Single cell, magnified about 380 diam.

a, Spatulate avicularium.

b, median avicularium with rounded mandible.

c, median dentzcle.

d, two lateral denticles.

Ov, vicell.

Mite

{

te ee Ee cer ae Re oe

Plate 5.

Manchester Memoirs Vol. XLIT.

Mintern Bros lith

EM Pratt del

PROCEEDINGS
OF

THE MANCHESTER LITERARY AND
Poa lOsOrhicAkL' SOCIETY,

Ordinary Meeting, October 5th, 1897.
James Cosmo MELVILL, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the
books upon the table.

Dr. C. H. LEES gave an account cf Zeeman’s further
researches on the effect of a magnetic field on light, and explained
the theory of the production of triplets in directions perpendicular
to the lines of the field.

Mr. F. J. Farapay suggested that, in view of the enormous
importance of the question of the duration of the gold supply,
considered from an economic standpoint in connection with the
increasing legislative tendency to base all valuations and all
contracts for long periods ahead on gold, the Council might
usefully elicit from Professor Suess, of Vienna, an honorary
member of the Society, and the highest living geological authority
on the physical formation of the crust of the earth and on the
deposits of the precious metals, an expression of opinion on the
character of the Klondike deposits and also on the South
African deposits according to the latest evidence yielded by the
development of mining. In Mr. Faraday’s opinion, the question
had a scientific importance in economics equal to that of the
duration of the coal supply.

Several members of Council spoke on the subject, expressing
a fear lest the introduction of a practice of officially soliciting

ii PROCEEDINGS. [October 5th, 1897. |

papers might have a deterrent effect upon the supply, which had
hitherto been voluntary, and desiring that Mr. Faraday should
approach Professor Suess independently on the subject.

The following paper was read :—

“A mechanical device for the solution of problems
in refraction and polarization,’ By THomas THorp. |

In determining the relation existing between the angles of
incidence and refraction, the experimental apparatus usually
employed, or at least the simplest form of it, has the character-
istics shown on ig. z, in which AB

fig. 1.
is the direction of a ray of light in one medium, say air, incident
upon the surface of a denser medium C, say water, contained in
a semi-cylindrical vessel, at B, where it is refracted, and then

proceeds to D.
By making AB= BD =1 and putting a the angle of incidence
and # that of refraction, the lines AE and DF are the sines of a
and (3 respectively. ;
| Now these sines are found to bear the same ratio to each
other at all angles of the incident ray from the vertical,—different
media giving different ratios, which are known as refractive
indices. When the angle of incidence is 9o° that of refraction
will necessarily be less than go’, and is termed the critical angle.
From experiments made with this form of apparatus,
however, very little, if any, insight can be obtained into the actual
working of the law of refraction as determined by it. Recourse
must therefore be had to other methods. =

October 5th, 1897.| PROCEEDINGS. ili

In Fig. 2, let a ray of light AB be incident upon the surface
of C, as before, but at one extremity of the diameter of the semi-
cylindrical vessel, instead of at the centre, and let BD be the

Fig. 2.
refracted ray. Describe a-semi-circle BAF having its diameter
BF =BE= 1 and cutting the ray AB in A. Join AF and DE
and produce AB to G, joining EG. Now as AF and DE are
normal to AB and BD respectively and EB=BF; AB and BD
are the sines of the angles a’ and #’ respectively. But a’ is
equal to the angle of incidence a and /3’ to , therefore AB ( = BG)
and BD are also the sines of the angles of incidence and refraction.

Although incidentally interesting it will be readily seen from
the figure that the refractive index of a medium is simply the
time that light takes to travel a distance in the medium which it
travels in unit time in air, or more correctly in a vacuum.

It will now be quite evident that if an instrument be
constructed with BG and BD constant and their intersection
with their normals through E kept all in the semi-circle, the
phenomenon of refraction will be exhibited mechanically.

Some time ago I designed such an instrument which
fulfilled to some extent these conditions. The principle is
shown in /izg. 3, in which AB is made equal to the refractive

iV PROCEEDINGS. [October 5th, 1897.

index, AC being unity and constant, B being movable as desired.
At D is a slide guiding two equal cords of length EA, secured at
E, Cand B. The rods AB and AC terminate in pointers on a
protractor F.

By moving the slide D towards or away from A the varying »
angles of incidence and refraction are shown by the pointers.

Another construction which lends itself to instrumental
requirements more perfectly, however, is shown in fig. 4g, in
which BG is the mean proportional between BD and BC.

Cc
Fig. 4.
In my latest instrument, of which /7g. 5 is a diagrammatic
representation, the above construction is utilised.
A is a slide capable of being moved along the diameter of

October 5th, 1897.] | PROCEEDINGS. Vv

the protractor B. C is a rod of constant length representing the
incident ray and passing through the centre, D, of the protractor
and terminating in a pointer C’.. At its other extremity is a
projection entering a slot in the slide A. E isarod divided into
parts in terms of C, representing the refracted ray produced, and
having the movable projection A’ capable of being clamped in
any desired position on E. G is a pointer normal to F which
represents the refracted ray. H and IJ are the normals to C’ and
F, the latter being movable. These normals can be adjusted to
intersect on the diameter of the protractor, and serve to
demonstrate that the refractive index of a substance is simply a
measure of the retardation in the velocity of the light in the
medium.

The polarizing angle is shown when the normal G and the
incident angle pointers are in the same position on the protractor, ,
but on opposite quadrants.

The instrument is particularly adapted for solving approxi-
mately numerical problems in refraction, as will be seen from the
following examples.

1. Jf the refractive index of a medium is 1°67, the instrument
gives the critical-angle to be 3634”, and angle of polarization 59°.

2. If the polarizing angle of a medium is 60°, the instrument
gives its refractive index 1°73.

3. The inner prism of a direct vision spectroscope is required
to be of angle go® with a refractive index of 1°96, that of the
outer ones being 1°52, required the angles of the outer prisms.

For refraction at the adjacent surfaces put

Set the movable projection to 1°29 and bring refracted-ray
pointer to 45°, when the incident-ray pointer shows 66° or a
difference of 21°: therefore refraction at first surface must be
through this arc (21°).

Now set the movable projection to 1°52 and bring pointer
to show a difference of 21°, we find 31°9° and 52°9°.

go° — 52°9° = 37'1° first angle
45 +52°9°=97'9 second ,,
an? = 45") third) _,

Ya Ss PROCEEDINGS. [October 5th, 1897.

97- 9°

fig. 6.

Numerous examples of its use can be given, but the foregoing
will serve to show the use to which the instrument can be put,
and although its indications will not suffice where great accuracy 1s
required still the results are very satisfactory, and in any case I
cannot but think that it will prove of some educational value in
affording a better insight into the principles underlying refraction
than can be obtained from the usual geometrical constructions.

Professor Lamb mentioned Sir George Airey’s model illus-
trating the refraction of light, and Dr. Lees and Mr. C. L. Barnes
took part in the discussion of the instrument and the geometrical
construction which it is designed to illustrate.

October 19th, 1897.| PROCEEDINGS. vii

General Meeting, October roth, 1897.
JaMEs Cosmo MELVILL, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

Mr. Wilfred B. Faraday, LL.B., Ramsay Lodge, Burnage
Lane, Levenshulme, Mr. William Thomas Rothwell, Heath
Brewery, Newton Heath, and Mr. Charles Henry Wyatt, School
Board Offices, Manchester, were elected ordinary members of

the Society.

Ordinary Meeting, October 19th, 1897.
JaMEs Cosmo MELvIL1L, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the
books upon the table.

The death of Mr. James Heywood, F.R.S., who was the
oldest member of the Society, having been elected in 1833, was
announced, and on the motion of the President, seconded by
Professor Osborne Reynolds, a resolution expressing sympathy
and condolence with the members of the family was carried
unanimously.

Professor Weiss exhibited some flowering specimens of
the plant called Dog’s Mercury, collected by Mr. F. J. George,
of Chorley. The Dog’s Mercury usually flowers in the early
spring, but the plant from which the shoots exhibited were
collected has been observed by Mr. George for thirteen successive
seasons to flower in the autumn. Sir Joseph Hooker, to whom
some of these shoots have been sent, was of the opinion that it
might be regarded as a special form with this autumn-flowering
character.

The PRESIDENT communicated a paper from Mr. PETER

viii PROCEEDINGS. [Movember 2nd, 1897.

CAMERON, entitled “‘ Notes on a Collection of Hymenop-
tera from Greymouth, New Zealand, with descriptions
of New Species.”

This paper is printed in full in the Memoirs.

The PRESIDENT also exhibited, on behalf of Mr. Henry
Hypg, specimens of Stsymbrium strictissimum L. from the banks
of the river Mersey, near Stretford.

Mr. HybDeE wrote: ‘“ The first time I met S. strictisstmum
was in June of last year, on the banks of the Mersey at Stretford.
I went there again this year and found it in three other places,
one of which was at least a mile from the others in the direction
of Northenden. ‘Three out of the four specimens found were in
fruit. Mteracium amplexicaule has been growing on the canal-
bank at Stretford for years. It is fairly abundant on the buttress
of the bridge that spans the Mersey, and looks very beautiful
when in full flower.

“T found Vicza orobus in June of this year on a road parallel
with the Bala road at Dolgelly. I found the Carduus on the
railway embankment near to Patricroft Station.”

Ordinary Meeting, November 2nd, 1897.
James Cosmo MELviL1u, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the
books upon the table.

Professor W. Boyp Dawkins, F.R.S., exhibited a section
of a spruce trunk which had been completely hollowed by the
mycelium of a polysporous fungus. The resinous pine-knots,
however, are left entire, radiating from the centre of the trunk.
He also pointed out that similar pine-knots had been found in
the inter-glacial deposit at Darnten, and had been examined
by him in the Museum at Basle. These pine-knots had been
considered by Professors Riitimeyer and Schwendauer to be the
remains of old basket-work or wattle-work and thus to prove the

[Movember 2nd, 1897.| PROCEEDINGS. ix

existence of inter-glacial man. They are, however, merely the
result of the decay of the wood and are not artificial.

Professor Dawkins also showed under the microscope a
section of Fardel coal, showing a resinous stem or knot from the
original carboniferous plant, while the rest had gone to form the
black substance of the coal.

Professor Weiss made some remarks on Professor Dawkins’
exhibit, attributing the destructive action to the fungus Zrametes
pint, and explained the manner in which the fungus was able to
reach and destroy the centre of the tree.

Professor Weiss then exhibited a specimen of Plowrightia
morbosa, the black-knot, on a branch of the cherry, collected in
Canada, where it has been the cause of considerable destruction
of cherry trees. 7

Professor Weiss also exhibited fructifications of Peziza
@ruginosa, the green-rot of the oak which he had quite recently
collected at New Abbey, near Dumfries.

In the discussion which followed, and which turned mainly
upon the colouring-matter of the wood-fungi, the President,
Professor Reynolds, Dr. G. H. Bailey, Dr. F. H. Bowman, and
Mr. Stirrup took part. Professor Dixon referred to a paper read
at the British Association Meeting, at Montreal, in 1884.

Professor H. B. Dixon, F.R.S., described some experiments
in obtaining photographs of explosion-flames, the first attempts
having been made abroad, and also some later attempts of his own.
Slides, showing the course of the explosion flames in tubes, were
exhibited by the electric lantern, and the character of the
explosion as indicated by the photographs was remarked upon.

Professor Reynolds, Professor Lamb, Dr. C. H. Lees, and
Mr. Gwyther took part in the discussion upon the exhibition.

ae PROCEEDINGS. [November 16th, 1897.

Ordinary Meeting, November 16th, 1897.
James Cosmo MEtvILL, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the
books upon the table.

Mr. S. Joyce exhibited a pocket form of volt-meter of the
permanent-magnet class. It is contained in an old-fashioned
watch-case, the first example having been made by Mr. Joyce in
1885. The present instrument is wound to read to three volts, a
reading much required in a cell-tester for users of secondary
batteries. In order to make the case quite smooth outside, the
terminals are formed of two spring-chucks contained inside the
instrument, and capable of gripping ‘any wire from No. 24 to
No. 18, B.W.G. Instruments have been made reading to
120 volts total. .

The PRESIDENT communicated.a paper by Mr, PETER
CAMERON, entitled ‘‘ Descriptions of two New sPesice
of Mutilla from South Africa.”

This paper is printed in full in the AZemozrs.

The specimens were exhibited at the meeting.

General Meeting, November 3oth, 1897.

JamEs Cosmo MELVILL, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

Mr. Henry Wybrow Freston, Parkfield, Prestwich, and
Mr. Charles Edmund Stromeyer, Assoc. Memb. Inst. C.E., Chief
Engineer, Steam Users Association, Manchester, were elected
ordinary members.

November 30th, 1897.| PROCEEDINGS. xi

Ordinary Meeting, November 3oth, 1897.
James Cosmo MELvIL1, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the
books upon the table.

The PRESIDENT announced that the Council had awarded
the Wilde Gold Medal of the Society for 1898 to Sir Joseph
Dalton Hooker, C.B., G.C.S.I., F.R.S., in recognition of his
eminent services to all branches of Botanical Science ; and an
original Dalton Medal of the Society struck in 1864, for 1898
to Dr. Edward Schunck, F.R.S., for his remarkable series of
researches on the natural colouring matters; and also the
Premium under the Wilde Deed of Trust for 1898 to Mr. John
Butterworth, of Shaw, for his paper printed in the last volume of
the Manchester Memoirs “On some further investigations of
fossil seeds of the genus Zagenostoma Williamson.” ‘The date
of the meeting for the presentation of the medals and the
delivery of the Wilde lecture would be announced at a later date. _

Professor Horace Lamp, F.R.S., read a paper “ On waves
in a medium having a periodic discontinuity of
structure.”

This paper is printed in full in the AZemozrs. |

Professor Reynolds, Mr. Tristram and Mr. Barnes took part
in the discussion.

xii PROCEEDINGS. [December 14th, 1897.

Ordinary Meeting, December 14th, 1897.
James Cosmo MELVILL, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the
books upon the table.

Professor OSBORNE REYNOLDS, F.R.S., and Mr. WILLIAM
Henry Moorsy, B.Sc., gave an account of the methods, appliances
and limits of error in the experimental determination of the work
expended in raising the temperature of ice-cold water to that of
boiling water, which they had used in the investigation “‘On
the Mechanical Equivalent of Heat,” which constituted
the Bakerian Lecture before the Royal Society in 1897 ; and
they also shewed lantern illustrations of the engines and apparatus
designed for the purpose.

An abstract of this paper will be printed in the AZemozrs.

The PRESIDENT read a paper, entitled :—“‘Further investi-
gations into the Molluscan Fauna of the Arabian
Sea and the Persian Gulf.”

This paper will be printed in full in the AZemozrs.

Mr. CuarLeEs H. Less, D.Sc., read a paper, entitled:—“A
Method of Determining the Thermal Conductivities
of Salts.”

This paper will be printed in full in the A/emozrs.

October 11th, 1897.| PROCEEDINGS. xiii

[Microscopical and Natural History Section. |
Ordinary Meeting, October 11th, 1897.

Mark Stirrup, F.G.S., President of the Section,
in the Chair.

The PRESIDENT gave an address on Finland, recently visited
by members of the Geological Congress, illustrated by maps
and rock specimens. The geological structure of pre-Cambrian
rocks and the present glaciated land-surface were described ; the
eskers of sand and gravel now used in many instances for lines
of road, the coast islands, forests of coniferous trees and the
innumerable lakes all connected by canals forming a network of
waterways over the whole country. ‘Traces of gold have been
found in the northern parts.

Mr. CosMo MELVILL described and exhibited specimens of
a plant just reported as a native of Great Britain :—namely,
Stachys alpina L. found by Mr. Cedric Bucknill in a coppice
on a hill near Wooiton-under-Edge, Gloucestershire.

Mr. Henry Hype exhibited specimens of Sésymbrium
strictissimum L., a plant new to England, also of Vicia orobus and
Hieracium amplexicaule. See Proceedings of the Society, p. viii.

A paper by Mr. PETER CAMERON, F.E.S., illustrated by
specimens, was submitted, entitled :—* A collection of Hy-
menoptera from Greymouth, New Zealand, with a
catalogue of the recorded New Zealand species.”

This paper is printed in full in the Memoirs.

xiv PROCEEDINGS. [Movember 8th, 1897.

[ Microscopical and Natural History Section.|
Ordinary Meeting, November 8th, 1897.

MarK STIRRUP, F.G.S., President of the Section,
‘in the Chair.

Mr. J. Cosmo MeEtvitt exhibited a large collection of
Alpine plants collected by himself during June and July, 1897,
in the Ampezzo Thal, S. Tyrol, Austria; mainly on the
mountains round Schluderbach, Landro, and Cortina d’Ampezzo
—all of the magnesian limestone called Dolomite. The
mountains range in height from 7,500 to 12,900 feet, being
capped by the Drei Zinnen, Monte Cristallo, Diirrenstein, and
Croda Rossa. Of these the Monte Cristallo, with its glaciers, is
the most conspicuous, and seems to dominate the entire valley.
The Croda Rossa is almost inaccessible, and is one of the finest
of the Dolomite mountains for variety of colours, the red
rock contrasting with the snowfield below. It has thus acquired
the local name of the Mount of the Crucifixion. ae

Between 400 and 500 species of Phanerogams and Ferns were
gathered, the most striking and local being the V/otentilla
caulescens, Phyteuma comosum, Pederota bonarota, Sesleria sphero-
cephela, Artemisia nitida and others, which specially affect crevices
in the living Dolomite. ‘The detritus and stony beds of the
R. Rienz ere it flowed into the Diirren-see, afforded many
interesting plants, such as Zhlaspi rotundifolium, Poa minor,
P. laxa, Cerastium carinthiacum, Papaver alpinum, Scro-
phularia hoppet, etc., and the precipitous woods of the Platz
Wiesen, Eduardfelsen, Schwartzkofel and the Monte Piano,
abundance of Anemone trifolia, Rhododendron chamecistus,
R. hirsutum, Sorbus chamemespilus, Polygala. chamebuxus,
Atragene alpina and Crepis incarnata, while higher up occurred
the curious Ranunculus hybridus, R. pyrenceus, three species
of Soldanella, of which SS. minima is the most elegant,

‘November 8th, 1897.| PROCEEDINGS. XV

Hlorminum pyrenaicum, Gentiana seven or eight species, verna
being the most plentiful. Two species of Daphne occurred, one,
D. cneorum, at 5,000 to 7,000 feet, the other, D. s¢vzatfa, more
alpine. Between Eduardfelsen and the Monte Cristallo Glacier is
a narrow gorge flanked on each side by vertical precipitous rocks,
while the stony bed of a mountain stream, issuing from the
glacier, is between. Beyond this is the most perfect fernery ever
beheld. The ground is swampy, with asmall trickling stream, but
the growth of Cystopteris montana, FPolystichum lonchitts,
Polypodium robertianum, and Asplenitum viride is marvellous.
At a similar place by the Sigmund’s Brunnen, off another spur
of the Monte Cristallo, was found Cys¢opéeris regia Presl.

Above 7,500 feet the plants assume a thoroughly alpine
character. Edelweiss is more plentiful than in Switzerland.
Primula longifiora, Saxifraga androsacea, S. sedoides, Arnica
montana, Achillea moschata and clavenne, Sempervivum dolomitt-
cum, Potentilla minima, aurea, nttida (with pink flowers), being
amongst the more noticeable, as well as many Caryophyllacea.

In the alpine meadows, near Cortina, below the Tre Croci
Pass, and at the Platz Wiesen, below the Diirrenstein, occurred
Gentiana utriculosa, Cineraria alpestris, Cirsium erisithales,
Orobus luteus, Nigritella angustifolia, Festuca pumila, F. spadicea,
Myosotis alpestris, Paradisea liliastrum, known commonly as
St. Bruno’s Lily, Scorzonera aristata, Arnica montana, Crepis
alpestris, Laserpitium latifolium and very many others.

In the (comparatively speaking) low land (4,700 ft.) by the
Schluderbach Hotel occurred Primula farinosa, Gentiana verna,
Pyrola rotundfolia, uniflora, Aposeris fetida, Daphne cneorum,
Bellidiastrum muichelit, Liscutella saxatilis most abundant,
Moehringia muscosa, polygonoides, Dianthus carthusianorum, the
local Laserpitium peucedanoides, and several Hieracia. The chief
trees were Pinus mughus, P. cembra and the Spruce Fir. Dwarf
Birches and many kinds of Alpine Willow were found up to
8,500 ft., most of the latter either by the Sigmund’s Brunnen,
near Schluderbach, or on the ascent of the Toblinger Riedel, on
the way to those three most wonderful peaks, standing alone,
castellated, bare, and precipitous, the Drei Zinnen.

xvi _ PROCEEDINGS. [Movember Sth, 1897.
Mee... &

A few interesting Lepidoptera, Coleoptera, and other insects
were noticed, including Pieris callidice, which affected mountain
tops, in company with a few Zvebie. Only seven species of
Land Mollusca were seen, of them the alpine form of A7vianta
arbustorum was the most frequent.

Mr. THomas RoGERs exhibited a small collection of Bzyozoa,
from South Australia, and described the work among this group
of animals of Mr. Waters, a former resident in Manchester, and a
member of the Society.

Mr. J. F. ALLEN exhibited specimens of Chromium and an
alloy of manganese and tin, requiring for their production the
intense heat of the electrolytic furnace ; also bars of various
sections of manganese bronze obtained by Dick’s extrusion
process, a ram forcing the metal under pressure through openings
of any desired section, Bars and rails of any length can thus be
obtained superior to those of the rolling process. The sections
are fibrous and of much higher tensile strength.

January 11th, 1898.| PROCEEDINGS. xvii

Ordinary Meeting, January 11th, 1898.
James Cosmo MELviLL, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of
the books upon the table.

Mr. R. F. GwyTHER read a paper ‘Ona General Method
in determining the Form of the Velocity-Potential of
Fluid Motion in Two Dimensions across a Channel
with Straight Sides.”

Professor Lamb, F.R.S., and Dr. C. H. Lees took part in
the discussion which followed.

The paper will be printed in fullin the AZemoirs.

General Meeting, January 25th, 1898.
JAmMes Cosmo ME tvit1, M.A., F.L.S., President in the Chair.

Mr. Louis Schwabe, Hart Hill, Eccles Old Road, Pendleton,
was elected an ordinary member of the Society.

XViii PROCEEDINGS. [ January 25th, 1898.

Ordinary Meeting, January 25th, 1898.
James Cosmo Metvit1, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the
books upon the table.

The PRESIDENT referred to the loss sustained by the Society
through the death of Mr. Thomas Ashton, who, since. the death
of Mr. James Heywood, was the oldest member of the Society,
having been elected in 1837. |

Mr. J. J. ASHworTH called attention to a paper by Mr. J.
Smith (brother of the late Dr. Angus Smith) in Vol. XXI. of the
Society’s AZemoirs (1859) “on the origin of colours and the theory
of light,” in which is given a complete description of the colour-
phenomena seen when a black and white disc is rapidly rotated.
As the phenomena have been to some extent re-discovered during
the past few years, and have attracted considerable interest,
Mr. Ashworth thought it advisable to direct attention to a paper,
which appeared to have been forgotten, in which the subject is
treated with great thoroughness.

The PRESIDENT exhibited specimens of gilops, Triticum,
and Agropyrum from his herbarium, as bearing upon the subject
of an enquiry made at a recent meeting of the Society as to the
origin of wheat, Z77t7cum vulgare Vill. being not supposed to
have ever been found in a truly wild condition. Mr. Melvill
particularly pointed out -£gzlops ovata L.., having a distribution
over the Mediterranean region of Europe from Portugal to
Crete, and likewise, according to Boissier (/Zora Orientals, vol.
V. p. 674), extending to Persia, Egypt, and the Caucasus, North
Africa, and the Canary Islands. It does not, however, find a
place in the flora of India, or further East. M. Fabre, of Agde,
announced some fifty or more years ago that this grass, when
cultivated, became wheat. Ina condition of nature, 4. ovata
is more fragile, and the glumes and palez possess a larger

January 25th, 1898.| | PROCEEDINGS. mx

number of awns than in the somewhat muticous or short
awned wheat. We hear that the experiments, carried out under
the supervision of distinguished botanists and agriculturists,
both in England and on the Continent, confirmed M. Fabre’s
discovery, and yet now the 4gz/ofs is not so much considered
the parent of wheat as a wild Z7z¢icum of Asia Minor and Meso-
potamia, viz.: Zriticum monococcum 1., which Boissier (fora
Orientalis, vol. V. p. 673) also indicates from Greece. It must
be confessed that, at first sight, this wheat grass has more the
appearance of the cultivated form, with the more regular spike,
though longer awned than the cultivated Z: vulgare. Another
cereal, known as 7. polonicum, has, however, long awns; so,
indeed, has 7: durwm, with very broad leaves and elongate, hard
grains.

In the just published Alora of Jndia (vol. VII., p. 367), Sir
J. D. Hooker quotes Murray’s article in Watts’ Dictionary of the
Economic Products of India, amongst other references, as to Z.
monococcum L,. being the origin of all wheat cultivated in India.
Ten varieties are signalised as being cultivated in that country,
including Z: sfelta L. and Z: composttum L. ‘This last has been
popularly known as Mummy Wheat, but there can be no doubt
that no seeds found in the Egyptian tombs have germinated.

The chief point of difference between the genera Z7iticum
and 4 gi/ops (united in Bentham and Hooker’s Genera Plantarum,
vol. III., p. 1204) consists in the glumes of the latter never
being keeled or carinate. Z: monococcum in its wild state bears
a certain superficial resemblance to Hordeum or Barley; the
difference between the two genera is as follows :—

Triticum L. Hordeum L.
Spikelets with two or more Spikelets in threes, the side
flowers, all perfect. ones usually barren, none

with more than one per-
fect flower,

M. Alphonse de Candolle, in his Origin of Cultivated Plants
(pp. 354-370), gives an interesting dissertation on the origin of
wheat, and has collated a number of facts well worth perusal,
the upshot being that he considers all wheats emanated from a

xx PROCEEDINGS. [ January 25th, 189&.

common source, distinguishing wheat from other cereals as that
grain which, when ripened, detaches itself from the husk readily.
He subdivides this species into

(a) Common Wheat. Z7iticum vulgare Vill.

(6) Turgid Wheat. T. turgidum and compositum L.

(c) Hard Wheat. T. durum Desf.

(d@) Polish Wheat. T. polonicum L.

He points out that Alsfeld (otan. Zeitung, 1865), having
examined carefully (a), (0) and (c) growing together, was able to
give their common origin. He considers 7: monococcum L. more
allied to the Spelt, Z: Sela L., these being wheats whose seeds
when ripe are closely contained in the husk, and not easily detach-
able from it. Asregards Mummy Wheat, De Candolle points out
that no grains found in the Egyptian tombs have ever been known
to germinate, and that it is a popular fallacy to suppose that they
have done so.

The PrestpENT aferwards communicated a paper by Mr.
PETER CAMERON, entitled ‘Hymenoptera Orientalia, or
Contributions to a knowledge of the Hymenoptera of
the Oriental Zoological Region,” Part VII.

The paper will be printed in full in the AZemozrs.

February 8th, 1898.| PROCEEDINGS. Xxi

General Meeting, February 8th, 1898.

James Cosmo MELVILL, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

Rev. Arthur Taylor, M.A. (Oxon), Manchester Grammar
School, was elected an ordinary member of the Society.

Ordinary Meeting, February 8th, 1898.
JAMEs Cosmo ME tvi11, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the
books upon the table.

The PRESIDENT nominated Mr. Frank Southern and-Mr.
Thomas Thorp to be the auditors of the Society’s accounts for
the present session.

Mr, A. BRoTHERS exhibited and described the latest form of
Mr. F. E. Ives’ photo-chromoscope, called the “ kromskop.”
Stereoscopic photographs were shown in which the various
objects, when viewed through the arrangement of red, blue, and
green glasses, were seen in all the colours of nature—groups of
flowers, landscapes, &c., being thus realistically reproduced.

Messrs. R. H. Jones, B.Sc., and J. Bower, B.Sc., read a
paper (communicated by Professor Dixon, F.R.S.) ‘‘On the
Instantaneous Pressures produced in Explosion
Waves,” illustrated by diagrams and lantern slides, a discussion
followed in which Professors Dixon, Lamb, and Reynolds,
Dr. C. H. Lees, and Mr. R. F. Gwyther participated.

The paper will be printed in full in the Memoirs.

Deon PROCEEDINGS. [March 8th, 1898.

Ordinary Meeting, February 22nd, 1898.
James Cosmo MELVILL,'M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the
books upon the table.

The PRESIDENT announced that Professor Michael Foster
would deliver the Wilde Lecture before the Society on March zoth.

The PRESIDENT exhibited an interesting series of distortions
and hyperstrophical deformities of Planorbis spirorbis L., found
by Mr. Arthur Stubbs at Black Rock, Tenby. These distortions
included (1) evolute whorls, (2) various forms of carination,
(3) sinistral turbinate spirals, and (4) dextral turbinate spirals.
The causes for such malformations are at present practically
unknown, but may be traced to the obstructions to the active but
tender-shelled mollusc caused by duckweed and conferve.

A discussion on the subject of inversion of vision was after-
wards participated in by several members.

Ordinary Meeting, March 8th, 1808.
James Cosmo MELVILL, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the
books upon the table. |

The PRESIDENT announced that the title of the Wilde
Lecture, to be delivered by Professor Michael Foster, would be
‘“‘On the Physical Basis of Psychical Events.”

Mr. T. THorp exhibited some celluloid films taken from
Rowland’s gratings of 14,438 lines to the inch. By making use
of the refractive properties of prisms, the first and second orders
of spectra are obtained by direct vision. ‘The dispersion is such
as to easily separate the two D lines, and is practically normal.

March 22nd, 1898.| | PROCEEDINGS. XXiil

After demonstrating the action of the grating as applied to a
prism, Mr. Thorp suggested a simple form of spectroscope on
this principle, which could be used for solar prominence
observations.

Mr. F. J. Farapay opened a discussion as to the relative
merits of cane and beet sugar, and whether the effect of the
sugar bounties is to substitute an inferior for a superior sugar.
Several members took part in the discussion, the prevailing
opinion being that, while no difference can be detected chemically
or physically between the two sugars, cane sugar seems to be
distinctly superior in its sweetening and preserving qualities.

Professor H. Lamp, F.R.S., read a paper “On the Velocity
of Sound in a Tube, as affected by the Elasticity of
the Walls.”

The paper will be printed in full in the Zemoirs.

Ordinary Meeting, March 22nd, 1808.
JAMEs Cosmo ME tvit1, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the
books upon the table.

The PRESIDENT read a description and exhibited two speci-
mens of Strombus (conomurex) belutschiensts, just discovered by
Mr. F. W. Townsend off the Mekran Coast of Beluchistan.

The description is printed as an Appendix to Mr. Melvill’s
paper on “ Further investigations into the Molluscan Fauna of
the Arabian Sea and the Persian Gulf,” in the AZemoirs.

Professor S. J. Hickson, F.R.S., communicated a paper by
Miss E. M, Pratt, entitled “Contributions to our know-
ledge of the Marine Fauna of the Falkland Islands.”

The paper will be printed in full in the AZemoirs.

xxiv PROCEEDINGS. [December 6th, 1897.

[MWecroscopical and Natural History Sectzon.]
Ordinary Meeting, December 6th, 1897.
MarK STIRRUP, F.G.S., President of the Section, in the Chair.

Mr. John Butterworth, F.R.M.S., Shaw, near ire was
elected an Associate of the Section.

Mr. J. C. MELVILL exhibited forty-three species of Marine
Mollusca, shortly to be described by him. ‘Twenty-eight were
from the Mekran Coast and Persian Gulf, collected by Mr. F. W.
Townsend, and are described in the paper entitled ‘‘ Further
Investigations into the Molluscan Fauna of the Arabian Sea,”
published in the Memoirs of the Society. The remaining fifteen
were dredged by Captain E. R. Shopland in the vicinity of Aden,
and include a most beautiful Ze//ina (Z: manumissa MS.) hitherto
compared with TZ: madagascariensis, a parti-coloured JVassa
(LV. Polychroma), and many other interesting novelties. These
have been described in the Anu. & Mag. Vat. Hist., March,
1898, pp. 194-206.

The PRESIDENT exhibited specimens of silicified wood found
in Egypt. Similar deposits occur in Auvergne, Arizona, Ireland,
and elsewhere. The Egyptian deposits are situate in Wadies,
south of Cairo. ‘The source of the siliceous fluid is not known,
but it may perhaps have been derived from volcanic districts
lying to the East. Entire tree-trunks do not occur, only frag-
ments, broken up possibly by rapid changes of temperature.

January 17th, 1898.| | PROCEEDINGS. SoMy

[Microscopical and Natural History Section. |
Ordinary Meeting, January 17th, 1898.
Mark Stirrup, F.G.S., President of the Section, in the Chair.

Mr. Mark L. Sykes, F.R.M.S., Ardwick, was elected an
Associate of the Section.

Mr. CHARLES BalILey exhibited a large number of specimens
of a floating fern Salvinia natans Willd., found plentifully in
ponds round Berlin and generally throughout Northern Europe,
but not as yet noticed in this country. He described in detail
the floating leaves, the pendant, submerged, root-like leaves, and
- the fructification.

Mr. Mark SyKEs exhibited several specimens of Termites,
so-called white ants, recently received from Sierra Leone, also
their nests, the arrangement and construction of which he
described.

Mr. J. F. ALLEN exhibited a number of manganese alloys,
some of which, after being submitted to a severe strain, had
recovered their elasticity after a lapse of about three weeks.

Mr. PETER CAMERON contributed a paper on “ Hymen-
optera Orientalia, or Contributions to a knowledge
of the Hymenoptera of the Oriental Zoological
Region,” Part VII.

XXV1 PROCEEDINGS. [February 14th, 1898.

[Macroscopical and Natural H¢story Section.|
Ordinary Meeting, February 14th, 18098.

Joun Boyp, Vice-President of the Section, in the Chair.

Mr. RoceErs exhibited a new species of land shell, which had
recently been discovered in Lord Howe Island by Mrs. Water-
house, of Sydney, and had now been named Lxdodonta Water-
housta by Mr. Hedley, of the Australian Museum. Mr. Rogers
also showed several new species of land shells from Trinidad,
which had been recently discovered by Mr. W. Lunt, Assistant-
Superintendent at the Royal Botanic Gardens, Trinidad. Mr.
Lunt has been fortunate in adding considerably to the list of
molluscs hitherto found in that island.

Mr. Rocers afterwards made some remarks on the habitats
and geographical distribution of a small British mollusc Achatina
acicula, an earth-burrowing mollusc, often found in and about
ancient burial places, specimens having been found in the
so-called tear-bottles found in the graves of ancient Greece. It
has now been found in South Africa.

The rest of the evening was devoted to the microscopes. :

[Microscopical and Natural Hzstory Sectzon.|

Ordinary Meeting, March 14th, 1898.

Mark STIRRUP, F.G.S., President of the Section, in the Chair.

Mr. John Mullen, Oldham, and Mr. W. Stanley, Weaste,
were elected Associates of the Section.

Mr, J. F. Allen and Mr. W. R. Scowcroft were elected
auditors.

March 14th, 1598.| PROCEEDINGS. xvii

The PRESIDENT read a paper on “ The Composition and
Structure of Spore-Coals and Bogheads,” illustrated by
hand specimens and thin sections under the microscope, by
which the fundamental characters were shown which distinguish
spore-coals and the class of oil shales known as bogheads. ‘The
differences which present themselves were shown to be mainly
due to the original plant organisms of whose fossilised remains
the spore-coals and bogheads were composed. The “ better-
bed ” coal of Bradford and the Tasmanite mineral of Tasmania
were selected as examples of coals owing their special properties
to spores, or to the reproductive organs of certain cryptogamic
plants of doubtful origin, but whose probable relationship is
considered by Sir William Dawson to be with the Rhizocarpez.
On the other hand, the combustible part of bogheads, such as
the Torbane Hill mineral of Scotland, the boghead of Autun in
France, and the kerosene shales of Australia, owed their remark-
able properties to the vast accumulations of microscpic algze of a
very low order, and so far as.is yet known, without any actual
living representatives. Science is indebted for the latter facts
to the long-continued investigations into the nature of bogheads
carried on by Professors Renault and Bertrand in France.

Mr. Mark Sykes made a short communication on mimetic
forms among Lepidopterous insects, showing some fine charac-
teristic specimens of the genus Xad/ima, including K. inactus,
K. paralekta, K. albofasciata, K. philarchus, and K. Wardit,
from N. and S. India, Siam, Java, Ceylon, and the Andaman
Islands.

Mr. ALLEN exhibited some specimens of an alloy of man-
ganese and silver.

Mr. BROADBENT described Sarcina, an organism observed by
him in manure water.

XXVIil PROCEEDINGS. [April 4th, 1898.

[Mecroscopical and Natural Tistory Section. |
Annual Meeting, April 4th, 1898.
MARK STIRRUP, F.G.S., President of the Section, in the Chair.

Dr. Booth, Swan Street, Manchester, was elected an Asso-
ciate of the Section.

The Annual Report of the Council and the Treasurer’s
Statement of Accounts were submitted and approved.

The following officers and Council were elected for the Ses-
sion 1898-99: President, JoHN Boyb; Vice-Presidents, CHARLES
BaiLey, F.L.S., J. Cosmo Metyitt, M:A., FoL.S2 vier
STIRRUP, E-G.S.;. Treasurer, G. HH. BROADBENT, MERaG@sSe
Secretary, T. SInGToN; Council, J. F. ALLEN, W. E. Hoyts,
M.A:, H. Hypn EF. NicsoLson, F.Z:53) Ty RocrRs Gamer
SCHILL, W. R. SCOWCROFT.

Mr. BroapBENT described some observations made by him
on Vorticelle, their life-work and mode of attachment.

Mr. BUTTERWORTH described and exhibited an apparatus
for observing the development of low forms of aquatic life, con-
sisting of a circular metal plate with a rim, containing several
layers of flannel, kept well moistened, covered with a glass shade,
under which is a zinc frame with trays for the brass or glass
animalcule troughs or slips. With this apparatus the objects to
be studied can be watched day by day for weeks, the daily
changes being easily noted.

Mr. STIRRUP exhibited zircons, garnets, and sapphires occur-
ring in the volcanic rocks of Le Puy, Haute Loire, France.
Those shown were found on Mont Mezen. They also occur
in volcanic rocks, near the Rhine, at Andernach.

Mr. T. RoceErs exhibited a number of fresh-water shells cbr
lected from mud flats at Loando, Africa, all the specimens being
sinistral. ‘They included three species of AZelodomus from Zan-
zibar, Zululand, and the Quanze River, Angola, S. W. Africa
respectively. The species of dZelodomus are nearly allied to
those of Paludina and Ampullaria.

March 29th, 1898.| | PROCEEDINGS. Xia

Special Meeting, March 2gth, 1898.
JaMEs Cosmo MELvILL, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

The meeting was specially convened for the presentation of
the Wilde and Dalton Medals and of the premium, and for the
delivery of the Wilde Lecture for 1898. There was a large
attendance of members and friends.

The PRESIDENT, in his opening remarks, referred to the fact
that last year, when the Wilde Medal was presented for the first
time, Dr. Schunck stated at length the particulars of the generous
benefactions of Mr. Wilde, and said that it was, therefore, not
necessary to again speak of these except to express their con-
tinued sense of indebtedness to Mr. Wilde. The Wilde Medal
for this year had been awarded, by the unanimous vote of the
Council, to Sir JosEpH DaLton Hooker, G.C.S.I., C.B., F.R.S.

In presenting the Wilde Medal for 1898 to Sir Joseph
Hooker, the President spoke as follows :—

“The name of Hooker has been associated with botanical
progress during nearly the whole of the present century. Sir
William Jackson Hooker, the father of Sir Joseph, had been
appointed, in 1820, Regius Professor of Botany at Glasgow
University, and, in 1844, was made Director of Kew Gardens,
which post he held until his death in August, 1865, being
succeeded by his son, who continued to hold the office for more
than twenty years. But Sir Joseph is also known to fame as a
traveller. His first journey, early in the forties, was to the Ant-
arctic regions, including visits to New Zealand, the Auckland and
Campbell Islands, the Strait of Magellan, and the Falkland
Islands. The southernmost shores of Australia, particularly
Tasmania, were also explored, the results being embodied in the
Floras of Tasmania and New Zealand, and the Botany of the
Antarctic Voyage. A few years later, in 1848, in company with
Mr. Thomson, he essayed a comprehensive botanical journey to
India, the first fruits of which were his delightful journals of the
Himalayan region, and the beautiful work on the Rhododendrons

DO. 6 PROCEEDINGS. [March 29th, 1898.

of the Sikkim Himalaya, likewise the first volume (all published)
of a Flora of India. This was never finished in its present form,
but his magnum opus, completed late last year in seven volumes,
on the Flora of India, will remain for all time a memorial of its
author. He might exclaim with Horace: ‘Exegi monumentum
ere perennius.’ ‘The twentieth century is hardly likely to improve
upon the nineteenth in respect of Systematic Botany, and I think
Sir Joseph is happy in having lived during a period in which such
wonderful investigations and discoveries were possible. I would
also like to mention the /udex Kewensis, completed during the
last decade of this century, a catalogue, arranged alphabetically,
of all known phanerogamic plants, the idea of which, inaugurated
by Charles Darwin, had, at his expense, been so well carried
out by Mr. Daydon Jackson, under the auspices of Sir Joseph
Hooker.”

Sir JosepH HooKER, in replying, said the great honour which
the Society had conferred upon him by the award of the Wilde
Medal was rendered doubly grateful by the fact that Manchester
held a place amongst his very earliest botanical reminiscences.
He was born a muscologist, and very early—in the first decade
of the eighty years that had passed over him—he was a collector
of mosses. He was stimulated in the pursuit by a book in his
father’s library bearing the title of “‘Musci Britannici,” by Edward
Hobson, of Manchester. Later on, when still in his teens, he
aided a young Glasgow botanist in collecting specimens for a
work he had in preparation on the lines of Hobson’s. Man-
chester, indeed, was famous as a school of muscologists in the
first half of the century, and he need not recall to their memory
the names of John Nowell and Richard Buxton as forming, with
Hobson, a celebrated trio, distinguished for their critical know-
ledge of British mosses. A well-remembered Manchester friend
of his early youth was Thomas Glover, of Smedley Hill, an
excellent botanist and entomologist. Mr, Glover invited him to
Smedley Hill to see his beautiful collection of insects and rare
garden plants, and, though this was 65 years ago, he noticed that
the latter suffered a good deal from the city smoke. His

March 29th, r898.| | PROCEEDINGS. XXM1

next visit to Manchester, after an interval of a dozen years
or more, was to examine in the Museum some coal fossils
for the Geological Survey of Great Britain, to which institution
he was for a short time attached. Still later he had the
pleasure of the friendship of Mr. Binney, who asked his
assistance in investigating the flora of the coal measures. But
of all his Manchester fellow-botanists there was none to whose
friendship and correspondence he looked back with greater
pleasure than to that of the famous palzeo-botanist and accom-
plished naturalist Professor Williamson. It was indeed a privilege
-to be consulted by Professor Williamson, and to be kept informed
of the progress of the wonderful collection he was making and
illustrating with a disinterested zeal that overcame all obstacles.
The magnificent series of papers on the organisation of the fossil
plants of the coal measures which Professor Williamson presented
to the Royal Society was unrivalled for the wealth of material
they contained on that subject. As further examples of the
influence of the Manchester school of botany, if he might so call
it, he mentioned the names of the Rev. the Hon. W. Herbert,
at one time Dean of Manchester, and the late Mr. Clowes, of
Broughton. In concluding, Sir Joseph said that in accepting
this gratifying assurance of the Society’s sympathy for his labours
he was far from regarding it as solely personal. No man could say
that his merits, be they what they might, were all his own. For
his own part, he could claim to have had a persistent love of
knowledge for its own sake from his earliest years, but that
would have availed him little had he not felt from the first the
guiding hand of a parent who had himself attained eminence,
and who, by example, precept and encouragement, kept him to
his purpose, launched him in the fields of exploration and
research, and liberally supported him as occasion required. He
accepted the medal as a tribute to his father’s memory as much
as to his own exertions.

The President then presented to Dr. Epwarp ScHUNCK,
Ph.D., F.R.S., the Dalton Medal—this being the first occasion
on which this medal has been presented—and said that Dr.

poem PROCEEDINGS. [March 29th, 1898.

Schunck might be called the “father” of the Society. He had
been a member for 56 years, and had held the office of President
four times. He had contributed most important papers on
various dyes and colouring matters, and it was for these and the
life-long services he had given for the advancement of science
that the Council had awarded him the medal.

In his reply, Dr. ScHuNcK said that his labours had been
confined to a very small department of chemistry, but a depart-
ment which was very important. He would like very much, if he
could, to add to these labours, but he was afraid that at his age
it was hardly possible to do important work, and no doubt many
would say that it was better that he should not attempt it. He
had two or three irons in the fire, but whether he would ever
take them out he did not know.

In handing the Wilde Premium for 1898 to Mr. JoHN
BUTTERWORTH, F.R.M.S., the President stated that it had been
awarded by the Council in recognition of the excellent work done
by Mr. Butterworth, more especially in regard to the flora of the
coal measures. ,

Mr. BUTTERWORTH expressed his thanks to the Society for
the honour it had done him, and said that he had worked for
nearly thirty years with the late Professor Williamson, and had
contributed materials for a considerable portion of the memoirs.
He regretted that in his early days he had not had the ad-
vantages of systematic instruction; with him it had been a case
of the night school and the solitary candle. He had pursued
the study of geology purely for the love of it, and had found
great enjoyment among the flora of the coal measures.

This brought the first part of the proceedings to a close.
The members then adjourned to the Library, where the Wilde
Lecture, “‘On the Physical Basis of Psychical Events,”
was delivered by Professor MicHarL Foster, M.A., Src. R.S.
At the conclusion of the Lecture, a hearty vote of thanks
was accorded to Professor Foster, on the motion of the
PRESIDENT, seconded by Professor Lamp, F.R.S.

The Lecture is printed in full in the AZemozrs.

April 5th, 1898.] PROCEEDINGS. SX Xil

Ordinary Meeting, April 5th, 1898.
JAMEs Cosmo MELvILL, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the
books upon the table.

Mr. BROTHERS communicated a note on stereoscopic and
pseudoscopic vision, with the object of eliciting views as to
whether, when the stereoscopic effect of stereoscopic pictures
is seen without the use of an instrument, the effect can be said
to be caused by “squinting.”

A discussion followed, in which opinion was divided as to
whether squinting was the correct definition of the cause. It
was held that for true stereoscopic vision the axes of the eyes are
constrained to be parallel, and that the term squinting applied
more properly to the crossing of the axes which produces the
inverted stereoscopic appearance. In both cases, there is an
unnatural strain if that constitutes squinting.

Mr. F. J. FARADAY communicated a paper by Professor
SUEss, of Vienna, on “ The New Gold Discoveries.”

The paper is printed in full in the Memoirs.

Mr. W. E. HoyLe described a bone supposed to be the
pelvic bone of a whale.

Mr. H. Botton read a paper entitled: “ The Paleontology
of the Slates of the Isle of Man,” and exhibited several
specimens to illustrate it. After a critical summary of previous
literature, the author described the occurence of characters of
certain worm-burrows and castings, graptolites, and the impres-
sion of a trilobite. It was shown that, notwithstanding the work
of geologists for nearly a hundred years, not more than half-a-
dozen species of fossils from slate are yet known, and that these
are not sufficient of themselves to determine the stratigraphical
position of the Slates, which is, therefore, still uncertain.

Mr. Bolton was of opinion that the specimens he exhibited

Sty PROCEEDINGS. [April roth, 1898.

and described indicated an horizon between the Lingula Flags
and the Arenig Series.

The paper will be printed in full in the next volume of the
Memotrs.

Annual General Meeting, April 19th, 1898.
James Cosmo MELvILL, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

The Annual Report of the Council and the statement of
accounts were presented, and it was resolved :—“ That the Annual
Report, together with the statement of accounts, be adopted, and
be printed in the Society’s Proceedings.”

On the motion of Mr. CHaRLEs BAILEy, seconded by Mr.
NICHOLSON, it was resolved :—“ That the system of electing
Associates of the Sections be continued during the ensuing
session.”

The following members were elected officers of the Society
and members of the Council for the ensuing year :—

President: JAMES CosMo MELviLL, M.A., F.L.S.

Vice-Presidents : OSBORNE REYNOLDS, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S. ;
ARTHUR SCHUSTER, Ph.D., F.R.S.; CHarLes BaiLey, F.LS. ;
W. H. JoHnson, B.Sc.

Secretaries : R. F. GwyTH_ER, M.A.; FRANcIs JONES, F.C.S.

Treasurer: J. J. ASHWORTH.

Librarian: W. E. Hoye, M.A., M.Sc.

Other Members of the Counctl: HAROLD B. Dixon, M.A.,
F.R.S. ; Horace Lams, M.A., F.R.S.; Francis NICHOLSON,
F.ZS. 3°. VES KING} MvAsis ORS Ice) Davior,, iC.S7) hee
FARADAY, Eile: |

April 19th, 1598.) |= PROCEEDINGS. XXXV

Ordinary Meeting, April roth, 1898.
JaMEs Cosmo MELVILL, M.A., F.L.S., President, in the Chair.

The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the
books upon the table.

Mr. CHARLES BalILeEy exhibited some living plants of
Jacquin’s oxlip (Primula elatior), which he had gathered ten
days ago in a wood on Mrs. Rayment’s estate at Tindon End,
near Thaxted, Essex. He pointed out its peculiar distribution
in England—where it is confined to an area within the triangle
formed between St. Neots in Huntingdon, Stowmarket in Suffolk,
and Bishop Stortford in Hertfordshire—and explained the
botanical characters which separate it from the primrose and
cowslip. Mr. Miller-Christy in his very interesting paper, read
before the Linnean Society last November, refers to the strong
scent of the oxlip, but Mr. Bailey in the large number of plants
he examined last week in Essex, was rather struck with the
absence of odour in the oxlip, especially compared with the
cowslip or primrose. With it he exhibited a flower-scape, from
a root which he brought some years ago from Gloddaeth, near
Llandudno, which was a natural hybrid between the cowslip and
the primrose, and which flowered every spring in his garden.
Such hybrids generally pass for the true oxlip; and they are
not infrequent in districts where both parents occur; in the
neighbourhood of Manchester he had found this spurious oxlip
at Ashley, at Mobberley, and in several places in Derbyshire.

xo Annual Report of the Council.

Annual Report of the Council, April, 1898.

The Society began the session with an ordinary membership
of 161. During the present session 7 new members have joined
the Society ; 9 resignations have been received, and the deaths
have been 7, viz.: Rev. G. H. G, Anson, M.A.; Mr. Thomas
Ashton, LL.D.; Mr. William Grimshaw ; Mr. Peter Hart; Mr.
James Heelis; Mr. James Heywood, F.R.S., F.G.S.; and Mr.
John Ramsbottom, M.Inst.C.E. This leaves on the roll 152
ordinary members. The Society has also lost 4 honorary
members by death, viz.: Francesco Brioschi; Professor Victor
Meyer, Ph.D.; Professor Julius von Sachs, Ph.D., For. Mem.
R.S. ;, and, Professor E, J. Stone, M.A., F.R'S, "Memorial
notices of these gentlemen appear at the end of this report.

The Treasurer commenced the year with a balance in
favour of the Society of £375. 4s. 34d. (including £463. 4s. 2d.,
balance of the Wilde Endowment Fund), and reports that the
total balance, including the Wilde and Joule Funds, and not
including the amount still owing by the Natural History Fund,
in hand and at the bankers, at the close of the yeareus
L230 nos. 7ae

The state of the floor of the old Tea Room, above the
Meeting Room, has for years been so unsatisfactory as almost to
preclude the use of the room, and the renewal of the floor could
not have been long delayed without danger. The constant
growth of the library has also made the provision of additional
bookcases a matter of almost immediate urgency. The floor
has, therefore, been relaid in so substantial a manner that it will
now carry the weight of bookcases, and the room will constitute
a material addition to the space which can be used for library
purposes.

The re-cataloguing of the library has been continued during

Annual Report of the Council. XXXVII

the session, 6,063 volumes having been catalogued, stamped,
and pressmarked, 5,537 of these being serials, and 526 separate
works. The latter belong to the following branches of science:
Astronomy, Botany, and Medicine. There have been written
2,016 catalogue cards; 1,400 for serials, and 616 for separate
works. The total number of volumes catalogued to date is
8,744, for which 3,290 cards have been written, and for these
latter a cabinet has been purchased, which now stands in the
Secretaries’ room.

The shelf list, which was commenced last session, has been
continued, and will prove useful to members as a subject-index
to the separate works.

During the session, 234 volumes have been borrowed from
the library, as compared with 124 volumes in the previous
session, and it is hoped that, as the cataloguing progresses and
affords increased facilities for quickly finding any work required,
members will make still further use of the valuable collection of
books possessed by the Society.

Especial attention has been paid to the completion of sets,
where possible, with the result that 189 volumes or parts have
been obtained which render 32 sets complete, whilst 210 volumes
have been acquired which partly complete 37 sets. Of this
total of 399 volumes, 155 were purchased (including 76
volumes of the Aznales de Chimie et de Physique and 48 volumes
of the American Journa! of Science), the remainder being pre-
sented by the respective societies publishing them.

Slightly less binding has been done than last session, 363
volumes having been bound in 301, whilst 17 volumes have
undergone repair. There are about 4,000 volumes in the library
still unbound, which number is constantly being added to, so
that in order to overtake the arrears of binding within ten years,
and to provide for the annual increase in the library during that
time, it will be necessary to bind about 800 volumes, at an
approximate cost of about £100, each year.

XXXViili Annual Report of the Council.

During the three months January-March, 1898, a record has
been kept of the accessions to the library, showing that, during
that period, 261 serials and 11 separate works were received, a
total of 272 volumes. The donations during the session (exclu-
sive of the usual exchanges) amount to 68 volumes and 120
dissertations ; and g books have been purchased (in addition to
the periodicals on the regular subscription list).

The Society has arranged to exchange publications with the
following : Conchological Society of Great Britain and Ireland ;
Université de Lyon ; Goteborgs Stadsbibliotek ; Kazsas Univer-
sity Quarterly, Lawrence ; Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis ;
and the Queensland Museum, Brisbane.

The undermentioned periodicals have been added to the
list of those subscribed for by the Society :—Watural Science
(London) ; Proceedings of the Malacologtcal Society (London) ;
Science Progress (London); Zoologische Jahrbiicher (Jena) ;
Journal fiir Ornithologie (Leipsic); Mathematische Annalen
(Leipsic) ; American Journal of Science (New Haven) ; and Zhe
Auk (New York).

The printing of the list of serial publications referred to in
the last report has been delayed owing to the decision of the
Council to make a catalogue of the scientific serials available in
Manchester, as far as lists can be officially obtained, with an
indication of the libraries in which they are to be found. The
negotiations have made considerable progress.

The Council appointed the Assistant Secretary and Librarian
to represent the Society at the second International Library
Conference, which met in London in July last, and was attended
by a large number of delegates from Great Britain and abroad. |

The Council has awarded :—

The Wilde Medal for 1898 to Sir Joseph Dalton Hooker,
G.C.S.1,, CoB A oR. Ss in recognition of the eminent services he —
has rendered to all branches of botanical science ;

A Dalton Medal (struck in 1864) to Dr. Edward Schunck,
F.R.S., for the remarkable series of researches on the natural

Annual Report of the Council. XM

colouring matters with which he has enriched Chemistry, and
in appreciation of the life-long services which he has rendered,
in particular, to the advancement of science in Manchester ;
and

The Wilde Premium for 1898 to Mr. John Butterworth,
F.R.M.S., for his memoir read before the Society on ‘‘Some
further investigation of fossil seeds of the genus Lagenostoma
(Williamson) from the lower coal-measures, Oldham,” in con-
tinuation of his researches in the structure of fossil plants of the
coal-measures.

Professor Michael Foster, Sec.R.S., was appointed to deliver
the Wilde Lecture.

The Council arranged that the Medals should be presented
and the Wilde Lecture delivered on Tuesday, March 2oth,
1898.

Professor FRANCESCO BRIOSCHI was the author of many highly
original investigations in Pure Mathematics and Analytical
Mechanics. He was associated with Hermite in the development
of the Theory of Invariants founded by Boole, Cayley, and
Sylvester, and made notable contributions to the Theory of Equa-
tions and to Solid Geometry. He held many important scientific
posts ; in addition to his official position as Director of the Milan
Polytechnic, he was editor of the Avnali di, Matematica; and the
great veneration in which he was held by his colleagues in Italy is
shewn by the fact that he was made President of the Accademia
dei Lincei in 1884, and thereafter regularly re-elected at the expi-
ration of each quadrennial period. He was a Senator of the
Kingdom of Italy, and at various times did work of a more or less
official character in connection with the Budget, the organisation
of the railway system, and the Department of Public Instruction.
He died on December 13th, 1897, at the age (almost) of 73
years. He had been an honorary member of our Society since 1892.

A highly appreciative account of his scientific labours
appeared in the Comptes Rendus for December 27, 1897, from
the pen of his friend and collaborateur, Hermite. me

xl Annual Retort of the Council.

By the death of VicroR MEYER, the Society loses one of its
most distinguished honorary members, and science one of its
greatest teachers and discoverers. He died young—he was not
quite forty-nine—and it might have been hoped that there were
many years of work still before him, but his health broke down,
and, worn out with pain and insomnia, he committed suicide
on August 8, 1897.

Victor Meyer began his chemical studies under Bunsen, at
Heidelberg, and continued them under Baeyer, at Berlin. He
held appointments successively at Stuttgart, Ziirich, Gottingen,
and finally, at Heidelberg, where he succeeded to the chair of
Chemistry on the retirement of Bunsen.

It is impossible here to give details of his investigations,
which began about 1870, and were continued till his death ; it
must suffice to mention some of the most important. He dis-
covered nitro-ethane and its homologues, and by acting on these
bodies with nitrous acid, he obtained nitrolic acid and pseudo-
nitrols. ‘Ten years later he found that iso-nitroso compounds
are formed by the action of hydroxylamine on aldehydes and
ketones, and that this reaction is of general application.

In 1882, Meyer discovered in ordinary benzene a new con-
stituent, to which he gave the name thiophene ; and, in 1888,
he was able to publish, under the title of ‘“‘ Die Thiophen-gruppe,”
a very complete account, not only of this interesting body, but
of many of its derivatives. Mention must also be made of his
discovery of the oximes and of the group of bodies obtained
from the hypothetical iodonium hydroxide.

Lastly, but certainly not least in importance, is Victor Meyer’s
work on vapour density, and the simple methods he devised for
making that important determination. The earlier methods
were direct—a certain volume of the vapour was obtained and
its weight ascertained, or a definite weight of a substance was
vaporised, and the volume occupied by the vapour ascertained— —
but they were liable to error, and difficult to execute. It was
reserved for Victor Meyer to show how much easier it was to
make the method zzdirect—to volatilize a definite weight of the

Annual Report of the Council. xli

substance in a suitable apparatus and measure the volume of air
it displaced. The advantages of the new method were speedily
recognized, and its use is now universal. It falls to the lot of
comparatively few chemists to invent an apparatus or discover a
process which is adopted in every laboratory ; this is certainly
the case with Liebig and with Bunsen, and to their honoured
names must be added that of Victor Meyer. ES le

By the death of JuLius Sacus, on May 2oth, 1897, one of
the most ardent workers in Botanical Science has been lost.
Not only have his labours largely enriched our knowledge of
Plant Physiology, which he had made his special study, but his
infectious enthusiasm for this branch of Botany has caused enor-
mous advances to be made by those Botanists who were privileged
to work under his stimulating guidance. Among these are
numbered most of the Vegetable Physiologists both of ingland
and the Continent, including such men as Francis Darwin, Vines,
Marshall Ward, Brefeld, Pfeffer and Reinke. Born in 1832, in
Breslau, Julius Sachs received from his father, an engraver,
considerable encouragement for the development of his artistic
faculties, and his early training in drawing and painting stood
him in good stead in afterlife. His enthusiasm for Natural
History, however, was kindled by his intercourse with the sons
of the physiologist Purkynje, with whom he went out collecting
plants for the herbarium which he commenced while at school.
Later on, when Purkynje was appointed to the University of
Prague, he engaged Sachs as his draughtsman. His connection
with Purkynje no doubt determined the direction of his subse-
quent work, and, after having taken his degree at Prague, he
established himself there as lecturer in Vegetable Physiology—a
branch of Botany which it was usual at that time to dismiss with
a very few words. Largely owing to Sachs’s labours, however,
Vegetable Physiology is now so extensive a subject that it forms
a very considerable portion of the study of Botany.

From Prague Sachs proceeded to Tharandt in 1859, to
work out the agricultural bearings of Vegetable Physiology. He

xii Annual Report of the Council.

then lectured successively at Bonn and Freiburg, and finally
was called to the University of Wiirzburg, where he established
himself definitely, in spite of many tempting offers from the
Universities of Munich, Berlin, and Vienna.

It is with Wurzburg that Sachs’s name will always be
associated, and it is here that most of that work was done which
made Sachs the founder of Modern Vegetable Physiology.

His first publication, summing up the older experiments in
Plant Physiology, with the incorporation of the results of his own
researches, was the Handbuch der Experimental-Physiologie der
Pflanzen, published, in 1865, as the 4th volume of Hofmeister’s
Handbuch der phystologiscthen Botantk.

Then followed his well-known Lehrbuch der Botanik, which
rapidly passed through four editions, and was translated into
English and several other languages.

In 1875 appeared the Geschichte der Botanik, an admirable
exaniple of what a history of science should be, and which shows
his critical faculty at its best. This, as well as his Lectures on
the Physiology of Plants, was translated into English. His
numerous papers are characterised by the trenchant criticism of
his opponents, and by the clear and concise language which he
employed in the skilful unfolding of any new results obtained by
his carefully thought-out experiments. j

Sachs was elected an honorary member of this Society on
April 30th, 1872. A complete list of his papers will be found at
the end of the excellent biographical notice, by Professor Goebel,
in volume 84 of Flora. F, E. W.

EDWARD JAMES STONE was born in London on February
28th, 1831. His early education was frequently interrupted
owing to ill health, and his systematic education really began
when he entered King’s College, London, at the age of twenty-
one. In his twenty-fourth year he entered Queen’s College, —
Cambridge, and was fifth Wrangler in 1859.

In 1860, Mr. Stone was appointed First Assistant at the
Greenwich Observatory, where he remained ten years. In 1870,

Annual Report of the Council. xiii

he obtained the appointment as Astronomer Royal at the Cape ”
Observatory, which he held till, in 1878, he was appointed
Radcliffe Observer at Oxford.

In the positions which Mr. Stone held he devoted himself
assiduously to problems of the astronomy of position, and espe-
cially to meridian observations. As evidence of his industry, the
Royal Society Catalogue of Scientific Papers contains the titles of
92 of his papers antecedent to 1883.

It is not here possible to discuss his work at length ; fuller
notices will be found in the ALZonthly Notices of the Royal Astrono-
mical Society (vol. 58, p. 143), and in the Proceedings of the Royal
Society (vol. 62, p.x.).

Mr. Stone was elected an honorary member of the Society on
April 17th, 1894.

Mr. Stone’s death took place, from cardiac failure during an
attack of pneumonia, on May gth, 1897. Only a week previously,
during a visit to North Wales to fish (a pursuit of which he had
always been very fond), his boat had been upset, and, to avoida
chill, he rowed quickly a distance of two miles to his hotel. It
was supposed that he unfortunately overstrained his heart, and
that the accident was the cause of his fatal illness.

On the day before his death he was at the Observatory,
making arrangements for trial observations, preparatory to
observing the total solar eclipse in India in 1898.

The Ven. GEoRGE HENRY GREVILLE Anson, M.A., third
son of General Sir William Anson, was born on July 19, 1820.
he received his education at Eton, Charterhouse, and at
Exeter College, Oxford, where he graduated in 1843. He was
ordained the same year, and appointed to a curacy at Leeds
Parish Church under his future father-in-law, Dr. Hook. Here
he remained for three years, when he was nominated by his
eldest brother, the late Sir J. W. H. Anson, to the incumbency
of St. James’s, Birch-in-Rusholme, which he held until his death,
In 1848 he was appointed examining chaplain to Dr. Prince Lee,
then Bishop of Manchester, and, on Bishop Fraser’s nomination

xliv Annual Report of the Council.

to the See in 1870, was appointed Archdeacon in succession to
Dr. Durnford. Bishop Fraser’s regard for him was further shown
by his offering the Archdeacon, in 1882, a residentiary canonry
in the Cathedral, which was accepted. He did not hold the
office long, however, for the death of Canon Gibson, in 1884,
left him no alternative but to give up Birch Rectory and take the
rectory of St. Matthew’s, Campfield, or to resign his canonry. His
strong family associations with Birch inclined him to the latter
course, and six years later (in 1890) he also resigned the arch-
deaconry, being of the opinion that the duties of the office
required a younger man.

Archdeacon Anson was a governor of the Hulme Trust
Estates, a feoffee of Chetham Hospital and Library, and was also
interested in the St. Mary’s Home, Rusholme (which he founded),
in the Manchester Southern Hospital, and in St. Mary’s Hos-
pital. He married, in 1848, Augusta Agnes, eldest daughter of
Dr. Hook, who survives him. He was elected a member of this
Society on January 22, 1861, and was always interested in its
proceedings, though of late years he was seldom seen at the
meetings. His death took place at Winchester on February 8,
1898, the remains being brought to Manchester and interred in
Birch churchyard.

Tuomas AsHTON, LL.D., who died at his residence, Ford
Bank, Didsbury, on January 21st last, was elected a member of
the Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society, August
tith, 1837. Mr. Ashton was well-read in many subjects, and
in full sympathy with both literary and scientific men. An inte-
rest in philosophical as well as in historical studies had remained
to him, perhaps from his Heidelberg days; and the pleasure
which he took in the conversation of the late Professor Huxley,
when his guest at Ford Bank, in 1870, is vividly remembered by
those who saw them together. But his field of action lay else-
where than in the world of letters and science, though he was
brought into close contact and connection with it through his
services to higher education. Of these the most conspicuous

Annual Report of the Council. xlv

consists in the leading part taken by him in extending, and placing
on a basis of permanent efficiency, a Manchester institution
which, before the close of his career, had taken the foremost place
among English University Colleges of the Victorian type. When,
in 1892, Mr. Ashton received the Freedom of the City of Man-
chester—the only public honour which he ever accepted—his
services to educational progress were justly placed in the fore-
front of the record of the benefits conferred by him on his native
county.

Born at Hyde, in 1818, as the descendant of an old and
wealthy Lancashire family of manufacturers, Mr. Ashton from his
early manhood onwards closely engaged in the business of the
great industrial house of which he was ultimately to become the
head. But from an early date he found ample opportunities
both for the exercise of a political activity, of which it is sufficient
to say here that he came to be recognised, during a period of
many years, as one of the leaders of his party in the North of Eng-
land, and for exertions on behalf of the welfare and progress of
the population at large, as well as of those sections of it with
which he was brought into personal relations as an employer of
labour. He was one of the most active members of the Cotton
Famine Relief Committee of 1862, and was identified with the
success of the Arts Treasures Exhibition of 1857. He was
afterwards the first deputy-chairman of the Art Gallery
Committee of the Corporation, and was well known as a
private collector of remarkable judgment. For several years
he held the Chairmanship of the Governing Body of Hulme’s
Charity, to the reconstitution of which his own efforts had
largely contributed, and the Treasurership of the Manchester
College (now at Oxford). He was also an active member
of the Governing Bodies of the Manchester Grammar School
and other institutions, among which he took a special interest
in the progress of the ‘echnical School at Hyde. He was for
many years a Justice of the Peace and Deputy Lieutenant for
Lancashire, and in 1884, held the office of High Sheriff of the
County.

‘xivi Annual Report of the Council.

With the Owens College Mr. Ashton first became: closely
associated in 1867, when at the instance of Professor (now Sir
Henry) Roscoe, F.R.S. he consented to become Chairman
of the Committee then appointed for the extension of. the
‘College. The work of his Committee was completed in seven
years, during the course of which it achieved the re-building
of the College on a new site and scale, the entire. reorgan-
isation of its constitutional and administrative system, involving
protracted Parliamentary proceedings, an extraordinary develop-
ment of its instruction in class’ rooms and laboratories, and
something like a trebling of its financial resources. Mr. Ashton;
besides being one of the most liberal of the benefactors of the
reconstituted College, with which he helped to bring about the
incorporation of the Manchester School of Medicine, was one of
the most energetic and sagacious members of its governing body,
and remained a working member of its Council during the rest of
his life. He had an important share in the transactions which,
in 1880, resulted in the foundation of the Victoria University,
which, without his- advice and- encouragement, would have
remained an academic dream. In 1895, the’ University had
the satisfaction of conferring upon Mr. Ashton its honorary
degree of Doctor of Laws. The College possesses no outward
memorial of his long and unwearying labours-on its behalf,
with the exception of a copy of the First Folio Shakspere placed
as a tribute to his services in the Christie Library by Mr. Edward
Donner, a member of the Council. But his name is unlikely to
be forgotten in the College of which he was the Second Founder,
in the University into the conception of which he entered with
invaluable readiness, or in the City where he was for many years
looked up to as an example, than which this age has eae no
better, of a true Manchester man.

- Mr. Ashton married, in 1851, Elizabeth, dusavieeete of Mer.
S. S. Gair, of Liverpool, who ‘survives him. His eldest son,
Mr. Thomas Gair Ashton, is M.P. for the Luton division of
Bedfordshire. His second son, Mr. Mark- Ashton, died ‘in 1895.
His eldest surviving daughter is the wife of the Right Hon.
James Bryce, M.P. Pee Wve

Annual Report of the Council. ~ xivii

WILLIAM BROCKBANK was born in St. John Street, in this
city, in 1830, which year saw the opening of the Manchester and
Liverpool Railway, in the construction of which his father had
been largely concerned, building the bridge over the Irwell
and supplying the hurdles upon which the line was carried over
Chat Moss. At his father’s house young Brockbank met Dixon,
Locke, and other engineers, which gave his mind a bent which
led his father to have him apprenticed to his cousin, Mr. Thomas
Carrick, then a well-known Manchester surveyor. In 1853, a
partnership was. entered into, under the style of Carrick and
Brockbank ; the firm was largely engaged in railway surveys, and
the s/aking out of new lines; the firm also made the surveys of
the Manchester Corporation Waterworks, as well as the greater
part of the plans (now in the Town Hall) of the completed
works, including the Thirlmere Parliamentary Surveys, in which
the leading share was taken by Mr. T. Silk Wilson, who had
become a partner in the firm ; Mr. Brockbank, in the meanwhile,
had retired from it and was devoting his attention to his large
and increasing business as metal merchant in Manchester and
Birmingham, which became very considerable ; but, like many
other very busy men, he found time to benefit the culture and
comfort of those with whom he was brought in contact.

A descendant of a family who joined the Society of Friends
on its foundation by George Fox, Mr. Brockbank took an active
interest in their welfare. He had an important share in the
initiation and founding of Dalton Hall, a hall of residence in
connection with the Owens College, in Victoria Park, which was
opened in 1882, and has since served as a model for several
other halls of residence in connection with other provincial
colleges. The scheme for such an institution was formulated by
Mr. Brockbank, and was carried on experimentally in Lloyd
Street, Greenheys, as the Friends’ Hall, and its success led to
the larger undertaking in Victoria Park, which has more than
answered the expectations of its founders.

Mr. Brockbank hag a very strong individuality, his imposing
figure and presence, massive handsome head, and his courteous

xlvili_ Annual Report of the Council.

but decisive method of speaking, will not readily be forgotten by
those who came in contact with him. He appears to have early
acquired a taste for scientific pursuits, especially in geology and
horticulture, his first paper in the Proceedings, dating back to
1859, and that of 1861 deal with metallurgical subjects. From
1864 a succession of geological papers appeared, but these only
represent a very small part of the varied information he collected,
more especially the extensive series of water-colour sketches with
which he illustrated his notes, which combined much artistic
merit, with the careful draughtsmanship of a surveyor. His
artistic instincts enabled him to form a very interesting collection
of modern English art, many examples of which were exhibited
at the Manchester Jubilee Exhibition. When the writer was
associated with Mr. Brockbank in 1890, in working out the
details of the Levenshulme railway cuttings, the results of which —
is published in the Society’s A/emoirs, he was struck with the
fertility of resource he exhibited on various occasions, as for
instance, when a strange granite boulder occurred in the railway
cutting, he wrote to all the postmasters in Cumberland and
‘Westmoreland in the neighbourhood of granite bosses, to kindly
ask a local quarryman to send samples of the granites of the
district, enclosing a suitable recompense ; in several cases this
plan was most successful in producing specimens. He was much
interested in glacial geology, and rescued several important
erratics from destruction ; one was placed in the area around the
Friends Meeting House at St. Helens, many others he had placed
in his beautiful garden at Didsbury. In this garden also were
preserved samples of all the different limestones met with in the
Levenshulme railway cutting, and several specimens of the old
wooden water pipes, that originally distributed water to Manchester.
To the botanist and the horticulturist the garden was of the
greatest interest. In it he raised the beautiful double daffodil
from seeds saved from double daffodils of previous growth. Here
also he carried on a most interesting series of experiments with
the crossing of various species of saxifrages with very remarkable
results. His garden was an object of interest and pleasure,

Annual Report of the Council. lie

not only to the initiated, but to more humble members of society,
such as the boys employed on the Levenshulme railway con-
tract, who were invaluable in collecting fossils from the Permians,
to whom he gave a tea in his gardens to their infinite delight.
Each boy collected his store of fossils day by day, and a cart
was sent down every week for them; but the results were not
so satisfactory as Mr. Brockbank and the writer had anticipated,
through a collector with a carpet bag playing the part of the
white bears in the Arctic cachées.

In following up ascientific matter to its source, Mr. Brock-
bank neither studied his time, or inconvenience, or money, when,
with the business aptitude that characterized him, he saw there
was an obvious chance of a successful result. He joined the
Society in 1855. He was also a Fellow of the Geological Society,
the Linnean Society, and the Glacialists’ Association, of which
latter he was a Vice-President. His death took place on
September 18th, 1896. C_.E., Dp-R:

List of Papers read before the Society:—--

[Note on Titanium from Iron Furnaces.] Proceedings, i. (1859), p. 99.

[Notes on the Bessemer Process of manufacturing Steel.] Proceedings, ii.
(1861), pp. 146 and 153.

On the Discovery of the Bones of the Mammoth (Zvephas primigentus) in a
Fissure of the Carboniferous Limestone at Waterhouses, near
Leek. Proceedings, iv. (1864), pp. 46-50.

Notes ona Section of Chat Moss, near Astley Station. Proceeaings, v. (1866),
Pp: 91-95-

[On Hzematite Iron Deposits.] Proceedings, vii. (1867), pp. 59-61.

The Hzmatite Iron Ore Deposits of Whitehaven; Notes on the Aldby
Limestone, Cleator Moor. Proceedings, viii. (1868), pp. 51-56.

Notes on the Effects of Cold upon the Strength of Iron. Proceedings,
x. (1871), pp 77-86.

[Notes on a Specimen of Mineral Wool, and ona Mode of Utilising Slag. ]
Proceedings, xi. (1872), pp. 78-79.

Notes on supposed Glacial Action in the Deposition of Hematite Iron Ores
in the Furness District. Proceedings, xii. (1873), pp. 58-65.

[Note on Specimens of Iron manufactured by the old Bohemian process
from Hematite Ores in the South of Europe.] Proceedings, xii.
(1873), pp. 72-73. |

Notes on the Victoria Cave, Settle. Proceedings, xii. (1873), pp. 95-103.

a Annual Report of the- Council.

[On Granites from Ravenglass and Criffel.] Proceedings, xv. (1876), pp: _
70-71. J

On the Levenshulme Limestone : A Section from Slade Lane eastwards.
-[1883.] Memoirs, Ser. 3, viil. (1884), pp. 125-132; abstract in
Proceedings, xxii. (1883), pp. 61-65. ;

[On the late Dean Herbert’s Illustrations of Flowers.] Proceedings, xxv.

| (1885), pp. 43-46.

The Levenshulme Limestones. Memoirs and eS, Ser. 4, ill. (1890),

pp- 209-211.
Notes on Seedling Saxifrages grown at Brockhurst [Didsbury] from a single
scape of Saxifraga Macnabiana. Memoirs and Proceedings, Ser. 4, |
li. (1889), pp. 227-230. as 7
[Notes on’the Discovery of Estheria minuta var. Brodieana in the Lower
Keuper Sandstone of Alderley Edge.] Memoirs and Proceedings,
Ser. 4, iv. (1890), pp. 12-13 and 31-32. \

[Note on a Cutting of Boussingaultia baselloides.| Memotrs and Proceedings,
Ser. 4, iv. (1890), pp. 13-15.

On the Entomostraca and Annalida in the Levenshulme Mottled Limestone. |
Memoirs and Proceedings, Ser. 4, iv. (1890), Pp- 47-52.—Supple-
mentary Note, pp.353-356.

On the Occurrence of the Permians, Spirorbis Teas: and ‘Upper Coal

* Measures at Frizington Hall, in the Whitehaven District. Memozrs

and Proceedings, Ser. 4, iv. (1891), pp. 418-426.

On the Permians of the N.W. of England. Discovery of two Plant
Beds in the St. Bees Sandstone, at Hilton, Westmorland. JZemozrs
and Proceedings, Ser. 4, Vv. (1891), pp. 66-76, plates 2-4.

On the Artificial Coloration of Flowers. Memoirs and Proceedings, Ser. Ave
v. (1892), pp. 142-144. >

Notes on Gide: eg in Cumberland aad Westmorland. Memozrs and
Proceedings, Ser. 4, ix. (1895), p . 195-205, plates 4-63; abstract in
Proceedings, x. (1870), pp. 19-25. i “a

Papers written’ conjointly :—

On the Liassic and Oolitic Iron Ores of Yorkshire and the East Midland
Counties. By Epwarp Huu and WILLIAM BROCKBANK. _~Pro- f
ceedings, v. (1866), pp. 119-122. ;

Notes on the Geological Section exposed in the Railway Cuene from. .
Levenshulme to Fallowfield. By Witi1am BrocKBANK and C. E. —
DE Rance. Memoirs and .Proceedings, Ser. 4, iv. (1890-91), pp.
Heo 339-352, Ble 5: us ra a

WILLIAM GRIMSHAW was — at Church Kirk, four miles”
from Blackburn, in the parish of Whalley, Lancashire, on January
24, 1824. Church Kirk may be spoken of as the original home
of the great calico-printing industry of ‘the county, the father of -

Annual Report of the Council. li

the first Sir Robert Peel having early erected a printworks there,
which was speedily followed by the establishment of many of the
most famous printing and Turkey-red dyeing works in the same
locality. Indeed, it may be said that most of the printworks of

the district were either direct offshoots of the works at Church.

Kirk, or were founded by men who were trained there. With
this industry William Grimshaw was destined to be intimately
associated, first as a workman and eventually as a drysalter and
colour merchant on his own account in Manchester. Born in
very humble circumstances, Grimshaw’s early life was extremely
hard, affording scanty opportunities for education in those days.
While still a youth, however, he obtained employment at the
Belfield Printworks, with which Dr. Edward Schunck, F.R.S.,
was then connected. Many years after, on his election, February

7, 1888, as a member of the Manchester Literary and Philo-.

sophical Society, Mr. Grimshaw expressed to the present writer
his special pleasure on entering an institution with which Dr.
Schunck had been so long and prominently associated, as it was
to Dr. Schunck’s efforts for the intellectual advancement of the
workmen under his control at Belfield, by means of personal
instruction, that Grimshaw attributed his own success in life.
Whenever, in these recent years, there was a prospect of “ the
Doctor” presiding at the Society’s meetings, or taking part in its
proceedings, Mr. Grimshaw was certain to be found in his place
as an attentive listener. Dr. Schunck has been good enough to
give the writer of this notice an account of the Belfield period
of Grimshaw’s life. “I first knew William Grimshaw,” he writes,

“as an apprentice in the ‘colour-shop’ of the printworks with.

which I was connected. I found him an intelligent youth and
one of remarkably open, ingenuous demeanour, in fact, decidedly
superior to the average youth of his class. Generally speaking,
the men working in the colour department of a printworks are
more intelligent than others, from the fact, I suppose, of their
meeting . with: phenomena which call for explanation from an
inquiring mind. Well, I formed a small class—I don’t think
there were more than 14—for- reading and study, all of them

Ww

lii Annual Report of the Council.

being employed in the works in some capacity or other. The
plan was for each attendant to have a copy of the text-book, and,
after reading a paragraph or two, an experiment was introduced
in illustration. I -look back with pleasure to the hours spent
with these honest fellows—they were so genial and unceremonious.
I always thought it strange, however, that Grimshaw should
attribute his success in after life to the time so spent ; no doubt
he was right, but it only proves again, what has often been said,
that for successful growth an appropriate seed and a congenial
soil conjoined are requisite. After my connection with the Bel-
field Printworks had ceased, I lost sight of Grimshaw, and did
not see him again for many years. When we met again, he had
attained a position very much superior to that of a working-—
man.” Dr. Schunck adds :—‘“‘ Grimshaw’s case shows again
what a large measure of intelligence, energy and moral fibre the
best of our working-men possess. It is on such qualities widely
distributed amongst her sons that the greatness of this country
has been built up.” When he had attained affluence, Mr. Grim-
shaw developed strong tastes for horticulture, and for pictures
and dric-a-brac, the latter passion being largely encouraged by
his long acquaintance with his attached friend, the late Mr.
George Freemantle, the well-known musical critic. His collection -
of paintings by old and modern masters, of pottery and of
specimens of Japanese art-workmanship was a very remarkable
one. But he was much more than-a collector ; he had a true
thirst for knowledge of the history and qualities of every article
he purchased ; and by diligent reading and study acquired an
amount of information, and a judgment which impressed all
who met him, and were truly extraordinary in one who had had
such few opportunities for culture in early life. Asa director
of the Manchester Aquarium, Mr. Grimshaw was associated with
the late Mr. Charles Moseley in a vigorous attempt to maintain
that institution as a means of promoting the study of natural ©
history in Manchester. He was also a member of the Council
of the Royal Institution of Manchester, before the-transfer of the
building and collections to the Manchester Corporation. For many

Annual Report of the Council. liii

years he was a member of the Executive Committee of the
Certified Industrial Schools of Manchester, and was specially
active in that capacity in the management of the Girls’ Industrial
School at Sale. He was also active as a member of the Music,
Electric Lighting, and Gardens Committee in connection with
the highly successful Royal Jubilee Exhibition (1887) in Man-
chester. He gave generous support and assistance in the arrang-
ments for the “mammoth” meeting of the British Association
in Manchester in the same year, and took a not less cordial and
helpful part in promoting the movement for a‘memorial of Joule
in Manchester, which resulted in the fine statue, by Alfred
Gilbert, now in the Town Hall. The catholicity of his tastes is
further evidenced by the fact that he was an equally well-known
figure at Hallé’s Concerts and at the County Cricket Ground on
match days. To his latest years, Mr. Grimshaw continued to
have that “open, ingenuous demeanour” which Dr. Schunck
observed in him as a youth, and a consistent and peculiarly
attractive earnestness of spirit. When struck by the malady
which terminated his life, he faced the inevitable with quiet
courage and resignation, remarking that he had no reason to
complain of the length of years allotted to him; and he con-
tinued almost to the end to visit his club daily, mainly, it
appeared, for the purpose of distributing amongst his friends
nosegays—which he carried inside his hat—from his own garden.
He died at his residence, Stoneleigh, Sale, on March 14, 1898,
and was buried at Brooklands. FE. J. F.

PETER Hart was born at Orford, near Warrington, on June
6th, 1834. In the village school he received a plain education,
and he there came under the notice of Mr. William Beamont,
first Mayor of Warrington, a well-known solicitor and antiquarian,
and, what was then rare, an enthusiastic educationalist.

Through this gentleman, Peter Hart, at the age of 10,
obtained a situation in a solicitor’s office at Tarporley, and he
was subsequently employed in Mr. Beamont’s own office at
Warrington.

liv Annual Report of the Council.

_ In the interval between these periods, young: Hart had been
for a short time at the Chemical Works of Messrs. Tennants, at
Ardwick, Manchester, where his father, William Hart, assisted
Dr. James Young, F.R.S., in the management... In 1849, he
finally relinquished law and returned to the Chemical Works,
After spending a short time in the office he was, to his intense
satisfaction, drafted into the laboratory.

He took up chemistry enthusiastically and ete nial
classes at the old Mechanics’ Institute, in Cooper Street, under
Dr. Allen, and read diligently the chemical books in the library
attached. to Tennants’ laboratory. ‘‘Graham,” “Turner,” and
‘“‘Brande” were his oracles, and he often said in after life that if
he did not acquire as much from them ashe ought, he found
out at least “how little he knew and how much there was to
be known.” The innate. modesty of the man comes out in “=
typical expression. . |
_ In. 1847 and the fall wie years, came Voanbe es dis-
covery of the shale oil process, experiments in which were con-
ducted at Ardwick. In connection with this, in 1851, it was
necessary to make some tons of solid caustic soda from liquid
caustic. This is probably the earliest record of the manufacture
of solid caustic soda in England. - William Gossage was at this
time experimenting (upon the concentration of vitriol) at the
Ardwick works, and subsequently devoting his attention to the
manufacture of caustic soda, took out his well- Kney Patent
in 1853.

In the year 1852, Young left Messrs: ‘Tennante to exploit
his shale. ail process, and Péter Hart became chemist to the
works, at the age of eighteen, oy under his father eae
pg . .

The next year us published. ie ae ieeitiak paper “On a
new method of estimating Tin in Native Peroxide of Tin Ore
in a periodical called Zhe Chemist. awe

The tin compounds in those days were the mordants on
which the dyers and printers mainly relied, the aniline colours
not having been yet invented, the animal and vegetable kingdoms

Annual Report of the Council. lv

supplied the basis of their colours. Numerous and mysterious
were the names under which tin mordants were sold, ‘“ oxy-
muriate,” ‘‘sulphomuriate,” ‘purple spirits,” ‘ blue spirits,”
“scarlet spirits,” “double muriate,” and so on, there being in
many cases a good deal more difference in the name than in the
chemical composition of the substance.

About this time, in connection with this subject, he carried
out important technical improvements in the manufacture of
stannate of soda.

From this time forward Peter Hart was constantly engaged
in original work of one kind or another, either in elaborating
and improving the processes of manufacture carried on in the
chemical works of Messrs. Tennants and elsewhere, or in
improving or originating methods of analysis.

It is characteristic of him that, although his original papers
are fairly numerous, yet the amount of work which he did-in
following out his ideas was very great indeed compared with the
length of his communications. His results were presented com-
plete and fully digested, a paper of a few pages representing
generally months of work and perhaps the study of a year or two.

His genius was essentially practical and simple. Unnecessary
elaboration was a Jdéfe noir to him. Unless he had satisfied
himself beyond all possibility of doubt, and had actually used a
new method of analysis continuously, and satisfactorily, he was
very diffident about troubling the chemical world with it.

His method for the estimation of chromium in chrome ore is
given by Fresenius in the fourth edition of his Quantitative
Analysis. It consists in successive fusion with borax, carbonate
of sodium, and nitrate of potassium, and was subsequently
modified by Dittmar.

In 1860, when the noted Dzyctionary of Applied Chemistry
was published, he, at the request of Sheridan Muspratt, wrote
the article on “Sulphuric Acid Manufacture,’ a sufficient
testimony to the fact that he was recognized as one of the leading
technologists in his own subjects. In connection with -the
manufacture of sulphuric acid, in 1865 he devised an apparatus

lvi Annual Report of the Counezl.

for the rapid determination of sulphur dioxide in chamber gases.
In 1858,a description of similar apparatus was given by F. Reisch,
but it was more complicated and less suitable for removal from
place to place. Davis devised an apparatus similar to that of
Hart at a later date. :

Peter Hart’s connection with this Society began in 1862,
when he was elected a member. He communicated several
papers to the Society, the first being in 1867 “On the occurrence
of Sulpho-cyanates in Gas Mains,” in which was pointed out the
great distance from the source at which this substance is
often found in the mains and pipes, often at the distance of a
mile. A year later he patented a method for recovering the
nitrous gases from vitriol chambers, but the invention “on the
Glover Tower superseded his idea.

The principle of the anemometer for strong or weak drafts,
described by Hart at the meeting of this Society on April 5th,
1870, has received recognition from Dr. Hobson, in Zhe Chief
Alkali Inspector's Report for that year, and from other authorities,
although Swan in the Zvansactions of the Newcastle Chemical
Society subsequently, in 1871, published an account of an
anemometer of his own construction, which involves the same
principle as that of Hart.

Original papers were communicated to this Society~ at
intervals until he joined the Society of Chemical Industry, since
then most of his papers have been read before the latter
Society, which is more directly concerned with his prowilies of
technology.

In 1866, a serious accident happened at Messrs. Tennants’
works to Mr. Hart, senior, which resulted in his death, and the
management and full control of the works then devolved on his
son Peter. Since the death of the subject of this memoir one of
his sons again occupies a similar post, so that three generations
of the same name have now been associated with these works.

In 1885, the situation of the Ardwick works of Messrs.
Tennants had, by the growth of the city, become too confined,
and their removal to the present site in Clayton threw upon Peter

e
Annual Report of the Council. lvii

- Hart the duty of the entire reconstruction of a large modern
chemical works. It is needless to say that under his capable
superintendence a fine, well equipped establishment was speedily
evolved.

In 1887, in connection with the concentration of sulphuric
acid he made some very interesting and valuable researches into
the protective action of a coating of gold on the platinum vessels
used in this process. Heraeus carried this out practically in
1891. (Jour. Soc. Chem. Ind., 1891, pp. 460, 773). He was
one of the earliest members of the Society of Chemical Industry
when it was established in Manchester, and after being a member
of the Committee for many years, was elected Vice-Chairman
of the Manchester Section in 1897.

Being educated in the old school of chemistry, Peter Hart
grew up under the old system of notation and nomenclature, and
remained wedded to them. He always ‘“‘thought’”’ in the
_ grain-decem-Fahrenheit system and the old equivalents, though
of course his recent papers were translated before publication
into the modern system.

After about 50 years of work, his health began to fail in the
early part of 1897, and, suffering a relapse in May, he died on
the 30th of that month at his residence Gransmoor, Fairfield.

Apart from the loss to technical and practical chemistry, the
removal of Peter Hart from the midst of those who knew him,
came as the loss of a friend and comrade, and left a blank which
will not soon be filled. The bright geniality of his presence,
his never failing quaint humour, the direct simplicity and
kindliness of his nature, secured affection for him where many
are fated to be content with respect.

Appearances he scorned, the inner nature of a man was what
appealed to his sympathy, and opinion and advice were
tendered as freely as they were received by him.- “I have
scarcely known anyone who could not teach me something” he
once remarked to the writer of this memoir, and this was
typical of his attitude to the youngest student of science as to
her most famous veteran.

lviti Annual Report of the Council.

The writer acknowledges gratefully the value of the assist-
ance of Mr. Peter Hart’s sons in revising this brief memoir.
A list of published papers is appended.

1853. A new method of estimating Tin in native peroxide of Tin Ore. ©
The Chemist, Vol. 4, 1853, p. 337-

1854. On the estimation of Tin. Chem. Gaz., Vol. 12, es ps 2G aa

On an Anhydrous Persulphate of Iron. Chem. Gaz., Vol. 12, p. 350.

1855. Description of a new Gas-Furnace. Chem. Gaz., Vol. 13, pt ggen

Estimation of Chromium Sesquioxide in Chrome Ore. Chem. Gaz.,

Vol. 13, p. 458. This method is given in Bresoniie: Quantztatzve
_ Analysis, 4th Ed., p. 387.
1859. Researches on a racthod of Nitrous Vitriol estimation, by the reaction
with Urea. Chem. Gaz., Vol. 17, P. 172. Quoted in Muspratt’s
Dictionary of Chemistry.

A modification of Fresenius’ and Wills’ apparatus adapted to the
estimation of Limestone. Chem. Gaz., Vol, 17, p. 174.

1860. Article on Sulphuric Acid manufacture in Muspratt’s Dictionary of
Applied Chemistry.

Article on the Explosive Properties of Mercuric Oxalate. Chem.
News, Vol. 2, p. 46. aus

1865. An apparatus for the RES determination of Sulphur Dioxide in
Chamber Gases.

1867. Method for the estimation of Nitrous Acid in Nitrous Vitriol. |

Note on the occurence of Sulphocyanide of Ammonium in Gas Mains.

Proc. Manch. Lit, and Phil. Soc., Vol..7. pp. 9—10.

1868. Patent for the utilizing of the Nitrous Vapours from Sulphuric Acid
Chambers. (Superseded by the Glover Tower which came into
general use. ) prc

1869. The rapid determination of Free Oxygen. Chem. News, Vol. 19,
p. 2533 Proc. Manch. Lit. and Phil. Soc., Vol. 8, pp. 188—190.

1870. Description of a new Anemometer. Proc. Manch. Lit. and Phi.
Soc., Vol. 9, pp. 152—4 ; Chem. Mews, Vol. 21, p..200. Lunge’s
Sulphuric Actdand Alkalz. ist Ed., Vol. I, p. 331. -

1881. A Sulphuretted Hydrogen Apparatus. Proc. Manch. Lit. and Phil.
Soc., Vol. 20, pp. 96—98.

1882, Estimation of Free and Combined Acid in the Residual Liquor. of

Chlorine Stills. Jour. Soc. Chem. Ind., Vol. 1, p. 308.

Estimation of Chlorine. existing as. Hypochlorite and Chlorate in

Bleaching Liquors. (JZ02d.)

1884. On the Concentration of Sulphuric Acid. Jour. Soc. Chem. Lnda.;
Vol. 3, P- 355

1885. Patent—method of | Sulphurous Acid naaeetat for ‘Bisulphite
manufacture.

1887. Estimation of Sodium Hydrate and Ceanegae in Commercial Soda
Ash. /our. Soc. Chem. Ind., Vol. 6, p. 347.

Annual Report of the Council. lix

1887. Method of cooling water for technical purposes. é¢d, p. 711.

1892. Patent—manufacture of Ferric Sulphate for sewage purposes.

1895. Treatment of Zinc Ores and Complex Ores containing Zinc, Jour.
: Soc. Chem. Ind., Vol. 14, p. 544.

1896. <A feed-water heater for technical purposes. Jour. Soc. Chem. Ind.,

Vol. 15, p. 252.
Hy .G.:

James HeEeEtts.—In a large commercial centre like Man-
chester whose inhabitants are, broadly speaking, all workers,
there must be many who have not the necessary leisure to
develope to the full the talents with which they have been
endowed by nature. Such’ persons. look forward to the time
when they can sever their connection with business and devote
the autumn ‘of their lives to the pursuit of the literary and
scientific subjects which they can only follow in a dilettante
fashion in their busier years.

Such a man- was the late James Heelis, whose premature
death in March last at the early age of 55 1s to be deplored, not
only from its happening far from his friends and from his home,
but also from its coming at the very commencement of the
period of leisure which he had earned i a business career of
nearly 40 years.

Born in 1843, the sixth and youngest son n of Stephen Heelis,
formerly a well-known Solicitor of this city, James Heelis
received the rudiments of his education at the Grammar School
at Sandbach, in Cheshire, from which he was taken in 1861, at
the age of 18, to be articled to his father. He was admitted a
Solicitor in 1866, and in 1868, on the death of his brother,
Thomas Heelis, he was taken into his father’s firm. From this
time until his retirement from business at the beginning of 1897,
his life was almost wholly absorbed with his professional work,
in the conduct of which his great abilities were widely recognised.

Outside the sphere of his business, James Heelis was em-
phatically one of those whose education is never completed ;
who never cease to cultivate and develope the tastes and talents
which they possess, and who add to a discriminating choice of
subjects a thoughtful and attentive appreciation of what they read.

lx Annual Report of the Council.

Mr. Heelis was elected a member of the Society in 1873,
and though unable to devote himself to original research, he was
keenly interested in scientific subjects, and kept in touch with
the latest discoveries of the day. A voracious reader with a
retentive memory, his spare time was occupied with the assimi-
lation of a store of knowledge, the variety and scope of which
was remarkable.

At all times fond of travel, the first few months of his
emancipation from business were occupied with a tour in India,
and it was on a second tour in the East a few months later that
he fell a victim to dysentery at Yokohama. AvA. Gomes

JAMES Herywoop, M.A., F.R.S., the last surviving brother
of the late Sir Benjamin Heywood, died at his residence in
Kensington Palace Gardens, London, on October 17, 1897. He
was born at Everton on May 28, 1810, being the fourth and
youngest son of Mr. Nathaniel Heywood and of Ann, daughter
of Dr. Thomas Percival, one of the founders of this Society. His
early education was received in Manchester, and continued later
at Bristol (under the Rev. Lant Carpenter), Edinburgh and
Geneva. He then entered Heywoods’ Bank in Manchester, but,
in 1829, after the death of his uncle Mr. B. A. Heywood who
_had bequeathed him considerable property, he withdrew and
entered Trinity College, Cambridge. In the Mathematical
Tripos of 1833 his name appeared among the Senior Optimes,
but, being a nonconformist, he did not graduate on account
of the religious test then enforced. This serious impediment he
was in later years the main instrument in removing by promoting
the Cambridge University Reform Bill, which was passed in
1856, and under which he proceeded to the degree in 1857. For
some years he represented North Lancashire in the House of
Commons, and was a liberal in politics.

Mr. Heywood was greatly interested in matters relating to
the spread of education, and was one of the founders of the
Manchester Athenzeum, of which he was the first president, and
laid the foundation stone of the building. A marble medallion

Annual Report of the Council. |xi

of him by John Adams Acton was placed in the newsroom of
the Athenzeum in 1881. It forms one of a group of three, the
others representing Richard Cobden and William Langton, who
were associated with him in founding the institution.

Mr. Heywood was one of the Trustees of the Owens College
by the terms of John Owens’ Will, and was, for some years,
the president of Manchester New College. For several years when
that institution was seated in Manchester, he maintained at his
own expense a lecturer in Civil Engineering in connexion with
the secular side of the College, the lectures being delivered in a
room in his own house in Mosley Street. He was nominated
by the Crown to the Senate of the University of London, and
there advocated the regulations allowing women to take degrees
in that University. .

His scientific work was mainly statistical, and the list of
his communications to the Statistical Society is a long one. He
also wrote on the South Lancashire Coal District, and was
elected a Fellow of the Royal Society, February 7, 1859. He was,
with E, W. Binney, H. M. Ormerod and G. W. Ormerod, one of
the founders of the Manchester Geological Society, and accom-
modated its collections in his house in Mosley Street, situated
where the Clarendon Club now stands, until they were transferred
to the ground floor of the left wing of the Museum of the
Natural History Society in Peter Street. During a long and
active life, he held the positions of President of the Statistical
Society and of the Economic Section of the British Association,
and Chairman of the Royal Historical Society, and was a
member of the first Council of the Chetham Society.

Mr. Heywood married, in 1853, Anne, daughter of John
Kennedy of Ardwick and widow of Albert Escher of Ziirich,
who died in 1872, and by whom he had one daughter. At the
time of his death, Mr. Heywood was the “ father” of the Society,
the date of his election as a member being April 26, 1833.

JoHN Ramssotrom, born at Todmorden on September
11th, 1814, owed his success to his natural aptitude and industry,

Lxii Annual Report of the Council.

and to the opportunities wisely afforded him by his father, who
owned a steam-driven cotton mill, and not to a systematic early
education. He had constructed many machines in his father’s
workshop, and had invented the weft fork or weft stopper, which
is still essential for the high speed of looms, before, in 1829, he
came to Manchester and entered the service of Messrs. Sharp,
Roberts and Co. His industry and ability attracted the notice
of Mr.C. F. Beyer, who, in 1842, recommended his appointment as
locomotive superintendent of the then Manchester and Birming-
ham Railway. In 1857, he followed Mr. Trevithick as locomotive
superintendent at the Crewe Works, and, in 1862, he obtained
the control of all the locomotive works of the Company which
were then concentrated at Crewe. His inventions in the con-
struction and working of locomotives are too numerous to
mention here; the best known are his device for enabling loco-
motives to pick up water from a trough on the permanent way,
and the well-known type of express engine in use on the London
and North-Western line. Thirteen papers in the Proceedings of
the Institute of Mechanical Engineers contain the details of his
inventions. He retired from the service of the London and
North-Western Railway Company, owing to ill health, in 1871,
but, his health being again established, he became consulting
engineer at the Horwich Works of the Lancashire and Yorkshire
Railway Company in 1883, and was elected a director of that
company in 1885. Mr, Ramsbottom was also a director of the
firm of Messrs. Beyer, Peacock and Cec., and his name is asso-
ciated with that of Mr. Beyer in connection with the Engineering
Department of the Owens College. He was a Governor of the
Owens College and a generous contributor to the funds of that
institution, apart from his connection with the Department of
Engineering.

Mr. Ramsbottom was elected a member of the Society on
February 7th, 1854. He died on May 2oth, Boh being in his
eighty-third year.

Treasurer's Accounts. xiii

NotTEe.—The Treasurer’s Accounts of the Session 1897-98
of which the following pages are summaries, have

been endorsed as follows :—

April 18th, 1898. Audited and found correct.

We have also seen, at this date, the certificates of the following
Stocks held in the name of the Society, viz., £1,225 Great Western Railway
Company 5% Consolidated Preference Stock, Nos. 12,293, 12,294, and 12, 323 ;
£258 Twenty years’ loan to the Manchester Corporation, redeemable 25th
March, 1914 (No. 1564); £3,000 (sas Light- and Coke Company [London]
Certificate No. 47,544, Ordinary A Consolidated Stock, Transfer No. 73,627,

th July, 1895; and the Deeds of the Natural History Fund and of the
Wilde Endowment Fund, as well as the deeds conveying the land on which
the Society’s premises stand, and the Declaration of Trust.
(Szgzed)
FRANK SOUTHERN.
THOMAS THORP.

lxiv Treasurer's Accounts.

‘MANCHESTER LITERARY AND

Dr. J. J. Ashworth, Treasurer, in Account with the
& s. d. 4 s d
To Cash in hand, April 1st, 1897 Be ae ans ae ie a
To Members’ Subscriptions :— ° 375 4) 8o)
Half Subscriptions, 1894-95, 1 at £1. 1S od. oie as ae i aye nual (6)
” 1896-97, 3 » ” Ss} 3}
oie, 1897-98, 9 » 9 9 0
Subscriptions:— 1891-92, 1 at £2, "bs. od. 2 2 0
2 1892-93, I 45 29 2 2 0
” 1893-94, 3), OD oe 6 16%e
’ 1894-95, 3 », ” EGS
9 1895-96, 8 ,, ” 16 16 o
» 1896-97, 27 52 55 56 14 0
OB 1897-98, I00 455 D9 a6 a De < 228 18 o
1898-99, 1 ,, 59 Bb 24 bi a0 Be 2 2No
To Wilde Endowment Fund :— — 334 19 oO
Half Subscriptions, pe 98, 7 at £1. 1s. od. as ae a ae oe 77 0
Subscriptions, 1897-98, 3 », 42. 2s. od. sss ae ae Ae Be 6 6 0
Admission Fees 6 he 50 ou wa ne a he wick ss | 02) T2o
To Donation :— — Ay i ©)
G. A. James Rothney, Esq. ae ae aa oe oe te ne ae 210 0
To Contributions from Sections :—
Microscopical and Natural History Section, 1897-58. ae ae a is 5 5 0
Physical and Mathematical Section, 1897- 98 . ys os ae wy ss 6)
To Use of the Society's Rooms :— no ®
Transfer from Wilde Endowment Fund, acs 98 a ee be ae be 50 0 0
To Sale of Publications : ae ie a ae ot 16 6 10% |
To Dividends :—
Natural History Fund .. ots oe oe ae ss as sie ai iSO eee
Joule Memorial Fund os be ig ie oe Ae ae ae An 7 910
To Income Tax Refunded :— -—— 66 14 0
Natural History Fund .. oe “i cps ss ee ce > at 2 010
Joule Memorial Fund 3c be oe ae a sie ae Be ‘ ys o
—_ —- 2 5 10
To Bank Interest Se 40 TI9 0

4883 11 oO
1898.—April 1. To Cash in Williams Deacon and Manchester & Salford Bank, andin hand . £1091 11 7

wih ENDOWMENT

Z£.. ‘s.d
To Balance from 1896-97 Aes 63) 4a
To Dividends on £3,000 leas Light and Coke Company (London) Ordinary @)s Stock . oe 369 15 oO
To Remission of Income Tax, Dh Be aie 1215 0
To Bank Interest ne Pr ve _ i Es af iy ae = © 12 10

£446 7 OM

NATURAL HISTORY

4 s. da

To Dividends on £1,125 Great Western Railway Compan s pipe aS oa ze ae 50 4 2am
To Remission of Income Tax, 18 a 5 i ae ee as 2 010
To Balance against this Fund, April Ist, 1898 93 II Io

4154 16 10

JOULE MEMORIAL

4 s. da
To Balance, April 1st, 1897 ae as ae fs we oe 23) (ome
To Dividends on £2 58 Loan to Manchester Corporation ae aé ae nee Ke ee 7 Oko
3 ae cy ©

eee

#30 15 0

To Remission of Income Tax 1897.. ss ie os on Se Ye -

Treasurers Accounts.

PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY.
Society, from rst April, 1897, to z1st March, 1898.

en Sade ££ sad
By Balance of Wilde Endowment Fund, transferred to District Bank 63°42
By Charges on Property
Chief Rent Ge Tax deducted) 12 9 8
Income Tax on Chief Rent o 8 7
Insurance against Fire m3 17 6
Repairs to Building, &c. . Gis
re eens 102 0 10
Coals, Gas, Electric Light, Water, Wood, Xc. 24
Tea, Coffee, &c., at Meetings 12 0114
Cleaning, Sweeping Chimneys, &c. Ferourd
By Administrative Charges :-— — 41 16 8}
Housekeeper 62 8 o
Postages, and Carriage of Parcels and of ‘‘ Memoirs” 38 9 I0
Stationery, Cheques. Receipts, and Bepressing 716 4h
Printing Circulars, Reports, &c. TX eZ) (0
Legal Charges ac : 2) 2) 9
Miscellaneous Expenses .. mane 3
By Publishing :— eS 129 19 5%
Honorarium for Editing the ‘‘ Memoirs, . a el 6) | ("
Printing ‘* Memoirs and Proceedings”... 120 6 o
Binding ‘‘ Memoirs” 2.0 0
Wood Engraving and Lithography (except Natural History Plates) tr 4. 16
By Library :— —- 183 10 6
Books and Periodicals a ai on Natural Bey) A r5 0
Library Appliances a. using
Binding Repairs . oe) ol
Expenses of Delegate to Library Conference Berd or
By Natural History Fund :— SS - Gs) vl
(Items shown in the Balance Sheet of this Fund) TIO S) 7
By Joule Memorial Fund :—
(No expenditure this session.)
By Balance at Bank .. 186 1m 7
= an ae s hands ST wie Ate.
—— IOt rr) 7

£883 11 o

FUND, 1897—1898.

By Assistant Secretary's Salary, April, 1897, to March, 1898
By Maintenance of Society’s Library :—

Periodicals (to complete sets)

Binding Books in omy

Catalogue Cabinet . é

By Decorating and Electrical Repairs
By Gold Medal and Eepraving Medals
By Wilde Premium , :
By Honorarium to Lecturer ..
By Transfers to the Society's Funds :—
Subscriptions of Members
Entrance Fees ‘
Use of Society’s Rooms

By Cheque Book a
By Balance, April rst, 1897 ~

FUND, 1897—1898,
ey Balance a = , April ist, 1897.

y Natural History Books and Periodicals
By Plates for Papers on Natural History in “ Memoirs”

FUND, 1897—1898.

(No Expenditure this Session) .
By Balance, April 1st, 1898 .

Se ds
38 13 3
Sy Ams) a)
18 18 oO

£154 16 10
—_———_ —__

te Sa Ae

50) D5 0

430 15 0

Ixvi Mucroscopical and Natural History Section.

Annual Report of the Council of the Microscopical
and Natural History Section.

The Council have much pleasure in stating that the
Session 1897-98 has been an exceedingly successful one, a large
number of very interesting and valuable papers and exhibits
having been brought to the meetings.

Several new Associates have been elected, who have added
great strength to the Section, and have made valuable con-
tributions to the proceedings, whilst, on the other hand, no
resignations have been received.

The papers and exhibits brought to the meetings have
generally been more than there was time to read and examine, the
principal contributions being by the Presipent, Messrs.
MELVILL, BAILEY, CAMERON, BUTTERWORTH, SYKES, ROGERS, “i
Hypr, ALLEN, and BROADBENT.

With the increase in the number of Associates your Council
have every reason to look forward to the next session with
confidence.

The Council, Ixvii

ere MOU Nea
AND MEMBERS

OF THE

MANCHESTER

PPreRARY AND PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY.

(Corrected to September 30th, 1898. )

President.
JAMES COSMO MELVILL, M.A., F.L.S..

Pice-Presidents.

OSBORNE REYNOLDS, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.
ARTHUR SCHUSTER, Ph.D., F.R.S., F.R.A.S.
CHARLES BAILEY, F.L.S.

W. H. JOHNSON, B.Sc.

Secretaries.
R. F. GWYTHER, M.A.
FRANCIS JONES, F.C.S., F.R.S.E.

@reasurer.
J. J. ASHWORTH.

Wibrarian.
W. E. HOYLE, M.A., M.Sc., M.R.C.S.

Of the Council.
HAROLD B. DIXON, M.A., F.R.S.
HORACE LAMB, M.A., F.R.S.
FRANCIS NICHOLSON, F.Z.S.
J..E. KING, M.A.

R. L. ‘TAYLOR, F.C.S.

F. J. FARADAY, F.L.S.

Ixvill

Date of Election.

1870, Dec. 13.

1896, Jan. 21.

1895, Jan. 8.
1887, Nov. 16.

1865, Nov. 14.

1888, Nov. 13.
1888, Feb. 7.

1895, Jan. 8.

1894, Jan. 9.
1896, April 14.

1895, Mar. 5.
1868, Dec. 15.

1896, April 14.
1896, April 28.

1861, Jan. 22.

1896, Oct. 6.

1896, Feb. 18.

1875, Nov. 16.
1889. Oct. I5.

1894, Mar. 6.
1896, Nov. 17.

1861, April 2.

1889, April 16.

1844, Jan. 23.

1860, Jan. 24.

1886, April 6.

Ordinary Members.

ORDINARY MEMBERS.

Angell, John, F.C.S., F.I.C. 6, Beaconsfield, Derby Road,
Withington, Manchester.

Armstrong, Frank. Zhe Rowans, Harboro’
Harboro Road, Ashton-on- Mersey, Cheshire.
Armstrong, Geo. B. Clarendon, Sale, Cheshire.
Ashworth, J. Jackson. 39, Sprzng Gardens, Manchester.

Grove,

Bailey, Charles, F.L.S. Ashfield, College Road, Whalley
Range, Manchester.

Bailey, G. H., D.Sc., Ph.D. Owens College, Manchester.

Bailey, Alderman Sir W. H. Sale Hall, Sale, Cheshire.

Barnes, Charles L., M.A., 10, Welson Street, Chorlton-on-
Medlock, Manchester.

Beckett, J. Hampden, F.C.S. Corbar Hall, Buxton.

Behrens, George B. Zhe Acorns, 4, Oak Drive, LE
field, Manchester.

Behrens, Gustav. Holly Royde, Withington, Manchester.

Bickham, Spencer H., F.L.S. Underdown, Ledbury.

Bindloss, James B. Zl Bank, Eccles, Lancs.

Bolton, Herbert, F.R.S.E. 94, Dickenson Road, Rusholme,
Manchester.

Bottomley, James,: D.Sc:,. B.A., F.C.S:
Broughton Road, Manchester.

Bowman, F. H., D.Sc., F.R.S.E. Mayfield, Knutsford,
Cheshzre.

Bowman, George, M.D. 594, Stretford Road, Old T; ee
Manchester.

Boyd, John.
Manchester.

Bradley, Nathaniel, F.C.S. Sznsayszae, Whalley Range,
Manchester.

Broadbent, G. H.,

220, Lower

Barton House, Didsbury Park, Diba

M.R.C.S. 8, Avdwick Green, Manchester.

Broderick, Lonsdale, F.C.A. Somerby, Wilmslow,
Cheshire.
Brogden, Henry, F,.G..S, M.Inst.M.E. Hal Lodge,

Altrincham, Cheshire.
Brooks, Samuel Herbert.
Manchester.
Brooks, Sir William Cunliffe, Bart, M.A.
Street, Manchester.
Brothers, Alfred, F.R.A.S. 78, Kizg Street, Manchester.
Brown, Alfred, M.A., M.D. Sandycroft, Higher Brough-
ton, Manchester.

Slade House, Levenshuime,

Bank, 92, King

Date of Election.

1846, Jan. 27.

1889, Jan. 8.

1889, Oct. 15.

1872, Nov. 12.

1896, Nov. 3.
1894, Nov. 13.

1893, Jan. 10.
1854, April 18.

1895, April 9.
1895, April 30.

1884, Nov. 4.
1895, April 30.

1859, Jan. 25.

1895, Nov. 12.

1896, Nov. 3.

1876, April 18.

1853, April 19.

1895, April 9.

1894, Mar. 6.
1879, Mar. 18.
1887, Feb. 8.

1896, Oct. 20.

fees, Oct, 2.

1897, Oct. 19.

Ordinary Members. lxix

Browne, Henry, M.A. (Glas.), M.R.C.S. (Lond.), M.D.

(Lond.) Zhe Gables, Victoria Park, Manchester.
Brownell, T. W., F.R.A.S. 64, Upper Brook Street,
Manchester.

Budenberg, C. F., M.Sc., M.Inst.M.E. Bowdon Lane,
Marple, Cheshire.

Burghardt, Charles Anthony, Ph.D.
Manchester.

Burke, John, B.A. Owens College, Manchester.

Burton, Wm., F.C.S. Zhe Hollies, Clifton Junction, near
Manchester.

35, Fountain Street,

Chadwick, W. I. 26, King Street, Manchester.

Christie, Richard Copley, M.A., 2zbsden, near Bagshot,
Surrey.

Claus, Wm. H.
chester.

Collett, Edward Pyemont.
cum-Hardy, Manchester.

Corbett, Joseph. Zownz Hall, Salford.

Cornish, James Edward. * Stone House, Alderley Edge,
Cheshire.

Coward, Edward, Assoc.Inst.C.E., M.Inst.M.E. Heaton
House, Heaton Mersey,-near Manchester.

Crossley, Wm. J., M.Inst,M.E., Openshaw, Manchester.

Crowther, J., A.R.S.M. Zechnical School, Swansea.

Cunliffe, Robert Ellis. Halton Bank, Pendleton, Man-

chester.

31, Mauldeth Road, Fallowfield, Man-

7, Wilbraham Road, Choriton-

Darbishire, Robert Dukinfield, B.A., F.S.A. 1, St. James’s
Square, Manchester.

Dawkins, Wm. Boyd, M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Geology.
Owens College, Manchester.

Delépine, Sheridan, M.D., Professor of Pathology. Owens
College, Manchester.

Dent, Hastings Charles, F.L.S., F.R.G.S.
Square, London, S. W.

Dixon, Harold Bailey, M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Che-

Owens College, Manchester.

Carill Drive, Fallowfield, Manchester.

20, ZThurloe

mistry.
Drey, Oscar.

Faraday, F. J., F.L.S., F.S.S. Ramsay Lodge, Slade
Lane, Levenshulme, Manchester.

Faraday, Wilfred B., LL.B. Ramsay Lodge, Slade Lane,
Levenshulme, Manchester.

lxx

Date of Election.
1895, April 30.

1897, Nov.
1886, Feb.

1896, Nov.

1881, Nov
1897, Jan.

1875. Feb.

1890, Feb.
1895, Nov.

1890, Nov.
1890, Mar.

1896, Nov.

1889, Jan.

1895, Mar.

1884, Jan.

1896, Nov.

1889, Oct.

1896, Nov.
1870, Nov.

1896, Oct.

1878, Nov.

1891, Nov.

1886, Jan.

1891, Dec.
1895, Nov.

1893, Nov.

30.

9.

17.

206.

18.
12.

Ordinary Members.

Flux, A, W., M.A., Professor of Political Economy.
Parsonage Road, Withington, Manchester.
Freston, H. W. 6, St. Pauls Road, Kersal, Manchester.

575

Gee, W. W. Haldane, B.Sc.
Street, Manchester.

Gordon, Rev. Alexander, M.A. Memorial Hall, Albert
Square, Manchester.

Greg, Arthur. Zagley, near Bolton.

Grossman, J., Ph.D. Harpurhey Chemical Works,
Harpurhey, Manchester.

Gwyther, Reginald F., M.A., Fielden Lecturer in Mathe-
matics, Owens Obes Hee

Technical School, Princess

Harker, Thomas. Srook House, Fallowfield, Manchester.

Hartog, Philippe Joseph, B.Sc., F.C.S., Demonstrator in
Chemistry. Owezs College, Manchester.

Heenan, H., M.Inst.C.E., M.Inst.M.E. Manor House,
Wilmslow Park, Wilmslow, Cheshire.

Henderson, H. A. Eastbourne House, Chorlton Road,
Manchester.

Henderson, John, B.Sc. Ash Villa, Marple, Cheshire.

Heywood, Charles J. Chaseley, Pendleton, Manchester.

Hickson, S.J., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., Professor of Zoology,

wens College, Manchester.

Hodgkinson, Alexander, M.B., B.Sc.
Manchester.

Hopkinson, Edward,
Timperley, Cheshzre.

Hoyle, William Evans, M.A.,
Museum.

18, St. John Street,

D:.S<e., M.InstiC.E: “Oagkiese7
Keeper of the Manchester
Owens College, Manchester.

Jacob, Edwin. 648, Mamzlton Terrace, London, N.W.

Johnson, William H., B.Sc. 26, Lever Street, Manchester.

Jones, A, Emrys, M. D. 10, St. John Street, Manchester.

Jones, Francis, F.R.S.E., F.C.S., Manchester Grammar
School.

Joyce, Samuel, Electrical Engineer.
Greenheys Lane, Manchester.

Kay, Thomas. Moorfield, Stockport, Cheshire.

King, John Edward, M.A., High Master, Manchester
Grammar School.

Kirkman, W. W.

Latchford House,

The Grange, Timperley, Cheshire.

Lamb, Horace, M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Mathematics,
6, Wilbraham Road, Fallowfield, Manchester.

Date of Election.
1890, Nov. 4.

1884, April 15.
1895, Nov. 12.

1895, Mar. 5.

1857, Jan. 27.

1870, April 19.

1896, Nov. 3.

1866, Nov. 13.

1859, Jan. 25.

1875, Jan. 26.

1896, Oct. 20.

1864, Nov. I.
1873, Mar. 18.
1896, Nov. 3.

1881, Oct. 18.

1894, Feb. 6.

1873, Mar. 4.
1889, April 16.

1862, Dec. 30.
1884, April 15.

1876, Nov. 28.
1895, Nov. 12.

1892, Nov. 15.

1885, Nov. 17.

Ordinary Members. Ixxi

Langdon, Maurice Julius, Ph.D. 15, Déckinson Street,

Manchester.
Leech, Daniel John, M.D., Professor of Materia Medica.

Owens College, Manchester.

Lees, Charles Herbert, D.Sc., Demonstrator in Physics.
Owens College, Manchester.

Levinstein, Ivan. Wilbraham
Manchester.

Longridge, Robert Bewick, M.Inst.M.E. Yew Zree House,
Tabley, Knutsford, Cheshire.

Lowe, Charles, F.C.S. Summerfield House, Reddish,
Stockport, Cheshire.

Lynde, James Henry, M.Inst.C.E. Auckland, Ashton-on-
Mersey, Cheshire.

Road, Fallowfiela,

McDougall, Arthur, B.Sc.
Manchester.

Maclure, Sir John William,
Whalley Range, Manchester.

Mann, John Dixon, M.D., F.R.C.P. (Lond.), Professor of
Medical Jurisprudence. 16, St. John Street, Manchester.

Massey, Leonard F. Ofjenshaw, Manchester,

Mather, William, M.Inst.C.E., M.Inst.M.E. Jvon Works,
Salford.

Melvill, James Cosmo, M.A., F.L.S.
Prestwich, Lancs.

Milligan, William, M.D. Westbourne, Wilmslow Road,
Rusholme, Manchester.

Mond, Ludwig, Ph.D., F.R.S., F.C.S. Winnington Halt,
Northwich, Cheshire. ;

Mond, Robert, M.A.,F.C.S. Winnington Hall, Northwich,
Cheshire.

Fallowfield House, Fallowfield,

Bart. MJP. > sRoGsS,

Brook House,

Nicholson, Francis, F.Z.S. 84, Major Street, Manchester.
Norbury, George. Hillside, Prestwich Park, Prestwich,

Lanes.
Ogden, Samuel. 10, A/osley Street West, Manchester.
Okell, Samuel, F.R.A.S. Overley, Langham Road,

Bowdon, Cheshire.

Parry, Thomas, F.S.S. Grafton House, Ashton-under-Lyne.

Pennington, James Dixon, B.A., M.Sc. 254, Oxford Road,
Manchester.

Perkin, W. H. jun., Ph.D., F.R.S., Professor of Organic
Chemistry. Ozens College, Manchester.

Phillips, Henry Harcourt, F.C.S. 183, oss Lane Last,
Manchester.

Ixxii
Date of Election.
1888, Feb. 21.

1869, Nov. 16.

1880, Mar. 23.
1864, Dec. 27.
1897, Oct. 19
1893, Mar. 21.
1896, Nov. 17.
1842, Jan. 25.
1873, Nov. 18.
1898, Jan. 25.
1895, Nov. 12.

1890, Nov. 4.
1890, Jan. 21.

1886, April 6.
1895, Nov. 12.

1896, Feb. 18.
1896, April 14.

1894, Jan. 9.
1894, Nov. 13.

1897, Nov. 30.

1892, Nov. 29.

1895, April 9.

1898, Feb. 8.

Ordinary Members.

Rée, Alfred, Ph.D., F.C.S. Guzldhall Chambers, Lloyd
Street, Manchester. ‘

Reynolds, Osborne, LL.D., M.A., F.R.S., M.Inst.C.E.,
Professor of Engineering, Owens College. Zadybarn
Road, Fallowfield, Manchester.

Roberts, D? Lloyd, M.D:, F.RiStE. EF. RiC.P, (onda
kavenswood, Broughton Park, Manchester.

Robinson, John, M.Inst.C.E., M.Inst.M.E. Wes/wooa
Hall, Leek, Staffs.

Rothwell, William Thomas. Heath Brewery, Newson
Heath, near Manchester.

Schill, C. H. 117, Portland Street, Manchester.

Schmitz, Hermann Emil, B.A., B.Sc. Manchester Gram-
mar School.

Schunck, Edward, Ph.D., F.R.S., F.C.S. Xersal, Man-
chester.

Schuster, Arthur, Ph.D., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Professor of
Physics. Owens College, Manchester.

Schwabe, Louis. Aart All, Eccles Old Road, Pendleton,
Manchester.

Shearer, Arthur. 36, Demesne Road, Alexandra Fark,
Manchester.

Sidebotham, Edward John. Zrlesdene, Bowdon, Cheshire.

Sidebotham, James Nasmyth, Assoc.M.Inst.C.E. Park-
field, Groby Place, Altrincham, Cheshire.

Simon, Henry, M.Inst.C.E., M.Inst.M.E., Lawzhursz,
Didsbury, Manchester. :

Southern, Frank, B.Sc. Burnage Lodge, Levenshulme,
Manchester.

Spence, David. Pine Ridee, Buxton.

Stanton, Thomas E., M.Sc. 23, Kelvin Grove, Princes
Park, Liverpool.

Stevens, Marshall, F.S.S. Bolton Lodge, Eccles, Lancs.

Stirrup, Mark, F.G.S. Aigh Thorn, Stamford Road,
Bowdon, Cheshire.

Stromeyer, C.E., M.Inst.C.E. Steam Users’ Association,
9, Mount Street, Albert Square, Manchester.

Swindells, Rupert, M.Inst.C.E. Wlton Villa, The Firs,
Bowdon, Cheshire.

Tatton, Reginald A., Engineer to the Mersey and Irwell
Joint Committee. 44, Mosley Street, Manchester.

Taylor, Rev. Arthur, M.A. (Oxon.). 49, Agerton Road,
Withington, Manchester.

Date of Election.
1893, Nov. 14.

1873, April 15.
1896, Jan. 21.

1889, April 30.

1896, Jan. 21.
1897, Jan. 26.

1879, Dec. 30.

1873, Nov. 18.-

1892, Nov. 15.

1895, April 9.

1859, Jan. 25.

1859, April 19.

1888, April 17.

1896, Dec. I.

1889, April 16.
1860, April 17.

1896, Jan. 21.
1863, Nov. 17.
1865, Feb, Pie
1895, Jan. 8.

1897, Oct. 19.

Ordinary Members. Ixxiii

Taylor, R. L., F.C.S., F.I.C. Central School, Whitworth
Street, Manchester.

‘horson,, Wiliam, F.R.S.E., E.C.S., F.C. oeyal
Institution, Manchester.

Thorburn, William, M.D., B.Sc.
Manchester.

Thornber, Harry. ookfield Avenue, Sale, Cheshire.

Thorp, Thomas. Joss Bank, Whitefield, near Manchester.

Tristram, James Floyd, M.A., B.Sc. 180, Princess Road,
Moss Side, Manchester.

2, St. Peter's Square,

Ward, Thomas. Wadebrook House, Northwich, Cheshire.

Waters, Arthur William, F.G.S. Sunny Lea, Davos Dorf,
Switzerland. .

Weiss, F. Ernest, B.Sc., F.L.S., Professor of Botany,
Owens College. 4, Clifton Avenue, Fallowfield, Man-
chester.

Whitehead, James.
Cheshire.

Wilde, Henry,
Cheshire.

Wilkinson,
Cheshire.

Williams, Sir E. Leader, M.Inst.C.E, » M.Inst.M.E.
41, Spring Gardens, Manchester. ;

Wilson, George, M.Sc. Owevs College, Manchester.

Wilson, Thomas B. Mellor, near Marple, Cheshire.

Woolley, George Stephen. V2ctoria Bridge, Salford.

Wordingham, Charles Henry, A.M.Inst.C.E., M.Inst.M.E.
Hazelhurst, Urmston Lane, Stretford, Manchester.

Worthington, Samuel Barton, M.Inst.C.E. M.Inst,M.E.
Mill Bank, Bowdon, and 37, Princess Street, Manchester.

Worthington, Thomas, F.R.I.B.A. 46, Brown Street,
Manchester.

Worthington, Wm. Barton, B.Sc., M.Inst.C. E.
Polygon, Cheetham Hill, Manchester.

Wyatt, Charles H. Chelford, Cheshire.

Linfield, Fulshaw Park, Witmslow,
Fa S: The Hurst, Alderley Edge,

Thomas Read. Vale Bank, Knutsford,

2, Wilton

N.B.—Of the above list the following have compounded for their
subscriptions, and are therefore life members :—

Bailey, Charles, F.L.S.

Bradley, Nathaniel, F.C.S.
Brogden, Henry, F.G.S.
Johnson, William H., B.Sc.
Lowe, Charles, F.C.S.
Worthington, Wm, Barton, B.Sc.

Ixxiv

Date of Election.

1892, April 26.

1892, April 26.

1894, April 17.

1887, April 19.

1892, April 26.

1892, April 26.

1886, Feb. 9.
1886, Feb. 9.

1895, April 30.

1886, Feb. 9.

1892, April 26.

1386, Feb. 9.

1860, April 17.

1888. April 17.

1889, April 30.

1866, Oct. 30.

1887, April 19.

1892, April 26.

Honorary Members.

HONORARY MEMBERS.

Abney, W. de Wiveleslie, Capt. R.E., C.B., ¥.RISt
Rathmore Lodge, Bolton Gardens South, S. Kensington,
London, S.W.

Amagat, E. H., For. Mem. R.S., Corr. Memb. Inst. Fr.
(Acad. Sci.), Honorary Professor, Faculty of Sciences,
Lyons. 34, Aue St. Lambert, Paris,

Appell, Paul, Membre de l'Institut, Professor at the
Faculty of Sciences, Pards.

Armstrong, Wm. George, Word, C.B., D/C:L., Liao
F.R.S. Mewcastle-on-Tyne.

Ascherson, Paul F. Aug., Professor of Botany. Ser/in.

Baeyer, Adolf von, For. Mem. R.S., Professor of Chemistry.
1, Arcisstrasse, Munich.

Baker, Sir Benjamin, K.C.M.G., F.R.S. 2, Queen’s Square
Place, Westminster, S. W,

Baker, John Gilbert, F.R.S., F.L.S. Royal Herbarium,
Kew.

Beilstein, F., Ph.D., Professor of Chemistry, 8th Line,
N. 17, St. Petersburg, W.O.

Berthelot, Marcellin, For. Mem. R.S., Membre del’ Institut..
Professor of Chemistry. ards.”

Boltzmann, Ludwig, Professor of Physics.
setat, Vienna.

Buchan, Alexander, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S. 42, Herzot Row,
Ledinburgh.

Bunsen, Robert Wilhelm, Ph.D., For. Mem. R.S., For.
Assoc. Inst, Fr. (Acad. Sci.), Professor of Chemistry.
Heidelberg.

K. K. Univer-

Cannizzaro, Stanislao, For. Mem. R.S., Corr. Memb.
Inst. Fr. (Acad. Sci.), Prof. of Chemistry. Oxzverszty
of Rome.

Carruthers, William, F.R.S., F.L.S., late Keeper of
Botanical Dept., British Museum. Central House,
Central Hill, London, S.E.

Clifton, Robert Bellamy, M.A., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Prof.-
of Natural Philosophy, Oxford. Mew Museum, Oxford.

Cornu, . Professor Marie Alfred, For. Mem. R.S., Membre’
de l'Institut. cole Polytechnique, Paris.

Curtius, Theodor, Professor of Chemistry. A7zedé.

Date of Election.
1892, April 26.

1886, Feb. 9.
1894, April 17.
1888, April 17.

1892, April 26.

1892, April 26.

1892, April 26.
1895, April 30.

1889, April 30.

1889, April 30.

1889, April 30.

1860, April 6.

1892, April 26.
1892, April 26.
1892, April 26.
1895, April 30.
1892, April 26.
1894, April 17.
1894, April 17.
1894, April 17.
1894, April 17.

1894, April 17.

Honorary Members. Ixxv

Darboux, Gaston, Membre de I’Institut, Professor at the
Faculty of Sciences. 36, Rue Gay Lussac, Parts.
Dawson, Sir John William, C.M.G., M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.,

F.G.S. McGill College, Montreal.

Debus, H., Ph.D., F.R.S. 4, Schlangenweg, Cassel, Hessen,
Germany.

Dewalque, Gustave, Professor of Geology. University of
Liége.

Dohrn, Dr. Anton. Zoological Station, Naples.

Rigen, Wy.) Es “Dhiselton, ‘C.M.G.,.C.1E..
Director of the Royal Botanic Gardens.

M. A.) Fo RiS.,
Kew.

Edison, Thomas Alva.
Elster, Julius, Pb.D.

Orange, N.J., U.S.A.
6, Lesstngstrasse, Wolfenbittel.

Farlow, W. G., Professor of Botany. Harvard College,
Cambridge, Mass., U.S.A.

Flower, Sir William Henry, K.C.B., LL.D., F.R.S.,
Corr. Memb. Inst. Fr. (Acad. Sci.). 26, Stanhope
Gardens, South Kensington, London, S.W.

Foster, Michael, M.A., M.D., LL.D., Sec. R.S., Professor
of Physiology. Z7rznzty Cales, Ce .

Frankland, Sir Edward, K.C.B., Ph.D., M.D., LL.D.,
Pee. Vor ©.5:, Ff .1x.S., For. Assoc.” Inst, ir
(Acad. Sci.) The Yews, Retgate Hill, Kezgate,
Surrey.

Friedel, Ch., D.C.L., Membre de l'Institut, Professor at
the Faculty of Sciences. 9, Rue Michelet, Paris.

Fiirbringer, Max, Professor of Anatomy. /eza.

Gegenbaur, Carl, For. Mem. R.S., Professor of Anatomy.
57, Leotoldstrasse, Heidelberg.

Geitel, Hans. 6, Lesstngstrasse, Wolfendbiittel.

Gibbs, J. Willard, For. Mem. R.S., Professor of Mathe-
matical Physics, Yale University. Mewhaven, Con-
necticut, U.S.A.

Glaisher, J. W.
Cambridge.

Gouy, A., Professor at the Faculty of Sciences. Lyons.

Guldberg, Cato M., Professor of Applied Mathematics.

Christiana, Norway.

L., Se.D.; F.RIS. Zrenity Collaze;

Harcourt, A. G. Vernon, F.R.S., Lee’s Reader in
Chemistry, Christ Church. Cowley Grange, Oxford,

Heaviside, Oliver, F.R.S. Bradley View, Newton Abbots,
Devon.

Ix xvi

Date of Election.
1892, April 26.

1892, April 26.
1888, April 17.

1892, April 26.
1892, April 26.

1869, Jan, 12

1851, April 29.

1892, April 26.

me 894, April 17.

1895, April 30.

1892, April 26.

1887, April 19.

1894, April 17. -

1892, April 26.

1887, April 19.

1889, April 30.

1892, April 26.

1892, April 26.

Flonorary Members.

Hermite, Ch., LL.D. (Edin.), For. Mem. R.S., Membre
de l'Institut. 2, Aue dela Soxbonne, Paris.

Hill, G.W. West Nyack, N.V., U.S.A.

Hittorf, Johann Wilhelm, Professor of Physics.
nicum, Munster.

Hoff, J. van’t, Ph.D., For.
Chemistry. Amsterdam.

Hooker, Sir Joseph Dalton, G:@2SiL, CoB a Rakess
Corr. Memb. Inst. Fr. (Acad. Sci.) Szsnznedale, Berks,

Huggins, ‘Sir William, K.C.B., LL.D.) (DI@iLaheReSe
F.R.A.S., Corr. Mem. Inst. Fr. (Acad. Sci.) 90, Upper
Tulse Hill, Brixton, London, S.W

Polytech-

Mem. R.S., Professor of

Kelvin, William Thomson, Lord, G.C.V.O., M.A.,
D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S., .F.R.SJE., For.” Assoeneinse
Fr. (Acad. Sci.), Prof. of Nat! Pil.“ im Wieser
Glasgow. 2, College, Glasgow.

Klein, Felix, Ph.D., For. Mem. R.S., Corr. Memb. Inst.
Fr. (Acad. Sci.), Professor of Mathematics. 3, Welhelm
Weber Strasse, Gottingen.

Konigsberger, Leo, Professor of Mathematics. ezdelberg.

Lacaze-Duthiers, F.J. Henri de, For. Mem. R.S., Membre
de l'Institut, Prof. a la Sorbonne. 7, Aue del Estrapade,
Paris.

Ladenburg, A., Ph.D., Professor of Chemistry. 3, Kazser
Withelm Strasse, Breslau.

Langley, S. P., For, Mem. R.S. Svzthsonian ae
Washington, U.S.A.

Lie, M. Sophus, For. Mem. R.S., Corr. Memb. Inst. Fr.
(Acad. Sci.), Professor of Mathematics. 33, Seeburg
Strasse, Letpsec.

Liebermann, C., Professor of Sadia
Kirch Strasse, Berlin.

Lockyer, Sir J. Norman, K.C.B., F.R.S., Corr. Memb.
Inst. ir, (Acad! Sci.) eae School, Kensington,
London, S.W.

Lubbock, Sir John, Bart., M.P., D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S.
15, Lombard Street, London, E.C. |

29, Matthaz-

Marshall, Alfred, Sc.D., F.R.S., Professor of Political
Economy. Salliol Croft, Madingley Road, Cambridge.

Mascart, E. E. N., For. Mem. R.S., Membre de1’Institut,
Professor at the College de France. . 176, Rue de
? Université, Paris.

Date of Election.
1889, April 30.
1895, April 30.

1892, April 26.

1894, April 17.

1894, April 17.

1887, April 19.

1894, April 17.

1892, April 26.

1894, April 17.
1892, April 26.
1892, April 26.
1892, April 26.

1849, Jan. 23.
1886, Feb. 9.

1897, April 27.

1889, April 30.

1894, April 17.

Hlonorary Members. Ixxvil

Mendeléeff, D., Ph.D., For. Mem. RS. St. Petersburg.

Mittag-Leffler, Gdsta, D.C.L. (Oxon.), For. Mem. R.S.,
Professor of Mathematics. Dzzrsholm, Stockholm.

Moissan, H., Membre de l'Institut, Professor at the
Ecole Supérieure de Pharmacie. 7, Aue Vanqguelin,
Paris.

Murray, Sir John, K.C.B., LL.D., D.Sc., F.RS.
lenger Lodge, Wardie, Edinburgh.

Chatl-

Neumayer, Professor G., Director of the Seewarte.
Hamburg.

Newcomb, Simon, For. Mem. R.S., For. Assoc. Inst. Fr.
(Acad. Sci.), Professor of Mathematics and Astronomy.

Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, U.S.A.

Ostwald, W., Professor of Chemistry.
Lezpsic.

2/3, Linnéstrasse,

Perun, W. H,, LL.D.,. Ph.D. F.R,S.
Sudbury, Harrow.

Pfeffer, W., For. Mem. R.S., Professor of Botany.
Botanisches Institut, Letpsic.

Poincaré, H., For. Mem. R.S., Membre de l'Institut,
Professor at the Faculty of Sciences. 63, Rue Claude
Bernard, Parzs.

The Chestnuts,

Quincke, G. H., For. Mem. R.S., Professor of Physics,
60, Haupistrasse, Heidelberg.

Raoult, F. M., Corr. Memb. Inst. Fr. (Acad. Sci.), Dean
of the Faculty of Sciences. 2, Auedes Alpes, Grenoble.

Rawson, Robert, F.R.A.S. Havant, Hants.

Rayleigh, John William Strutt, Lord, M.A., D.C.L.
(Oxon.), LL.D. (Univ. McGill), F.R.S., F.R.A.S.
Corr. Memb. Inst. Fr. (Acad. Sci.) 7Z7rling Place,
Witham, Essex.

Roscoe, Sir Henry Enfield, B.A., LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.S.,
i. Corr. .Memb. Inst. Fr. (Acad. Sci), - 10,
Bramham Gardens, Wetherby Road, London, S.W.

Routh, Edward John, Sc.D., F.R.S. Mewnham Cottage,
Cambridge.

Rowland, Henry A., For. Mem. R.S., Corr. Memb. Inst.
Fr. (Acad. Sci.), Professor of Physics. Johns Hophins
University, Baltimore, U.S.A. ;

Ixxvill

Date of Election.

1889, April 30.

1894, April 17.

1892, April 26.

1892, April 26.
1869, Dec. 14.

1851, April 29.

1680, Keb. 9:
1895, April 30.
1868, April 28.
1895, April 30.
1894, April 17.
1894, April 17.

1886, Feb. 9.

1894, April 17.

1894, April 17.

1894, April 17.

1894, April 17.

1894, April 17.
1892, April 26.

1889, April 30.

Honorary Members.

Salmon, Rev. George, D.D., D-C.L., LL.D. F: RIS
Corr. Memb. Inst. Fr. (Acad. Sci. ) Provost's House,
Trinity College, Dublin.

Sanderson, J. S. Burdon, M.A., M.D., F. Ee S., Regius
Professor of Medicine. Oxford.

Sharp , R. Bowdler, LL.D British Museum (Natural
Ht s.ory), Cromwell Geen London, S. W.

Solms, H. Graf zu, Professor of Botany. Strassburg.

Sorby, Henry Clifton, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S. Breom-
field, Sheffield.

Stokes, Sir George Gabriel, Bart., M.A., LL.D., D.C.L.,
F.R.S., F.C.P.S., Corr. Mem. Inst. Fr (Acadia sem:
Lucasian Professor of Mathem. Univ. Cambridge.
Lensfield Cottage, Cambridge.

Strasburger, Eduard, D.C.L., For.
of Botany. Bove.

Suess, Eduard, Ph.D. For. Mem. R.T., Corr, Memb. Inst.
Fr. (Acad. Sci.), Professor of Geology. 9, Afrécanergasse,
Vienna.

Mem. R.S., Professor

Tait, Peter Guthrie, M.A., F.R.S.E., Professor of Natural
Philosophy, Edinburgh. 38, George Square, Edinburgh.
Thomson, Joseph John, M.A., Sc.D., F.R.S., Professor of
6, Scrope Terrace, Cambridge.
FERS: Laboratory, Somerset

Experimental Physics.
Thorpe, T7 1.,, PhDs.
House, London, W.C.
Turner, Sir William, M.B., D.C.L., F:R.S., Professor
of Anatomy. 6, Zton Terrace, Edinburgh. ‘~
Tylor, Edward Burnett, D.C.L. (Oxon.), LL.D. (St. And.
and McGill Colls.), F.R.S, Keeper of University
Museum. ‘Oxford.

Vines, Sidney Howard, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., Sherardian
Professor of Botany. Hoatitotea iil, Oxford.

Christiania, Norway.
Lustitut, Neue

Waage, P., Professor of Chemistry.

Warburg, Professor E. Physikalisches
Wiuthelmstrasse, Berlin.

Ward, H. Marshall, Sc.D., F.R.S., Professor of Botany.
Cooper’s Hill, Englefield Green, Surrey.

Weismann, August, Professor of Zoology. Frecburg-z.-B.

Wiedemann, G. H., For. Mem. R.S., Corr. Memb. Inst. Fr.
(Acad. Sci.), Prof. of Physics. 35, Zhadstrasse, Letpsic.

Williamson, Alexander William, Ph.D., LL.D., F.R.S.,
Corr. Mem. Inst. Fr. (Acad. Sci.) Azgh Pitfold,
Shottermill, Haslemere, Surrey.

Flonorary Members. Ixxix

Date of Election. ;
1886, Feb. 9. Young, Charles Augustus, Professor of Astronomy.
Princeton College, N.J., U.S.A.

1888, April17. Zirkel, Ferdinand, For. Mem. R.S., Professor of Mineralogy.
Oniversity of Letpsic.

1895, April20, Zittel, Carl Alfred von, Professor of Palzontology and
Geology. University of Munich.

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS.

Date of Election.
1866, Jan. 23. De Caligny, Anatole, Marquis, Corr. Mem. Accad. Sci.
. Turin, Soc. Agr. Lyons, Soc. Sci. Cherbourg. Zzége.

1850, April 30. Harley, Rev. Robert, Hon. M.A.(Oxon.), F.R.S., F.R.A.S.,
Hon. M.R.S. Queensland. Rosslyn, Westbourne Road,
Forest Hill, London, S.E., and The Athenaeum Club,

R ; London, S. W.

1882, Nov. 14. Herford, Rev. Brooke. 91, A%tzjohn’s Avenue, Hampstead,
London, N.W.

~

1859, Jan. 25. Le Jolis, Auguste-Francois, Ph.D., Archiviste-perpétuei
and late President of the Soc. Nat. Sci. Cherbourg,
Cherbourg.

1357, Jan. 27. Lowe, Edward Joseph, F.R.S., F.R.A.S., F.G.S., Mem.
Brit. Met. Soc. Shirenewton Hall, near Chepstow,
Monmouthshire.

Ixxx

Awards of Medals and Premiums.

Awards of the Wilde Medal under the conditions of the

1896.

1897.
1898.

1898.

Wilde Endowment Fund.

Sir GEORGE G. STOKES, Bart., F.R.S.
Sir WILLIAM HUGGINS, K.C.B., F.R.S.

Sir JOSEPH DALTON OCs C5. 1 Cae
ERS;

Award of the Dalton Medal,

EDWARD SCHUNCK, Ph.D., F.R.S.

Awards of the Premium under the conditions of we Wages

Endowment Fund.

1897. PETER CAMERON.

1898. JOHN BUTTERWORTH, F.R.M.S.

T. SowLER AND Sons LimiTED, CANNON STREET, MANCHESTER.

- «' & "
i» F ‘
a

ms a i Th oe ee “4 a Beal , ——— .
wh ee epg yc eb i Da ace See ;
RS ER RT sie Dp O4f 3 °

ws

VoL. 42: Parr I.

a>

_ MEMOIRS AND PROCEEDINGS

“|
My ‘= : OF

THE MANCHESTER
LITERARY & PHILOSOPHICAL
BOLIE TY.

1897-98.

CONTENTS.

oe es

Memoirs :—

I. Notes on a Collection of Hymenoptera from Greymouth,
New Zealand, with descriptions of New Species. By

Peter Cameron’ - . : - : : : - pp. I—53.
II. Description of two New Species of Mutilla from South Africa.
By Peter Cameron - - > - - - - pp. I-—3.
III. On Waves in a Medium having a Periodic Discontinuity of
Structitire. By Horace Lamb, M.A., F.R.S. - - pp. I—20.
Ce rea nn e Gresty te Poet is e+ fe - pp. i.—xvi.
MANCHESTER:

36, GEORGE STREET.

Price Two Shillings and Sirpence.

RECENT ADDITIONS TO THE LIBRARY,

Presented,
Bashforth (F.)—A Mathematical Treatise on the Motion of Projectiles, and
Supplement. 1873-81.
—— Tables of remaining velocity - +, Ofn,. » projectiles, &c. 2 pts, 1871-72,

Batavia.—Magnetisch en Meteorologisch Observatorium,— Wind and Weather
. in the East Indian Archipelago. 1897.

Brussels.—Academie Royale des Sciences de Belgique. Régiomente naa
concernant les trois classes. 1896.

—— —~— Notices biographiques et bibliographiques. Ed. 4. 1897.

—— Observatoire Royal de Belgique. Houzeau (J. C.) et Lancaster (A. )e
Bibliographie générale de l’Astronomie. Vol. I, pt. 2. 1889.

Budapest.—Magyar Tudomanyos Akademia. Munkdcsi(B.) Vogul népkoltési
gyiijtemény. Kot. 4. 1897.

—— —— Iconesselectae hymenomycetum Hungariae. Pt. 1. 1873.

Calcutta.—Asiatic Society of Bengal. Grierson (G. A.). The Kacmiracabdamrta,
&c. Pt. 1. 18097,

Cambridge.— Adams Memorial Committee. The Scientific Papers of J. C, Adams.
Vol. I. (1896.) x

—— —— University Press.—Collected Mathematical Papers of A. Cayley.
Vol. 13. 1897.

Christiania.—Universitet.. Caspari (C. P.).—Briefe, Abhandlungen und Pres
digten, &c. 1890.

poy Barth(].),'- Norronskaller.". 1896.

—— —— Schjott (P. O.), Samlede philologiske Afhandlinger, 1896.

—— —— Dade(L.) Symbolae ad historiam ecclesiasticam, &c. 1888.

Copenhagen.—Kongeligt Nordisk Oldskrift-Selskab. Nordiske fortidsminder.
Hefte 3. 18097.

Foster (Prof. M.)—A Text Book of Physiology. 7th edition, Part 3. 1897.

Haarlem.—Hollandsche Maatschappij der Wetenschappen. (CEuvres completes
de C. Huygens. Tome VII. (1897.)
—— Koloniaal Museum. Greshoff (M.). ‘Nuttige Indische Planten. Aflev. 4.

1807.
[Continued on page 3 of wrapper.

ru ce oninklijke Instituut van Ingenieurs. Gedenkboek uitgegeven ter
-_ gelegenheid van het vijftigjaarig bestaan. 1847-1897. (1897.)

. Johnson (W. H.)—Tournal of the Iron and Steel Institute. 1892, pt. 1; 1893, pt-2s
= 1895, pt. 1; 1897, pt. I.

c€

Kiel. — Universitat. Dissertations.

_ Leeds.—Philosophical and Literary Society. The Collection of Ancient
i Marbles at Leeds. By E. L. Hicks. 1890.

Lund.—Universitet. Lunds Universitet. 1872-1897. AfE. Tegnér. 1897.

Mexico.—Secretaria de Fomento. La Fumagina y el Pulgén de los Cafetos, &e.
1897.

—— —— Sanchez (P. C.) and Rangel (M.). Informe acerca de los temblores en
la cuidad de Tehuantepec, 1897.

—— —— Barcéna(M.). Ensayo practico de repoblacion de Bosques. 1897.

Middelburg.—Zeeuwsch Genootschap. Fokker (M.). Zelandia illustrata.
2* verfolg. 1897.

—— —— Hollestelle (A.). Geschiedk. Beschrijv. van Tholen en omstreken. 1897.
Schiaparelli (G.)—Rubra Canicula. Pt.2. 1897.
—— Osservazioniastronomiche. . . del Pianeta Marte. Memorie 5. 1897.

Sheffield.— University College. Papers printed to commemorate the incorporation
of the. . . College. 1897.

Upsala.—Universitet. Festskrift. 1897.

Purchased.

Boulenger (G. A.)—The Tailless Batrachians of Europe. Pt. 1. 1897.
Harvey (W. H,) and Sonder (O. W.)—Flora Capensis. Vol. VII., pt. 1. 1897.
Hooker (Sir J. D.)—Flora of British India. Vol. VII., pts. 23 and 24. 1897.

44 FE haw FD OF

VOL. 42° PARv IT:

MEMOIRS AND PROCEEDINGS

OF

THE MANCHESTER
LITERARY & PHILOSOPHICAL
POULETY.

1897-98.

CONTENTS.

Memoirs :—

IV. Further investigations into the Molluscan Fauna of the
Arabian Sea, Sea of Oman, and Persian Gulf, with
descriptions of Thirty-nine species. (Addendum: Des-
cription of a new Strombus from the Mekran Coast of
Beluchistan. By James Cosmo Melvill, M.A., F.L.S.

Plates 2 and 2 : . ~ - - - pp. I—40.

V. On a Method of os the Thermal Conductivities
of Salts, with some results of its mise By
Charles H. Lees, D:Sc. - : - - - pp. I—4.

Proceedings - - - - - - - + + + pp. *Vil.—xxviil.

MANCHESTER:
36, GEORGE STREET.

Price Two Hbillings.

RECENT ADDITIONS TO THE LIBRARY.

Presented.
Benson (D. E.).—Hutton (C.). A Course of Mathematics. Ed. 3. Vol 2. 1801.

—— Hutton (C.). A Treatise on Mensuration. Ed. 2. 1788.

Cambridge.— University Press. The Collected Mathematical Papers of A. Cayley.
Supplementary vol. 1808. :

Gilson (G.). Recherches sur les Cellules sécrétantes. Mém. III. 1898.

Leeds.—Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union. Lees (F. A.). The Flora of Yorkshire.
1888.

London.—Meteorological Office. Quarterly Current Charts for the Pacific
Ocean. 1897.

—— — Rainfall Tables of the British Islands, 1866-1890. 1897.

Madison.—State Historical Society of Wisconsin. The State Historical Society
of Wisconsin. The Story of its Growth, etc. 1898.

Munich.—K. Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften.—Dyck (W.). Ueber
die wechselseitigen Beziehungen zwischen der reinen und der angewandten
Mathematik. 1897.

Newcastle-upon-Tyne.—North of England Institute of Mining and Me-
chanical Engineers. An Account of the Strata of Northumberland, etc. —
U—Z. 1897.

Washington. — Smithsonian Institution. —Goode (G. B.). The Smithsonian
Institution, 1846-1896. 1897.

And the usual Exchanges and Periodicals.

ae eee
¥ f-

VOE 424 PART TIT

MEMOIRS AND PROCEEDINGS

OF

THE MANCHESTER
Pee eRARY & PHILOSOPHICAL

SOCTE TY.
1897-98.

CONTENTS.

Memoirs :—
VI. On the Mechanical Equivalent of Heat. By Osborne
Reynolds, M.A., F.R.S., and W. H, Moorby, M.Sc. pp. 1—54.

VII. On the Instantaneous Pressures produced on the Collision
of Two Explosion Waves. a R. H. Jones, B.Sc., and
J. Bower, B.Sc. Plate 3 - - : - pp. I—7.

VIII. On a General Method of determining the Form of the
Velocity-Potential of Fluid-Motion in Two Dimensions
across a Channel with Straight Sides. By R. F.
Gwyther, M.A. - : : . . : : - pp. 1—6.

IX. On the Velocity of Sound in a Tube, as affected by the
Elasticity of the Walls. ne, Horace Lamb, M.A.,

Pia». .- - : . : : - pp. 1—16.
X. The New Gold Discoveries. By Eduard Suess, of
Vienna - - - ¢ : - pp. I—9.
MANCHESTER:

36, GEORGE STREET.

Price Three Shillings and Sixpence,

ae

| RECENT ADDITIONS TO”

See Presented.

-Hongkong.—Observatory.—Doberck (W.). The Law of Storms in the Eas
Seas. 1808. ee

ae "Johnson (W. H.).—Journal of the Iron and Steel Institute.
Se ~. Vols, 1—50.

-Rome.—Ministro della Istruzione Pubblica. Le Opere di
Pete Oley, LOO] »

Strasburg.—Kaiser Wilhelms Universitat. [37 Dissertations. ]

Turin.—Osservatorio Centrale . . . in Moncalieri. Boffito (G.). ‘ Per

| a ‘Storia della Meteorologia in Italia. 1898. By

: leg: ER. . Purchased.

ee : Boulenger (G. A.). The Tailless Batrachians of Europe. Part 2. 1898. (
ae Ai 0s ROGET Ss

_ And the usual Exchanges and Periodicals.

/6

VOL.c42- PART: LY,

MEMOIRS AND PROCEEDINGS

OF

THE MANCHESTER
PIPTERARY & PHILOSOPHICAL

SOCIETY.
1897-98.

CONTENTS.
Memoirs :— ja

XI. Hymenoptera Orientalia, or Contributions to a knowledge
of the Hymenoptera of the Oriental Zoological Region.
Part VII. By Peter Cameron. Plate 4. : : pp. 1—84.

XII. On the Physical Basis of Psychical Events, (The Wilde
Lecture.) By Professor Michael Foster, Sec. R.S. - pp. 1—46.

MANCHESTER:
36, GEORGE STREET.

Price Three Shillings and Sirpence.

RECENT ADDITIONS TO THE LIBRARY.

Presented.

Cambridge.— University Press. Catalogue of 14464 Stars between 24° 15’
and 30° 57’ of North Declination 1855 for the epoch 1875 .°. . By
A. Graham. 1897.

Christiania.—Universite Royale de Norvege.—Den norske privatrets leere
om Vildfarelsens . . . ved N. Gjelsvik. 1897.

—— —-— Om Skadeserstatning for retmessige handlinger efter norsk ret, ved
N. Gjelsvik. 1897.

—— —— Om Vildfarelse og dens Indflydelse efter norsk Privatret pa en
Retshandels Gyldighed. Af F. Stang. 1897.

——. -— Om Erstatning for Liv. . . Af F. Stang. 1897.

—— —— Fauna Norvegie. Bd. 1. Phyllocarida og Phyllopoda, ved G. O. |
Sars. 1896, :

Fairley (T.).—On the Water Supplies of Yorkshire. 1898.
Gegenbauer (C.).—Vergleichende Anatomie der Wirbelthiere. Bd. 1. 1898.

Hannover.—Naturhistorische Gesellschaft. Katalog der systematischen
Vogelsammlung des Provinzial-Museums in Hannover. 1897.

—— —— Verzeichnis der im Provinzial-Museum . . . vorhandenen Saugetiere.
1897.

—— —— Katalog der Vogelsammlung aus der Provinz Hannover. 1897.

—— —— Flora der Provinz Hannover. . . Zusammengestellt von W. Brandes.
1897.
Purchased.
Harvey (W. H.) and Sonder (O. W.).—Flora Capensis. Vol. VII. pt. 2.
1808.

And the usual Exchanges and Periodicals, together with the following
NEW EXCHANGES :—

Buffalo.—Society of Natural Sciences. Bulletin.

Cape Town.—South African Museum. Annals.
London.—‘ ‘Science Abstracts.”

New York.—American Mathematical Society. Bulletin.

Sydney,—Linnean Society of New South Wales. Proceedings.

rr ge eee eg PL ee
(ight ee ya

MOE@ Aas PARR V.

1636 rr
MEMOIRS AND PROCEEDINGS

OF

THE MANCHESTER
Pee ARY & PHILOSOPHICAL

1897-98.
CONTENTS.
-Memoirs :—
XIII. Contributions to our knowledge of the Marine Fauna of the
Falkland Islands. By Edith M. Pratt. Plate 5 + pp. 1-26,
Proceedings - : Ta oe pp. xxix.—xxxv.

Annual Report of the ‘Council: ‘With Obituary Notices of F. Brioschi,
V. Meyer, J. von Sachs, E. J. Stone, G. H. G. Anson, T. Ashton,
W. Brockbank, W. ee a P. Hart, J: Heelis, J. Heywood,

and J. Ramsbottom : : . pp. xxxvi.—Ixii.
Treasurer's Accounts - : : - pp. Ixiii.—txv.
Report of Microscopical and Natural History Section . : - pare
List of Council and Members of the Society - : - es p. Ixvii.

List of the Awards of the Wilde and Dalton Medals and of the Premium p. Ixxx.
Title Page and Contents for Volume.

MANCHESTER:
36, GEORGE STREET.

Price Two Shillings.

Gat a err oy ee ee ear ae eet
rae ee Oe eats ae

RECENT ADDITIONS TO THE LIBRARY.

Presented,

Amsterdam.—Koninklijke Akademie van Wetenschappen.—Laus Mitiae.
Carmen praemio aureo ornatum. 1898. 1ee

Black (W. G.)—A Short History of ... the Manchester Royal Infirmary
from... 1752 to 1872. By Dr. F. Renaud. 1898.

Budapest. —Magyar Tudomanyos Akademia.—Magyarorszég Torténelmi Fold-
rajza. By D. Csanki. Kotet 3. 1897.

Colenso (W.).—A Maori-English Lexicon. 1898.

Frankfort-on-the-Main,—Senckenbergische Naturforschende Gesellschaft.—
Katalog der Reptilien-Sammlung im Museum, Teil2. 1898.

Gorlitz.—Oberlausitzische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften.—Codex diplo-
maticus Lusatiae Superioris II. Heft 3. 1898.

London. —Institution of Civil Engineers.—Report of Committee on the Thermal
Efficiency of Steam-Engines, 1898.

_—— — Patent Office.—Catalogue of the Library. Vol. 1. Authors. 1898.

— —— Royal Geographical Society.—Antarctic Exploration: a plea for a
national expedition. By Sir Clements R. Markham. 1898.

Manchester Museum.—Handy Guide. 2nded. 1897.

— General Guide to the Contents. z2nded. 1893.

—— Descriptive Catalogue of the Embryological Models. 18091.

— Catalogue of the Hadfield Collection of Shells. - Pts. 1—3. 1895—97.

—— The Nomenclature of the Seams of the Lancashire Lower Coal-measures. 1898.
—— Supplementary List of Type and Figured Specimens.

Mexico.—-Instituto Geologico.—Expedicién cientifica al Popocatepetl. By J. G.
Aguilera and E. Ordofiez. 1895.

Newcastle.—Literary and Philosophical Society—Lectures delivered to the
.ts. SOCIELY. 2... FOO

And the usual Exch. es and Periodicals, together with the following
NEW EXCHANGES :—
Chicago.—‘‘ Astrophysical Journal.”

Mexico:—Instituto Geolégico. Boletin.

Montevideo.—Museo Nacional. Anales. +}

MAA

3 9088 01303 5845